DigiEye 760 - Service Manual - V3.0 - EN [PDF]

Citation preview

DigiEye 760 Digital Radiography System



Service Manual



© 2010-2014 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved. For this Manual, the issued Date is 2014-04.



Intellectual Property Statement Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. (hereinafter called Mindray) owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may refer to information protected by copyright or patents and does not convey any license under the patent rights or copyright of Mindray, or of others. Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information. Disclosure of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.



Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any other derivative work of this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.



,



,



are the trademarks, registered or otherwise, of Mindray in



China and other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for informational or editorial purposes. They are the property of their respective owners.



Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.



All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable for errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual. Mindray is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability and performance of this product, only if:



• all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;



• the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national and local requirements; and



• the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.



This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained clinical professionals.



IT IS IMPORTANT FOR THE HOSPITAL OR ORGANIZATION THAT EMPLOYS THIS EQUIPMENT TO CARRY OUT A REASONABLE SERVICE/MAINTENANCE PLAN. NEGLECT OF THIS MAY RESULT IN MACHINE BREAKDOWN OR PERSONAL INJURY.



Warranty THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.



Exemptions Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or other charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from the improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or accessories not approved by Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel. This warranty shall not extend to:




Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.








Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.








Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.








Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or unauthorized service people.








Malfunction of the instrument or part whose serial number is not legible enough.








Others not caused by instrument or part itself.



Customer Service Department Manufacturer:



Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.



Address:



Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, High-tech industrial park, Nanshan, Shenzhen 518057, P.R. China



Website:



www.mindray.com



E-mail Address:



[email protected]



Tel:



+86 755 81888998



Fax:



+86 755 26582680



EC-Representative: Address:



Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH(Europe) Eiffestraβe 80, 20537 Hamburg, Germany



Tel:



0049-40-2513175



Fax:



0049-40-255726



X-ray Protection X-ray system may cause injury if not properly used. Accordingly, read thoroughly and understand the instructions herein before attempting to place the system in operation. Although this system is built to the highest safety standards and incorporates a high degree of protection against X-radiation other than the useful beam, no practical design of system can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly, unwisely, or unknowingly exposing themselves or others to X-radiation. It is important that everyone working with X-radiation should be properly trained and take adequate steps to insure protection against injury. The manufacturer assumes that all operator and service personnel authorized to use, install, calibrate and maintain this system is cognizant of the danger of excessive exposure to X-radiation, is sufficiently trained and has the required knowledge for it. The system herein described is sold with the understanding that the manufacturer, its agents, and representatives are not liable for injury or damage which may result from exposure to X-radiation. Various protective materials and devices are available. It is recommended to use such materials and devices.



Environmental Statement on the Life Cycle of the System This system contains environmentally dangerous components and materials (such as PCBs, electronic components, used dielectric oil, lead, batteries, etc.), which, at the end of the life-cycle of the system, becomes dangerous and will be considered as harmful waste according to the international, domestic and local regulations. Mindray recommends contacting an authorized representative of Mindray or an authorized waste management company to remove this system once the life-cycle of the system comes to an end.



Safety Precautions 1. Advisory Symbols In this manual, the advisory symbols



DANGER,



WARNING,



CAUTION and



NOTICE are used regarding safety and other important instructions. Their application and meaning are described below. Please understand their meanings clearly before reading this manual. Signal word



Meaning INDICATES AN IMMINENTLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION WHICH, IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED, WILL CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH OR SUBSTANTIAL PROPERTY DAMAGE. INDICATES A POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION WHICH, IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED, COULD CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH OR SUBSTANTIAL PROPERTY DAMAGE. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not heeded or avoided, will or could cause minor personal injury or substantial property damage. Alert



readers



to



pertinent



facts



and



conditions.



It



represents information that is important to know but does not necessarily relate to possible injury or damage to equipment.



2. Safety Symbols The table below explains the safety symbols used in the System. Symbol



Description



Type B applied part (on medical equipment)



Caution Refer to instruction manual NOTE: On ME EQUIPMENT “Follow instructions for use”



Warning, radioactive material or ionizing



X-ray source assembly, emitting



Warning, laser beam



Caution, risk of electric shock



Warning, crushing hazard: hand



No sitting Alternating current Protective earth (ground)



Earth (ground)



Three-phase alternating current "ON" for a part of equipment



"OFF" for a part of equipment



Stand-by or preparatory state for a part of equipment



Emergency stop Loudspeaker Date of Manufacture



Manufacturer



Serial Number



Authorized representative in the European community This symbol indicates that the waste of electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. Please contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer or an authorized waste management company for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment. This product is provided with a CE marking in accordance with the regulations stated in Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning Medical Devices. The code adjacent to the CE marking (0123) is the number of the EU-notified body



3. Safety Precautions Please observe the following precautions to ensure patient and operator safety when using this system.



DO NOT USE FLAMMABLE GAS SUCH AS ANESTHETIC, OR FLAMMABLE LIQUID NEAR THIS PRODUCT; OTHERWISE, THERE MIGHT BE THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION.



• THIS SYSTEM IS NOT WATER-PROOF. DO NOT USE THIS SYSTEM IN ANY PLACE WHERE WATER LEAKAGE MAY OCCUR. IF ANY WATER IS SPRAYED ON OR INTO THE SYSTEM, ELECTRIC SHOCK MAY RESULT. IF WATER IS ACCIDENTALLY SPRAYED ON OR INTO THE SYSTEM, CONTACT MINDRAY CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPARTMENT OR SALES REPRESENTATIVE.



• CONNECT THE GROUND TERMINAL BEFORE TURNING ON THE SYSTEM. AND THE GROUND CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED AFTER THE SYSTEM IS TURNED OFF. OTHERWISE, ELECTRIC SHOCK MAY RESULT.



• BEFORE CLEANING THE SYSTEM, DISCONNECT THE POWER CORD FROM THE OUTLET. SYSTEM FAILURE AND ELECTRIC SHOCK MAY RESULT.



• DO NOT OPEN THE COVERS AND FRONT PANEL OF THE SYSTEM. SHORT CIRCUIT OR ELECTRIC SHOCK MAY RESULT WHEN THE SYSTEM HARDWARE IS EXPOSED AND POWERED ON. ANY SERVICE OR UPGRADE OF THE SYSTEM SHOULD BE CONDUCTED BY THE SERVICE PERSONNEL TRAINED AND AUTHORIZED BY MINDARY.



• THE OPERATOR SHOULD STRICTLY OBSERVE THE SAFETY AND



RADIATION PROTECTION REGULATIONS ON X-RAY SYSTEM, TO AVOID THE RADIATION HARM ON THE OPERATOR OR THE PATIENT.



• PLEASE DO NOT SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT WHEN THE PATIENT OR NON-PROFESSIONAL PERSONNEL ARE PRESENT.



• Precautions concerning clinical examination techniques:




This system must be used only by qualified medical professionals.








This operator’s manual does not describe clinical examination techniques. The clinician should select the proper examination techniques based on specialized training and clinical experience.



• Malfunctions due to radio wave:




If a radio wave emitting device is used in the proximity of this system, it may interfere with operations. DO NOT use or take any devices transmitting RF signals (such as cellular phones, transceivers and radio controlled products) in the room placing the system.








If a person brings a device that generates radio waves near the system, ask him / her to turn OFF the device immediately.



• DO NOT turn OFF the power supply of the system during printing, file storage or invoking other system operations. An interrupted process may not be completed, and can become lost or corrupted.



• During operation, improper power failure may lead to disk data destroy or system breakdown.



• DO NOT allow the patient to contact the control parts of the system. • DO NOT dismantle or replace any component of the system. Only professional



authorized



maintenance



personnel



are



allowed



for



maintenance.



• The professional personnel should be equipped with testing devices during installation, operation and maintenance.



• DO NOT modify the system software; otherwise, it may lead to system failure and image data loss. DO NOT use any software that is not supplied by Mindray.



• DO NOT replace any hardware component of the system; otherwise, it may lead to system failure.



Revision History Version V1.0



Date 2010-07-20



Revision Newly established Add sections of AEC calibration and generator calibration.



V2.0



2012-04-28



Add



80kw



generator



installation



and



dip



switch



configuration. Modify some maintenance details. V3.0



2014-04-02



Add Safety and Performance Scheduled Maintenance.



TABLE OF CONTENTS Section



Page



CHAPTER 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4



INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................... 1



OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................. 1 STANDARD SERVICE TOOLS .................................................................................. 1 MECHANICAL STRUCTURE OF THE SYSTEM ......................................................... 2 ELECTRICAL STRUCTURE CONNECTION CHART OF THE SYSTEM ...................... 3



CHAPTER 2



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ..... 5



2.1



MECHANICAL SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE .... 5 2.1.1 Maintaining Set Screws of the Rails ...................................................... 6 2.1.2 Maintaining Set Screws of the Telescopic Column and the Traveling Carriage .................................................................................................................... 7 2.1.3 Maintaining the Steel Cable of the Traveling Carriage ....................... 9 2.1.4 Maintaining the Expansion Sleeve Screws ........................................ 10 2.1.5 Maintaining the Steel Cable Clamping Screws of the Telescopic Column 11 2.1.6 Maintaining Set Screws of the Tube-collimator Assembly and the L-arm Assembly ..................................................................................................... 12 2.1.7 Maintaining the Stand Column ............................................................. 15 2.1.8 Maintaining Set Screws of the Stand Column .................................... 16 2.1.9 Maintaining Set Screws of the Detector Assembly and the Support Arm 18 2.1.10 Maintaining Set Screws of the Table Assembly Wheels ................... 19 2.1.11 Maintaining Longitudinal and Lateral Movement of the Tube-collimator Assembly .................................................................................... 20 2.1.12 Maintaining Lifting Movement of the Tube-collimator Assembly ..... 21 2.1.13 Maintaining Rotation of the Tube-collimator Assembly on the Horizontal Plane..................................................................................................... 22 2.1.14 Maintaining Rotation of the Tube-collimator Assembly on the Vertical Plane 23 2.1.15 Maintaining Lifting Movement of the Detector Assembly ................. 24 2.1.16 Maintaining Rotation of the Detector Assembly ................................. 25 2.1.17 Maintaining Floating Movement of the Tabletop ................................ 25 2.1.18 Maintaining Wheels of the table assembly (Optional) ...................... 25 2.1.19 Maintaining the Rail Assembly ............................................................. 26 2.1.20 Maintaining the Telescopic Column ..................................................... 27 2.1.21 Maintaining the Patient Contacting Devices....................................... 27 2.2 HARDWARE SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE .... 29 2.2.1 Maintaining the Emergency OFF Switch on the Detector Assembly 29



2.2.2



Maintaining the Emergency OFF Switch on the Stand Column Wire



Connection Box...................................................................................................... 29 2.2.3 Maintaining the Emergency OFF Switch on the Tube-collimator Assembly ................................................................................................................ 30 2.2.4 Maintaining the Emergency OFF Switch on the System Control Cabinet 31 2.2.5 Maintaining the Emergency OFF Switch on the Operator Console 31 2.2.6 Maintaining the Fiber Optic Sensor ..................................................... 32 2.2.7 Maintaining the DETECTOR Height Potentiometer .......................... 32 2.2.8 Maintaining the Detector Angle Potentiometer .................................. 34 2.2.9 Maintaining the Movable Bridge Potentiometer ................................. 35 2.2.10 Maintaining the Telescopic Column Potentiometer ........................... 37 2.2.11 Maintaining the Tube-collimator Assembly Angle Potentiometer .... 39 2.2.12 Maintaining the Remote Controller ...................................................... 41 2.3 IMAGE CHAIN SAFETY INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE .................................... 42 2.3.1 Maintaining the X-ray Tube ................................................................... 42 2.3.2 Maintaining the X-ray Tube Cables ..................................................... 43 2.3.3 Maintaining the Detector Assembly ..................................................... 43 2.3.4 Maintaining the Ion Chamber ............................................................... 43 2.4 POWER SAFETY INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ............................................. 45 2.4.1 Inspection for the Power-off System ................................................... 45 2.4.2 Inspection for the Power-on System ................................................... 46 2.5 SOFTWARE SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ..... 47 2.5.1 Hard-disk Space Inspection .................................................................. 47 2.5.2 File Storage ............................................................................................. 47 2.5.3 Windows Process ................................................................................... 48 2.5.4 Database Compression and Repair .................................................... 48 2.5.5 Calibration ............................................................................................... 48 CHAPTER 3 3.1 3.2



ELECTRICAL PARTS ........................................................................... 49



ELECTRICAL PRINCIPLES ..................................................................................... 49 INTERFACE CONNECTION BLOCK DIAGRAM OF ASSEMBLIES ............................ 50 3.2.1 Main Circuit Connection Chart of the System Control Cabinet ....... 50 3.2.2 Control Loop Connection Diagram of the System Control Cabinet 51 3.2.3 Terminal Row Connection Diagram ..................................................... 52 3.2.4 Motion Control Board (IPC) Connection Diagram ............................. 53 3.2.5 System Control Cabinet Interior Board and Detector Power Connection Diagram ............................................................................................. 54 3.2.6 Operator Console Connection Diagram.............................................. 55 3.2.7 OTS Signal Acquisition Board Connection Diagram ......................... 56 3.2.8 Driving Parts Connection Diagram ...................................................... 57 3.2.9 Generator and Detector Connection Diagram ................................... 58 3.2.10 Tube-collimator Assembly Connection Diagram................................ 59 3.2.11 Connection Diagram of Stand Column Signal Acquisition Board. 60 3.3 DEFINITION OF FRU ............................................................................................ 61 3.4 LIST OF COMPONENTS AND MATERIALS ............................................................. 61



3.4.1 Operator Console ................................................................................... 61 3.4.2 System Control Cabinet ........................................................................ 63 3.4.3 Generator................................................................................................. 65 3.5 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF BOARDS ............................................................................. 67 3.5.1 Block Diagram of Motion Control Board ............................................. 67 3.5.2 Block Diagram of Device Drive Board ................................................. 69 3.5.3 Block Diagram of Traveling Carriage Signal Acquisition Board ...... 69 3.5.4 Block Diagram of Stand Column Signal Acquisition Board .............. 70 3.5.5 Block Diagram of Operator Console Control Panel .......................... 71 3.5.6 Block Diagram of Man-Machine Interface Board............................... 72 3.5.7 Block Diagram of Detector Button Board............................................ 73 CHAPTER 4 4.1 4.2



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS ................................................... 75



HOST COMPUTER ASSEMBLY (DR70-30-101743)............................................ 75 STAND COLUMN ASSEMBLY (DR70-30-101716) .............................................. 77 4.2.1 SID Monitor Assembly (service spare part 801-DR70-00005-00) .. 79 4.2.2 Counterpoise Pulley Assembly (service spare part 801-DR70-00047-00) ............................................................................................ 80 4.2.3 Counterpoise Pulley Assembly (service spare part 801-DR70-00047-00) ............................................................................................ 81 4.2.4 Motion Signal Acquisition Box (DR70-30-101722) ............................ 82 4.2.5 Top Cover Assembly (service spare part 801-DR70-00002-00)83 4.2.6 Upper Cover Plate Assembly (DR70-30-101718) ............................. 83 4.2.7 Rope Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101725) ........................................ 84 4.2.8 Pulley Assembly (service spare part 801-DR70-00006-00 )............ 85 4.2.9 Wire Rope Fixed Assembly (DR70-30-101723) ................................ 86 4.2.10 Side Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101703).......................................... 86 4.2.11 Eccentric Shaft Assembly (DR70-30-101702) ................................... 87 4.2.12 Front Shell Assembly of Bottom Cover (service spare part 801-DR70-00013-00) ............................................................................................ 88 4.2.13 Anticollision washer assembly (DR70-30-101704) ........................... 88 4.2.14 Top Drive Assembly (service spare part 801-DR70-00004-00) ....... 89 4.3 FPD AND SUPPORT ARM ASSEMBLY (DR70-30-101726) ................................ 92 4.3.1 Support Arm Assembly (DR70-30-101727) ........................................ 93 4.3.2 Rotation Control Assembly – a (DR70-30-101731)........................... 94 4.3.3 Rotation Control Assembly – b (DR70-30-101732)........................... 94 4.3.4 Potentiometer Assembly (DR70-30-101733) ..................................... 95 4.3.5 Switch Assembly for FPD Vertical Movement (DR70-30-101734) . 95 4.3.6 Shaft Assembly (DR70-30-101728) ..................................................... 96 4.3.7 FPD Connection Assembly (DR70-30-101742) ................................. 96 4.3.8 Motor Assembly (service spare part 801-DR70-00015-00) ............. 97 4.3.9 FPD Assembly (DR70-30-101730) ...................................................... 98 4.3.10 Left Key PCBA (DR70-30-101735) ...................................................... 99 4.3.11 Right Key PCBA (DR70-30-101736) ................................................. 100 4.3.12 Emergency OFF Switch Assembly (DR70-30-101738) .................. 100



4.3.13 Grid Holder Assembly (service spare part 801-DR51-00074-00) . 101 4.3.14 Table Position Switch Assembly (DR70-30-101740) ...................... 102 4.3.15 Converter Assembly (service spare part 801-DR70-00055-00) .... 102 4.3.16 Front Shell Assembly of FPD (DR70-30-101741) ........................... 103 4.4 RAIL ASSEMBLY (DR70-30-101651)................................................................ 104 4.4.1 Stationary Rail Assembly (DR70-30-101652) .................................. 105 4.4.2 Wire Carrier and Slideway Assembly (DR70-30-101656) .............. 107 4.4.3 Hose Mounting Assembly (DR70-30-101657) ................................. 108 4.4.4 Hose Mounting Assembly of Movable Bridge (DR70-30-101655) 109 4.4.5 Drive Assembly of Movable Bridge (DR70-30-101654) ..................110 4.4.6 Movable Bridge Assembly (DR70-30-101653) .................................112 4.4.7 Wire Carrier Assembly (DR70-30-101661) .......................................114 4.4.8 Rotatable Cable Clamp Assembly of Wire Carrier (DR70-30-101662) 115



4.4.9 Roller Assembly (DR70-30-101664)...................................................116 4.4.10 Cable Clamp Assembly (DR70-30-101663) ......................................116 4.4.11 Transition Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101660) ...............................117 4.4.12 Connector Plate Assembly 1 (DR70-30-101659) .............................118 4.4.13 Connector Plate Assembly 2 (DR70-30-101659) .............................119 4.4.14 Vertical Eccentric Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101667) ................. 120 4.4.15 Horizontal Eccentric Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101666) ............ 121 4.4.16 Guide Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101669) ..................................... 121 4.5 TRAVELING CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY (DR70-30-101671) .................................. 123 4.5.1 Bumper Assembly (DR70-30-101689) .............................................. 126 4.5.2 Driven Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101676) .................................... 127 4.5.3 Transition Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101679) .............................. 128 4.5.4 Reel Assembly (DR70-30-101672) .................................................... 129 4.5.5 Reel Bearing Seat Assembly (DR70-30-101687)............................ 130 4.5.6 Potentiometer Assembly (DR70-30-101677) ................................... 130 4.5.7 Travel Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101675)..................................... 131 4.5.8 Balancer (DR70-30-101673) .............................................................. 132 4.5.9 Motor Assembly (DR70-30-101674) .................................................. 132 4.5.10 Limit Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101686) ....................................... 133 4.5.11 Brake Assembly 1 (DR70-30-101683) .............................................. 134 4.5.12 Photoelectric Switch Assembly (DR70-30-101678) ........................ 135 4.5.13 Upper Limit Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101688) ........................... 136 4.5.14 Travel Switch Assembly 1 (DR70-30-101681) & 2 (DR70-30-101682) 136



4.5.15 Inspection Belt Pulley Assembly (DR70-30-101680) ...................... 137 4.5.16 Eccentric Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101685) ............................... 137 4.6 TELESCOPIC COLUMN ASSEMBLY (DR70-30-101691)................................... 138 4.6.1 Trunk Assembly 1 (DR70-30-101692)............................................... 139 4.6.2 Trunk Assembly 2 (DR70-30-101693)............................................... 140 4.6.3 Trunk Assembly 3 (DR70-30-101694)............................................... 141



4.6.4 4.6.5



Trunk Assembly 4 (DR70-30-101695)............................................... 142 Guide Wheel Assembly of Suspended Column (DR70-30-101696) 143



4.6.6 Wire Rope Assembly of Telescopic Column (DR70-30-101697) .. 143 4.6.7 Wire Carrier Assembly of Telescopic Column (DR70-30-101698) 144 4.6.8 Splint Assembly (DR70-30-101699) .................................................. 145 4.7 HANDPIECE ASSEMBLY (DR70-30-101755) .................................................... 146 4.7.1 Tube Mainbody Assembly (DR70-30-101706)................................. 147 4.7.2 Tube Handgrip Assembly (service spare part 801-DR70-00070-00) 148



4.7.3 Front Shell Assembly (DR70-30-101709) ......................................... 149 4.7.4 Handpiece Screen Assembly with Wire (service spare part 801-DR70-00173-00) .......................................................................................... 150 4.7.5 L-arm Assembly (service spare part 801-DR70-00172-00) ........... 152 4.7.6 L-Arm Potentiometer and Travel Switch Assembly (service spare part 801-DR70-00064-00) .................................................................................. 156 4.8 MOBILE PATIENT TABLE ASSEMBLY (DR70-30-101789 / DR70-30-101816) 157 4.8.1 Left Foot Assembly of Patient Table (DR70-30-101814 / DR70-30-101802) ................................................................................................ 158 4.8.2 Patient Table Board Assembly (DR70-30-101813 / DR70-30-101797) 159



4.8.3 Right Foot Assembly of Patient Table (DR70-30-101807 / DR70-30-101815) ................................................................................................ 160 4.8.4 Optional Parts for Table ....................................................................... 161 4.9 ACCESSORY BOX ............................................................................................... 162 CHAPTER 5 5.1



TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................ 163



CAUSE AND ANALYSIS OF FAILURES ................................................................. 163 5.1.1 Disassembly and Installation of Shell................................................ 171 5.2 STAND COLUMN ASSEMBLY .............................................................................. 182 5.2.1 Replace the Wire Rope of Stand Column ......................................... 182 5.2.2 Replace the Chain ................................................................................ 188 5.2.3 Replace the Top Drive Assembly ....................................................... 193 5.2.4 Replace the Motor of Stand Column ................................................. 197 5.2.5 Replace LED Indicator Light Plate of Stand Column ...................... 199 5.2.6 Replace SID Display Panel................................................................. 201 5.2.7 Replace the Signal Acquisition Board of Stand Column................. 203 5.2.8 Replace the Potentiometer Assembly ............................................... 204 5.3 FPD AND SUPPORT ARM ASSEMBLY ................................................................ 208 5.3.1 Replace Motor-driven Push Bar ......................................................... 208 5.3.2 Replace the Switch for FPD Vertical Movement...............................211 5.3.3 Replace FPD Rotation Potentiometer ............................................... 212 5.3.4 Replace the Travel Switch on the Grid.............................................. 214 5.3.5 Replace Converter Assembly ............................................................. 216 5.3.6 Replace the Fiber Sensor ................................................................... 218



5.4



5.5



5.6 5.7



5.3.7 Replace the Ion chamber .................................................................... 220 5.3.8 Replace the Detector ........................................................................... 222 5.3.9 Replace the Emergency OFF Switch ................................................ 224 5.3.10 Replace the Keyboard of FPD............................................................ 225 RAIL ASSEMBLY .................................................................................................. 227 5.4.1 Replace the SID Drive Motor .............................................................. 227 5.4.2 Replace the SID Decelerator and Clutch.......................................... 230 5.4.3 Replace the SID Driven Synchronous Belt ...................................... 238 5.4.4 Replace the Travel Switch .................................................................. 241 5.4.5 Replace the Movable Bridge Moving Potentiometer Assembly .... 244 5.4.6 Replace the Movable Bridge Drive Assembly .................................. 247 TRAVELING CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY .................................................................... 252 5.5.1 Replace the Traveling Carriage Signal Acquisition Board ............. 252 5.5.2 Replace the Traveling Carriage Motor Assembly ............................ 254 5.5.3 Replace the Traveling Carriage Positioning Assembly ................... 257 5.5.4 Replace the Balancer .......................................................................... 258 5.5.5 Replace the Potentiometer Assembly ............................................... 265 5.5.6 Replace the Thorax-position or Level-position Optocoupler ......... 269 5.5.7 Replace the Brake Assembly.............................................................. 272 TELESCOPIC COLUMN ....................................................................................... 275 5.6.1 Replace the Telescopic Column Assembly....................................... 275 HANDPIECE ASSEMBLY ...................................................................................... 293 5.7.1 Replace the Tube Handgrip Assembly .............................................. 293 5.7.2 Replace the Front Shell Assembly ..................................................... 295 5.7.3 Replace the Air-duct............................................................................. 298 5.7.4 Replace the Cooling Fan..................................................................... 300 5.7.5 Replace the Tube Emergency OFF Switch Assembly (service spare part) 301 5.7.6 Replace the Tube Support Cover ...................................................... 304 5.7.7 Replace the Tube Rear Shell.............................................................. 306 5.7.8 Replace the Collimator ........................................................................ 307 5.7.9 Replace the Bulb of Collimator........................................................... 309 5.7.10 Replace the X-ray Tube........................................................................311 5.7.11 Replace the Photoelectric Switch of Tube Handgrip....................... 314 5.7.12 Replace the Tube Front Shell ............................................................. 316 5.7.13 Replace the Right, Left and Lower Key Kits..................................... 317 5.7.14 Replace the Infrared Receiver............................................................ 319 5.7.15 Replace the Monitor Assembly........................................................... 321 5.7.16 Replace the LCD Backlight Inverter .................................................. 322 5.7.17 Replace the LCD Drive Control Board .............................................. 324 5.7.18 Replace the Human-machine Interface Board ................................ 325 5.7.19 Replace the Touch Screen Controller ............................................... 327 5.7.20 Replace the Locknut 3 ......................................................................... 329 5.7.21 Replace the Cable Clamp Assembly ................................................. 331



5.7.22 Replace the Limit Pin ........................................................................... 333 5.7.23 Replace the Terminal Pad of Tube..................................................... 335 5.7.24 Replace the Shaft Sleeve 3 ................................................................ 337 5.7.25 Replace the Key 8X6X20 .................................................................... 339 5.7.26 Replace the Drive Unit Assembly ...................................................... 340 5.7.27 Replace the L-arm Adaptor 1.............................................................. 343 5.7.28 Replace the Motor Mounting Baseplate............................................ 345 5.7.29 Replace the L-arm Motor Assembly .................................................. 347 5.7.30 Replace the Potentiometer and Travel Switch Assembly of L-arm349 5.7.31 Replace the Bolt Assembly ................................................................. 351 5.7.32 Replace the L-arm Back Cover .......................................................... 353 5.7.33 Replace the L-arm Adaptor 2.............................................................. 354 5.7.34 Replace the Horizontal Turntable Assembly .................................... 356 5.7.35 Replace the 3-loop Potentiometer of L-arm ..................................... 359 5.7.36 Replace the Microswitch of L-arm ..................................................... 360 5.7.37 Adjust the Pitching Angle of Handpiece ............................................ 361 5.7.38 Adjust the Initial Horizontal Rotation Angle of the Handpiece ....... 365 5.7.39 Replace the L-arm Assembly.............................................................. 367 5.7.40 Replace the Photoelectric Sensor ..................................................... 369 5.8 ACCESSORY BOX ............................................................................................... 373 5.8.1 Replace the Slideway .......................................................................... 373 5.8.2 Replace the Stopper ............................................................................ 375 5.8.3 Replace the Shrapnel .......................................................................... 376 CHAPTER 6 6.1



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................... 379



OPERATOR CONSOLE ........................................................................................ 379 6.1.1 Replace the Operator Control Panel ................................................. 379 6.1.2 Replace the Host Computer ............................................................... 381 6.1.3 Replace the 4-Serial-port Expansion Card ....................................... 384 6.1.4 Replace the Startup Interface Board ................................................. 385 6.1.5 Replace the Display Card ................................................................... 387 6.2 SYSTEM CONTROL CABINET ............................................................................. 389 6.2.1 Replace 380VAC Transformer............................................................ 389 6.2.2 Replace 24V ON/OFF Power Box ..................................................... 391 6.2.3 Replace FPD Linear Power Supply ................................................... 394 6.2.4 Replace the UPS Power ..................................................................... 396 6.2.5 Replace the AC Contactor .................................................................. 398 6.2.6 Replace the Relay ................................................................................ 400 6.2.7 Replace the Stepping Motor Driver.................................................... 401 6.2.8 Replace the Signal Switching Board ................................................. 403 6.2.9 Replace the Device Interface Board.................................................. 405 6.2.10 Replace the Device Drive Board ........................................................ 407 6.2.11 Replace the IPC Control Box.............................................................. 408 6.2.12 Replace the IPC System ..................................................................... 410 6.2.13 Replace the IPC Power Supply Backplane PCBA .......................... 413



6.2.14 6.2.15 6.2.16 6.2.17 6.2.18 6.2.19 6.2.20 CHAPTER 7 7.1 7.2



Replace the 24V Standby Power Supply Board .............................. 415 Replace the 220V Output and Wiring Duct ...................................... 417 Replace the IPC Board Intel Celeron M 600 with Memory Stick... 419 Replace the Double-port Isolation CAN Interface Module ............. 421 Replace the Startup Interface Board ................................................. 423 Replace the 24V Power Supply Board (PCBA) ............................... 425 Replace the Power Compartment Soleplate (PCBA) ..................... 426 REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS ............. 431



POSITION OF GENERATOR BOARD.................................................................... 431 REPLACEMENT OF KEY COMPONENTS AND BOARDS ....................................... 431 7.2.1 Replace EPROM-U24 on ATP Control panel ................................... 431 7.2.2 Replace the U5 on HT Control Panel (Microprocessor+ROM) ..... 432 7.2.3 Replace DRAC Control Panel Microprocessor U17 ....................... 434 7.2.4 Replace ATP Control Panel ................................................................ 435 7.2.5 Replace AEC Control Panel................................................................ 436 7.2.6 Replace HT Control Panel .................................................................. 438 7.2.7 Replace Filament Driver Board .......................................................... 439 7.2.8 Replace the Interface Control Panel ................................................. 440 7.2.9 Replacement of High-pressure Fuel Tank ........................................ 441 7.2.10 Replace DRAC Control Panel ............................................................ 442 7.2.11 Replace AEC AAP ................................................................................ 443 7.2.12 Replace Inverter Module ..................................................................... 444



CHAPTER 8



TOUCH SCREEN ACTIVATION AND MOTION CONTROL



SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ...................................................................................... 451 8.1 8.2 8.3



TOUCH SCREEN ACTIVATION ............................................................................. 451 MOTION CONTROL SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ................................................. 451 MOTION CONTROL SOFTWARE UPGRADATION ................................................ 458



CHAPTER 9



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL



CONSOLE SOFTWARE ............................................................................................... 465 9.1 9.2



9.3



INSTALLATION AND RECOVERY OF THE OPERATION SYSTEM .......................... 465 9.1.1 System Recovery ................................................................................. 465 DROC SETUP MENU ......................................................................................... 469 9.2.1 The Function of Key Programs .......................................................... 469 9.2.2 Functions of Key Folders .................................................................... 471 RECOVERY OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE ...................................... 471 9.3.1 Recovery for the Re-Installed System............................................... 471 9.3.2 Recovery for the Non Re-Installed System ...................................... 476 DATABASE BACK-UP AND RECOVERY............................................................... 477 IMAGE RECOVERY AFTER THE RE-INSTALLATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE



9.4 9.5 SOFTWARE .................................................................................................................... 477 9.6 LOG SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ......................................................................... 478 9.7 UPDATING PCB SOFTWARE .............................................................................. 479 CHAPTER 10 AEC CALIBRATION............................................................................ 485



10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6



PREPARATION .................................................................................................... 485 BALANCE ADJUSTMENT FOR THREE FIELD DETECTORS ................................ 489 ION CHAMBER DENSITY CONTRAST TEST ........................................................ 491 EI EXPECTED VALUE ADJUSTMENT UNDER 70KV ........................................... 492 AEC KV COMPENSATION ADJUSTMENT ........................................................... 493 EXIT THE SERVICE MODE ................................................................................. 495



CHAPTER 11 AEC MODE EI DEVIATION INSPECTION........................................ 496 11.1 TESTING 70 KV-EI DEVIATION........................................................................... 496 11.2 TESTING 120 KV-EI DEVIATION ........................................................................ 496 CHAPTER 12 ERROR LISTING ................................................................................. 498 12.1 MECHANICAL ERROR ......................................................................................... 498 12.2 ELECTRIC ERROR .............................................................................................. 500 12.2.1 Power Supply Error Diagnosis ........................................................... 500 12.2.2 Traveling carriage signal acquisition board error diagnosis .......... 506 12.2.3 Human-machine interface board error diagnosis ............................ 510 12.2.4 Device Interface Board Error Diagnosis ........................................... 513 12.2.5 Device Drive Board Error Diagnosis.................................................. 519 12.2.6 Error Diagnosis in the Operator Console Control Panel ................ 522 12.2.7 Stand Column Signal Acquisition Board Error Diagnosis ............... 527 12.3 SYSTEM CONTROL CABINET ERROR ................................................................ 531 12.4 GENERATOR ERROR .......................................................................................... 533 12.4.1 Error Introduction .................................................................................. 533 12.4.2 General Cautions ................................................................................. 533 12.4.3 General Procedures ............................................................................. 534 12.4.4 Error Codes ........................................................................................... 536 12.4.5 Description of Errors ............................................................................ 538 12.5 SOFTWARE PROMPTS........................................................................................ 589 12.5.1 Control Console Software Prompts ................................................... 589 12.5.2 Motion Control Software Prompts ...................................................... 589 12.6 DETECTOR ERROR ............................................................................................ 612 12.7 BOUGHT-IN COMPONENTS ERROR ................................................................... 615 12.7.1 Barcode Scanner Error ........................................................................ 615 12.7.2 Disc Driver Error ................................................................................... 615 APPENDIX A ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM..........................................A-1 B.1 B.2



MAIN CIRCUIT CONNECTION CHART OF THE SYSTEM CONTROL CABINET .....A-2 CONTROL LOOP CONNECTION DIAGRAM OF THE SYSTEM CONTROL CABINET A-3



B.3 TERMINAL ROW CONNECTION DIAGRAM...........................................................A-4 B.4 IPC CONNECTION DIAGRAM ..............................................................................A-5 B.5 CONNECTION DIAGRAM OF THE SYSTEM CONTROL CABINET INNER MOTOR DRIVING PARTS ..............................................................................................................A-6 B.6 POWER CONNECTION DIAGRAM OF PCB AND FPD INSIDE THE SYSTEM CONTROL CABINET ........................................................................................................A-7 B.7 CONNECTION DIAGRAM OF OPERATOR CONSOLE............................................A-8



B.8 B.9 B.10 B.11 B.12



CONNECTION DIAGRAM OF OTS SIGNAL ACQUISITION BOARD .......................A-9 CONNECTION DIAGRAM OF DRIVING PARTS ...................................................A-10 CONNECTION DIAGRAM OF GENERATOR AND FPD ........................................ A-11 CONNECTION DIAGRAM OF HANDPIECE ASSEMBLY .......................................A-12 CONNECTION DIAGRAM OF SIGNAL ACQUISITION BOARD OF STAND COLUMN A-13



INTRODUCTION



CHAPTER 1



INTRODUCTION



1.1 Overview This manual provides Mindray DigiEye 760 system the detailed operation procedures of the installation and maintenance, parts replacement, software upgrades etc that occurs in normal circumstances. This manual is intended for the qualified system maintenance engineer who has received the following trainings:











The principle of X-ray and knowledge of the products Knowledge of X-ray Generator Knowledge of X-radiation protection Knowledge of electrical technicians



1.2 Standard Service Tools The following standard service tools are required during maintenance: SN. 1. 3.



Name/Type Hex-key wrench 1.5-10mm Monkey wrench (opening size 24mm, 8’’)



Qty



SN.



1



2.



1



4.



Name/Type Hex-key wrench 1.5-6mm Monkey wrench (opening size 12mm, 4’’)



Qty 1 1



5.



Double open wrench 6-7



1



6.



Double open wrench 8-10



1



7.



Double open wrench 12-14



1



8.



Double open wrench 17-19



1



9.



Plum wrench (bend)13



1



10.



1



12.



11. 13. 15. 17. 19. 21.



Crosshead



screwdriver



107*250 Crosshead



screwdriver



14.



102*200 Crosshead



screwdriver



104*38 Flat Blade screwdriver ＃ 2-200 Flat



Blade



1



16.



1



18.



screwdriver adhesive



hammer 32mm



wrench) 18 Crosshead



screwdriver



107*100 Crosshead



screwdriver



101*75 Flat



Blade



screwdriver



101*100 Flat



Blade



screwdriver



102*100



1 1 1 1 1



20.



Plier P-107



1



1



22.



Diagonal plier N-205S



1



3.0*100 Double-faced



Solid wrench (combination



23.



Long Nose Plier MT29AB



1



24.



Circlip plier SEB-175



1



25.



Circlip plier SIB-175



1



26.



Tapeline 7.5M



1



27.



Combination circlip plier



1



28.



Feeler gauge 150mm



1



29.



Washer and blade



1



30.



Bar spirit level 600mm



1



-1-



INTRODUCTION



31. 33. 35.



Batter



screwdriver



362



series T8 Drill hammer (square-head / round-head) 6mm Drill hammer (square-head / round-head) 12mm



drill hammer (square-head



1



32.



2



34.



Socket spanner



1



2



36.



Small plumb



1



/ round-head) 10mm



2



1.3 Mechanical Structure of the System



Front Back



Stationary rail



Right



assembly



Left



Traveling carriage assembly



Stretch tube assembly



Handpiece assembly Up FPD and support arm assembly Stand column assembly



-2-



Down



INTRODUCTION



1.4 Electrical Structure Connection Chart of the System



-3-



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



CHAPTER 2 SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE 2.1 Mechanical Safety and Performance Inspection and Maintenance The first periodic maintenance service should be performed within 3 months (after the first month) since the installation, and the subsequent services are performed at twelve month intervals. If there are many examinations (more than 125 patients per day), the maintenance period should be shortened to six months. Note: Refer to the table below for standard torque (screw-tightening force, (allowance: ±5%). Screw Spec.



M3



M4



M5



M6



M8



M10



M12



Torque (kgf.cm)



9.0



21.4



41.2



74.2



178



350



599



Use the Mindray-designated bottled lubricating oil (P/N: 115-005032-00, for maintenance) to lubricate the component or part.



Adopt the SPHEEROL EPL3 high-temperature grease of the AXLE series to lubricate. The grease P/N is A90-000048 (for maintenance).



-5-



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



2.1.1 MAINTAINING SET SCREWS OF THE RAILS Items Set



screws



stationary



Interval of



rail



the



Every 12



and



months



Maintenance



Maintenance



Time (minute)



tool



30



Wrench, ladder



Manpower 1



movable bridge 1. Maintain set screws of the stationary rail: Step on a ladder and fasten the M12 double nuts (eight in total) on the bolts connecting the stationary rail and the channel beam. Check whether any nut is loose.



2. Maintain connection screws on the movable bridge: Put the ladder under the movable bridge. Fasten the M8 set screws (six in total) by using a wrench. Check whether any screw is loose.



3. Maintain set screws of the movable bridge walking wheels: Check whether there is any shift in the axial direction of the walking wheel. Check whether the position-limit ring clings to the supporting block with no obvious gap. If the gap is large, loosen the M5X16 top screw. Adjust the walking wheel axle to cling the ring to the lateral side of the supporting block. Then, tighten the top screw by using the wrench. Four places need to be checked and maintained.



-6-



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



M5X16 Walking wheel



Supporting block Ring



2.1.2 MAINTAINING



SET



SCREWS



OF



THE



TELESCOPIC



COLUMN AND THE TRAVELING CARRIAGE Items



Interval



Set screws of the telescopic column and the traveling carriage



Every 12 months



Maintenance Time (minute) 30



Maintenance tool Wrench, ladder



Manpower 1



1. Maintain set screws of the traveling carriage walking wheel. Put the ladder under one side of the traveling carriage. Tighten the two M5 hex socket cap screws of the traveling carriage walking wheel by using a wrench and check whether any screw is loose. Move the ladder under the other side of the traveling carriage. Tighten the two M5 hex socket cap screws on this side and check whether any screw is loose.



M5 hex socket cap screws



2. Maintain set screws of the telescopic column. Remove the front and rear covers of the traveling carriage.



-7-



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



M4 countersunk hex socket screws



Front cover of the traveling carriage



Rear cover of the traveling carriage



M4 countersunk hex socket screws (two symmetrically) M4 countersunk hex socket screws



3. Remove the set screws of the traveling carriage cylinder and slide it to the lowest position.



M4 countersunk hex socket screws



Traveling carriage cylinder body 4. Fasten the 20 M6 hex socket cap screws of the telescopic column by using the wrench and check whether any screw is loose.



-8-



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



M6 hex socket cap screws (same as those on the opposite side)



M6 hex socket cap screws (same as those on the opposite side)



2.1.3 MAINTAINING THE STEEL CABLE OF THE TRAVELING CARRIAGE Items



Interval



Maintenance



Maintenance tool



Manpower



Soft brush, lubricating



2



Time (minute) Steel cable of the



every 12



traveling carriage



months



30



oil,



cross-headed



screwdriver 1. Pull the traveling carriage downward until it reaches the lowest position near the ground. In this way, most part of the steel cable is exposed outside of the cable wheel. 2. Dip the soft brush with lubricating oil, and then press the brush against the master steel cable.



-9-



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



Master steel cable Spare steel cable



3. Another person pulls the traveling carriage upward to the highest position. 4. Repeat step 2 to step 3 twice to make the steel cable thoroughly wiped and lubricated. 5. During maintenance, check the tension degree of the spare steel cable (not steel cable connected to the balancer) in the telescopic column. Press the spare steel cable from the winding drum to the top column. If the steel cable is kept away from contact with other metal parts, it needs no tensioning. If the steel cable touches the metal parts around, contact the service personnel of the equipment supplier for tensioning. Notice: During maintenance, check if the steel cable is broken. If so, turn off the system immediately, and contact the service personnel of the equipment supplier for replacement as soon as possible. Notice: Adopt the FLUID-setral-SHT 4500 MT aerosol manufactured by SETRAL Chemie GmbH to lubricate. The P/N is 115-005032-00 (for maintenance). Notice: During maintenance, be careful not to drop tiny materials into the traveling carriage. Otherwise, it may be involved to other parts by the steel cable.



2.1.4 MAINTAINING THE EXPANSION SLEEVE SCREWS Items Expansion screws



Interval sleeve



Every 12 months



Maintenance Time (minute) 15



Maintenance tool



Manpower



Cross screwdriver, socket head wrench, brush, lubricant



2



1.



Remove the front cover of the traveling carriage.



2.



Remove the rear cover of the traveling carriage.



3.



Fasten the six M6 hex socket cap screws of the expanding sleeve by using a wrench and check whether any screw is loose.



- 10 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



Expansion sleeve set screws



Figure 2-1 Maintain the Expansion Sleeve Set Screws



2.1.5 MAINTAINING THE STEEL CABLE CLAMPING SCREWS OF THE TELESCOPIC COLUMN Items



Interval



Steel cable clamping screws of the telescopic column



Every 12 months



1.



Maintenance Time (minute) 15



Maintenance tool Socket wrench, lubricant



head brush,



Manpower 1



Remove four M4X10 hex socket cap screws fastening the telescopic column cover and then detach the column cover.



2.



Move the telescopic column to the highest position.



3.



Check whether four M5X16 hex socket cap screws fastening the steel cable clamp plate are loose. If yes, fasten the four screws.



4.



Fasten the column cover by using four hex socket cap screws.



- 11 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



Column cover M4X10 hex socket cap screws M5X16 hex cap screws



socket



Figure 2-2 Maintain the Steel Cable Clamping Screws Notice: During maintenance, cover the upper part of the telescopic column by using paper or bubble film to avoid tiny objects from falling into the telescopic column.



2.1.6 MAINTAINING SET SCREWS OF THE TUBE-COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY AND THE L-ARM ASSEMBLY Items



Interval



Set screws of the tube-collimator assembly and the L-arm assembly



Every 12 months



1.



Maintenance Time (minute) 60



Maintenance tool Wrench, ladder



Manpower 2



Maintain set screws of the tube-collimator assembly. For the old-version equipment, if there is no inspection hole, check whether there is any gap or shake between the horizontal rotating disc and the telescopic column. If yes, it indicates that the connection screws of the tube-collimator assembly are loose. Detach the L-arm assembly.



- 12 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



Telescopic column



Check the gap here.



Horizontal rotating disc assembly



Set screws of the tube-collimator assembly



Inspection holes



Figure 2-3 Maintain Set Screws of the Tube-collimator Assembly 2.



To remove the L-arm assembly, refer to Service Manual. Then, fasten the six set screws of the tube-collimator assembly by standard torque.



Set screws of the tube-collimator assembly



Figure 2-4 Maintain Set Screws of the Tube-collimator Assembly 3.



For the new-version equipment, if there are inspection holes, check whether any screw is loose by an Allen wrench. Then, rotate the L-arm assembly and check whether two - 13 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



screws around it are loose. If yes, relock the set screws of the tube-collimator assembly according to the steps above. 4.



Maintain connection screws of the L-arm assembly. Check whether the six M6 connection screws of the L-arm assembly are loose. Fasten the connection screws by standard torque and check whether any screw is loose.



Coupling screws of the L-arm assembly



Figure 2-5 Maintain Coupling Screws of the L-arm Assembly 5.



Maintain connection screws of the L-arm rotary joint. Adjust the tube-collimator assembly 1.5m above the ground. Fasten the following three M8 screws by using the wrench and check whether any screw is loose.



Figure 2-6 Maintain Coupling Screws of the L-arm Rotary Joint 6.



Maintain set screws of the tube support. Adjust the tube-collimator assembly 1.5m above the ground. Fasten the following three M6 screws by standard torque and check whether any screw is loose.



- 14 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



Figure 2-7 Maintain Set Screws of the Tube Support



2.1.7 MAINTAINING THE STAND COLUMN Items



Interval



Guiderail surface, steel cable, and chain of the stand column



Every 12 months



Coupling shaft between the pulley and the chain



Maintenance Time (minute) 45



Maintenance tool



Manpower



Socket head wrench, cross-headed screwdriver, brush, lubricant



2



Upper end nut



Lower end nut Chain



Clasp Figure 2-8 Maintain the Stand Column Interior 1. Maintain the steel cable of the stand column: Move the flat-panel detector assembly to the lowest position near the ground. Remove the top cover and front cover of the wall stand column. Clean the surface of the steel cable with a soft cloth. Then, apply little lubricating oil to a clean soft cloth and lubricate the steel cable by the cloth.



- 15 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



2. Maintain the transmission chain of the stand column: Brush the transmission gear pair and the chain with a thin cover of lubricating oil. Check the tensity of the chain. If the chain is found to be loose, regulate the tensity. a)



Screw in the M5 nut and plain washer fastening the chain terminal to the lower part of the pulley and chain coupling shaft. Revolve the M5 nut on the upper part of the pulley and chain connection shaft, to keep the gap of 10~15 mm between the upper /lower M5 nut and the pulley.



b)



Draw the chain downwards slightly to tighten the chain. Revolve the nut on the lower part of the pulley and chain connection shaft to get the plain washer exactly touch the pulley.



c)



Revolve downwards the nut on the upper part of the pulley and chain connection shaft, and then tighten the nut. During fastening, use sharp nose pliers to clamp the upper part of the pulley and chain connection shaft to avoid wheeling of the chain.



Notice: If the steel cable is detected as broken, turn off the system immediately and notify the service engineer of Mindray. Wait for equipment maintenance and do not use the system before the maintenance. Notice: Do not twist the chains during and after the assembly. Notice: Adopt FLUID-setral-SHT 4500 MT aerosol manufactured by SETRAL Chemie GmbH to lubricate. The P/N is 115-005032-00 (for maintenance).



2.1.8 MAINTAINING SET SCREWS OF THE STAND COLUMN Items



Interval



Maintenance Time (minute)



Set screws of the stand



Every



column



months



1.



12



30



Maintenance



Manpower



tool Wrench, ladder



1



Maintain set screws of the stand column base. Remove the set screws on the rear side of the stand column and pull out the rear cover of the base. Remove the two screws and demount the front cover of the base.



Figure 2-9 Maintain the Stand Column Interior 2.



Tighten the four M8 expansion screws with standard torque and check whether any screw is loose.



- 16 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



Figure 2-10 Fasten the M8 Expansion Screws 3.



Maintain set screws on the stand column top. Tighten the two M8 expansion screws by standard torque and check whether any screw is loose.



Figure 2-11 Maintain Set Screws on the Stand Column Top 4.



Maintain coupling screws of the stand column fixed plate. Tighten the two M8 bolts with standard torque and check whether any bolt is loose.



Coupling screws of the fixed plate



Figure 2-12 Maintain Coupling Screws of the Stand Column Fixed Plate



- 17 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



2.1.9 MAINTAINING



SET



SCREWS



OF



THE



DETECTOR



ASSEMBLY AND THE SUPPORT ARM Items



Interval



Set screws of the detector assembly and the support arm



Every 12 months



1.



Maintenance Time (minute) 30



Maintenance tool Wrench, ladder



Manpower 1



Maintain set screws of the detector assembly and the support arm. Remove the top cover, front base cover, and front cover plate of the stand column.



Top cover



Front cover plate



Front base cover Figure 2-13 Maintain Set Screws of the Detector and the Support Arm 2.



Fasten the four M8 screws on the detector support arm by standard torque and check whether any screw is loose.



- 18 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



Four M8 screws



Figure 2-14 Fasten Four M8 Screws Fixing the Support Arm 3.



Maintain set screws of the detector assembly. Rotate the detector assembly to vertical position. Fasten four M8 hex socket cap screws fastening the detector by using the wrench and check whether any screw is loose.



M8 hex socket cap screws



M8 hex socket cap screws Figure 2-15 Maintain Set Screws of the Detector



2.1.10MAINTAINING SET SCREWS OF THE TABLE ASSEMBLY WHEELS Item



Interval



Maintenance



Maintenance tool



Manpower



Socket head wrench



1



Time (minute) Set screws of the table



Every 12 months



10



assembly wheels



- 19 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



Check whether the three M6 hexagon socket screws fastening each wheel of the table assembly are loose and tighten them with standard torque if necessary.



M6 hexagon socket screw



2.1.11MAINTAINING LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL MOVEMENT OF THE TUBE-COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY Item



Interval



Maintenance



Maintenance tool



Manpower



Time (minute) Longitudinal movement



and



lateral



of



the



Every 12



30



months



Socket



head



1



wrench



tube-collimator assembly 1. Draw the tube-collimator assembly longitudinally or laterally by hand within the travel range. Check whether the movement and brake functions are normal. If the motional resistance is too large or the braking force is too small, adjust the space between the detent friction plate and the rail surface according to detent adjustment steps in Section 3.12 of DigiEye760 Installation Manual to achieve satisfactory movement and detent effects. 2. Maintain the traveling carriage positioning mechanism: Apply lubricating oil to the electromagnetic pin. Fasten the mounting screws on the positioning adjustment block and the mounting screws on the traveling carriage positioning mechanism. Check whether the electromagnetic pin works flexibly. If not, adjust the traveling carriage positioning mechanism according to relevant adjustment steps in Section 3.12 of DigiEye760 Installation Manual.



- 20 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



Positioning adjustment block



Screws on the positioning adjustment block



Traveling carriage positioning mechanism



Mounting screws



3. Maintain the driving gear pair of the potentiometer: Apply lubricating oil to the surface of the gear pair, so that the mating surface is covered by a layer of oil film. Do not apply too much lubricating oil; otherwise, it may increase the resistance to transmission.



Gear pair of the potentiometer



Notice: Adopt the FLUID-setral-SHT 4500 MT aerosol manufactured by SETRAL Chemie GmbH to lubricate. The P/N is 115-005032-00 (for maintenance).



2.1.12MAINTAINING



LIFTING



MOVEMENT



OF



THE



TUBE-COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY Item



Interval



Maintenance



Maintenance tool



Manpower



Socket head wrench,



1



Time (minute) Lifting movement of the



every 12



tube-collimator assembly



months



30



adjustable wrench



1. Move the tube-collimator assembly up and down in manual and electric modes respectively. Check whether the movement and brake functions are normal. If the tube-collimator assembly is unbalanced during manual operation and blocked in lifting during electric operation, adjust the balancing weight of the balancer to match the weight of the tube-collimator assembly. 2. Maintain the driving gear pair of the potentiometer: Apply lubricating oil to the surface of the - 21 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



gear pair, so that the mating surface is covered by a layer of oil film. Do not apply too much lubricating oil; otherwise, it may increase the resistance to transmission.



Driving gear pair of the potentiometer



3. Check whether the sync belt is strained. If the sync belt is slack, loosen the set screws of the motor assembly. Pull the motor assembly in the arrow direction to strain the sync belt. Then, tighten set screws of the motor assembly.



Set screws of the motor assembly



Notice: Adopt the FLUID-setral-SHT 4500 MT aerosol manufactured by SETRAL Chemie GmbH to lubricate. The P/N is 115-005032-00 (for maintenance).



2.1.13MAINTAINING ROTATION OF THE TUBE-COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY ON THE HORIZONTAL PLANE Item



Interval



Maintenance



Maintenance tool



Manpower



Socket head wrench



1



Time (minute) Rotation tube-collimator



of



the



every 12



assembly



months



15



on the horizontal plane 1. Demount the rear cover of the L-arm assembly. 2. Apply a thin layer of lubricating oil to the toothed wheels of the driving bevel gear pair by a - 22 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



brush. Note: Cover the surrounding of the gears by paper. 3. After lubrication, turn on the system to rotate the tube assembly on the vertical plane for two cycles. In this way, the whole bevel gear pair can be lubricated evenly. 4. Mount the rear cover of the L-arm assembly. Bevel gear pair



Rear cover of the L-arm



Notice: Adopt the FLUID-setral-SHT 4500 MT aerosol manufactured by SETRAL Chemie GmbH to lubricate. The P/N is 115-005032-00 (for maintenance).



2.1.14MAINTAINING ROTATION OF THE TUBE-COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY ON THE VERTICAL PLANE Item



Interval



Maintenance



Maintenance tool



Manpower



Socket head wrench



1



Time (minute) Rotation



of



the



every 12



tube-collimator assembly



months



15



on the vertical plane 1. Demount the cover plate of the L-arm assembly.



Cover plate



2. Check whether the electromagnetic pin of the pin assembly works normally and apply lubricating oil to the pins. Fasten set screws of the four sets of pin assembly and set screws of the three clamping blocks.



- 23 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



Set screws of the clamping blocks



Set screws of the pin assembly



Pin assembly



Notice: Adopt the FLUID-setral-SHT 4500 MT aerosol manufactured by SETRAL Chemie GmbH to lubricate. The P/N is 115-005032-00 (for maintenance).



2.1.15MAINTAINING LIFTING MOVEMENT OF THE DETECTOR ASSEMBLY Item



Interval



Maintenance



Maintenance tool



Manpower



/



1



Time (minute) Lifting movement of



every 12



the detector assembly



months



5



1. Move the detector assembly up and down manually and electrically. Check whether the movement and brake functions are normal. 2. Main the driving gear pair of the stand column. Move the detector assembly to the lowest position (closet to the ground). Demount the top cover and front cover of the stand column. Apply a thin layer of lubricating oil to the driving gear pair and the toothed wheels by a brush respectively.



Driving gear pair



- 24 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



Notice: Adopt the FLUID-setral-SHT 4500 MT aerosol manufactured by SETRAL Chemie GmbH to lubricate. The P/N is 115-005032-00 (for maintenance).



2.1.16MAINTAINING ROTATION OF THE DETECTOR ASSEMBLY Item



Interval



Rotation of the detector



every 12



assembly



months



Maintenance



Maintenance



Time (minute)



tool



15



Socket



head



Manpower 1



wrench



1. Rotate the detector assembly manually and electrically. Check whether the movement and brake functions are normal. 2. Maintain the driving gear pair of the potentiometer. Demount the front closure plate. Apply lubricating oil to the surface of the gear pair to ensure that the mating surface is lubricated. Do not apply too much lubricating oil; otherwise, it may increase the transmission resistance.



Driving gear pair of the potentiometer



Front closure plate Notice: Adopt the FLUID-setral-SHT 4500 MT aerosol manufactured by SETRAL Chemie GmbH to lubricate. The P/N is 115-005032-00 (for maintenance).



2.1.17MAINTAINING FLOATING MOVEMENT OF THE TABLETOP Item Floating



movement of



the tabletop



Interval



Maintenance



Maintenance



Time (minute)



tool



every 12



30



months



Socket



head



Manpower 1



wrench



Check whether the tabletop of the mobile floating patient table or the stationary lifting patient table (optional) can be floated smoothly and whether the brake works normally. For any exception, contact Mindray for maintenance.



2.1.18MAINTAINING



WHEELS



OF THE



TABLE



ASSEMBLY



(OPTIONAL) Item



Interval



Maintenance



Maintenance



Time (minute)



tool



- 25 -



Manpower



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



Wheels of the table



every 12



assembly (optional)



months



30



Socket



head



1



wrench



1. Maintain the supporting feet and wheels of the mobile patient table or mobile floating patient table (optional). Release the supporting feet of the mobile patient table or the wheel detent pedal of the mobile floating patient table. Move the table assembly and check whether the wheels can be moved smoothly. If not, contact Mindray for maintenance. 2. Lock the supporting feet of the mobile patient table and the wheel detent pedal of the mobile floating patient table. Push the table assembly with normal force. If the table assembly can be moved, contact Mindray for maintenance.



2.1.19MAINTAINING THE RAIL ASSEMBLY Items



Interval



Maintenance



Maintenance tool



Manpower



Soft cloth, soap or



2



Time (minute) Stationary



rail



I,



Every 12



stationary



rail



II,



months



60



ethyl alcohol, brush



movable bridge I, movable bridge II



Stationary rail I Stationary rail II



I Movable bridge I



Movable bridge II



Figure 2-16 Maintain the Rail Assembly 1.



Power on the system and move the movable bridge to one end of the rail. Expose the stationary rails and movable bridges as much as possible.



2.



Clean the surface of the rails with a cloth moistened in warm water with mild soap. Then, wipe with a cloth moistened in clean water. Or, dip a soft cloth into the medical-applied ethyl alcohol, and then wipe the surfaces with cloth.



3.



Power on the system and move the movable bridge to the other end of the rails. Wipe



- 26 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



the rails in step 2. Clean the surface of all rollers. Notice: Do not clean it by detergent or other solvent other than alcohol.



2.1.20MAINTAINING THE TELESCOPIC COLUMN Items



Interval



Maintenance



Maintenance tool



Manpower



Time (minute) Telescopic column



Every 12 months



30



Soft cloth



1



1.



Draw the X-ray tube assembly downward to the lowest position near the ground.



2.



Add little soap to the warm water and then dip the cloth into the water; or dip the cloth into the medical-applied ethyl alcohol. Then, wipe outer surfaces of the telescopic column.



Outer surfaces of the telescopic column



Figure 2-17 Maintain the Telescopic Column Notice: During usage, if there is any abnormal sound inside the telescopic column or severe shaking during movement, notify Mindray for maintenance.



2.1.21MAINTAINING THE PATIENT CONTACTING DEVICES Items



Interval



Mobile patient table/mobile floating patient table/stationary lifting patient table (optional), mobile stand (optional), handgrips and front cover of the detector assembly



Every day



Maintenance Time (minute) 10



- 27 -



Maintenance tool Soft cloth, soap, water, ethyl alcohol



Manpower 1



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



1.



Maintain the mobile patient table/mobile floating patient table (optional) or mobile stand every day before system start-up and after system shutdown.



2.



Add little soap to the warm water and then dip the cloth into the water; or dip the cloth into the medical-applied ethyl alcohol. Then, wipe the outer surfaces of the mobile stand and the mobile patient table.



3.



Dip a soft cloth into the medical-applied ethyl alcohol, and then wipe the handgrips and front cover of the detector assembly by using the cloth.



Tabletop of the mobile patient table



Detector front cover



Detector handgrip



Mobile stand



Tabletop of the mobile floating patient table



Figure 2-18 Maintain the Patient Contacting Devices



- 28 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



2.2 Hardware Safety and Performance Inspection and Maintenance 2.2.1 MAINTAINING THE EMERGENCY OFF SWITCH ON THE DETECTOR ASSEMBLY Item



Interval



Maintain the emergency



every 12



OFF



months



switch



on



the



Maintenance



Maintenance



Time (minute)



tool



30



/



Manpower 1



detector assembly 1. Check whether the system works normally (The LED light on the operator console is on. The workstation host and the touch screen on the tube-collimator assembly are normal with no error message displayed. Verify that emergency OFF switches on the detector, tube-collimator assembly, stand column wire connection box, operator console, and system control cabinet are not pressed. 2. Press the emergency OFF switch on the detector assembly. When the emergency OFF switch is pressed down, all movements of the system are stopped: a)



Check the touch screen on the tube-collimator assembly. A warning message (“Warn: The system stops movement. Please release the emergency OFF switch”) and a hardware error message are displayed.



b)



Operate any movement control button on the tube-collimator assembly, remote controller and detector, all movements (including hand controlled movements) are disabled.



Note: When the movement control button is pressed, it is normal if an error message is displayed on the touch screen. The following is the same. 3. Revolve the emergency OFF switch. The switch is released quickly. a)



The warning message on the touch screen disappears. The normal positional information is displayed on the touch screen.



b)



Press any movement control button. The system moves normally.



Note: Take a proper movement range for the test. The following is the same. If the emergency OFF switch is tested as abnormal, check whether the installation and wire connection of the emergency OFF switch and the DR70 stand column signal acquisition board are normal. For any fault, repair or replace them as needed.



2.2.2 MAINTAINING THE EMERGENCY OFF SWITCH ON THE STAND COLUMN WIRE CONNECTION BOX Item



Interval



Maintenance



Maintenance



Time (minute)



tool



- 29 -



Manpower



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



Maintain



the



emergency



every 12



OFF switch on the stand



months



30



/



1



column wire connection box 1. Check whether the system works normally (The LED light on the operator console is on. The workstation host and the touch screen on the tube-collimator assembly are normal with no error message displayed. Verify that emergency OFF switches on the detector, tube-collimator assembly, stand column wire connection box, operator console, and system control cabinet are not pressed. 2. Press the emergency OFF switch on the stand column wire connection box. When the emergency OFF switch is pressed down, all movements of the system are stopped: a)



Check the touch screen on the tube-collimator assembly. A warning message (“Warn: The system stops movement. Please release the emergency OFF switch”) and a hardware error message are displayed.



b)



Operate any movement control button on the tube-collimator assembly, remote controller and detector, all movements (including hand controlled movements) are disabled.



Note: When the movement control button is pressed, it is normal if an error message is displayed on the touch screen. The following is the same. 3. Revolve the emergency OFF switch. The switch is released quickly. a)



The warning message on the touch screen disappears. The normal positional information is displayed on the touch screen.



b)



Press any movement control button. The system moves normally.



Note: Take a proper movement range for the test. The following is the same. If the emergency OFF switch is tested as abnormal, check whether the installation and wire connection of the emergency OFF switch and the DR70 stand column signal acquisition board are normal. For any fault, repair or replace them as needed.



2.2.3 MAINTAINING THE EMERGENCY OFF SWITCH ON THE TUBE-COLLIMATOR ASSEMBLY Item



Interval



Maintain the emergency OFF



every 12



switch on the tube-collimator



months



Maintenance



Maintenance



Time (minute)



tool



30



/



Manpower 1



assembly 1. Check whether the system works normally (The LED light on the operator console is on. The workstation host and the touch screen on the tube-collimator assembly are normal with no error message displayed. Verify that emergency OFF switches on the detector, tube-collimator assembly, stand column wire connection box, operator console, and system control cabinet are not pressed. 2. Press the emergency OFF switch on the tube-collimator assembly. When the emergency OFF switch is pressed down, all movements of the system are stopped: a)



Check the touch screen on the tube-collimator assembly. A warning message (“Warn: - 30 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



The system stops movement. Please release the emergency OFF switch”) and a hardware error message are displayed. b)



Operate any movement control button on the tube-collimator assembly, remote controller and detector, all movements (including hand controlled movements) are disabled.



Note: When the movement control button is pressed, it is normal if an error message is displayed on the touch screen. The following is the same. 3. Revolve the emergency OFF switch. The switch is released quickly. a)



The warning message on the touch screen disappears. The normal positional information is displayed on the touch screen.



b)



Press any movement control button. The system moves normally.



Note: Take a proper movement range for the test. The following is the same. If the emergency OFF switch is tested as abnormal, check whether the installation and wire connection of the emergency OFF switch and the man-machine interface board are normal. For any fault, repair or replace them as needed.



2.2.4 MAINTAINING THE EMERGENCY OFF SWITCH ON THE SYSTEM CONTROL CABINET Item



Interval



Maintain the emergency OFF



every 12



switch on the system control



months



Maintenance



Maintenance



Time (minute)



tool



30



/



Manpower 1



cabinet 1. Check whether the system works normally (The LED light on the operator console is on. The workstation host and the touch screen on the tube-collimator assembly are normal with no error message displayed. Verify that emergency OFF switches on the detector, tube-collimator assembly, stand column wire connection box, operator console, and system control cabinet are not pressed. 2. Press the emergency OFF switch on the system control cabinet. When the emergency OFF switch is pressed down, all movements of the system are stopped: Operate any movement control button on the tube-collimator assembly, remote controller and detector, all movements (including hand controlled movements) are disabled. 3. Revolve the emergency OFF switch. The switch is released quickly. Press any movement control button. The system moves normally. If the emergency OFF switch is tested as abnormal, check whether the installation and wire connection of the emergency OFF switch and the power major circuit are normal. For any fault, repair or replace them as needed.



2.2.5 MAINTAINING THE EMERGENCY OFF SWITCH ON THE OPERATOR CONSOLE Item



Interval



Maintenance



- 31 -



Maintenance



Manpower



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



Maintain the emergency OFF



every 12



switch on the operator console



months



Time (minute)



tool



30



/



1



1. Check whether the system works normally (The LED light on the operator console is on. The workstation host and the touch screen on the tube-collimator assembly are normal with no error message displayed. Verify that emergency OFF switches on the detector, tube-collimator assembly, stand column wire connection box, operator console, and system control cabinet are not pressed. 2. Press the emergency OFF switch on the operator console. When the emergency OFF switch is pressed down, all movements of the system are stopped: a)



Check the DROC screen on the workstation PC. There is a warning message (“Warn: The emergency OFF switch is pressed. Operation is forbidden”). Click on any position on the screen. There is no feedback. The generator will be switched off and a generator communication error message will be displayed.



b)



Operate any movement control button on the tube-collimator assembly, remote controller and detector, all movements (including hand controlled movements) are disabled.



3. Revolve the emergency OFF switch. The switch is released quickly. a)



The warning message on the DROC screen disappears.



b)



Press any movement control button. The system moves normally.



Note: Take a proper movement range for the test. The following is the same. If the emergency OFF switch is tested as abnormal, check whether the installation and wire connection of the emergency OFF switch and the operator console control board are normal. For any fault, repair or replace them as needed.



2.2.6 MAINTAINING THE FIBER OPTIC SENSOR Item



Interval



Maintain the fiber optic



every 12



sensor



months



Maintenance



Maintenance



Time (minute)



tool



30



/



Manpower 1



1. Test according to DigiEye760 Installation Manual. 2. If the function is tested as abnormal, check whether the installation and wire connection of the fiber optic sensor and the stand column signal acquisition board are normal. For any fault, repair or replace the fiber optic sensor.



2.2.7 MAINTAINING THE DETECTOR HEIGHT POTENTIOMETER Item



Interval



Maintain the detector height



every 12



potentiometer



months



Maintenance



Maintenance



Time (minute)



tool



30



standard



Manpower 1



service tool



1. According to steps of Section 5.2.8 in this service manual, detach the outer cover and find the



- 32 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



detector height potentiometer. Note: Do not disassemble the potentiometer. 2. Check whether the nut and fastening screws of the potentiometer are loose. If yes, tighten the nut and screws. Potentiometer



Pulley adjusting plate Potentiometer nut Driven synchronous pulley



Location hole



Stop pin



M4X8 set screws (2) 3. Check whether the wire of the potentiometer is connected firmly or abnormally. Fasten the wire if necessary. 4. On the System Setting Screen of the tube-collimator assembly, press Calibration-> Detector height.



5. Move the system to the maximum limit position and then record the current AD reading of the sensor. Move the system to the minimum limit position and then record the current AD reading of the sensor. 6. The data range of the potentiometer sensor is 0-4095. Check whether the AD allowance difference (of the maximum position and minimum position) is too great (above 400). For instance, if the AD of the maximum position is 200 and the AD of the minimum position is 2500, - 33 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



their allowances are 200-0=200 and 4095-2500=1595 respectively. The allowance difference is obvious. 7. If the allowance difference is obvious, separate the potentiometer gear from the machine according to Section 5.3.9 of this manual. Adjust the number of turns of the potentiometer to ensure that the potentiometer has approaching allowances of turn number when it moves to the two limit positions. Note: Observe the reading of the potentiometer. Do not move the potentiometer approaching the limit positions. Otherwise, it may damage the potentiometer. 8. After adjustment and installation of the potentiometer, restart position calibration.



2.2.8 MAINTAINING THE DETECTOR ANGLE POTENTIOMETER Item



Interval



Maintain the detector angle



every 12



potentiometer



months



Maintenance



Maintenance



Time (minute)



tool



30



Standard



Manpower 1



service tool



1. According to steps of Section 5.3.3 in this service manual, detach the outer cover and find the detector angle potentiometer (Do not detach the potentiometer assembly). 2. Check whether the nut and fastening screws of the potentiometer are loose. If yes, tighten the nut and screws.



Potentiometer



Pulley adjusting plate Potentiometer nut Driven pulley



Stop pin



Location hole M4X8 bolt (2)



3. Check whether the wire of the potentiometer is connected firmly or abnormally. Fasten the wire if necessary. 4. On the System Setting Screen of the tube-collimator assembly, press Calibration-> Detector angle.



- 34 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



5. Move the system to the maximum limit position and then record the current AD reading of the sensor. Move the system to the minimum limit position and then record the current AD reading of the sensor. 6. The data range of the potentiometer sensor is 0-4095. Check whether the AD allowance difference (of the maximum position and minimum position) is too great (above 400). For instance, if the AD of the maximum position is 200 and the AD of the minimum position is 2500, their allowances are 200-0=200 and 4095-2500=1595 respectively. The allowance difference is obvious. 7. If the allowance difference is obvious, separate the potentiometer gear from the machine according to Section 5.3.3 of this manual. Adjust the number of turns of the potentiometer to ensure that the potentiometer has approaching allowances of turn number when it moves to the two limit positions. Note: Observe the reading of the potentiometer. Do not move the potentiometer approaching the limit positions. Otherwise, it may damage the potentiometer. 8. After adjustment and installation of the potentiometer, restart position calibration.



2.2.9 MAINTAINING THE MOVABLE BRIDGE POTENTIOMETER Item



Interval



Maintain the movable bridge



every 12



potentiometer



months



Maintenance



Maintenance



Time (minute)



tool



30



Standard



Manpower 1



service tool



1. According to steps of Section 5.4.5 in this service manual, detach the outer cover and find the longitudinal movement potentiometer (Do not detach the potentiometer assembly). 2. Check whether the nut and fastening screws of the potentiometer are loose. If yes, tighten the nut and screws.



- 35 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



Potentiometer fastening plate



Potentiometer



Stop pin



M3X3 set screw



Location hole Lock nut



Gear 2



3. Check whether the wire of the potentiometer is connected firmly or abnormally. Fasten the wire if necessary. 4. On the System Setting Screen of the tube-collimator assembly, press Calibration-> Longitudinal pos.



5. Move the system to the maximum limit position and then record the current AD reading of the sensor. Move the system to the minimum limit position and then record the current AD reading of the sensor. 6. The data range of the potentiometer sensor is 0-4095. Check whether the AD allowance difference (of the maximum position and minimum position) is too great (above 400). For instance, if the AD of the maximum position is 200 and the AD of the minimum position is 2500, their allowances are 200-0=200 and 4095-2500=1595 respectively. The allowance difference is obvious. 7. If the allowance difference is obvious, separate the potentiometer gear from the machine according to Section 5.4.5 of this manual. Adjust the number of turns of the potentiometer to ensure that the potentiometer has approaching allowances of turn number when it moves to the two limit positions. Note: Observe the reading of the potentiometer. Do not move the potentiometer approaching the limit positions. Otherwise, it may damage the potentiometer. - 36 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



8. After adjustment and installation of the potentiometer, restart position calibration.



2.2.10MAINTAINING



THE



TELESCOPIC



COLUMN



POTENTIOMETER Item Maintain



the



Interval telescopic



column potentiometer



Maintenance



Maintenance



Time (minute)



tool



30



Standard



every 12 months



Manpower 1



service tool



1. According to steps of Section 5.5.5 in this service manual, detach the outer cover and find the tube-collimator assembly height potentiometer (Do not detach the potentiometer assembly). 2. Check whether the nut and fastening screws of the potentiometer are loose. If yes, tighten the nut and screws. Potentiometer



Pulley adjusting plate Potentiometer nut Driven pulley



Stop pin



Location hole



M4X8 bolt (2) 3. Check whether the wire of the potentiometer is connected firmly or abnormally. Fasten the wire if necessary. 4. On the System Setting Screen of the tube-collimator assembly, press Calibration-> Tube height.



- 37 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



5. Move the system to the maximum limit position and then record the current AD reading of the sensor. Move the system to the minimum limit position and then record the current AD reading of the sensor.



6. The data range of the potentiometer sensor is 0-4095. Check whether the AD allowance difference (of the maximum position and minimum position) is too great (above 400). For instance, if the AD of the maximum position is 200 and the AD of the minimum position is 2500, their allowances are 200-0=200 and 4095-2500=1595 respectively. The allowance difference is obvious. 7. if the allowance difference is obvious, separate the potentiometer gear from the machine according to Section 5.5.5 of this manual. Adjust the number of turns of the potentiometer to ensure that the potentiometer has approaching allowances of turn number when it moves to the two limit positions. Note: Observe the reading of the potentiometer. Do not move the potentiometer approaching the limit positions. Otherwise, it may damage the potentiometer. 8. After adjustment and installation of the potentiometer, restart position calibration. - 38 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



2.2.11MAINTAINING



THE



TUBE-COLLIMATOR



ASSEMBLY



ANGLE POTENTIOMETER Item



Interval



Maintain the tube-collimator



every 12



assembly



months



angle



Maintenance



Maintenance



Time (minute)



tool



30



Standard



Manpower 1



service tool



potentiometer 1. According to steps of Section 5.7.30 in this service manual, detach the outer cover and find the tube-collimator assembly angle potentiometer (Do not detach the potentiometer assembly). 2. Check whether the nut and fastening screws of the potentiometer are loose. If yes, tighten the nut and screws. Potentiometer



Pulley adjusting plate



Potentiometer nut Driven pulley



Stop pin



Location hole



M4X8 bolt (2) 3. Check whether the wire of the potentiometer is connected firmly or abnormally. Fasten the wire if necessary. 4. On the touch screen of the tube-collimator assembly, press System Configuration-> Position Calibration->Tube angle.



- 39 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



5. Move the system to the maximum limit position and then record the current AD reading of the sensor. Move the system to the minimum limit position and then record the current AD reading of the sensor.



6. The data range of the potentiometer sensor is 0-4095. Check whether the AD allowance difference (of the maximum position and minimum position) is too great (above 400). For instance, if the AD of the maximum position is 200 and the AD of the minimum position is 2500, their allowances are 200-0=200 and 4095-2500=1595 respectively. The allowance difference is obvious. 7. if the allowance difference is obvious, separate the potentiometer gear from the machine according to Section 5.8.27 of this manual. Adjust the number of turns of the potentiometer to ensure that the potentiometer has approaching allowances of turn number when it moves to the two limit positions. Note: Observe the reading of the potentiometer. Do not move the potentiometer approaching the limit positions. Otherwise, it may damage the potentiometer. 8. After adjustment and installation of the potentiometer, restart position calibration. - 40 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



2.2.12MAINTAINING THE REMOTE CONTROLLER Item Maintain controller



the



remote



Interval



Maintenance Time (minute)



Maintenance tool



Manpower



every 12 months



30



Standard service tool



1



1. Check whether the buttons of the remote controller work normally. Normally, the remote control distance is above 5m. 2. Check whether the infrared receiver on the tube-collimator assembly is spained, blocked or abnormal. If yes, handle it. Infrared receiver



3. If the battery of the remote controller is not replaced for long time, replace the battery of the remote controller timely. Otherwise, it may affect the remote control distance.



- 41 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



2.3 Image Chain Safety Inspection and Maintenance 2.3.1 MAINTAINING THE X-RAY TUBE Item Maintain the X-ray tube



Interval



Maintenance



Maintenance



Time (minute)



tool



30



/



every 12 months



Manpower 1



2.3.1.1 X-ray Tube Seasoning (Calibration) If the tube unit has not been used for a period of one week or more, or if daily operating tube voltage is above 120kV, follow the seasoning steps below before starting using the tube unit, for the purpose of maintaining the stable operation and long service life of the tube unit (Refer to the Seasoning Schedule at starting). Even when daily operating tube voltage is lower than 120kV, raise the tube voltage gradually from low voltage. Notice: Adjust the collimator light field to the minimum size for tube seasoning. Do not face the X-ray tube to the detector.



Do not exceed the daily operating tube voltage



-1



1. Use a large focus, rotate the anode at normal speed (3,000 or 3,600 min ), set the tube current to the 50% value of the maximum permissible current at the maximum tube voltage, give the short time input at a rate of one time per 30 seconds with the exposure time of 0.1s, and raise the tube voltage gradually. When an unstable state of the tube current is observed in the course of increasing tube voltage, lower the tube voltage until the tube current fluctuation disappears, and then increase the tube voltage more slowly than previously.



- 42 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



To prevent the tube unit from being damaged, the maximum tube voltage of daily seasoning should not exceed the daily operating tube voltage. 2. After completing the above seasoning, use the tube unit in the ordinary way.



2.3.1.2 Periodic Inspection and Maintenance Since the silicone grease is easily dry after long-term operation, the status of the silicone cover may be changed, or the withstand voltage performance may be degraded, to maintain long-term stable operation and long service life of the tube unit, notify the service engineer to apply a new layer of silicone grease on the HV cable plug and socket at regular intervals (at least once a year).



2.3.2 MAINTAINING THE X-RAY TUBE CABLES Item



Interval



Maintain the X-ray tube



every 12



cables



months



Maintenance



Maintenance



Time (minute)



tool



30



/



Manpower 1



1.



Check whether the tube related cables and HV cables are connected firmly.



2.



Move away the tube-collimator assembly and the detector assembly. Open the collimator light and set the light field to the minimum size. On the DROC screen, select Chest PA; Lumbar Spine Lateral and Hand Lateral respectively, and then switch to the Time mode and make exposures. If an error prompt such as mA precision error is displayed, perform tube calibration. For details, refer to Generator Calibration of DigiEye760 Installation Manual.



2.3.3 MAINTAINING THE DETECTOR ASSEMBLY Item Maintain



the



assembly



Interval detector



Maintenance



Maintenance



Time (minute)



tool



30



/



every 12



Manpower 1



months



1.



Check whether the detector related cables are connected firmly.



2.



Set the SID to 130cm and exposure parameters: 70kv, 50mA, and 20ms. Open the collimator light and set the light field to maximum size. Make an exposure and then check whether the acquired image is even and normal.



3.



If the image is not even and normal, or the user reports for reduced image quality, perform detector calibration. For details, refer to Detector Calibration of DigiEye760 Installation Manual.



2.3.4 MAINTAINING THE ION CHAMBER Item



Interval



Maintenance - 43 -



Maintenance



Manpower



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



Maintain



the



ion



Time (minute)



tool



30



AEC calibration



every 12 months



chamber



1



tool



1.



Check whether the cables connected to the ion chamber are normal.



2.



Set the SID to 130cm and the exposure parameter to 10mmAl. Open the collimator light and set the light field to the maximum size. Select Chest AP, 70kV, 64mA, and AEC mode. Make exposures in the same exposure conditions to acquire two images. Save the images and then quit the DROC software.



3.



Run the G-DR00-S03 DR Image SNR test tool. Open the imagefiles folder under the DROC directory. Drag the two exposed raw images (.ORIG) to the software screen. Click Compute to get the SNR value. Compare the value with the acceptance criterion in the AECCalibrationDatas.xml file under the DROC directory. If the calculated SNR value is lower than SNRFloor or higher than SNRCell of the corresponding kV, perform AEC calibration. For details, refer to AEC Calibration in this manual or DigiEye760 Installation Manual.



4.



Set exposure parameters to 110kV, 16mA, AEC mode and make an exposure. Repeat the above step.



5.



If the user reports for reduced image quality, perform AEC calibration. For details, refer to AEC Calibration of this manual.



- 44 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



2.4 Power Safety Inspection and Maintenance Power Safety Inspection Record Note: The inspection cycle is 12 months.



2.4.1 INSPECTION FOR THE POWER-OFF SYSTEM 2.4.1.1 Checking the Structure 1.



Check the power connection lines: Check whether the generator input cable and output cable are damaged or aged. Check whether the input HV cable of the X-ray tube assembly is damaged or aged. Check whether power lines of the workstation computer and monitor are damaged or aged.



2.



Check the protective ground wire: Open outer covers of the generator and check whether the input protective ground wire is loose. Check whether the protective ground wire of the X-ray tube assembly is loose. Check whether the protective ground wire of the detector box is loose.



3.



Check outer covers of the equipment: Check whether there is any crack on the tabletop of the patient table. Check whether there is any crack on the detector box. Check whether there is any crack on the outer cover of the X-ray tube assembly.



4.



Check the air vents and fans: Check whether the air vents of the generator are blocked. Check whether the air vents of the collimator are blocked. Check whether the air vents of the workstation computer and monitor are blocked.



5.



Check the tube-collimator assembly and the balancer of the detector box on the wall stand: Hold the tube-collimator assembly with hands. Move the tube-collimator assembly up and down and check whether the tube-collimator assembly falls down in speed-up rate. Release the detector box detent handle and check whether the detector box falls down in speed-up rate.



6.



Check the labels: Check whether the labels on the system are pasted firmly and clearly, with no edge curls. Check whether the high-temperature warn label on the collimator is pasted firmly and clearly, with no edge curls. Check whether the No-sitting labels on both ends of the tabletop are pasted firmly and clearly, with no edge curls. Check whether the warning labels on the exam room door or around are pasted firmly and clearly, with no edge curls.



2.4.1.2 Checking Connection of Ground Wires Us e a m ult im et er t o t e s t t he r es is tanc e be t wee n t h e f o l lo wi n g c o n n ec t i on p oi nts : th e ge n er at or pr ot ec t i v e g r o u nd t er m in a l an d th e s c r e w on t h e ge n er a t or pr o t ec t i v e gr o u nd t er m i na l , or t h e s et s c r e w o n t h e c o ll im at or, th e m eta l s c r e w o n th e ta b l e de t ec t or b ox , a n d th e s e t s c r e w on th e wa l l s tan d d et ec to r b ox . T he tes t v a lu e s h o u ld no t b e a bo v e 1 O hm . - 45 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



2.4.1.3 Checking the Components Check whether the m od e ls of th e wor k s ta t io n c om put er, m on i to r, p o wer l i ne a n d s i gn a l l i ne c o n n ec t ed t o th e c om pu te r ar e th o s e d es i g na t ed b y M i n d r a y.



2.4.2 INSPECTION FOR THE POWER-ON SYSTEM 2.4.2.1 Checking the Emergency OFF Switch Function Power on the system, so that the system is in standby state. Press down the emergency OFF switch on the operator console and check whether the workstation computer and monitor are powered off and whether the power light on the mobile floating patient table is off. Press the collimator light and check whether the light can be turned on. Keep the emergency OFF switch being pressed down. Press the system startup button and check whether the system can be powered on. Release the emergency OFF switch. Press the system startup button and check whether the system can be powered on. Set exposure parameters to 70kV, 10mA, 10ms and make exposures for three times. Check whether the system can expose normally.



2.4.2.2 Checking the Fan Function Check whether the computer fan works normally.



- 46 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



2.5 Software



Safety



and



Performance



Inspection



and



Maintenance 2.5.1 HARD-DISK SPACE INSPECTION 1. Log on to the DROC software and check whether free space of the disk is above 50%.



2. Switch to the History Image screen and check whether the images are saved or archived (If there is no PACS, the images are saved in the CD/DVD disc; if there is PACS, the images are sent to PACS for archiving). Delete the images until the space of the disk data is greater than 50%.



2.5.2 FILE STORAGE 1. Exit from the DROC software. On the Windows desktop, double-click My Computer. Open the folder (D:\DROC\bin\logs or :\DROC\logs) that saves the logs.



Copy the whole folder of logs to a mobile storage device and then delete the folders of one year ago (the folders are named by the date). If the logs are not named by date, check the file name and delete the logs named by the date of one year ago. 2. Compress the configfiles folder and copy it for analysis: 错误！ 错误！不能通过编辑域代码创建对象。 不能通过编辑域代码创建对象。 Compress the configfiles folder under the D:\DROC directory and copy it to the mobile storage device for analysis.



2.5.3 WINDOWS PROCESS Exit from the DROC software. Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete at the same time. The Task Manager window is displayed. Click on the Process screen and maximize the Task Manager window. Press Printsc to print and save the screen.



- 47 -



SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE



2.5.4 DATABASE COMPRESSION AND REPAIR In the D:\DROC\database directory, check the size of the droc.mdb file and then copy the file to a laptop (installed with Office 2007-Access). On the Windows OS of the laptop, double-click the Office icon and select Manage. Click Compress and Repair the Database. Then, close the Access. Change the previous database file name to drocbak.mdb and copy the compressed and repaired database to the D:\DROC\database directory.



2.5.5 CALIBRATION Perform position information calibration and detector calibration according to DigiEye760 Maintenance Manual.



- 48 -



ELECTRICAL PARTS



CHAPTER 3



ELECTRICAL PARTS



3.1 Electrical Principles DR70 System Connection Diagram Stator cable HV cable + HV cable 3N, 380V AC



X-ray tube



Generator Power cable Touch screen serial line



25Pin signal line Image acquisition workstation



Fiber



Power and wire harness



Detector



Power and wire harness



CAN bus Power cable Motor/clutch



Signal line



SID LED monitor



Signal line



Grid perception



Stand Column



Signal line



Left/right rotation limit



System Control Cabinet



Rotation angle potentiometer Motor drive line



Signal line



Button board Emergency OFF switch



Power cable



LED Indicator



Signal line



Photoelectric perception switch



X-ray Tube Support Assembly



Motor/brake/clutch Power cable Collimator cable VGA cable Touch screen serial line CAN bus



VGA cable CAN bus Collimator cable



Collimator



Limit switch cable Potentiometer cable Optoelectronic switch cable Electronic pin cable Motor/brake/clutch



L-arm support assembly



Limit switch cable Optoelectronic switch cable Potentiometer cable CAN bus Power cable Motor/brake/clutch



Traveling carriage



Detector rotation motor



The electrical parts of DigiEye 760 mainly consist of system control cabinet, detector supporting system, X-ray tube supporting system, generator, X-ray tube and collimator.System control cabinet is mainly in charge of power supply for the system (including power supply for the stepping motor driver, motion control board, varies of motion signal acquisition board, operator console, etc.); detector supporting system adjusts the height and the angle of FPD by motor driving, and completes the acquisition and transmission of related data; generator is mainly responsible to provide high voltage for X-ray tube and provide driving signal for tube anode rotating motor; X-ray tube and collimator are mainly responsible to produce and control X-ray.



- 49 -



ELECTRICAL PARTS



3.2 Interface Connection Block Diagram of Assemblies 3.2.1 Main Circuit Connection Chart of the System Control Cabinet



- 50 -



ELECTRICAL PARTS



3.2.2 Control Loop Connection Diagram of the System Control Cabinet



- 51 -



ELECTRICAL PARTS



3.2.3 Terminal Row Connection Diagram



- 52 -



ELECTRICAL PARTS



3.2.4 Motion Control Board (IPC) Connection Diagram



- 53 -



ELECTRICAL PARTS



3.2.5 System Control Cabinet Interior Board and Detector Power Connection Diagram



- 54 -



ELECTRICAL PARTS



3.2.6 Operator Console Connection Diagram



- 55 -



ELECTRICAL PARTS



3.2.7 OTS Signal Acquisition Board Connection Diagram



- 56 -



ELECTRICAL PARTS



3.2.8



Driving Parts Connection Diagram



- 57 -



ELECTRICAL PARTS



3.2.9



Generator and Detector Connection Diagram



- 58 -



- 59 -



11



(S10-A4) To generator



Handgrip sensing Photoelectric sensor M90-100136---



DR70-30-82076



IR receiver



ES4



Emergency OFF switch of handpiece



PE



TH1



TH1



COM



SHIFT



MAIN



1 3 2



J1



12



Emcy+



GND



12V Signal



5 6



2 3 1



Emcy-



1 2



1 2 3



J21



GND



12V Signal



SHIELD CANL CANH



GND



SWITCH1



DR70-10-82253



RAY14 tube



1 2 3



(S3-C5) To collimator CAN adaptor J23



GND VCC/5V IR信号



1 2



J20



J3



J6



Cathode



Anode



1 2 3



1 2 3 4



1 2 3



J4



29 30



(S10-C6) To tank of generator



1 2



J19



FAN2



FAN1



GND



D24V



1 2 4 5



2 4 5



1



1 2



GND



D24V



FAN2



2 4 5



1



RTS



TXD



RXD



GND



024-000063-00



2 3 4



1



5 6



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 9 20



CN1



VSYNC GND GND HSYNC Red Blue Green GND GND GND



GND +12V DC ON/OFF VADJ GND



5 6 7 8 9



0000-10-11149 JP1



Touch screen controller



1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8 9 10



CON3



1 2 3 4 5



CON2



JP1



021-000003-00



2 3



CON4



Cooling fan of handpiece



1 2 4 5



TOUCH



GND



+5V



(S8-C3) To acquisition baord CAN(J3)



FAN1



RTS



TXD



RXD



GND



CANH



CANL



SHIELD



J22



FAN



1 2



1 2 3 4



GND-F



1 +12VDC To (S3-C6) system control cabinet D5 2 GND



GND



+12V DC



CAN 1 2 3 4



1 2



(S4-C5) To IPC of system control cabinet



GND



+5V



CANH



CANL



SHIELD



GND-F



GND



+12V



(S3-C5) To system control cabinet D5



1 2



12 14 15 16



8 10



J7



J4



PE



6 2 3 4 5



VGA



Gnd



Top



Bottom



Left



Right



10 13 1 3 2 6 7 8



14



VSYNC



0000-10-10772



(S8-D1)



Touch screen 0000-10-11148



(S3-C5) To IPC of system control cabinet



Low voltage end



High voltage end



17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1



20 1 9 18



To front shell of handpiece (terminal)



To traveling carriage



GND 10 13 HSYNC Red 1 Blue 3 Green 2 GND 6 GND 7 GND 8



14



1 2



CN3



022-000004-00



CN1



3.3V 3.3V GND GND RX0RX0+ GND RX1RX1+ GND RX2RX2+ GND CKCK+ GND RX3RX3+ GND GND



Inverter



VCC



LED_OUT8 LED_OUT9 LED_OUT10



21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28



DR70-30-82132



Human-machine interface board



KEY_OUT2 KEY_IN0 KEY_IN1 KEY_IN2



J1



Monitor



Bottom key of handpiece DR70-30-82074 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8



11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 9 20



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10



LCD monitor



VCC



KEY_OUT1 KEY_IN0 KEY_IN1 KEY_IN2 KEY_IN3 LED_OUT4 LED_OUT5 LED_OUT6 LED_OUT7



VCC



LED_OUT1 LED_OUT2 LED_OUT3



KEY_OUT0 KEY_IN0 KEY_IN1 KEY_IN2 KEY_IN3 LED_OUT0



3.2.10



Left key of handpiece DR70-30-82073 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10



Right key of handpiece DR70-30-82073 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10



ELECTRICAL PARTS



Tube-collimator Assembly Connection Diagram



ELECTRICAL PARTS



3.2.11 Connection Diagram of



Stand Column Signal Acquisition



Board



Signal acquisition board of stand column



- 60 -



ELECTRICAL PARTS



3.3 Definition of FRU FRU indicates that manufacturer has inventory in stock.



3.4 List of Components and Materials 3.4.1 Operator Console



6 7 5 8 4 9



3 2



10



11 1



1-1



1-2



- 61 -



1-3



1-4



ELECTRICAL PARTS



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



Workstation host computer 1.



801-DR51-00225-00



YES



assembly



(service



spare



1



part)



1-1



023-000086-00



YES



Display



Card



HDMI



512MB



GeForce PCI-E



1



Double Screen 801-DR51-00227-00



YES



1-3



801-DR51-00253-00



YES



1-4



801-DR51-00226-00



YES



801-DR51-00230-00



YES



1-2



Startup



interface



board



(service spare part) Data



acquisition



card



(service spare part) 4-serial-port



expansion



card (service spare part) Softdog



(Sentinel



Dog)



(service spare part)



1 1 1 1



LED Indicator light Yellow 2.



M08-001050---



YES



Round D16mm 100cd/m2



1



24V 18A LED Indicator light Green 3.



M08-001060---



YES



Round D16mm 100cd/m2



1



24V 18A Switch with blue indicator 4.



010-000005-00



YES



light – contact normally



1



disconnected 5.



/



NO



6.



0000-10-11147



YES



7.



010-000027-00



YES



8.



/



NO



Keyboard



1



LCD Monitor 19 ＂ 1280 ＊ 1024 Hand Switch equipped (DR used for DR servicing) Mouse



1 1 1



SWITCH, Emergency OFF 9.



M07-00136S---



YES



switch,



Diameter



30mm,



1



Red, Release by twist 10.



801-DR51-00188-01



Operator console control



YES



board (service spare part) UPS Power supply 电 源



11.



801-DR51-00105-00



YES



500W



/



750VA



(service spare part)



- 62 -



230V



1 1 (Optional)



ELECTRICAL PARTS



3.4.2 System Control Cabinet



7-1



7-2



8-1



8-2



8-3



9



10



7 11 6 12 5



13



4 14 3



2



15 1



- 63 -



ELECTRICAL PARTS



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



1



801-DR51-00107-00



YES



2



801-DR51-00106-00



YES



Description



Qty



Filter EMI three phases 520VAC max 20A Transformer



3KVA



3PHASE



380V/220V(service spare part)



1 1



Power 220VAC Input 24V 3A + 3



801-DR51-00104-00



YES



Output 5.15V 3A (service spare



1



part) 4



M90-100126---



YES



5



M39-000426---



YES



6



DR70-30-82515



YES



M07-00138R--



YES



M07-00139R



YES



7



DR70-30-82515



NO



7-1



M07-00135S---



YES



7-2



M07-00094S---



YES



Contactor – universal 7.5kW 3 poles TERMINAL



801-DR70-00100-00



YES



and



suspension type (fuse available) Relay DPDT 24VDC DIP8 with LED light Relay DPDT 24V DIP8 Fixed Clip Relay DPDT 24V Dip8 Fixed Socket Control box assembly



switch (black) SWITCH Rocker switchDPDT Secondary switch rotation



1 1 1 1 1



SWITCH Self-locked selection



Handpiece 8-1



speration



1



1 5



stepping



motor driver assembly(service



1



spare part) Telescopic 8-2



801-DR70-00099-00



YES



column



stepping



motor driver assembly (service



1



spare part) 8-3



801-DR70-00101-00



YES



9



801-DR51-00118-00



YES



10



DR70-30-82174



NO



10-1



024-000004-00



YES



SID



stepping



motor



driver



assembly (service spare part) Standby power supply board (PCBA) (service spare part) IPC assembly (DR70) FAN



12V



1 1 1



11CFM



26dB



50*50*10mm 240mm wire



2



IPC board Intel Celeron M 600 10-2



801-DR51-00206-00



YES



with



memory



bank



(service



1



spare part) 10-3



801-DR51-00208-00



YES



10-4



801-DR70-00143-00



YES



IPC



power



supply soleplate



(PCBA) (service spare part) 24V ON/OFF power cabinet



- 64 -



1 1



ELECTRICAL PARTS



Double-port 10-5



801-DR51-00207-00



YES



isolation



CAN



interface module (service spare



1



part) 10-6



801-DR51-00227-00



YES



10-7



M07-00134S---



YES



11.



801-DR51-00166-00



YES



12.



801-DR70-00098-00



YES



13.



801-DR51-00161-00



YES



14.



801-DR51-00105-00



YES



15.



DR70-30-82154



NO



15-1



801-DR51-00117-00



YES



15-2



801-DR51-00160-00



YES



Startup interface board (service spare part) Pressing startup switch White Signal switching board (service spare part) Device interface board (service spare part) Device drive board (service spare part) UPS Power 500W / 750VA 230V (service spare part) 24V ON/OFF power cabinet 24V



power



supply



power



1 1 1 1 1 1



board



(PCBA) (service spare part) 24V



1



2



compartment



soleplate (PCBA) (service spare



1



part) FAN 15-3



BA33-20-55752



YES



12Vdc



37CFM



80*80*25mm



30dB



Customized



2



cable, two in one



3.4.3 Generator SN.



Code of Material



FRU



115-006654-00



NO



1.



801-DR51-00239-00



YES



2.



801-DR51-00240-00



YES



3.



801-DR51-00241-00



YES



4.



801-DR51-00242-00



YES



5.



801-DR51-00244-00



YES



6.



801-DR51-00245-00



YES



7.



801-DR51-00246-00



YES



8.



801-DR51-00247-00



YES



/



Description SEDECAL



Generator



Qty service



spare parts pack HT control board (service spare part) Filament drive board (service spare part) Interface board (service spare part) ATP board (service spare part) LV-DRAC board (service spare part) DRAC interface board (service spare part) IPM drive board (service spare part) Charged/discharged - 65 -



PCB



/ 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2



ELECTRICAL PARTS



(service spare part) 9.



801-DR51-00248-00



YES



10.



801-DR51-00249-00



YES



11.



801-DR51-00252-00



YES



12.



801-DR51-00251-00



YES



13.



801-DR51-00250-00



YES



14.



801-DR70-00176-00



YES



15.



801-DR70-00177-00



YES



16.



801-DR70-00178-00



YES



17.



801-DR70-00179-00



YES



18.



801-DR70-00180-00



YES



19.



801-DR70-00181-00



YES



20.



801-DR70-00182-00



YES



21.



801-DR70-00183-00



YES



22.



801-DR70-00184-00



YES



23.



051-000239-00



YES



24.



002-000050-00



YES



25.



010-000029-00



YES



26.



010-000030-00



YES



27.



010-000031-00



YES



28.



010-000032-00



YES



29.



010-000033-00



YES



30.



010-000034-00



YES



Delay ON/OFF



PCB



(service



spare part) AEC control PCB (service spare part) Tank (service spare part) LV-DRAC



transformer



(service



480/400-230VAC



(service spare part) PCB, Clamping (A3) (service spare part) Rectifier SKKD 40F10 (service spare part) Inverter-3 Ph,400-480 V,Hi kW (service spare part) IGBT (service spare part) Low Voltage Power Supply (ser vice spare part) Filter Line (service spare part) PCB, Locks (service spare par t) PCB, AEC Adaptation (service spare part) Input Filter for Three Phases (s ervice spare part) Input Rectifier Board for 3 Pha se (used for DR servicing) Rectifier Bridge FAGOR/10Amp (used for DR servicing) Fuse 1.5A/250V, SB(used for D R servicing) Fuse 3A/250V, SB(used for DR servicing) Fuse 0.4A/250V, SB(used for D R servicing) Fuse 50A/600V, SB(used for D R servicing) Fuse 10A/250V T (used for DR servicing) Fuse 0.5A/250 V (used for DR servicing)



- 66 -



1 1



spare part) Transformer



1



1 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 2 2 2



ELECTRICAL PARTS



31.



010-000035-00



YES



32.



001-000144-00



YES



33.



010-000028-00



YES



34.



005-000053-00



YES



35.



001-000146-00



YES



36.



005-000054-00



YES



37.



005-000057-00



YES



38.



005-000055-00



YES



39.



005-000056-00



YES



40.



004-000064-00



YES



41.



011-000015-00



YES



42.



009-000529-00



YES



43.



010-000025-00



YES



44.



010-000026-00



YES



45.



001-000143-00



YES



46.



009-000414-00



YES



Fuse 15A/600 V (used for DR servicing) U5 EPROM (used for DR servi cing) ON/OFF Relay 4PDT/110V(use d for DR servicing) Capacitor ELE2400 Micro/50V(u sed for DR servicing) U24 EPROM(used for DR servi cing) Capacitor 10mF,1000VDC(used for DR servicing) Capacitor Elec.3700mF/450VDC (used for DR servicing) Capacitor 2 micro/1000V(used f or DR servicing) Contactor(3pHs/24V/50Amp)(use dfor DR servicing) Resistor 20ohms/100w/10% (us edfor DR servicing) Green light lamp (used for DR servicing) DC-BUS cable (specially used f or DR products) Contactor 24V/15A (specially us ed for DR servicing) Aux Contactor (used for DR se rvicing) U17 EPROM DRAC (used for DR servicing) DRAC Cable Kit (used for DR servicing)



2 1 1 2 1 1 4 3 2 1 1 1 3 1 1 1



3.5 Block Diagram of Boards 3.5.1 Block Diagram of Motion Control Board The motion control board mainly acquires the state of all equipment in the system, controls normal operation of the equipment, processes and reports faults. The board communicates with the control console host through the network interface, receives commands of the host, reports the equipment’s control status, achieves man-machine interaction through the touch screen on the tube-collimator assembly, and monitors operation of the equipment through communication with the control module (man-machine interface board and signal acquisition board) of other system component via the CAN port. - 67 -



Network



USB device or interface



Touch screen interface



Network transformer



VGA display port



USB Controller



CAN BUS



VDDCPU



- 68 -



24V logic power board



Operator console control board



Convert 24V VCC 24V from 24V Protective to 3.3V circuit and 5V 5V to 24V 3.3V Convert from 24V VDD VDD to 5V 3.3V to 5VSB 1.8V Standby circuit, remote start/sto p circuit



3.3V to 1.2V



Power startup & power convert module



FPGA Module VDD



Detector and generator interface



Motor and converter interface



VDDQ



Detector Generator



Motor Converter



Ion chamber and fan status monitor interface



VDDC



Configuring FLASH



Displaying DDR SDRAM



Equipment interface isolation module Motion control board



Detector



ELECTRICAL PARTS



CAN controller



Communication module



Touch screen



The block diagram is shown as below:



Motion Control CPU Board



ELECTRICAL PARTS



3.5.2 Block Diagram of Device Drive Board The device drive board mainly consists of DC motor drive, DC servo motor drive, clutch brake drive and electrical plug drive.The block diagram is shown as below:



DC motor



DC servo motor



Clutch brake



Electrical plug



Overcurrent protection for DC motor



Device drive board 24V



12V



5V



24V power input



Device interface board



3.5.3 Block Diagram of Traveling Carriage Signal Acquisition Board The traveling carriage signal acquisition board mainly consists of limit switch signal interface, photoelectric sensor, potentiometer interface, communication interface, power supply interface and digital tube display interface.Its main functions include data acquisition and transmission of the height, angle and position of tube. The block diagram is shown as below:



- 69 -



ELECTRICAL PARTS



Digial isolation



Signal adjustment



Signal isolation



Signal adjustment



Analog input *8



3.5.4 Block Diagram of Stand Column Signal Acquisition Board The signal acquisition control board of stand column is mainly responsible to acquire the information about the position of stand column and FPD holder, and peripheral devices, and to display SID signal and complete the communication with the motion control board. Main functional modules of the board include FPD position (height and angle) signal acquisition module, power supply module, FPGA module and CAN communication module. The block diagram is shown as below:



- 70 -



ELECTRICAL PARTS



Digital isolation



Signal adjustment



Signal isolation



Signal adjustment



Analog input *2



3.5.5 Block Diagram of Operator Console Control Panel The operator console control panel is divided into signal conversion and power control. The signal conversion part is responsible for converting the signal between peripheral components (generator and exposure handswitch) and the operator console. And the power control part is responsible for power management control of the system under the routine and emergency situation. The block diagram is shown as below:



- 71 -



ELECTRICAL PARTS



Buzzer



power indicator light



Exposure indicator light



Ready indicator light



System startup button



Generator ON button



Emergency OFF switch



Indicator



Operator console control board



PC&IPC



Sedecal generator



System control cabinet



3.5.6 Block Diagram of Man-Machine Interface Board The man-machine interface board primarily achieves human-machine interaction function and the control of collimator.Main functional modules of the board include: FPGA module, CAN Communication module, handle perception signals, infrared receiver board interface, keyboard and power module, etc. The block diagram is shown as below:



- 72 -



ELECTRICAL PARTS



Collimator



IR receiver board



Keyboard



Emergency OFF switch signal



Level converter FPGA module



CAN isolation module



Handle perception signal



+3.3V JTAG



+5V



CAN isolation module



+12V



Man-machine interface board



Power supply



3.5.7 Block Diagram of Detector Button Board The detector button board mainly acquires signals of the detector buttons and provides multi-group stem node signals to the stand column signal acquisition board.



Signal acquisition board



Equipment interface board



The circuit structure is shown in the diagram as below:



- 73 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



CHAPTER 4 LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS 4.1 Host Computer Assembly (DR70-30-101743)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-30-101716



NO



Stand column assembly



1



2.



DR70-30-101726



NO



FPD and support arm assembly



1



3.



030-000007-00



NO



4.



M04-000202---



NO



Flat wahser GB/T97.1-2002 8



4



5.



M04-021031---



NO



Spring washer



4



6.



DR70-30-101651



NO



Rail assembly



1



7.



DR70-30-101671



NO



Traveling carriage assembly



1



8.



801-DR70-00001-00



YES



9.



M04-004504---



NO



Coarse full thread hexagon-headed bolt M8x25



GB93 8



Telescopic column assembly (service spare part) Spring washer GB93 -87



- 75 -



6



4



1 12



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



10.



M04-021003---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 6



12



11.



M04-051116---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw



12



12.



DR70-30-101755



NO



Handpiece assembly



1



13.



M04-051062---



NO



14.



M04-021007---



NO



Hexagon



socket



cap



head



M5x16 Spring washer GB93 -87



- 76 -



5



screw



6 6



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.2 Stand Column Assembly (DR70-30-101716)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



1.



801-DR70-00005-00



YES



2.



DR70-20-82346



NO



3.



801-DR70-00008-00



YES



4.



DR70-20-82201-51



NO



Stand column



1



5.



DR70-20-82214-51



NO



Front cover of stand column



1



6.



801-DR70-00014-00



YES



7.



M04-011011---



NO



Stainless steel nut



2



8.



DR70-20-82205



NO



L-shaped back fixing plate



1



9.



M04-051066---



NO



SID



monitor



Qty assembly



(service



spare part) Cable protector plate of stand column Counterpoise



assembly



(service



spare part)



Rear shell of bottom cover of stand column



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x25



- 77 -



1 3 1



1



2



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



10.



DR70-30-101722



NO



11.



031-000005-00



YES



Motion signal acquisition box Chain, Roller chain RS25,



1 Single



row, 299 segments, Pitch 6.35mm,



2



Two chain clasps 12.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 5



25



13.



0000-10-10912



NO



Foot switch connector



1



14.



DR70-20-82234



NO



Foot switch anchor block



1



15.



DR70-20-82237



NO



Lower cover of stand column



1



16.



DR70-20-82217



NO



Front cover supporting screws



2



17.



M04-051140---



NO



18.



DR70-20-82241



NO



19.



DR70-20-82236



YES



20.



M04-051114---



NO



21.



M04-021011---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 5



25



22.



M04-000501---



NO



Hexagon nut M5



2



23.



DR70-20-82233



NO



Coupling shaft of pulley and chain



1



24.



DR70-20-82250



YES



Stainless steel wire of stand column



4



25.



M04-000202---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 8



6



26.



M04-051161---



NO



27.



M04-021031---



NO



Spring washer GB93 8



4



28.



DR70-20-82204



NO



I-shaped back fixing plate



1



29.



801-DR70-00002-00



YES



30.



M90-000166---



YES



Grounding cable clamp FN011



2



31.



DR70-30-101718



NO



Upper cover assembly



1



32.



M90-000032---



NO



Closed cable protector tube



1



33.



M04-051134---



NO



34.



DR70-20-82218



NO



Travel switch supporting plate



2



35.



M04-021012---



NO



Spring washer GB93 2



2



36.



M04-000102---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 2



2



37.



801-DR70-00006-00



YES



Pan



head



combination



screws



M3X8 Bottom cover upper presser slice of stand column Pulley mounting plate Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x12



Hexagon socket cap head screw M8x25



Top cover assembly (service spare part)



Pan head combination screws M4 X8



Pulley assembly (service spare part) - 78 -



9 1 1 12



4



1



16



1



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



38.



801-DR70-00013-00



YES



39.



M04-051210---



NO



40.



M07-00143S---



YES



41.



M04-051020---



NO



42.



DR70-30-101704



NO



43.



M04-051062---



NO



44.



801-DR70-00004-00



YES



SID



4.2.1



Monitor



Front shell of bottom cover of stand column (service spare part) Hexagon socket countersunk head screws M6X16 Subminiature microswitch DIP



M2X10 Anticollision washer assembly



4 2



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x16 Top drive assembly (service spare part)



(service



6 2



Cross recessed pan head screw



Assembly



1



spare



9 1



part



801-DR70-00005-00)



9



1 8



7 2 6



5



SN.



4



3



Code of Material



FRU



Description



1.



DR70-20-82212-51



NO



Front shell of SID monitor



1



2.



DR70-20-82064



NO



Label of LED screen



1



3.



801-DR51-00162-00



YES



SID display panel (service spare part)



1



4.



M04-051140---



NO



Cross



recessed



pan



Qty



head



combination screw GB818-85 M3X8 - 79 -



8



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



5.



DR70-20-82213



NO



Rear shell of SID monitor



6.



M04-021005---



NO



Spring washer GB93 -87



7.



M04-051113---



NO



8.



DR70-20-82211



NO



SID monitor supporting hinge



1



9.



DR70-20-82210



NO



SID monitor support arm



1



4.2.2 Counterpoise



1 4



1



Hexagon socket cap head screw



1



GB70.1 M4x25



Pulley Assembly (service spare part



801-DR70-00047-00)



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



9 10



18



11



17



12



16



13



15



14



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82225



NO



Counterpoise fixer



1



2.



DR70-20-82223



NO



Counterpoise hinge



1



3.



DR70-20-82249



NO



Center pin of counterpoise



1



4.



M04-021035---



NO



Circlips for shaft – Type A 10



1



5.



M04-000202---



NO



Flat washer GB70.1 8



2



6.



M04-051161---



NO



Hexagon socket screw M8x25



2



7.



M04-021031---



NO



Spring washer



2



8.



M04-051102---



NO



GB93 8



Hexagon socket set screws with cone point M3X5



- 80 -



2



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



9.



DR70-20-82232



NO



Bushing fixed with wire rope



2



10.



032-000013-00



NO



Circlips for shaft 25



2



11.



M04-051134---



NO



Combination screw M4X8



18



12.



801-DR70-00047-00



YES



13.



DR70-20-82226



NO



Counterpoise fixed plate



1



14.



DR70-20-82221



NO



Counterpoise box



1



15.



M04-051114---



NO



16.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer



17.



M04-021011---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 5



2



18.



DR70-20-82222



NO



Counterpoise lever



1



4.2.3 Counterpoise



Counterpoise pulley assembly (service spare part)



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x12 GB93 5



8



2 2



Pulley Assembly (service spare part



801-DR70-00047-00)



2



1



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82224



NO



Counterpoise pulley mounting rack



1



2.



DR70-20-82246



NO



Polyurethane roller



1



- 81 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.2.4 Motion Signal Acquisition Box (DR70-30-101722)



4



3



2



1 6



5



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



1.



M04-051207---



NO



2.



801-DR70-00144-00



NO



3.



M04-051140---



NO



4.



DR70-20-82244



NO



5.



DR70-20-82243



NO



6.



M07-00136S---



NO



Description



Qty



Hexagon socket countersunk head screws GB70.3 M3X8 Signal acquisition board of stand column (service spare part) Cross recessed pan head combination screws M3X8 Rear



cover



of



motion



signal



of



motion



signal



acquisition box Front



cover



acquisition box Emergency OFF switch (ABB)



- 82 -



4 1 8 1 1 1



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.2.5 Top



Cover



Assembly



(service



spare



part



801-DR70-00002-00) 2



1



4



3



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



1.



801-DR70-00041-00



YES



2.



M04-003905---



NO



3.



801-DR70-00040-00



YES



4.



DR30-20-83169



YES



Description LED indicator light plate of stand column (service spare part) Self-tapping screw without sharp point PT3X6 Top cover of stand column (service spare part) Indicator light of stand column



4.2.6 Upper Cover Plate Assembly (DR70-30-101718) 5



4



3



2



1



- 83 -



Qty 1 2 1 1



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82203



NO



Upper cover of stand column



1



2.



DR70-30-101725



NO



Rope wheel assembly



2



3.



M04-051062---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x16



8



4.



M04-021011---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 5



8



5.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 5



8



4.2.7 Rope Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101725) 1 2 7



3



6



4



5



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82206



NO



Rope wheel supporting block



2



2.



DR70-20-82247



NO



Axle bushing of rope wheel



2



3.



DR70-20-82208



NO



Axle of rope wheel



1



4.



DR70-20-82209



NO



Rope wheel



1



5.



032-000023-00



NO



Bearing 6201ZZ



1



6.



M04-021041---



NO



Circlips for shaft GB894.1 12



1



7.



032-000012-00



NO



Circlips



for



hole



GB/T893.1-1986 32



- 84 -



–



Type



A



1



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.2.8 Pulley Assembly (service spare part 801-DR70-00006-00 )



8



9



10



7



6



11



5



12



4



3



2



1



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



1.



DR70-30-101723



NO



Wire rope fixed assembly



2



2.



030-000003-00



NO



Hexagon nut M12



10



3.



M04-051134---



NO



4.



DR70-30-101703



NO



Side wheel assembly



4



5.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer



8



6.



M04-051114---



NO



7.



M04-021051---



NO



Flat washer GB97 12



10



8.



DR70-30-101702



NO



Eccentric shaft assembly



8



9.



DR70-20-82227



NO



Pulley body



1



10.



DR70-20-82219



NO



Travel switch trigger plate



2



11.



M04-021011---



NO



Flat washer- Level A GB97.1 5



8



12.



M04-021016---



NO



Spring washer GB93 12



10



Pan head combination screws M4 X8



GB93 5



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x12



- 85 -



Qty



4



8



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.2.9 Wire Rope Fixed Assembly (DR70-30-101723) 4



3



2



1



技技技技 SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82231



NO



Wire rope coupling shaft



1



2.



DR70-20-82232



NO



Bushing fixed with wire rope



1



3.



032-000013-00



NO



Circlips for shaft 25



1



4.



M04-051102---



NO



Hexagon socket set screws with cone point M3X5



4.2.10 Side Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101703) 1



2



3



- 86 -



4



5



1



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82235



NO



Side wheel holder



1



2.



032-000018-00



NO



Rolling bearing 6202ZZ



1



3.



DR70-20-82230



NO



Pulley bearing bush



1



4.



M04-021019---



NO



Circlips for shaft – Type A 15



1



5.



032-000011-00



NO



Circlips for hole – Type A 35



1



4.2.11 Eccentric Shaft Assembly (DR70-30-101702) 2



3



1



4



5



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82229



NO



Eccentric shaft



1



2.



032-000018-00



NO



Rolling bearing 6202ZZ



1



3.



M04-021019---



NO



Circlips for shaft – Type A 15



1



4.



032-000011-00



NO



Circlips for hole – Type A 35



1



5.



DR70-20-82230



NO



Pulley bearing bush



1



- 87 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.2.12 Front Shell Assembly of Bottom Cover (service spare part 801-DR70-00013-00) 1



2



4



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



1.



DR70-20-82240



NO



2.



DR70-20-82238



NO



3.



M04-051140---



NO



4.



DR70-20-82242



NO



3



Description Bottom cover mounting slice of stand column Front shell of bottom cover of stand column Cross recessed pan head combination screws M3X8 Bottom cover lower presser slice of stand column



Qty 2 1 6 1



4.2.13 ANTICOLLISION WASHER ASSEMBLY (DR70-30-101704)



2



1



- 88 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82216



NO



Anticollision washer supporting block



1



2.



DR70-20-82215



NO



Anticollision washer



1



4.2.14 Top



Drive



Assembly



801-DR70-00004-00)



- 89 -



(service



spare



part



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82284



NO



Small drive gear of stand column



1



2.



DR70-20-82207



NO



Key 5X5X15



3



3.



DR70-20-82279



NO



Upper drive shaft of stand column



1



4.



M04-051062---



NO



5.



M04-021011---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 5



9



6.



DR70-20-82248



NO



Connector of top cover



1



7.



DR70-20-82277



NO



Middle drive board of stand column



1



8.



032-000018-00



NO



Bearing 6202ZZ



1



9.



032-000011-00



NO



Circlips for hole 35



1



10.



032-000024-00



NO



Clutch stator



1



11.



M04-051028---



NO



12.



/



NO



13.



DR70-20-82347



NO



14.



M04-051207---



NO



15.



/



NO



16.



M04-051026---



NO



17.



M04-000104---



NO



Spring washer



18.



M04-000802---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 3



4



19.



DR70-20-82285



NO



Motor fixed plate of stand column



1



20.



/



NO



21.



DR70-21-101613



YES



DC motor BCI-42.40-SA40



1



22.



M04-021019---



NO



Circlips for shaft GB894.1 15



5



23.



032-000005-00



NO



Bearing 6902ZZ



5



24.



M04-051114---



NO



25.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer



26.



DR70-20-82276



NO



Drive base board of stand column



1



27.



DR70-20-82281



NO



Driven shaft



1



28.



DR70-20-82280



NO



Lower drive shaft of stand column



1



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x16



Hexagon socket cap head screw M4x10 Clutch rotor Shaft-end



presser



plate



of



Hexagon socket countersunk head screws M3X8 Clutch armture



M3x10



4X4X16



1 2 1



Hexagon socket cap head screw



GB93 3



(configured



4 4



with



motor )



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x12



- 90 -



4 1



decelerator



Key



9



GB93 5



1



2 11



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



29.



DR70-20-82408



NO



Key 5X5X22



30.



M04-051102---



NO



31.



DR70-20-82282



NO



Sprocket wheel of stand column



2



32.



DR70-20-82283



NO



Big drive gear of stand column



1



33.



004-000004-00



YES



10-loop potentiometer (Sakae)



1



34.



DR70-20-82278



NO



Left drive board of stand column



1



35.



DR70-20-82316



NO



Gear 3 of potentiometer



1



36.



DR70-20-82386



NO



Gear 1 of potentiometer



1



Hexagon socket set screws with cone point M3X5



- 91 -



1 14



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.3 FPD and Support Arm Assembly (DR70-30-101726)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-30-101727



NO



Support arm assembly



1



2.



DR70-30-101728



NO



Shaft assembly



1



3.



DR70-30-101742



NO



FPD connection assembly



1



4.



M04-051209---



NO



5.



801-DR70-00015-00



YES



6.



M04-051184---



NO



7.



M04-004504---



NO



Spring washer



8.



DR70-30-101730



NO



FPD assembly



801-DR70-00016-00



YES



801-DR51-00076-00



YES



1.8m grid assembly (service spare part)



1



10.



DR70-20-82265



YES



Lower cover of support arm



1



11.



DR70-20-82266



YES



Side cover of support arm



1



12.



M04-051207---



NO



9.



Hexagon socket countersunk



head



screws M6X12 Motor assembly (service spare part) Hexagon



socket



cap



head



screw



M6X12 6



- 92 -



3



1



spare part)



screws M3X8



1



3



1m grid assembly (DR70) (service



Hexagon socket countersunk



8



head



1



10



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.3.1 Support Arm Assembly (DR70-30-101727)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82257



NO



FPD support arm



1



2.



DR70-30-101731



NO



Rotation control assembly - a



1



3.



DR70-30-101732



NO



Rotation control assembly - b



1



4.



801-DR70-00030-00



YES



5.



DR70-30-101734



NO



6.



DR70-20-82263



NO



Cable protector tube fixing plate



1



7.



DR70-20-82258



NO



Bearing seat of support arm



2



8.



DR70-20-82540



NO



Cable fixed slice 1



1



9.



M04-051028---



NO



10.



M04-021005---



NO



Spring washer



11.



M04-004702---



NO



Flat washer 4



12.



M04-051206---



NO



13.



M04-051134---



NO



Combination screw M4X8



2



14.



M04-000501



NO



Hexagon nut M5



1



15.



M04-021007



NO



Spring washer



16.



M04-021011



NO



Flat washer 5



1



17.



M90-000166---



NO



Metal wire-clamp



1



Potentiometer assembly for FPD rotation Switch assembly for FPD vertical movement (up and down)



Hexagon socket cap head screw GB70-85 M4X10



Hexagon



4



1



18 18 8



socket



countersunk



head screws M4X8



- 93 -



1



5



4



1



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.3.2 Rotation Control Assembly – a (DR70-30-101731)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82259



NO



Travel switch supporting plate 1



1



2.



M07-00143S---



NO



Travel switch



1



3.



M04-051020---



NO



Cross recessed pan head screw M2X10



2



4.



M04-000102---



NO



Flat washer 2



2



5.



M04-021012---



NO



Spring washer



2



2



4.3.3 Rotation Control Assembly – b (DR70-30-101732)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82287



NO



Travel switch supporting plate 2



1



2.



M07-00143S---



YES



Travel switch



1



3.



M04-051020---



NO



Cross recessed pan head screw M2X10



2



4.



M04-000102---



NO



Flat washer 2



2



5.



M04-021012---



NO



Spring washer



- 94 -



2



2



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.3.4 Potentiometer Assembly (DR70-30-101733)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82261



NO



Potentiometer holder



1



2.



M90-100130---



YES



Potentiometer



1



3.



DR70-20-82387



NO



Counter gear 2



1



4.



M04-051077---



NO



4.3.5 Switch



Assembly



Hexagon socket set screws with cup point M3X3



for



FPD



Vertical



1



Movement



(DR70-30-101734)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82260



NO



Photoelectric switch holder



1



2.



M90-100136---



NO



Photoelectric switch EX-14A



1



3.



M04-051020---



NO



Cross recessed pan head screw M2X10



2



- 95 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.3.6 Shaft Assembly (DR70-30-101728)



SN. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



DR70-20-82268



NO



Long axle of FPD



1



DR70-20-82270



NO



Cam



1



DR70-20-82262



NO



Large potentiometer gear



1



032-000005-00



NO



Bearing 6902ZZ



1



M04-021019---



NO



Circlips for shaft 15



2



M04-051102---



NO



Set screw M3X5



1



M04-051077---



NO



Set screw M3X3



1



DR70-20-82544



NO



Key 4X4X5



2



DR70-20-82269



NO



Flange of support arm



2



M04-051078---



NO



Hexagon socket set screws with cup point



2



M4X8



4.3.7 FPD Connection Assembly (DR70-30-101742)



- 96 -



Qty



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82271



NO



FPD supporting plate



1



2.



DR70-20-82546



NO



Hand rest bush



2



3.



M04-051078---



NO



Set screw M4X8



2



4.3.8 Motor Assembly (service spare part 801-DR70-00015-00)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82267



NO



Pusher-bar motor base



1



2.



DR70-21-101612



NO



FPD rotation motor and connection cable



1



3.



DR70-20-82272



NO



Bolt



2



4.



M04-021035---



NO



Circlips for shaft 10



2



- 97 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.3.9 FPD Assembly (DR70-30-101730)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



801-DR70-00174-00



NO



2.



DR70-30-101740



YES



3.



801-DR51-00074-00



YES



4.



801-DR70-00055-00



YES



5.



801-DR51-00148-00



NO



6.



DR70-30-101737



NO



Detector assembly



1



7.



DR70-30-101736



YES



Key PCBA (right)



1



8.



DR70-20-82264



NO



Cable fixed slice 4



1



9.



DR70-20-82251



YES



Handle of detector



2



10.



M04-051134---



NO



Combination screws M4X8



15



11.



DR70-20-82542



NO



Cable fixed slice 3



2



12.



DR70-20-82545



NO



Rear shell fixed block



1



13.



DR70-20-82254-52



YES



Rear shell of FPD



1



Front shell assembly of FPD (service spare part) Table position switch assembly



1



Grid holder assembly (service spare part) Converter assembly (service spare part) AEC



ionization



chamber



chamber) (service spare part)



- 98 -



1



(3-field



1 1 1



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



14.



DR70-20-82541



NO



Cable fixed plate 2



15.



M04-051061---



NO



16.



DR70-30-101738



YES



Emergency OFF switch assembly



1



17.



DR70-30-101735



YES



Key PCBA (left)



1



18.



DR70-20-82252-51



YES



Silicone keypad



2



19.



M04-051028---



NO



20.



DR70-20-82274



NO



Hexagon



socket



1 cap



head



screw



M5x10



Hexagon



socket



cap



head



screw



M4x10 Base plate of FPD



5



5 1



4.3.10 Left Key PCBA (DR70-30-101735)



3



SN.



2



1



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82273



NO



PCB supporting plate of FPD



1



2.



801-DR51-00163-00



NO



Keyboard of FPD (service spare part)



1



3.



M04-051140---



NO



Combination M3X8



6



- 99 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.3.11 Right Key PCBA (DR70-30-101736) 3



SN.



2



1



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



DR70-20-82273



NO



PCB supporting plate of FPD



1



2.



801-DR51-00163-00



NO



Keyboard of FPD (service spare part)



1



3.



M04-051140---



NO



Combination M3X8



6



1.



.



4.3.12 Emergency OFF Switch Assembly (DR70-30-101738) 2



1



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82288



NO



Emergency OFF switch holder



1



2.



M07-00136S---



NO



Emergency OFF switch



1



- 100 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.3.13 Grid



Holder



Assembly



(service



spare



part



801-DR51-00074-00)



3



4



5



6



10



13



11 1 12 14



8



9



7



2



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR51-20-82701



NO



Grid holder



1



2.



DR51-20-82688



NO



Right slideway



1



3.



DR51-20-82685



NO



Left slideway



1



4.



DR51-20-82686



NO



Popup assembly



1



5.



DR51-20-82687



NO



Travel switch fixed plate -2



2



6.



M07-00143S---



NO



Travel switch



3



7.



DR51-20-82692



NO



Travel switch fixed plate -1



1



8.



DR51-20-82699



NO



Sealed plate



1



9.



DR51-20-82691



NO



Shrapnel - 2



1



10.



M04-051020---



NO



Cross recessed pan head screw M2X10



6



11.



M04-004702



NO



Flat washer 4



11



12.



M04-002905



NO



Cross recessed pan head screw M4X16



11



13.



M04-006412



NO



Cross recessed pan head screw M4X8



6



14.



M04-006512



NO



Cross recessed pan head screw M4X6



5



- 101 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.3.14 Table Position Switch Assembly (DR70-30-101740)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82256



NO



Table position switch supporting plate



1



2.



024-000007-00



NO



Fiber sensor



1



4.3.15 Converter



Assembly



(service



spare



part



801-DR70-00055-00)



1 4



2 3



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82286



NO



Converter supporting plate 1



1



2.



024-000008-00



NO



Fiber sensor driver



1



3.



DR70-20-82289



NO



Converter supporting plate 2



1



4.



M04-051140---



NO



Combination screw M3X8



6



- 102 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.3.16 Front Shell Assembly of FPD (DR70-30-101741)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



801-DR70-00174-00



YES



2.



DR70-20-82543



NO



Front shell enhanced plate



1



3.



DR70-20-82290



NO



Cushion 1



4



4.



DR70-20-82291



NO



Cushion 2



4



5.



DR51-20-82670-51



NO



Carbon fiber panel



1



6.



M04-051207---



NO



Front shell assembly of FPD (service spare part)



Hexagon socket countersunk screws M3X8



- 103 -



head



1



5



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.4 Rail Assembly (DR70-30-101651)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-30-101652



YES



Stationary rail assembly



1



2.



M04-051205---



NO



3.



DR70-30-101656



NO



Wire carrier and slideway assembly



1



4.



DR70-30-101657



NO



Hose mounting assembly



1



5.



DR70-30-101655



NO



6.



M04-051134---



NO



Pan head combination screws M4 X8



9



7.



6200-10-09762



NO



Grounding cable clamp



1



8.



M04-051028---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M4X10



4



9.



M04-021005---



NO



Spring washer GB93 4



4



10.



M04-004702---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 4



4



11.



DR70-20-82296



NO



Outer cover of rail drive system



1



12.



M04-051161---



NO



13.



M04-000202---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M8X50 GB70.1



Hose mounting assembly of movable bridge



Hexagon socket cap head screw M8X25 GB70.1 Flat washer GB97.1 8



- 104 -



1



1



4 4



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



14.



M04-021031---



NO



Spring washer GB93 8



4



15.



DR70-30-101654



YES



Drive assembly of movable bridge



1



16.



DR70-30-101653



NO



Movable bridge assembly



1



4.4.1 Stationary Rail Assembly (DR70-30-101652)



- 105 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82308-53



NO



Left stationary rail



1



2.



031-000003-00



YES



L-shaped open synchronous belt



1



3.



DR70-20-82323



NO



Synchronous belt clamped block 3



1



4.



DR70-20-82324



NO



Synchronous belt tension fixing block



1



5.



M04-021031---



NO



Spring washer



1



6.



M04-051205---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M8x50



1



7.



DR70-20-82322



NO



Synchronous belt clamped block 4



1



8.



030-000002-00



NO



Nut M10



8



9.



030-000008-00



NO



Hexagon head bolt M10x50



8



10.



DR70-20-82337



NO



Stationary rail mounting slider



8



11.



M04-051198---



NO



hexagon socket set screws M5x12



8



12.



030-000005-00



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 10



8



13.



030-000004-00



NO



Spring washer GB93 10



8



14.



DR70-20-82308-54



NO



Right stationary rail



1



15.



DR70-20-82314



NO



Flannelette for stationary rail



2



16.



DR70-20-82215



NO



Anticollision washer



4



17.



M04-004504---



NO



Spring washer GB/T93-1987 6



4



18.



M04-004702---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 4



18



19.



M04-021005---



NO



Spring washer GB93 4



26



20.



M04-051113---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M4x25



18



21.



M04-021011---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 5



8



22.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 5



8



Hexagon 23.



M04-051114---



NO



GB93 8



socket



cap



head



screw



GB/T70.1-2000 M5X12, with rust-proof



8



nickel plating Hexagon



socket



countersunk



head



24.



M04-051206---



NO



25.



DR70-20-82318



NO



Travel switch trigger slider



2



26.



DR70-20-82310



NO



Rail end block



8



27.



DR70-20-82319



NO



Stationary rail end cover



4



28.



M04-051053---



NO



screws GB70.3



Cross



recessed



screws M4X12



- 106 -



M4X8



countersunk



head



4



4



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



29.



DR70-20-82320



NO



Synchronous belt clamped block 1



1



30.



DR70-20-82321



NO



Synchronous belt clamped block 2



1



31.



M04-051065---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M4x16



8



4.4.2 Wire Carrier and Slideway Assembly (DR70-30-101656)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



1.



M04-051206---



NO



2.



DR70-20-82336



NO



Wire carrier slideway end cover



2



3.



DR70-30-101661



NO



Wire carrier assembly



1



4.



M04-051066---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x25



2



5.



M04-021011---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 5



4



6.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 5



2



7.



M04-000501---



NO



Stainless steel nut GB6170 M5



2



8.



DR70-20-82329



NO



Wire carrier slideway



1



Hexagon



socket



Qty countersunk



head



screws M4X8



- 107 -



8



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.4.3 Hose Mounting Assembly (DR70-30-101657)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82325



NO



Steel wire for hose mounting



1



2.



DR70-20-82327



NO



Hose mounting board



1



3.



M04-051061---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x10



3



4.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 5



5



5.



M04-051061---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 5



5



6.



DR70-20-82326



NO



Hose mounting holder



1



7.



M04-000501---



NO



Stainless steel nut GB6170 M5



4



8.



M04-051134---



NO



Pan head combination screws M4 X8



4



9.



DR70-20-82328



NO



Shell of hose mounting seat



1



10.



M04-051206---



NO



Hexagon



socket



screws M4X8



- 108 -



countersunk



head



4



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.4.4 Hose



Mounting



Assembly



of



Movable



Bridge



(DR70-30-101655)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82297



NO



Hose mounting board of movable bridge



1



2.



DR70-20-82325



NO



Steel wire for hose mounting



1



3.



M04-000501---



NO



Stainless steel nut GB6170 M5



4



4.



M04-021011---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 5



2



5.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 5



2



- 109 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.4.5 Drive Assembly of Movable Bridge (DR70-30-101654)



- 110 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82344



NO



Synchronous belt roller



1



2.



DR70-20-82300



NO



Drive system baseplate



1



3.



M04-004504---



NO



Spring washer GB93 6



6



4.



M04-051116---



NO



Hexagon socket screw M6x16



6



5.



M04-021003---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 6



6



6.



DR70-20-82343



NO



Synchronous belt pulley 5



1



7.



DR70-20-82345



NO



Abutment sleeve



1



8.



DR70-20-82350



NO



Bearing support 1



1



9.



M04-021056---



NO



Circlips for hole GB893.1 28



1



10.



DR70-20-82371



NO



Locknut



1



11.



DR70-20-82316



NO



Gear 3 of potentiometer



1



12.



M04-051102---



NO



13.



DR70-20-82386



NO



Gear 1 of potentiometer



1



14.



DR70-20-82299



NO



Potentiometer mounting board



1



15.



004-000004-00



YES



10-loop potentiometer 22HP-10(20K)



1



16.



M04-051077---



NO



17.



M04-051028---



NO



Hexagon socket screw M4x10



7



18.



M04-021019---



NO



Circlips for shaft GB894 15



2



19.



DR70-30-101660



NO



Transition wheel assembly



2



20.



DR70-20-82207



NO



Key 5X5X15



2



21.



DR70-20-82349



NO



Bearing support 2



1



22.



032-000005-00



NO



Bearing 6902-ZZ



2



23.



M04-051207---



NO



24.



DR70-20-82347



NO



Shaft-end presser plate of decelerator



1



25.



M04-021005---



NO



Spring washer GB93 4



11



26.



M04-004702---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 4



6



27.



032-000008-00



NO



Electromagnetic clutch (SID clutch)



1



28.



032-000018-00



YES



Bearing 6202-ZZ



1



Hexagon socket set screws with cup point M3X5



Hexagon socket set screws with cup point M3X3



Hexagon



socket



countersunk



head



screws M3X8



- 111 -



2



4



2



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



29.



032-000011-00



YES



Circlips for hole GB893.1 35



1



30.



M04-051062---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x16



4



31.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 5



4



32.



DR70-20-82348



NO



Motor mounting board



1



33.



032-000016-00



NO



34.



M90-000188---



NO



Stepping motor SST59D5300



1



35.



M04-051073---



NO



Hexagon socket screw M4x12



4



Planetary reducer Level I, i ＝ 5, output shaft diameter φ15mm



4.4.6 Movable Bridge Assembly (DR70-30-101653)



- 112 -



1



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



030-000007-00



NO



GB5782 Hexagon bolt M8x25



12



2.



DR70-20-82311



NO



Connector plate mounting slider



4



3.



M04-021011---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 5



8



4.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 5



8



5.



M04-051062---



NO



6.



M04-021031---



NO



Spring washer GB93 8



12



7.



DR70-20-82312



NO



End cover of movable bridge



2



8.



DR70-20-82308-51



NO



Left movable rail



1



9.



DR70-20-82315



NO



Flannelette for movable bridge



2



10.



M04-004504---



NO



Spring washer GB/T93-1987 6



4



11.



030-000009-00



NO



GB6172 Nut M8



12



12.



DR70-20-82215



NO



Anticollision washer



4



13.



M04-021005---



NO



Spring washer GB93 4



16



14.



M04-004702---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 4



16



15.



DR70-20-82310



NO



Rail end block



8



16.



M04-051113---



NO



17.



DR70-30-101659



NO



Connector plate assembly 1



1



18.



DR70-20-82308-52



NO



Right movable rail



1



19.



DR70-20-82309



YES



Photoelectric switch sensing plate



1



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x16



Hexagon socket cap head screw GB70.1 M4x25



Cross 20.



M04-051140---



NO



recessed



combination



screw



pan



8



16



head



GB/T9074.8



2



M3X8, with rust-proof nickel plating 21.



DR70-30-101658



NO



Connector plate assembly 2



- 113 -



1



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.4.7 Wire Carrier Assembly (DR70-30-101661)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-30-101662



NO



2.



M04-004702---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 4



4



3.



M04-021005---



NO



Spring washer GB93 4



4



4.



M04-051028---



NO



Hexagon socket screw M4x10



4



5.



DR70-20-82330



NO



Wire carrier holder



1



6.



DR70-20-82215



NO



Anticollision washer



2



7.



M04-004504---



NO



Spring washer GB/T93-1987 6



2



8.



DR70-30-101664



NO



Roller assembly



3



9.



032-000001-00



NO



Rotatable cable clamp assembly of wire carrier



GB/T894.1-86 shaft 8



- 114 -



Circlips



for



1



3



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.4.8 Rotatable



Cable Clamp



Assembly of



Wire Carrier



(DR70-30-101662)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



032-000004-00



NO



Circlips for hole GB893.1 19



1



2.



M04-120008---



NO



Bearing 6800ZZ



1



3.



DR70-20-82331



NO



Rotatable cable clamp fixed seat



1



4.



DR70-20-82332



NO



Shaft of rotation



1



5.



M04-021035---



NO



Circlips for shaft GB894.1 10



1



6.



M04-004504---



NO



Spring washer GB93 6



1



7.



M04-051116---



NO



8.



DR70-30-101663



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M6x16 Cable clamp assembly



- 115 -



1 1



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.4.9 Roller Assembly (DR70-30-101664)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82421



NO



Limit wheel sleeve



1



2.



032-000020-00



NO



Bearing 638ZZ



1



3.



M04-021056---



NO



Circlips for hole 28



1



4.4.10 Cable Clamp Assembly (DR70-30-101663)



- 116 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82333



NO



Upper half of cable clamp



1



2.



M04-004504---



NO



Spring washer GB93 6



2



3.



M04-051116---



NO



Hexagon socket screw M6x16



2



4.



DR70-20-82334



NO



Lower half of cable clamp



1



4.4.11 Transition Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101660)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82298



NO



Transition wheel



1



2.



032-000005-00



NO



Bearing 6902-ZZ



2



3.



M04-021056---



NO



Circlips for hole 28



1



- 117 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.4.12 Connector Plate Assembly 1 (DR70-30-101659)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82306



NO



Connector plate 1



1



2.



DR70-30-101675



YES



Travel wheel assembly



2



3.



M04-051114---



NO



Hexagon socket screw M5x12



2



4.



032-000014-00



NO



Circlips for shaft GB894.1 20



2



5.



M04-021003---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 6



4



6.



M04-004504---



NO



Spring washer GB93 6



4



7.



M04-051116---



NO



Hexagon socket screw M6x16



4



8.



DR70-30-101667



YES



9.



M04-051198---



NO



Vertical



eccentric



assembly GB80 Set screw M5X12



- 118 -



wheel



2 2



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.4.13 Connector Plate Assembly 2 (DR70-30-101659)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82301



NO



Connector plate 2



1



2.



DR70-30-101675



YES



Travel wheel assembly



2



3.



DR70-30-101666



YES



4.



M04-051114---



NO



Hexagon socket screw M5x12



2



5.



032-000014-00



NO



Circlips for shaft GB894.1 20



2



6.



DR70-20-82303



NO



Travel switch mounting plate



2



7.



M04-004702---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 4



4



8.



M04-021005---



NO



Spring washer GB93 4



4



9.



M04-051028---



NO



10.



M04-051020---



NO



11.



M04-000102---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 2



4



12.



M04-021012---



NO



Spring washer GB93 2



4



Horizontal



eccentric



wheel



assembly



Hexagon socket cap head screw M4x10 Cross recessed pan head screw M2X10



- 119 -



2



4 4



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



13.



M04-021003---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 6



12



14.



M04-004504---



NO



Spring washer GB93 6



12



15.



M04-051116---



NO



Hexagon socket screw M6x16



12



16.



DR70-30-101665



YES



Brake assembly 2



1



17.



DR70-30-101667



YES



18.



M07-00143S---



NO



Microswitch SS-5GL2



2



19.



DR70-30-101669



YES



Guide wheel assembly



2



20.



M04-051198---



NO



GB80 Set screw M5X12



6



Vertical



eccentric



wheel



assembly



2



4.4.14 Vertical Eccentric Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101667)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82302



NO



Eccentric wheel holder



1



2.



DR70-20-82304



NO



Vertical eccentric wheel axle



1



3.



DR70-30-101664



NO



Roller assembly



1



4.



032-000001-00



NO



Circlips for shaft 8



2



- 120 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.4.15 Horizontal Eccentric Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101666)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82305



NO



Horizontal eccentric wheel axle



1



2.



DR70-30-101664



NO



Roller assembly



1



3.



032-000001-00



NO



Circlips for shaft 8



1



4.4.16 Guide Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101669)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82305



NO



Guide wheel axle



1



2.



DR70-30-101664



NO



Roller assembly



1



3.



032-000001-00



NO



Circlips for shaft 8



1



Note: Brake assembly 2 and travel wheel assembly of rails are both similar with those of - 121 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



traveling carriage. Refer to Traveling carriage Assembly for details.



- 122 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.5 Traveling Carriage Assembly (DR70-30-101671)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-30-101689



NO



Bumper assembly



1



2.



DR70-20-82437



NO



Synchronous belt pulley 2



1



3.



M04-051062---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x16



28



4.



031-000002-00



NO



Rubber of synchronous belt 185L075



1



5.



801-DR70-00025-00



YES



6.



DR70-20-82463



NO



7.



M04-051206---



NO



Driven wheel assembly (service spare part) Shell fixed plate Hexagon



socket



screws M4X8 - 123 -



1 2



countersunk



head



18



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



Signal acquisition board of traveling



8.



801-DR70-00061-00



YES



9.



M04-051140---



NO



Pan head combination screws M3X8



6



10.



DR70-20-82459



NO



Tension spring



1



11.



DR70-20-82467



NO



Trunk cover



1



12.



DR70-30-101679



NO



Transition wheel assembly



1



13.



DR70-20-82411



NO



Bearing end cover



1



14.



032-000033-00



NO



Deep groove ball bearing 6005ZZ



1



15.



DR70-20-82435



NO



Locating sleeve



1



16.



M04-051114---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x12



15



17.



DR70-20-82436



NO



Shaft end cover 1



1



18.



M04-051053---



NO



19.



DR70-30-101672



NO



20.



801-DR70-00020-00



YES



21.



DR70-20-82416



NO



Shaft end cover 2



1



22.



DR70-20-82461



NO



Wire input plate cover



1



23.



M04-051160---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M6x20



9



24.



M04-004504---



NO



Spring washer GB93 6



9



25.



M04-021003---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 6



9



26.



M04-051026---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M3x10



3



27.



M04-000104---



NO



Spring washer GB93 3



3



28.



DR70-30-101677



NO



Potentiometer assembly



1



29.



801-DR70-00021-00



YES



30.



M04-051205---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M8x50



1



31.



801-DR70-00038-00



YES



Balancer (service spare part)



1



32.



M04-051208---



NO



33.



M04-021016---



NO



Spring washer GB93_D12



2



34.



M04-021051---



NO



Flat washer GB97_1_D12



2



35.



DR70-20-82497



NO



Back shell of traveling carriage



1



36.



DR70-20-82419



NO



Limit wheel holder



4



37.



801-DR70-00026-00



YES



Motor assembly of traveling carriage



1



carriage (service spare part)



Cross



recessed



countersunk



head



screws M4X12 Reel assembly



spare part)



Travel wheel assembly (service spare part)



socket



cap



head



screw



M12x35



- 124 -



4 1



Roll bearing seat assembly (service



Hexagon



1



1



4



2



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



(service spare part) 38.



DR70-20-82464



NO



Slot fixed plate



1



39.



M04-060009---



NO



Stud and screw M3X14+8-10



6



40.



DR70-20-82496



NO



Front shell of traveling carriage



1



41.



M04-000501---



NO



Stainless steel nut GB6170 M5



12



42.



801-DR70-00022-00



YES



43.



801-DR70-00031-00



YES



Brake assembly 1 (service spare part)



1



44.



032-000014-00



NO



Circlips for shaft 20



4



45.



M04-051028---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M4X10



19



46.



M04-021005---



NO



Spring washer GB93 4



19



47.



M04-004702---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 4



19



48.



801-DR70-00032-00



YES



49.



M04-021035---



NO



Circlips for shaft 10



1



50.



DR70-20-82415



NO



Axle of safety pin



1



51.



DR70-20-82325



NO



Steel wire for hose mounting



2



52.



DR70-20-82460



NO



Wire input plate



1



53.



DR70-20-82401_1



NO



Frame of traveling carriage



1



54.



DR70-20-82495



NO



Drum of traveling carriage



1



55.



801-DR70-00024-00



YES



56.



M04-051102---



NO



57.



DR70-20-82441



NO



58.



801-DR70-00028-00



YES



59.



DR70-20-82443



NO



Block for inspection



1



60.



DR70-20-82442



NO



Pressing plate for inspection



1



61.



801-DR70-00029-00



YES



62.



031-000004-00



NO



63.



801-DR70-00027-00



YES



64.



M04-021011---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 5



46



65.



M04-051078---



NO



Set screw M4X8



6



Limit wheel assembly (service spare part)



Photoelectric switch assembly (service spare part)



Upper limit wheel assembly (service spare part) Hexagon socket set screws with cup point M3X5 Synchronous belt pulley 4 Travel switch assembly 2 (service spare part)



Belt pulley assembly for inspection (service spare part) Rubber of synchronous belt 310XL-025 Travel switch assembly 1 (service spare part)



- 125 -



2



2



4 2 1 1



2 1 1



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



Eccentric



wheel



assembly



(service



66.



801-DR70-00023-00



YES



67.



DR70-20-82466



NO



Axle of tension spring



1



68.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 5



48



69.



M04-000202---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 8



2



70.



M04-021031---



NO



Spring washer GB93 8



2



71.



M04-011011---



NO



Nut GB6170 M8



2



spare part)



4.5.1 Bumper Assembly (DR70-30-101689) 1



2



3



4



5



6



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



M04-021035---



NO



Circlips for shaft 10



1



2.



DR70-20-82414



NO



Washer



1



3.



DR70-20-82413



NO



Safety roller



1



4.



DR70-20-82412



NO



Bumper



1



5.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 5



1



6.



DR70-20-82466



NO



Axle of tension spring



1



- 126 -



2



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.5.2 Driven Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101676)



1



2



6



5



4



3



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82434



NO



Synchronous belt pulley 1



1



2.



032-000009-00



NO



Electromagnetic clutch ECS-1.5



1



3.



/



NO



4.



/



NO



Lock washer 4 (without clutch)



3



5.



M04-021056---



NO



Circlips for hole 28



1



6.



032-000005-00



NO



Bearing 6902_ZZ



1



Hexagon socket button head screw M4X6 (without clutch)



- 127 -



3



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.5.3 Transition Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101679)



1



2



3



4 5



6



10



9



8



7



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82425



NO



Transition wheel holder



1



2.



M04-051102---



NO



3.



DR70-20-82426



NO



Transition wheel axle



1



4.



DR70-20-82427



NO



Bearing seat 2



2



5.



M04-021041---



NO



Circlips for shaft 12



2



6.



032-000023-00



NO



Deep groove ball bearing 6201ZZ



2



7.



DR70-20-82428



NO



Locating check ring



3



8.



DR70-20-82429



NO



Transition wheel



2



9.



M04-000104---



NO



Spring washer GB93 3



8



10.



M04-051026---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M3x10



8



Hexagon socket set screws with cup point M3X5



- 128 -



6



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.5.4 Reel Assembly (DR70-30-101672) 1



2



3



4



5 6 7



8 19 9 18 17



16



15



13



14



12



11



10



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



M04-021031---



NO



Spring washer GB93 8



1



2.



DR70-20-82410



NO



Wire rope presser plate



1



3.



M04-051161---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M8x25



1



4.



DR70-20-82407



NO



Wire rope for reel



1



5.



DR70-20-82405



NO



Auxiliary reel



1



6.



DR70-20-82408



NO



Key 5X5X22



1



7.



DR70-20-82406



NO



Stop collar



1



8.



M04-150014---



NO



Hexagon head bolt M10x100



2



9.



030-000005-00



NO



Flat washer GB/T97.1 10



2



10.



030-000004-00



NO



Spring washer GB93 10



2



11.



DR70-20-82402



NO



Reel shaft



1



12.



DR70-20-82403



NO



Main reel



1



13.



032-000037-00



NO



Expansion sleeve Z3-30X55



1



14.



M04-051102---



NO



15.



M04-004504---



NO



Spring washer GB93 6



4



16.



M04-051160---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M6x20



4



17.



DR70-20-82409



NO



Key 3X3X10



1



18.



DR70-20-82446



NO



Gear 2



1



Hexagon socket set screws with cup point M3X5



- 129 -



4



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



19.



DR70-20-82404



NO



Ratchet



1



4.5.5 Reel Bearing Seat Assembly (DR70-30-101687)



1



2



3



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



032-000002-00



NO



Circlips for hole 47



1



2.



032-000033-00



NO



Deep groove ball bearing 6005ZZ



1



3.



DR70-20-82468



NO



Bearing seat 1



1



4.5.6 Potentiometer Assembly (DR70-30-101677) 1



2



3



4



5



- 130 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82444



NO



Potentiometer holder



1



2.



004-000004-00



NO



Potentiometer 22HP-10



1



3.



/



NO



4.



DR70-20-82445



NO



5.



M04-051102---



NO



Potentiometer nut (accompanied with potentiometer) Gear 1



1



Hexagon socket set screws with cup point M3X5



4.5.7 Travel Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101675) 1



2



3



4



5



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82417



NO



Travel wheel axle



1



2.



DR70-20-82418



NO



Travel wheel sleeve



1



3.



032-000019-00



NO



Bearing 6204



1



4.



032-000002-00



NO



Circlips for hole 47



1



5.



032-000014-00



NO



Circlips for shaft 20



1



- 131 -



1



1



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.5.8 Balancer (DR70-30-101673)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



031-000001-00



NO



Spring balancer EWF-90



1



2.



DR70-20-82469



NO



Wire rope for balancer



1



4.5.9 Motor Assembly (DR70-30-101674)



1



2



3



7



6



5



4



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



024-000060-00



NO



Stepping motor STP-58D4008



1



2.



M04-051073---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M4x12



4



3.



M04-021005---



NO



Spring washer GB93 4



4



4.



032-000010-00



NO



Planetary reducer i=5 φ10



1



- 132 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



5.



DR70-20-82424



NO



Motor mounting board



1



6.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 5



4



7.



M04-051114---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x12



4



4.5.10 Limit Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101686)



5



4



3



2



1



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82422



NO



Limit wheel axle



1



2.



DR70-20-82421



NO



Limit wheel sleeve



1



3.



032-000020-00



NO



Deep groove ball bearing 638ZZ



1



4.



M04-021056---



NO



Circlips for hole 28



1



5.



032-000001-00



NO



Circlips for shaft 8



1



- 133 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.5.11 Brake Assembly 1 (DR70-30-101683) 1



2



3



4



5



6



7



26



9



25



10



24



11



23



12



22



21



8



13 20



19



18



17



16



15



14



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82452



NO



Guide shaft



4



2.



DR70-20-82455



NO



Pressure spring



2



3.



M04-051207---



NO



4.



M04-051077---



NO



5.



DR70-20-82454



NO



Flange



4



6.



DR70-20-82456



NO



Block



1



7.



DR70-20-82457



NO



Friction block



1



8.



M04-051028---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M4X10



19



9.



M04-021005---



NO



Spring washer GB/T93 4



19



10.



M04-051026---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M3x10



4



11.



M04-000104---



NO



Spring washer GB93 3



4



12.



DR70-20-82453



NO



Connector plate



1



13.



DR70-20-82447



NO



Baseplate



1



14.



DR70-20-82458



NO



Buffer pad



4



Hexagon



socket



countersunk



head



screws M3X8 Hexagon socket set screws with cup point M3X3



- 134 -



6 4



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



15.



DR70-20-82448



NO



Stand plate



1



16.



DR70-20-82450



NO



Guide sleeve



2



17.



M04-051114---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x12



4



18.



DR70-20-82465



NO



Armature iron



2



19.



DR70-20-82449



NO



Guide bucket



2



20.



M04-000202---



NO



Flat washer GB/T97 8



4



21.



M04-021031---



NO



Spring washer GB/T93 8



4



22.



M04-011011---



NO



Nut GB6170 M8



4



23.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB/T93 5



10



24.



M04-051061---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x10



6



25.



DR70-20-82451



NO



Electromagnet mounting plate



1



26.



M90-100140---



NO



Electromagnet CPH-50-38Ω



2



4.5.12 Photoelectric Switch Assembly (DR70-30-101678)



1



2



3



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82462



NO



Photoelectric switch holder



1



2.



011-000002-00



NO



Opposed photoelectric sensor HOA0880



1



3.



M04-051140---



NO



Pan head combination screws M3X8



2



- 135 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.5.13 Upper Limit Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101688) 1



2 3



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



M04-021023---



NO



Circlips for shaft 7



1



2.



DR70-20-82246



NO



Polyurethane roller



1



3.



DR70-20-82423



NO



Upper limit wheel holder



1



4.5.14 Travel Switch Assembly 1 (DR70-30-101681) & 2 (DR70-30-101682)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



M04-051020---



NO



Cross recessed pan head screw M2X10



1



2.



M04-000102---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 2



1



3.



M04-021012---



NO



Spring washer GB93 2



1



4.



M07-00143S---



NO



Microswitch SS-5GL2



1



5.



DR70-20-82438



NO



Travel switch support



1



- 136 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.5.15 Inspection Belt Pulley Assembly (DR70-30-101680) 1



2



3



4



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82440



NO



Shaft for inspection



1



2.



032-000022-00



NO



Deep groove ball bearing 687



2



3.



DR70-20-82439



NO



Synchronous belt pulley 3



1



4.



M04-021023---



NO



Circlips for shaft 7



1



4.5.16 Eccentric Wheel Assembly (DR70-30-101685)



1



2



3



4



5



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



032-000001-00



NO



Circlips for shaft 8



1



2.



M04-021056---



NO



Circlips for hole 28



1



3.



032-000020-00



NO



Deep groove ball bearing 638ZZ



1



4.



DR70-20-82421



NO



Limit wheel sleeve



1



5.



DR70-20-82420



NO



Eccentric shaft



1



- 137 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.6 Telescopic Column Assembly (DR70-30-101691) 5



11



6



12



13



7 8 9 10



4



3



2



18



17



16



1



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-30-101692



NO



Trunk assembly 1



1



2.



DR70-30-101693



NO



Trunk assembly 2



1



3.



DR70-30-101694



NO



Trunk assembly 3



1



4.



DR70-30-101695



NO



Trunk assembly 4



1



5.



DR70-20-82433



NO



Trunk support plate 2



2



6.



DR70-20-101644



NO



Telescopic column support B



1



7.



M04-051116---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M6x16



8



8.



M04-004504---



NO



Spring washer GB93 -87



8



9.



M04-021003---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 6



8



10.



DR70-20-82432



NO



Trunk support plate 1



2



11.



DR70-30-101699



NO



Splint assembly



2



12.



DR70-20-82470



NO



Locating pin



1



13.



M04-051206---



NO



14.



DR70-30-101698



NO



15.



M04-021011---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 5



16.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 -87



17.



M04-051061---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x10



2



18.



M04-051062---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x16



2



Hexagon



socket



6



countersunk



head



screws M4X8 Wire carrier assembly of Telescopic column



- 138 -



4 1 4



5



4



15



14



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.6.1 Trunk Assembly 1 (DR70-30-101692) 1



2



3



4



5 13



8



12



9



6



7



10



11



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82471-51



NO



Trunk 1



1



2.



DR70-20-82486



NO



Shock pad



1



3.



DR70-20-82487



NO



Shock pad mounting seat



1



4.



DR70-20-101641



NO



Anticollision washer fixed plate A



1



5.



M04-051026---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M3x10



3



6.



M04-000104---



NO



Spring washer GB93 -87



3



7.



M04-000802---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 3



2



8.



DR70-20-82478



NO



Wire fixed metal plate A



1



9.



M04-051062---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x16



4



10.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 -87



4



11.



M04-021011---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 5



12.



M04-051043---



NO



13.



DR70-20-82475



NO



Cross



recessed



screws M5X10 End plate 1



- 139 -



3



5



countersunk



4 head



6 1



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.6.2 Trunk Assembly 2 (DR70-30-101693) 1 2 3



15



4 14 13 12 11 10



9



8



7



6



5



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-30-101697



NO



Wire rope assembly of Telescopic trunk



1



2.



M04-051043---



NO



3.



DR70-20-82476



NO



End plate 2



1



4.



DR70-20-82472-51



NO



Trunk 2



1



5.



DR70-30-101696



NO



6.



DR70-20-82479



NO



Wire fixed metal plate B



1



7.



M04-051026---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M3x10



3



8.



M04-000104---



NO



Spring washer GB93 -87



3



9.



M04-000802---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 3



2



10.



M04-051062---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x16



4



11.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 -87



4



12.



M04-021011---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 5



4



13.



DR70-20-101642



NO



Anticollision washer fixed plate B



1



14.



DR70-20-82487



NO



Shock pad mounting seat



1



15.



DR70-20-82486



NO



Shock pad



1



Cross



recessed



countersunk



head



screws M5X10



Guide wheel assembly of suspended trunk



- 140 -



3



5



8



12



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.6.3 Trunk Assembly 3 (DR70-30-101694) 4



5



7



6



8 9 10 11



3



2



SN.



1



15



14



13



12



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82473-51



NO



Trunk 3



1



2.



DR70-20-82477



NO



End plate 3



1



3.



M04-051043---



NO



4.



DR70-30-101697



NO



Wire rope assembly of Telescopic trunk



1



5.



M04-051110---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M3x6



3



6.



M04-000104---



NO



Spring washer GB93 -87



6



7.



M04-051026---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M3x10



3



8.



M04-000802---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 3



2



9.



M04-051062---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x16



2



10.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 -87



2



11.



M04-021011---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 5



2



12.



DR70-20-101643



NO



Anticollision washer fixed plate C



1



13.



DR70-20-82487



NO



Shock pad mounting seat



1



14.



DR70-20-82486



NO



Shock pad



4



15.



DR70-30-101696



NO



Cross



recessed



countersunk



head



screws M5X10



3



5



Guide wheel assembly of suspended trunk



- 141 -



8



12



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.6.4 Trunk Assembly 4 (DR70-30-101695) 1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8 9



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82474-51



NO



Trunk 4



1



2.



DR70-30-101696



NO



3.



DR70-20-82484



NO



Wire rope connector



1



4.



DR70-20-82483



NO



Wire rope axle



1



5.



M04-051062---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x16



3



6.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 -87



2



7.



M04-021011---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 5



2



8.



DR70-20-82494



NO



Telescopic trunk support A



1



9.



DR70-20-82485



NO



Wire rope fixed axle



1



Guide wheel assembly of suspended trunk



- 142 -



5



12



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.6.5 Guide



Wheel



Assembly



of



Suspended



Column



(DR70-30-101696) 1



2



3



4



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82480



NO



Guide wheel seat of suspended trunk



1



2.



032-000026-00



NO



609ZZ bearing



2



3.



M04-051061---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x10



5



4.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 -87



4



4.6.6 Wire



Rope



Assembly



of



5



Telescopic



Column



(DR70-30-101697) 1



2



3



4 5 6 14



13



12



11



10



- 143 -



9



8



7



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



032-000015-00



NO



GB/T893.1 15 Circlips for hole



1



2.



DR70-20-82488



NO



Pulley



1



3.



DR70-20-82500



NO



Wire rope of Telescopic Trunk



1



4.



DR70-20-82481



NO



Pulley mounting seat



1



5.



M04-120010---



NO



Bearing 696ZZMC3 SRL



1



6.



DR70-20-82482



NO



Limit pin



2



7.



DR70-20-82498



NO



Wire rope fixed axle



1



8.



DR70-20-82499



NO



Wire rope fixed cover



1



9.



M04-051061---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x10



1



10.



M04-051102---



NO



Set screw M3X5



1



11.



DR70-20-82490



NO



Bolt for wire rope



1



12.



DR70-20-82489



NO



Wire rope regulator rod



1



13.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 -87



14.



M04-000501---



NO



Stainless steel hexagon nut M5



4.6.7 Wire



Carrier



Assembly



of



5



Telescopic



2 2



Column



(DR70-30-101698)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description - 144 -



Qty



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



1.



032-000004-00



NO



Circlips for hole 19



1



2.



M04-120008---



NO



Bearing 6800_ZZ



2



3.



DR70-20-82294



NO



4.



M04-021035---



NO



Circlips for shaft 10



1



5.



0000-10-10904



NO



Wire protective clamp (CCS19-S8-M)



1



6.



M04-051134---



NO



Pan head combination screws M4X8



1



7.



M04-004504---



NO



Spring washer



1



8.



M04-051116---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M6x16



1



9.



DR70-30-101663



NO



Cable clamp assembly



1



10.



DR70-20-82493



NO



Spool fixed support



1



11.



M04-051206---



NO



12.



DR70-20-82295



NO



Wire clamp mounting seat of telescopic trunk



Hexagon



6



socket



countersunk



head



screws M4X8 Wire carrier rotation axle of telescopic trunk



1



4 1



4.6.8 Splint Assembly (DR70-30-101699)



4 3 2 1



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82492



NO



Wire rope splint A



1



2.



DR70-20-82491



NO



Wire rope splint B



1



3.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 -87



4.



M04-051062---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x16



- 145 -



5



2 2



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.7 Handpiece Assembly (DR70-30-101755)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



Horizontal-rotation turntable assembly



1.



801-DR70-00039-00



YES



2.



801-DR70-00172-00



YES



L-arm assembly (service spare part)



1



3.



M04-021003---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1



6



4.



M04-004504---



NO



Spring washer GB93



6



5.



M04-051160---



NO



6.



DR70-30-101711



NO



7.



M04-051116---



NO



(service spare part)



Hexagon



socket



cap



head



screw



M6X20 DR70 tube assembly Hexagon M6x16



- 146 -



socket



cap



1



6 1



head



screw



4



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.7.1 Tube Mainbody Assembly (DR70-30-101706)



- 147 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR30-20-83159



NO



Under board



1



2.



DR30-20-83157



NO



Left extension board support



1



3.



M04-051028---



NO



4.



M04-021005---



NO



5.



M04-051054---



NO



6.



M04-004702---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 4



8



7.



M90-100118---



NO



Fan



2



8.



2102-20-17166



NO



Protective grounding label



1



9.



M04-021003---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 6



4



10.



M04-004504---



NO



Spring washer GB93 6



4



11.



M04-051160---



NO



12.



DR70-20-82393



NO



Tube support cover (DR70-14)



1



13.



801-DR70-00090-00



YES



X-ray tube (service spare part)



1



14.



DR30-20-83162



NO



Front shell support



1



15.



DR30-20-83163



NO



Guide sleeve of front shell



2



16.



801-DR70-00078-00



YES



17.



DR30-20-83215



NO



Air-duct



1



18.



M04-051134---



NO



Pan head combination screws M4 X8



11



19.



DR30-20-83158



NO



Right extension board support



1



20.



DR70-20-82396



NO



Tube support (DR70-14)



1



21.



M04-051206---



NO



22.



DR30-20-83160



NO



23.



801-DR51-00184-00



YES



4.7.2 Tube



Handgrip



Hexagon



socket



cap



head



screw



M4X10 Spring washer GB93 4 Cross



recessed



pan



2 head



screw



M4X20



Hexagon



socket



cap



head



screw



M6x20



Tube emergency OFF switch assembly (service spare part)



Hexagon socket countersunk



head



screws M4X8 Flange 30



8



4



1



10 1



Automatic collimator AL02 II (service spare part)



Assembly



2



(service



1



spare



part



801-DR70-00070-00) SN. 1.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



DR70-20-82351



NO



Tube handgrip



2



- 148 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



2. 3. 4.



DR70-20-82397-51



NO



Bend tube



1



M90-100136---



NO



Photoelectric sensor EX-14A



1



DR70-20-82398



NO



Upper cover of photoelectric switch



1



4.7.3 Front Shell Assembly (DR70-30-101709)



- 149 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



801-DR70-00080-00



YES



Tube front shell (service spare part)



1



2.



801-DR51-00164-00



YES



IR receiver board (service spare part)



1



3.



DR70-20-82317



NO



Remote controller pressing plate



1



4.



801-DR70-00173-00



YES



5.



801-DR70-00088-00



YES



6.



801-DR70-00089-00



YES



7.



801-DR70-00087-00



YES



8.



M04-051140---



NO



Pan head combination screws M3X8



14



9.



A90-000072---



NO



Wire lock knob UC-3



1



10.



0000-10-10904



NO



Wire protective clamp (CCS19-S8-M)



1



Handpiece screen assembly (with wire) (service spare part) Left control key assembly (service spare part) Lower control key assembly (service spare part) Right control key assembly (service spare part)



1 1 1 1



4.7.4 Handpiece Screen Assembly with Wire (service spare part 801-DR70-00173-00)



- 150 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR30-20-83165



NO



Cover of screen PCB



1



2.



DR30-20-83164



NO



Screen support plate



1



3.



0010-10-12358



NO



TFT screen 8.4" (800X600)



1



4.



0000-10-11148



NO



Resistance touch screen 9507



1



5.



DR30-20-83251



NO



6.



DR30-20-83252



NO



7.



DR30-20-83253



NO



8.



DR30-20-83254



NO



9.



DR30-20-83255



NO



10.



DR30-20-83257



NO



11.



DR30-20-83256



NO



12.



M04-051121---



NO



Cross recessed pan head screw



4



13.



2102-20-17166



NO



Protective grounding label



1



14.



M04-051134---



NO



Pan head combination screws M4 X8



1



15.



M04-002405---



NO



Cross recessed pan head screw



2



16.



801-DR51-00114-00



YES



17.



021-000003-00



YES



Touch screen front dust-proofEVA adhesive tape-1 Touch screen front dust-proofEVA adhesive tape-2 Touch screen front dust-proofEVA adhesive tape-3 Touch screen front dust-proofEVA adhesive tape-4 Touch screen front dust-proofEVA adhesive tape-5 Touch screen rear dust-proof EVA adhesive tape-2 Touch screen rear dust-proof EVA adhesive tape-1



8.4-inch



LCD



screen



backlight



inverter



(D-PEAK) (service spare part) 8.4-inch LCD screen drive control board (D-PEAK) (service spare part) - 151 -



2 4 2 1 1 2 2



1 1



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



18.



DR30-20-83250



NO



19.



801-DR70-00162-00



YES



20.



801-DR51-00255-00



YES



21.



M04-051140---



NO



Electronic touch screen connecting wire pressing plate Human-machine interface board (service spare part) Resistance touch screen controller RS-232 interface (service spare part) Pan head combination screws M3X8



1 1 1 16



4.7.5 L-arm Assembly (service spare part 801-DR70-00172-00)



- 152 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



- 153 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR70-20-82400



NO



Back cover of L-arm



1



L-arm potentiometer and 2.



801-DR70-00064-00



YES



travel



switch



assembly



1



(service spare part) 3.



DR70-20-82381



NO



L-arm adaptor 1



1



4.



DR70-30-101750



NO



Drive unit assembly



1



5.



801-DR70-00063-00



YES



6.



M04-051028---



NO



7.



DR70-20-82363



NO



Motor mounting baseplate



1



8.



M04-021031---



NO



Spring washer GB93



8



9.



M04-051161---



NO



10.



M04-000202---



NO



11.



801-DR70-00066-00



YES



- 154 -



Cable



clamp



assembly



(service spare part) Hexagon socket cap head screw M4X10



Hexagon socket cap head screw M8x25 Flat washer GB97.1 L-arm



motor



assembly



(service spare part)



1 3



3 8 1



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



Bolt



assembly



(service



12.



801-DR70-00065-00



YES



13.



DR70-20-82382



NO



L-arm adaptor 2



1



14.



M04-021005---



NO



Spring washer GB93



4



15.



M04-051065---



NO



16.



DR70-20-82377



NO



Limit pin



1



17.



M04-021011---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 5



10



18.



M04-021007---



NO



Spring washer GB93 5



14



19.



M04-051066---



NO



20.



M04-051062---



NO



21.



M04-051140---



NO



22.



DR70-20-82379



NO



spare part)



Hexagon socket cap head screw M4x16



Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x25 Hexagon socket cap head screw M5x16 Pan



head



combination



screws M3X8 Cover plate



M04-051207---



NO



1



4 10 4 1



Hexagon 23.



1



socket



countersunk head screws



2



GB70.3 M3X8 Pan



head



combination



24.



M04-051134---



NO



25.



6200-10-09762



NO



26.



2102-20-17166



NO



Protective grounding label



2



27.



DR70-20-82359



NO



Key 8X6X20



1



28.



DR70-20-82339



NO



Locknut 3



1



29.



DR70-20-82369



NO



Terminal pad of tube



1



30.



DR70-20-82373



NO



Shaft sleeve 3



1



31.



DR70-20-101627



NO



Washer for adaptor 2



3



- 155 -



screws M4 X8 Ground



wire



clamp



FN-010



2 1



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



L-Arm Potentiometer and Travel Switch Assembly



4.7.6



(service spare part 801-DR70-00064-00)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



M90-100130---



NO



2.



030-000005-00



NO



Flat washer GB/T97.1 10



1



3.



DR70-20-82380



NO



Potentiometer mounting holder



1



4.



DR70-20-82387



NO



Gear 2 of potentiometer



1



5.



DR70-20-82360



NO



Holder



2



6.



M07-00143S---



NO



Microswitch SS-5GL2



2



7.



M04-000102---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 2



4



8.



M04-021012---



NO



Spring washer GB93 2



4



9.



M04-051020---



NO



10.



M04-051077---



NO



11.



M04-004012---



NO



(10K) 3-loop potentiometer (VISHAY)



Cross



recessed



pan



head



screw



M2X10 Hexagon socket set screws with cup point M3X3 Cross recessed pan head screw with washer M3X6



- 156 -



1



4 2 4



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.8 Mobile Patient Table Assembly (DR70-30-101789 / DR70-30-101816) 4



5



6



7 8



9



10



3



SN. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.



2



1



Code of Material



FRU



Description



DR70-20-101786



NO



Pull rod weld assembly



1



DR70-30-101814



NO



Left foot assembly-650 of bed



1



DR70-30-101802



NO



Left foot assembly-750 of bed



1



M04-000202---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 8



6



DR70-30-101813



NO



Bed surface assembly-650



1



DR70-30-101789



NO



Bed surface assembly-750



1



M04-021031---



NO



Spring washer GB93 8



6



M04-051204---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M8x20



6



DR70-30-101815



NO



Right foot assembly-650 of bed



1



DR70-30-101807



NO



Right foot assembly-750 of bed



1



M04-021003---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 6



4



- 157 -



Qty



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.8.1 Left Foot Assembly of Patient Table (DR70-30-101814 / DR70-30-101802)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



DR70-20-101793



NO



Table-board support beam-650



1



1.



DR70-20-101806



NO



Table-board support beam-750



1



2.



DR70-20-101795-52



NO



3.



DR70-20-101796



NO



Decorative strip of stand column



1



4.



DR70-20-101798-52



NO



Caster support beam (left)



1



Table-board supporting stand column (left)



1



Standard spring washer GB/T93-1987 5.



M04-021038---



NO



16 (plated with eco-friendly colored



2



zinc) 6.



M04-021027---



NO



Flat washer GB97.2 16



2



7.



034-000033-00



NO



Caster with brake (φ120mm)



1



8.



034-000032-00



NO



Caster without brake (φ120mm)



1



- 158 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



Hexagon socket cap head screw



9.



M04-051204---



NO



10.



M04-021031---



NO



Spring washer GB93 8



8



11.



M04-000202---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 8



8



4.8.2 Patient



Table



Board



8



M8x20



Assembly



(DR70-30-101813



DR70-30-101797) 9



8 7



6 5



4



SN. 1.



3



2



1



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



DR70-20-101781



NO



Mobile Patient Table Board 1



1



DR70-20-101782



NO



Mobile Patient Table Board 2



1



DR70-20-101790



NO



Welding part of bed support - 650



1



2.



DR70-20-101804



NO



Welding part of bed support - 750



1



3.



DR70-20-101792-51



NO



Bedside decorative material



2



4.



DR70-20-101794



NO



Bed sealing strip



2



5.



M04-005405---



NO



6.



M04-021005---



NO



Spring washer GB93 4



18



7.



M04-004702---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 4



18



8.



M04-051043---



NO



Cross



recessed



pan



head



screw



M4X10



Cross recessed countersunk head screws M5X10



- 159 -



18



20



/



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



9.



M04-000205---



NO



Cross recessed countersunk head screws M4X8



12



4.8.3 Right Foot Assembly of Patient Table (DR70-30-101807 / DR70-30-101815)



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



DR70-20-101793



NO



Table-board support beam-650



1



1.



DR70-20-101806



NO



Table-board support beam-750



1



2.



DR70-20-101796



NO



Decorative strip of stand column



1



3.



DR70-20-101795-51



NO



Bed supporting stand column (right)



1



4.



DR70-20-101798-51



NO



Caster support beam (right)



1



Caster 5.



034-000032-00



NO



without



brake



(Φ120mm,



off-white), connected with M16X25



2



screw rod Caster 6.



034-000033-00



NO



with



brake



(Φ120mm,



off-white), connected with M16X25



2



screw rod Flat 7.



M04-021027---



NO



washer



–



GB/T97.1-200216



level (plated



A, with



4



eco-friendly colored zinc) Standard spring washer, GB/T93-1987 8.



M04-021038---



NO



16 (plated with eco-friendly colored



4



zinc) 9.



M04-000202---



NO



Flat washer GB97.1 8



8



10.



M04-021031---



NO



Spring washer GB93 8



8



- 160 -



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



11.



M04-051204---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M8x20



1



4.8.4 Optional Parts for Table SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



DR70-20-101791



NO



Handle of Mobile Patient Table -650



2



1.



DR70-20-101805



NO



Handle of Mobile Patient Table -750



2



2.



DR70-20-101801



NO



Handle mounting block



4



3.



M04-051184---



NO



Hexagon socket cap head screw M6x12



- 161 -



16



LISTING OF MECHANICAL PARTS



4.9 Accessory Box



SN.



Code of Material



FRU



Description



Qty



1.



DR51-20-82741



NO



Stopper



4



2.



DR51-20-82733



NO



Shrapnel



4



3.



DR51-20-82739



NO



Slideway 4



1



4.



DR51-20-82732



NO



Wall plate



1



5.



DR51-20-82731



NO



Back cover



1



6.



DR51-20-82737



NO



Slideway 2



1



7.



DR51-20-82738



NO



Slideway 3



1



8.



DR51-20-82740



NO



Buffer pad



1



9.



DR51-20-82736



NO



Slideway 1



1



10.



M04-051158---



NO



Pan head combination screws M3X6



26



11.



DR51-20-82730



NO



Welding part of housing



1



12.



M04-051139---



NO



Pan head combination M4X12



8



13.



M04051168



NO



Pan head metal expansion screw



4



- 162 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



CHAPTER 5



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.1 Cause and Analysis of Failures Serial



Failure



Cause Analysis



Solutions



No. 1.



Vertical movement (up



1.



Chain cracks.



2.



Motor burned



and manually move FPD upward



out



1.



Open the top cover of stand column



and down) of or



bad



and downward. Check whether the



accomplished



contact



of



chain cracks. If yes, replace the



automatically.



cable



FPD cannot be



chain.



Clutch



burned out or big



2.



gap



motor. If the problem lies in cables,



between clutch



adjust cables and ensure that they rotor



are correctly connected. If motor is



and flange 3.



burned out, replace the motor of



Failure



of



device



drive



stand column. 3.



board 4.



Failure



Check the cable power conditions of



Open the top cover of stand column and check the clutch for power



of



condition. If the clutch is burned out,



device



replace the clutch of stand column



interface



top. If it runs normally, big gap



board



between clutch rotor and flange may exist. Adjust the gap to 0.2mm with feeler.



2.



Abnormal noise exists



in



stand



column



assembly when FPD



moves



vertically (upward



1.



the



Wire



rope



Replace the fault board.



1.



Open the front cover of stand



cracks 2.



column and check whether the wire



The



gap



rope is in normal status. If it is



between



the



broken, replace the wire rope.



roller of stand and



4.



2.



Check whether the roller of pulley



column pulley



assembly



is



damaged



or



the



and



the



eccentric wheel is loose. If the



of



problem lies in roller, replace the



downward). slideway



- 163 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



3.



stand column



roller or adjust the gap of eccentric



is too big.



wheel according to the disassembly



The



gap



and



between



the



replacing the wire rope of stand



roller of stand column pulley and



assembly



procedures



for



column. 3.



If no problem exists in the two steps



the



above, re-test the source of the



of



abnormal noise. If the noise is



stand column



caused by counterpoise assembly,



is too big.



check and replace the roller of



slideway



counterpoise assembly according to the



disassembly



and



assembly



procedures for replacing the wire rope. 3.



FPD cannot be positioned place



1.



in



Failure



of



1.



Open the top cover of stand column



potentiometer



and



Failure



potentiometer cables are in normal



check



whether



the



when



moving upward



2.



of



and downward



signal



status,



automatically.



acquisition



damaged, or the pairing gear of



board



of



or



the



potentiometer



is



potentiometer is meshed. Solve the



stand column



problem



accordingly



upon



the



different failures or replace the potentiometer.



4.



FPD



cannot



1.



rotate.



2.



Failure



of



2.



Replace the fault board.



1.



Open the lower cover of support arm



motor-driven



and draw out the the cable of



push bar



motor-driven push rod. Separately



FPD



key



electrify the motor-driven push rod



failure 3.



and check whether it runs normally.



Failure



of



device



drive



If it cannot run, replace the push rod; if



board 4.



Failure



it



runs



connecting of



device



cables



check to



the



confirm



whether the cables fail. 2.



interface



normally,



If the push rod runs normally, it should be the FPD key failure.



- 164 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



board



Repair



or



replace



the



FPD



keyboard.



5.



When rotating, FPD stop



1.



cannot in



Failure



of



3.



Replace the fault board.



1.



Check whether the potentiometer



potentiometer



cables and connectors are securely



Failure



fixed



the 2.



required position.



of



or



signal



damaged.



acquisition



accordingly.



board



of



the



potentiometer Make



is



solutions



2.



Replace the fault board.



1.



Remove the cover of the rail drive



stand column 6.



Movable



rails



1.



cannot



Failure



of



clutch



system and check whether the



automatically move



in



the



2.



SID direction.



3.



Failure



of



clutch is burned out. If yes, replace



stepping



the clutch; Check whether the clutch



motor



cables fail. If yes, repair or replace



Loose



the cables; Check the gap between



connection of



the clutch rotor and the flange. If the



motor



gap is larger than 0.2mm, re-adjust



and



reducer



the gap.



casing 4.



5.



2.



Failure



of



Electrify the stepping motor and check whether it is rotatable. If it



stepping



cannot rotate, check whether the



motor driver



motor is burned out. If so, replace



Failure



of



the stepping motor; Check the



device



cables of the motor. If failure exists,



interface



repair or replace the cables.



board



3.



If



the



motor



does



not



rotate



synchronously with reducer when electrified,



it



indicates



that



the



connection of the motor and the reducer casing is loose. Re-screw the coupling in the reducer casing to enclasp the motor shaft.



- 165 -



4.



Replace the failure driver



5.



Replace the fault board.



TROUBLESHOOTING



7.



Movable



rails



cannot



1.



be



Failure



of



1.



Check whether the potentiometer



potentiometer



cables and connectors are securely



Failure



fixed



correctly 2.



positioned



of



or



when



traveling



damaged.



automatically



carriage



accordingly.



moving in the



signal



the



potentiometer Make



is



solutions



2.



Replace the fault board.



1.



Tighten the synchronous belt. If the



SID direction. acquisition board 8.



Abnormal noise



1.



is accompanied



Inappropriate tension



belt is too long, loosen the belt and



of



with the moving of movable rails in SID direction. 2.



synchronous



adjust the belt in the other end, and



belt



finally tighten the belt.



Synchronous belt against pulley



2.



Check whether the synchronous belt



rubs



pulley moves in the drive assembly



belt



or the bearing of transition wheel is



or



damaged.



transition



Depending



on



the



situation, repair accordingly.



wheel. 9.



Movable



rails



1.



cannot brake in time



Failure



of



1、 Electrify the electromagnet of brake



brake



and check whether it is in normal



when Failure



of



status. If yes, it indicates the gap



SID direction or



device



drive



between the friction block and the



in the right and



board



moving in the



left



of



the



2.



3.



Failure



surface of brake is too big. Re-adjust of



the gap according to the adjusting



traveling device



carriage.



method for replacing the brake.



interface



2、 Replace the fault board.



board 10.



Telescopic trunk



1.



cannot



Safety lock of balancer



1.



is



If the telescopic trunk cannot be moved manually when electrified,



move vertically (upward downward).



not open.



and 2.



Failure



release the balancer lock according of



to



clutch 3.



Failure



the



balancer



replacing



procedures. of



2.



Check whether the clutch is burned



stepping



out. If yes, replace the clutch; Check



motor



the clutch cables. If problem exists,



- 166 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



4.



5.



6.



Loose



repair or replace cables; Check



connection of



whether the clutch rotor and the



motor



flange are effectively fitted while



and



reducer



meshing. If not, re-adjust the gap



casing



between them.



Failure



of



3.



Electrify the stepping motor and



stepping



check whether it is rotatable. If it



motor driver



cannot rotate, check whether the



Failure



of



motor is burned out. If so, replace



device



the stepping motor; Check the



interface



cables of the motor. If failure exists,



board



repair or replace the cables. 4.



If



the



motor



does



not



rotate



synchronously with reducer when electrified,



it



indicates



that



the



connection of the motor and the reducer casing is loose. Re-screw the coupling in the reducer casing to enclasp the motor shaft.



11.



There



is



1.



abnormal noise



There



are



5.



Replace the failure driver



6.



Replace the fault board.



1.



Remove



the



cover



over



the



foreign



telescopic trunk in the traveling



objects



carriage assembly. Check whether



existing in the



the connection of the wire rope over



telescopic



the trunk 4 is loose or the residue



trunk.



wire rope is in disorder. If the



existing in the telescopic trunk or



the



telescopic trunk shakes fiercely. 2.



The



rail



of



telescopic



problem exists, solve it in time. 2.



Measure the gap between trunk and



trunk is worn



trunk end plate in various travel



out.



positions. If the gaps are severely ununiform, replace the telescopic trunk assembly.



12.



Telescopic trunk cannot be



1.



Failure



of



potentiometer



correctly - 167 -



1.



Check whether the potentiometer cables and connectors are securely



TROUBLESHOOTING



positioned when



2.



moving



upward



Failure



of



fixed



or



the



traveling



damaged.



carriage



accordingly.



potentiometer Make



is



solutions



and



downward.



signal



2.



Replace the fault board.



1.



Check whether the photoelectric



acquisition board 13.



Traveling



1.



carriage



Photoelectric switch sensor



switch sensor mounted on the



is damaged.



movable



Failure



damaged. If it is damaged, replace



assembly is not braked



when



moving



in



2.



thorax or table



of



photoelectric



position.



switch 3.



of



of



the



cables;



Check whether the photoelectric switch can be triggered normally. If



carriage



not, replace it. 3.



Electrify the electromagnet of



acquisition



brake and check whether it is in



board



normal status. If yes, it indicates the



Failure



of



gap between the friction block and



device



drive



the surface of brake is too big.



board 6.



replace



traveling



signal



5.



or



Check whether the cables of the



abnormal,



Failure



deformed



photoelectric switch are abnormal. If



brake 4.



is



it. 2.



Failure



rail



Re-adjust the gap according to the



Failure



of



adjusting method for replacing the



device



brake.



interface



4.



Replace the fault board.



1.



Manually move the telescopic trunk



board 14.



Abnormal noise exists



in



1.



the



Abnormal noise



from



upward and downward to check the



traveling carriage the



when



telescopic



trunk



moves



upward



and



2.



balancer



balancer



running



Abnormal



balancer



wire



noise



replace



from



the



status.



rope



is



balancer;



If



the



broken, If



the



motor



abnormal noise exists inside the



assembly



mainbody of balancer, replace the



downward. balancer.



- 168 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



2.



Check the motor status. If the abnormal noise exists in the motor and



the



problem



cannot



be



addressed, replace the motor or the reducer casing. 15.



Handpiece



1.



cannot



Failure



of



1.



Remove the back cover of L-arm.



motor



Check whether the motor cables are



assembly



in normal status. If not, replace



Driven gear is



them; If the motor runs normally but



loose and is



not rotating synchronously with the



not



output shaft of the reducer casing, it



automatically rotate vertically. 2.



3.



4.



5.



securely



meshed.



indicates



Failure of the



between the reducer casing and the



clutch or the



motor is loose. Remove the screw



brake.



and fasten it again.



Failure



of



2.



that



the



connection



Check whether the screws of the



stepping



motor are loose or the gears are



motor driver



severely worn out. If the problem



Failure



of



exists, make a repair or replacement



device



accordingly.



interface



3.



board



If no problem exists in the two steps above, check whether the cables of the clutch and the brake are well electrified. If no voltage provided, replace the cables; If the cables are in normal status, it should be the problem of L-arm drive assembly. So, replace the drive assembly.



16.



Handpiece



1.



cannot



Failure



of



4.



Replace the failure driver



5.



Replace the fault board.



1.



Electrify and press the horizontal



electromagne



rotation switch. If the lock bolt does



t in the bolt



not respond, check whether the



assembly



electromagnet works normally (i.e.



manually rotate horizontally. 2.



Failure



of



- 169 -



check the electromagnet and its



TROUBLESHOOTING



3.



horizontal-rot



cables). If it works abnormally, make



ation



a repair or replacement accordingly.



turntable



If the lock bolt responds but cannot



Failure



of



release freely, check whether the



device



drive



bolt assembly is loose, or the lock



board 4.



bolt is deformed. Make a repair or



Failure



of



device



replacement accordingly. 2.



Electrify and press the horizontal



interface



rotation switch. If the lock bolt



board



responds and escapes from the lock slot, it should be the failure of horizontal



rotation



turntable.



So



replace the assembly.



17.



The the



keys



on



1.



handpiece



does respond



Failure



of



3.



Replace the fault board.



1.



Check the related electrical parts (If



correspondin



disassembly needed, disassemble



g



according



not after



electrical



parts



being triggered.



or



Failure



of



g key board Failure



maintenance



problem lies in the electrical parts or cables. Depending on the situation,



correspondin



3.



the



procedures) to confirm whether the



cables 2.



to



make a repair and maintenance. 2.



Check the status of boards of the



of



system control cabinet. If the status



man-machine



is normal, the problem should be



interface



focused on the boards inside the



board



handpiece. Turn off the power and pull the high-voltage cable out of the tube. Remove the back shell, the handgrip and the front shell of the tube. If any problem is found, make a repair accordingly. 3.



- 170 -



Replace the fault board.



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.1.1 Disassembly and Installation of Shell This section mainly describes the installation and disassembly of general shells to make it easy for the engineers to provide service and maintenance and offer the basis for the determination of general failures.



5.1.1.1 Disassembly and Installation of the Shell of Movable Bridge Drive System 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 2







Examination period



period 20 min



15 min



5 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Lifter



-



-



1



-







Safety



BECAUSE THE SHELL OF THE MOVABLE BRIDGE DRIVE SYSTEM IS LONG AND HEAVY, ITS INSTALLATION AND DISASSEMBLY SHOULD BE DONE BY TWO PEOPLE AT LEAST. OTHERWISE, IT MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE SCREW HOLE. WHEN ONE PEOPLE REMOVES THE SCREWS, THE OTHER PEOPLE SHOULD HOLD THE SHELL OF THE MOVABLE BRIDGE DRIVE SYSTEM.







Disassembly



1.



Push the movable bridge in place for easy disassembly. Then turn off the DigiEye 760 system.



2.



Disassemble the shell of the movable bridge drive system as shown below. After ascending to a certain height by stepladder or lifter, use hex-key wrench to remove 4 hexagon socket screws (M4×10) for installing the shell of movable bridge drive system.



- 171 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Screw M4x10



Shell



of



movable



bridge drive system







Installation



Install the shell of movable bridge drive system as shown above. Fit the shell on the movable bridge using 4 hexagon socket screws (M4x10) with flat washer and spring washer.







Completion of adjustment and testing



None



5.1.1.2 Installation and Disassembly of the Traveling Carriage Shell and the Trunk Cover 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



2 



Examination period



period



20 min



30 min



5 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Lifter



-



-



1



-







Safety



DISASSEMBLY OF THE TRAVELING CARRIAGE SHELL SHOULD BE DONE BY TWO PEOPLE. OTHERWISE, IT MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE SHELL.



- 172 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







Disassembly



1.



Push the traveling carriage in place for easy disassembly. Then turn off the DigiEye 760 system.



2.



Two people work together to remove the 10 hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M4x8) of the front and back shells of traveling carriage for the disassembly. Be noted to disassemble the front shell first. M4X8 hexagon socket countersunk head screws



Back shell of Front shell of



traveling carriage



traveling carriage



3.



Remove the 4 M4X8 hexagon socket countersunk head screws for the disassembly of the drum of the traveling carriage. Place the drum under the telescopic trunk. Be cautious to prevent scratch when the drum drops downward.



Hexagon countersunk



socket head



screws M4X8







Installation



1.



Install the two fixing plates and the drum. Pay attention to the installing direction.



2.



Two people install the front and back shells on the traveling carriage against the disassembly methods. Back shell should be installed firstly.







Completion of adjustment and testing



None



5.1.1.3 Disassembly and Installation of L-Arm Back Cover - 173 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



10 min



15 min



5 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-







Disassembly



Remove the two combination screws (M3X8) for the disassembly of L-arm back cover.



Combination screw M3X8 L-arm back cover







Installation



Buckle the L-arm back cover and fasten it by using 2 combination screws M3X8.







Completion of adjustment and testing



None



5.1.1.4 Disassembly and Installation of Back Shell of Handpiece 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1



Examination period



period 15 min



30 min



- 174 -



10 min



TROUBLESHOOTING







Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-







Disassembly



1.



Loosen the M3 set screw and the fixing ring on the high-voltage cable connector. Remove 2 cables and place into the package. Cover the tube high-voltage cable connector using a end cap.



Set screw M3 High-voltage cable connector Fixing ring of high-voltage cable connector



2.



Remove the 6 hexagon socket countersunk head screws M4x8 fixed on the back shell of tube. Remove the back shell.







Installation



Install the back shell of tube by using 6 hexagon socket countersunk head screws M4X8.



- 175 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Clean the high-voltage cable with alcohol and dust-free clothes and smear silicon on the



1.



surface. Remove the end cap of the tube cable connector and plug the high-voltage cable into the connector (be noted of the polarity). Before the cable is plugged in, the high-voltage cable connector must be plugged into the related groove of the tube cable connector. Afterwards, screw the fixing ring of high-voltage connector and fasten the M3 set screw.







Completion of adjustment and testing



Power on. Make an exposure to check whether the exposure function is normal.



5.1.1.5 Disassembly and Installation of the Top Cover of Stand Column 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 15 min



20 min



5 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Lifter



-



-



1



-







Disassembly



Remove the two M3×8 combination screws of the stand column top cover. Then remove the top cover. 2.



Draw out the connection wire of the LED indicator light of stand column.







Installation



Plug the connection wire of the LED indicator light of stand column. 3.



Install the top cover on the upside of the stand column by using 2 M3X8 combination screws.Be noted that the gap between joint surfaces should be uniform.







Completion of adjustment and testing



Power on. Test the LED indicator light of stand column to check if it works normally.



5.1.1.6 Disassembly and Installation of the Front Cover of Stand Column



- 176 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 15 min



60 min



15 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Lifter



-



-



1



-







Disassembly



Loosen the two M3×8 combination screws of the stand column top cover. Then remove the top cover. 4.



Loosen the M3×8 combination screws of the back shell of bottom cover of stand column. Push the back shell to make it move horizontally and backward. Then remove the back shell of bottom cover.



5.



Loosen the two M3×8 combination screws of the front shell of bottom cover of stand column. Push the front shell to make it move horizontally and frontward. Remove the front shell of bottom cover until the upper and lower presser slices on the bottom cover are separated.



6.



Move the FPD support arm assembly to the lowest of stand column. Loosen the two M4×8 combination screws on the stand column front cover and draw out the front cover upward.



DO NOT scratch the surface during the disassembly.



- 177 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Top cover I-shaped



and



L-shaped back SID Monitor



fixing plate



Stand column Motion



signal



Counterpoise



acquisition box



assembly



Front cover of stand column Front shell of bottom



Pulley assembly



cover of stand column



Back shell of bottom cover of stand column







Installation



Move the FPD support arm assembly to the lowest of stand column. Plug the front cover of stand column from upside. Fit the two M4×8 combination screws on the front cover of stand column to fasten the front cover together with the stand column. 7.



Fit the two M3×8 combination screws of the stand column top cover to install the top cover.



8.



Push the front shell of bottom cover of stand column frontward and backward to make the upper presser slice well fit the lower presser slice. Fix the front shell of bottom cover onto the lower cover by using 2 M3×8 combination screws.



9.



Push the back shell of bottom cover of stand column from the back to the front. When the back cover and the front cover are positioned in place, fasten M3X8 combination screws to fix the back shell of bottom cover onto the lower cover.







Completion of adjustment and testing



Move the FPD and support arm assembly upward and downward and check whether scratch or abnormal noise occurs during the movement.



5.1.1.7 Disassembly and Installation of the Bottom Cover and Lateral Cover of FPD Support Arm 



Manpower demand



- 178 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 15 min



20 min



5 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-







Disassembly



1.



Raise the FPD and support arm assembly to the maximum height as shown below. Rotate the FPD to the horizontal position (If the motor-driven push rod is damaged, refer to the contents hereinafter.).



2.



Remove the four hexagon socket countersunk head screws M4X8 fixing the lower cover of support arm. Then remove the lower cover.



3.



Remove the six hexagon socket countersunk head screws M4X8 fixing the lateral cover of support arm. Then remove the lateral cover.



FPD connector plate



Support arm



Handgrip of detector Center pin Lower cover of



Pusher-bar



Motor-driven



support arm



motor base



push bar



Lateral cover of support arm







Installation



1.



Use 6 hexagon socket countersunk head screws M3X8 to fix the lateral cover of support arm.



- 179 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



2.



Use 4 hexagon socket countersunk head screws M3X8 to fix the lower cover of support arm.



When the lateral cover is blocked by FPD so that the FPD cannot rotate, the following steps can be taken: 1.



Ascend the FPD and support arm assembly to the maximum height and remove the “lower cover of support arm”.



2.



Pull out the power cord of motor.



3.



One people hold the detector handgrip with hands to prevent the detector rotating. Remove the 3 screws fixing the pusher-bar motor base. (Notice: Be careful with the operation to prevent FPD rotating when removing the screws!)Pull the detector handgrip and move the FPD to horizontal position. Then remove the lateral cover of support arm.







Completion of adjustment and testing



None



5.1.1.8 Disassembly and Installation of FPD Front Cover 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 15 min



20 min



5 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-







Disassembly



1.



Turn off the power and remove the grid.Remove the top and front covers of stand column. Use screws to lock the stand column pulley so that FPD and the support arm assembly cannot move upward or downward.



- 180 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



M5X12 Hexagon socket screw



2.



Rotate FPD to the vertical position and remove the M4x16 cross recessed pan head screw in the upside and middle of the front shell.



3.



Rotate FPD to the horizontal position and remove the other 5 M4x16 cross recessed pan head screws of the front shell. Then remove the shell.







Installation



1.



Install the front shell.



2.



In the horizontal position of FPD, use 5 M4x16 cross recessed pan head screws to fix the front shell.



3.



In the vertical position of FPD, use 1 M4x16 cross recessed pan head screw to fix the front shell.







Completion of adjustment and testing



None



- 181 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.2 Stand Column Assembly 5.2.1 Replace the Wire Rope of Stand Column 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



2







Examination period



20 min



180 min



40 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Lifter



-



-



1



-







Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Wire rope of stand



DR70-20-82250



-



2



Shenzhen Mai



column







Ji



Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



Stand column assembly







Disassembly



1.



Remove the two M3×8 combination screws of the stand column top cover. Then remove the top cover.



2.



Remove the M3×8 combination screws of the back shell of bottom cover of stand column. Push the back shell to make it move horizontally and backward. Then remove the back shell of bottom cover.



3.



Remove the two M3×8 combination screws of the front shell of bottom cover of stand - 182 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



column. Push the front shell to make it move horizontally and frontward. Remove the front shell of bottom cover until the upper and lower presser slices on the bottom cover are separated. 4.



Remove the two M4×8 combination screws respectively in the upside and the downside of the stand column front cover. Then remove the front cover.



Top cover I-shaped



and



L-shaped back SID Monitor



fixing plate



Stand column Motion



signal



acquisition box Front cover of



Counterpoise assembly



stand column Front shell of bottom



Pulley assembly



cover of stand column



Back shell of bottom cover of stand column



5.



Remove 4 M5X12 hexagon socket screws from the bottom of stand column to lock the pulley and counterpoise box.



Spare screws



6.



Move the lifter under the FPD support arm and ascend it to approach the lower surface of the support arm. Remove the 4 hexagon bolts M8×25 fixing FPD and support arm - 183 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



assembly. Then remove the FPD and support arm.



Be careful when removing FPD and support arm to avoid damage of FPD. Then place them carefully.



7.



Remove the counterpoise.



8.



Remove the 4 M8×60 I-shaped expansion bolts and nuts on the bottom of stand column.



9.



Disconnect the stand column top cable connector and remove the protective cover of the wiring slot on the wall.



10. Remove the M8x25 hexagon screws connecting L-shaped and I-shaped back fixing plates, and the two M8×60 I-shaped expansion bolts fastening L-shaped fixing plate on the wall. Then remove the L-shaped fixing plate. 11. Remove the two M8×25 hexagon socket screws connecting I-shaped back fixing plate and the upper cover. Then remove the I-shaped back fixing plate. 12. Put down the stand column. 13. Remove the M3X5 hexagon socket set screws with cup point that fasten the potentiometer gear 1 and gear 3. Then disengage the potentiometer gear 1 and gear 3 of the top drive assembly from each other.



Potentiometer gear 1



Potentiometer gear 3



14. Remove 4 M5X12 hexagon socket screws to loosen the pulley and counterpoise box. 15. Remove 4 M5X16 hexagon socket screws fixing the upper cover. 16. Slide the counterpoise box, loosen the M3X5 hexagon socket set screws with cup point of wire rope fixed assembly, push away the bushing fixed with wire rope, remove the



- 184 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



scraped wire rope and replace it with a new one. Bushing fixed with wire rope Hexagon socket set screws with cup point M3X5



Wire rope



17. Push the counterpoise box into the stand column and slide it out of the pulley, loosen the M3X5 hexagon socket set screws with cup point of wire rope fixed assembly, push away the bushing fixed with wire rope and remove the scraped wire rope.







Installation



1.



Tread the new wire rope through the hole on the upper cover to connect the pulley.



Wire rope must not be screwed and should be dust-free.



2.



Push the pulley into the stand column.



3.



Fasten the upper cover onto the stand column with 4 hexagon socket screws M5X16.



4.



Lock the pulley and counterpoise box with 4 hexagon socket screws M5X12. - 185 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.



Stand the stand column and screw 4 nuts of I-shaped expansion bolts into the bottom of stand column.



6.



Fasten the I-shaped back fixing plate onto the upper cover with 2 hexagon socket screws M8×25. To fasten them more securely, make 2 hexagon socket cap head screws M5X25 pass through the I-shaped back fixing plate and the upper cover.



7.



Use 2 hexagon bolts M8×25 and 2 nuts M8 to connect the L-shaped back fixing plate with I-shaped back fixing plate. Then put 2 I-shaped expansion bolts through the waist hole of L-shaped back fixing plate to fasten the stand column onto the wall.



8.



Plug two locating pins on the stand column traveling carriage into 2 locating holes on the FPD support arm. And then use 4 hexagon bolts M8X25 to fasten the FPD and support arm assembly onto the stand column.



9.



Place the counterpoise into the counterpoise box.



10. Loosen the pulley and the counterpoise box (remove 4 hexagon socket screws M5X12 and screw them into the screw holes on the bottom of the stand column). 11. Push FPD and the support arm assembly to the top of stand column. Rotate the potentiometer gear 1 of the top drive assembly to the end clockwise. Then rotate it counterclockwise for 2 cycles to mesh with the potentiometer gear 3. Finally, fasten the hexagon socket set screws with cup point M3X5.



Rotate potentiometer gear 1 clockwise



12. Re-connect the stand column top cables. 13. Adjust the stand column to the vertical position and the FPD to the center. Screw the I-shaped expansion bolts and nuts (M8X60) (refer to the “Installation Manual”). 14. Fit the two M4×8 combination screws respectively in the upside and the downside of the stand column front cover. Then fasten the front cover onto the stand column. 15. Fit the two M3×8 combination screws of the stand column top cover to install the top cover of stand column. - 186 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



16. Push the front shell of bottom cover of stand column frontward and backward to make the upper presser slice well fit the lower presser slice. Fix the front shell of bottom cover onto the lower cover by using 2 M3×8 combination screws. 17. Push the back shell of bottom cover of stand column from the back to the front. When the back cover and the front cover are positioned in place, fasten M3X8 combination screws to fix the back shell of bottom cover onto the lower cover.







Completion of adjustment and testing



Calibrate the detector height as follows: 1.



Click Location ＞ System Setting ＞ Calibration ＞ Detector Height to enter the detector height calibration interface.



Detector height measurement indicates the distance from the stand column mounting surface to the FPD support arm upper surface.



2.



Move the detector to the lowest position (do not trigger the travel switch). The measured value of the detector height is 300±2mm. Set it the “Detector height 1” and click Confirm.



3.



Move the detector to the highest position. The measured value of detector height is 1800±2mm. Set this value the “Detector height 2” and click Confirm.



4.



Click Quit to return to the Calibration interface.



The records for calibration are the potentiometer values. After the height of FPD support arm changes, do not click “Confirm”. Subsequent operations are the same.



- 187 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.2.2 Replace the Chain 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 20 min



90 min



30 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-







Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Chain RS25



031-000005-00



-



1



Chun Ben Chain







Safety



- 188 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN.







Attached assembly



Stand column assembly







Disassembly



1.



Loosen the two M3×8 combination screws of the stand column top cover. Then remove the top cover.



2.



Loosen the M3×8 combination screws of the back shell of bottom cover of stand column. Push the back shell to make it move horizontally and backward. Then remove the back shell.



3.



Loosen the two M3×8 combination screws of the front shell of bottom cover of stand column. Push the front shell to make it move horizontally and frontward. Remove the front shell until the upper and lower presser slices on the bottom cover are separated.



4.



Remove the two M4×8 combination screws respectively in the upside and the downside of the stand column front cover. Then remove the front cover.



- 189 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Top cover I-shaped



and



L-shaped back SID Monitor



fixing plate



Stand column Motion



signal



acquisition box Front cover of



Counterpoise assembly



stand column Front shell of bottom



Pulley assembly



cover of stand column



Back shell of bottom cover of stand column 5.



Remove the M3X5 hexagon socket set screws with cup point that fasten the potentiometer gear 1 and gear 3. Then disengage the potentiometer gear 1 and gear 3 of the top drive assembly from each other (refer to the figure below).



Potentiometer gear 1



Potentiometer gear 3



6.



Remove the chain clasps and disassemble the chain from the coupling shaft of the pulley and chain (refer to the figure below).



- 190 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Chain clasp Chain



Coupling shaft of pulley and chain



7.



Remove the chain clasp and disassemble the chain from the counterpoise assembly (refer to the figure below).



Stand column



Chain



Chain clasp



Counterpoise assembly







Installation



1.



Have a new chain connected with the counterpoise assembly.



2.



Thread the chain through the hole on the upper cover and have the chain meshed with the front and back sprocket wheels of stand column.



3.



Connect the chain with the coupling shaft of pulley and chain.



Chain can not be screwed and should be dust-free.



4.



Push FPD and the support arm assembly to the top of stand column. Rotate the potentiometer gear 1 of the top drive assembly to the end clockwise. Then rotate it - 191 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



counterclockwise for 2 cycles to mesh with the potentiometer gear 3. Finally, fasten the hexagon socket set screws with cup point M3X5 (refer to the figure below). 5.



Fit the two M4×8 combination screws respectively in the upside and the downside of the stand column front cover. Then fasten the front cover onto the stand column.



6.



Fit the two M3×8 combination screws of the stand column top cover to install the top cover.



7.



Push the front shell of bottom cover of stand column frontward and backward to make the upper presser slice well fit the lower presser slice on the bottom cover. Fix the front shell of bottom cover onto the lower cover by using 2 M3×8 combination screws.



8.



Push the back shell of bottom cover of stand column from the back to the front. When the back cover and the front cover are positioned in place, fasten M3X8 combination screws to fix the back shell of bottom cover onto the lower cover.



Rotate the potentiometer gear 1 clockwise







Completion of adjustment and testing



Calibrate the detector height as follows: 1.



Click Location ＞ System Setting ＞ Calibration ＞ Detector Height to enter the detector height calibration interface.



Detector height measurement indicates the distance from the stand column mounting surface to the FPD support arm upper surface.



2.



Move the detector to the lowest position (do not trigger the travel switch). The measured value of the detector height is 300±2mm. Set it the “Detector height 1” and click Confirm.



- 192 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



3.



Move the detector to the highest position. The measured value of detector height is 1800±2mm. Set this value the “Detector height 2” and click Confirm.



4.



Click Quit to return to the Calibration interface.



The records for calibration are the potentiometer values. After the height of FPD support arm changes, do not click “Confirm”. Subsequent operations are the same.



5.2.3 Replace the Top Drive Assembly 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 20 min



90 min



30 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



- 193 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Chain RS25



031-000005-00



-



1



Chun Ben Chain







Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN.







Attached assembly



Stand column assembly







Disassembly



1.



Loosen the two M3×8 combination screws of the stand column top cover. Then pull off the indicator light cable of stand column and remove the top cover.



2.



Disconnect the cables of the clutch, motor and potentiometer on the top of the stand column.



3.



Remove the back shell of bottom cover of stand column and disassemble the front shell assembly of bottom cover of stand column.



4.



Remove the front cover of stand column.



5.



Remove the M3X5 hexagon socket set screws with cup point that fasten the potentiometer gear 1 and gear 3. Then disengage the potentiometer gear 1 and gear 3 of the top drive assembly from each other (as shown below).



- 194 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Potentiometer gear 1



Potentiometer gear 3



6.



Loosen the nut below and remove the chain from the pulley assembly of stand column. Then bring back the nut onto the coupling shaft of pulley and chain.



Nut



Coupling shaft of pulley and chain



7.



Loosen the four screws M5 fixing the top drive assembly and remove the top drive assembly. Be careful not to have the chain drop into the stand column during the disassembly.







Installation



1.



Thread the chain through the chain threading hole in the back of the replaced top drive assembly. Fit the top drive assembly onto the top of stand column.



2.



Disengage the potentiometer gears of the new top drive assembly from each other according to step 5 of disassembly.



3.



Mesh the chain with the front and back sprocket wheels of stand column. And connect the chain to the coupling shaft of pulley and chain.



- 195 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Chain can not be screwed and should be dust-free.



4.



Push FPD and the support arm assembly to the top of stand column. Rotate the potentiometer gear 1 of the top drive assembly to the end clockwise. Then rotate it counterclockwise for 2 cycles to mesh with the potentiometer gear 3. Finally, fasten the hexagon socket set screws with cup point (M3X5).



Rotate the potentiometer gear 1 clockwise



5.



Connect the cables of the motor, clutch and potentiometer of stand column.



6.



Power on the system. Check whether the stand column can run normally and whether there is any abnormal noise in the calibration status. If any problem exists, investigate the cause and solve the problem.



7.



Install the front cover of stand column, and the front shell and the back shell of bottom cover of stand column.



8.



Connect the cables of stand column indicator light and install the top cover of stand column.







Completion of adjustment and testing



Power on the system and rotate the FPD to 0°. Then enter the calibration interface for detector height calibration as follows: 1.



Click Location ＞ System Setting ＞ Calibration ＞ Detector Height to enter the detector height calibration interface.



Detector height measurement indicates the distance from the stand column



- 196 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



mounting surface to the FPD support arm upper surface.



2.



Move the detector to the height of 580mm, click Confirm under the Detector height 1 “692”.



3.



Move the detector to the height of 1,260mm, click Confirm under the Detector height 2 “1372”.



4.



Click Quit to return to the Calibration interface.



The records for calibration are the potentiometer values. After the height of FPD support arm changes, do not click “Confirm”. Subsequent operations are the same.



5.2.4 Replace the Motor of Stand Column 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



20 min



90 min



30 min



Tools and testing devices Item Feeler (thickness



Serial code



Description



Quantity



-



-



1



-



-



1



Manufacturer



of 0.2mm) Standard service tools











-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



DC motor BCI-42.40-SA40



DR70-21-101613



-



1



Manufacturer EBMPAPST



Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT - 197 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE. 



WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN.







Attached assembly



Top drive assembly







Disassembly



1.



Loosen the two M3×8 combination screws of the stand column top cover. Then remove the top cover.



2.



Disconnect the cables of the clutch and motor on the top of the stand column.



3.



Loosen 3 hexagon socket cap head screws M5X16 and remove the connectors of the top cover (refer to the figure below).



4.



Loosen the two hexagon socket cap head screws M5X16 on the driven base board of stand column that fasten the motor fixed plate of stand column. Then remove the motor fixed plate (refer to the figure below).



5.



Loosen the two hexagon socket set screws with cup point that fasten clutch armature. Then remove the clutch armature off the motor output shaft of stand column.



6.



Loosen the four hexagon socket cap head screws M3X10 that fasten the motor of stand column. Then remove the motor off the motor fixed plate of stand column.







Installation



1.



Fasten the four hexagon socket cap head screws M3X10. Then fit the new motor onto the motor fixed plate of stand column.



Note: Key 4X4X16 should be available on the motor output shaft of stand column. 2.



Fasten the two hexagon socket cap head screws M5X16. Fix the motor fixed plate onto the driven base board of stand column.



3.



Fasten the 3 hexagon socket cap head screws M5X16 and fit the connectors of the top cover.



4.



Slide the electromagnetic clutch armature along the DC motor output shaft. Adjust the gap between the clutch armature and the clutch rotor to 0.2mm with feeler. Then fasten the two hexagon socket set screws with cup point M3X5 with the moment of force controlled in 10 to 20 kgf·mm.



5.



Re-connect the motor cables of stand column.



6.



Fasten the two M3×8 combination screws fixing the stand column top cover to fit the top - 198 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



cover of stand column.



Motor of stand



Clutch armature



column



Motor fixed plate of stand column







Completion of adjustment and testing



Power on the system and check whether the vertical movement (upward and downward) of FPD is normal.



5.2.5 Replace LED Indicator Light Plate of Stand Column 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 20 min



90 min



30 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Cross head



-



-



1



-



screwdriver (S)







Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



LED indicator light



DR70-30-82077



-



1



-



plate



of



stand



column







Safety



- 199 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN.







WHILE REPLACING PCBA, DO WEAR ANTISTATIC DEVICE SUCH AS ESD RING OR ANTISTATIC GLOVES.







Attached assembly



Top cover assembly







Disassembly



1.



Loosen the two M3×8 combination screws of the stand column top cover. Then remove the top cover.



2.



Cut the power supply extension wire off the LED indicator light plate of the stand column.



3.



Remove two self-tapping cross recessed pan head screws without sharp point PT3X6. Then remove the LED indicator light plate and the indicator light of stand column (refer to the figure “Remove the indicator light of stand column” below).







Installation



1.



Connect new LED indicator light plate and indicator light together (refer to the figure “Installation of indicator light and LED indicator light plate of stand column”).



2.



Fasten two self-tapping cross recessed pan head screws without sharp point PT3X6. Then fix the LED indicator light plate and the indicator light onto the stand column top cover.



3.



Connect the power supply extension wire with the LED indicator light plate of stand column.



4.



Fasten the two M3×8 combination screws fixing the stand column top cover to fit the top cover of stand column.



- 200 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Self-tapping cross recessed pan head screws without sharp point PT3X6



Top cover of stand column



Indicator light of stand column



LED indicator light plate of stand column







Completion of adjustment and testing



Power on the system and follow the moving function to check whether the LED indicator light works normally.



5.2.6 Replace SID Display Panel 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 20 min



30 min



30 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Cross head



-



-



1



-



screwdriver (S)







Replace components Item SID monitor assembly







Serial code



Description



801-DR70-00005-00



SID monitor



Safety



- 201 -



assembly



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



TROUBLESHOOTING







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN.







Attached assembly



Stand column assembly







Disassembly



1.



Remove the top cover assembly of stand column.



2.



Remove the four screws that fasten the SID monitor front shell. Then remove the SID monitor front shell.



3.



Pull the SID and LED indicator connection cable off the SID display panel.



4.



Loosen the two M5 screws that fasten SID monitor support arm. Then remove the SID monitor assembly to be replaced.







Installation



1.



Fit a new SID monitor assembly onto the stand column assembly by using two M5 screws.



2.



Remove the four screws fixing the SID monitor front shell. Then disassemble the front shell. And connect the SID and LED indicator connection cable to the SID display panel.



3.



Fasten 4 pan head combination screws M3X8 to fit the SID monitor front shell.



4.



Organize the SID and LED indicator connection cable. Then install the top cover assembly of stand column. SID and LED indicator connection cable



SID display panel



SID monitor



Pan head combination



front shell



screw M3X8



- 202 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







Completion of adjustment and testing



Power on the system and check whether the SID monitor panel works normally.



5.2.7 Replace the Signal Acquisition Board of Stand Column 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 20 min



30 min



20 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Hex-key wrench



-



-



1



-



-



-



1



-



(9-piece package) Cross head screwdriver (M)







Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Signal acquisition



DR70-30-82083



-



1



-



board of stand column







Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHILE REPLACING PCBA, DO WEAR ANTISTATIC DEVICE SUCH AS ESD RING OR ANTISTATIC GLOVES.







Attached assembly



Motion signal acquisition box assembly







Disassembly



1.



Loosen the two hexagon socket countersunk head screws M3X8 respectively in the upside and downside of the motion signal acquisition box. Then remove the front cover of - 203 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



the motion signal acquisition box (refer to the figure below). 2.



Draw out the plug on the signal acquisition board of stand column.



3.



Loosen the eight pan head combination screws M3X8 that fasten the signal acquisition board of stand column. Remove the signal acquisition board off the back cover of the motion signal acquisition box (refer to the figure below).







Installation



1.



Fasten the eight pan head combination screws M3X8. And fit a new signal acquisition



2.



Insert the plug back into the signal acquisition board.



3.



Fasten the two hexagon socket countersunk head screws M3X8 respectively in the



board onto the back cover of the motion signal acquisition box.



upside and downside of the motion signal acquisition box. Then fit the front cover of the motion signal acquisition box. Signal acquisition board of stand column



Back cover of motion



Hexagon socket countersunk head screw M3X8



signal acquisition box



Combination screws M3X8 Front cover of motion signal acquisition box







Completion of adjustment and testing



Power on the system and check whether the system works normally. Re-conduct the location calibration.



5.2.8 Replace the Potentiometer Assembly 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 20 min



30 min



20 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



- 204 -



Quantity



Manufacturer



TROUBLESHOOTING



Hex-key wrench



-



-



1



-



-



-



1



-



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



Sakae



(9-piece package) Cross head screwdriver (S)







Replace components Item 10-loop potentiometer







Serial code



Description



801-DR70-00048-00



Potentiometer assembly



Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN.







Attached assembly



Top drive assembly







Disassembly



1.



Loosen the two M3×8 combination screws of the stand column top cover. Then remove the top cover.



2.



Remove the M3X5 hexagon socket set screws with cup point that fasten the potentiometer gear 1 and gear 3. Then disengage the potentiometer gear 1 and gear 3 of the top drive assembly from each other (refer to the figure below).



3.



Loosen the thin nuts of potentiometer and remove the damaged potentiometer.







Installation



1.



Replace the potentiometer with new one. And fasten the potentiometer thin nuts.



2.



Install a new potentiometer gear 1 and fasten it with new hexagon socket set screws with cup point.



3.



Push FPD and the support arm assembly to the top of stand column. Rotate the potentiometer gear 1 to the end clockwise. Then rotate it counterclockwise for 2 cycles, fit the potentiometer gear 3 and mesh the potentiometer gear 1 with the potentiometer gear 3. Finally, fasten the hexagon socket set screws with cup point M3X5 (refer to the figure “Potentiometer adjustment”).



4.



Fasten the two M3×8 combination screws fixing the stand column top cover to fit the top



- 205 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



cover of stand column. Thin



nut



of



potentiometer Potentiometer gear 1



Potentiometer gear 3



Rotate the potentiometer gear 1 clockwise







Completion of adjustment and testing



Power on the system and rotate the FPD to 0°. Then enter the calibration interface for detector height calibration as follows: 1.



Click Location ＞ System Setting ＞ Calibration ＞ Detector Height to enter the detector height calibration interface.



Detector height measurement indicates the distance from the stand column mounting surface to the FPD support arm upper surface.



2.



Move the detector to the height of 580mm, click Confirm under the Detector height 1 “692”.



- 206 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



3.



Move the detector to the height of 1,260mm, click Confirm under the Detector height 2 “1372”.



4.



Click Quit to return to the Calibration interface.



The records for calibration are the potentiometer values. After the height of FPD support arm changes, do not click “Confirm”. Subsequent operations are the same.



- 207 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.3 FPD and Support Arm Assembly This section provides technical support for the troubleshooting of FPD and support arm assembly. The illustration of FPD and support arm assembly is shown below:



G1 emergency OFF switch



G0 FPD and support arm assembly



The exploded view of this module is shown as follows: Front



shell



assembly of FPD



Grid holder



Grid assembly Fiber sensor driver



Ion chamber



Fiber sensor



FPD



FPD keyboard



Potentiometer



Motor-driven push bar



Photoelectric switch EX-14A



5.3.1 Replace Motor-driven Push Bar 



Manpower demand



- 208 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



2







Examination period



10 min



60 min



30 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Motor assembly



801-DR70-00015-00



Motor



1



-



assembly







Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



FPD and support arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Raise the FPD and support assembly to the maximum height as shown below. Rotate the FPD to the horizontal position (If the motor-driven push rod is damaged, refer to the contents hereinafter.).



2.



Remove the four hexagon socket countersunk head screws M4X8 fixing the lower cover of support arm. Then remove the lower cover.



3.



Remove the six hexagon socket countersunk head screws M4X8 fixing the lateral cover of support arm. Then remove the lateral cover.



4.



Pull out the power cord of motor-driven push bar.



5.



Remove the circlip on the center pin of FPD connector plate by using circlip plier.



6.



One people hold the detector handgrip with hands and keep the FPD remaining in the horizontal position.



7.



Remove the three hexagon socket cap head screws M6X12 (with spring washer) fixing the pusher-bar motor base under the FPD support arm.



8.



Draw out the center pin that connects motor push bar and FPD connector plate. Remove the motor assembly from the inside of the support arm as shown in the following figure.



- 209 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



FPD connector plate



Support arm



Detector handgrip



Center pin



The direction removing the motor-driven Lower cover of



Pusher-bar



Motor-driven



support arm



motor base



push bar



Lateral



push



cover



of support arm When the lateral cover is blocked by FPD so that the FPD cannot rotate, the following steps can be taken: 1.



Ascend the FPD and support arm assembly to the maximum height and remove the “lower cover of support arm”.



2.



Pull out the power cord of motor.



3.



One people hold the detector handgrip with hands to prevent the detector rotating. Remove the 3 screws fixing the pusher-bar motor base. (Notice: Be careful with the operation to prevent FPD rotating when removing the screws!)Pull the detector handgrip and move the FPD to horizontal position. Then remove the lateral cover of support arm.



4.



The following steps are the same with step 4, 5 and 8 described above.







Installation



1.



Install the motor assembly in the opposite order with the steps above. If the travel of the motor-driven push bar is too long or short, rotate the push bar manually to lengthen or shorten it. And fit the center pin.



2. Fasten the pusher-bar motor base onto the bottom of support arm with 3 M6X12 screws. 3. Connect the push bar and FPD connector plate using the center pin and add a circlip. 4. Fit the lower cover and lateral cover of support arm.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on the system and enter into DROC.



2. Control keys on FPD to turn over the FPD to the maximum angle of 90°and to the minimum angle of -20°.



- 210 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.3.2 Replace the Switch for FPD Vertical Movement 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



2







Examination period



10 min



60 min



30 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Photoelectric



024-000009-00



Description Sensor



sensing



switch for FPD



distance



2~25mm



vertical movement



light-on



Maximum



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



20mA Cable length 150m







Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



FPD and support arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Remove the lower cover of support arm and pull out the cable connector of photoelectric switch.



2. Firstly, remove the motor blocking the photoelectric switch (refer to the motor disassembly steps mentioned above). 3. Remove the two M4X10 hexagon socket screws. Then disassemble the switch assembly for FPD vertical movement. 4.



The switch assembly for FPD vertical movement is illustrated as below. To replace the photoelectric switch, remove two M2X10 screws. - 211 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Lower cover of support arm



Switch assembly for FPD vertical movement



EA14-A



Photoelectric switch holder







Installation



1.



Fasten the EA14-A onto the photoelectric switch holder with M2X10 cross recessed pan head screw.



2. Fasten the switch assembly for FPD vertical movement onto the lateral wall of support arm using M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws. 3. Connect the cable of photoelectric switch. 4. Fit back the motor-driven push bar. 5. Fit the lower cover and lateral cover of support arm.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on the system and enter into DROC.



2. Pull the handgrip on the FPD support arm with hand and check whether the photoelectric switch works normally. Normal working status means that FPD can move upward and downward by pulling the handgrip when the system is programmed. When you loosen your grip, FPD is locked and cannot move.



5.3.3 Replace FPD Rotation Potentiometer



- 212 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



2







Examination period



10 min



60 min



30 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Potentiometer



801-DR70-00030-00



Potentiometer



1



-



assembly







assembly



Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



FPD and support arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Rotate FPD to the horizontal position (If it cannot rotate due to damage of potentiometer, remove the screws on the motor base and then rotate FPD to the horizontal position (refer to the figure below).)



2.



Remove the six hexagon socket countersunk head screws M3X8 fixing the lateral cover of support arm. Then remove the lateral cover.



3.



Disassemble the connection cable on the potentiometer and remove three M4X10 screws. Finally, disassemble the potentiometer assembly.



- 213 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Lateral cover of support arm



Potentiometer assembly







Installation



1.



Adjust the new potentiometer assembly to 1.5-loop position and put back into the support



2.



Connect the cable of potentiometer.



3.



Fit the lower cover and lateral cover of support arm.







Completion of adjustment and testing



arm. Loosen the screws to make the gears in mesh. Then fasten the screws.



Power on the system. Enter the calibration program to re-calibrate the standard position of FPD. Refer to Sec. 6.2.1.2 of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual for more details.



5.3.4 Replace the Travel Switch on the Grid 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Travel switch



M07-00143S---



-



1



-



- 214 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



FPD and support arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Fit the grid.



2.



Rotate FPD to the vertical position and remove the M4x16 cross recessed pan head screw in the upside and middle of the front shell.Rotate FPD to the horizontal position and remove the other 5 M4x16 cross recessed pan head screws of the front shell. Then remove the shell.



3.



Disassemble the connection cable and remove the M2X10 pan head screws that fasten the travel switch. Then replace the travel switch on the grid holder.



Travel switch







Installation



1.



Fit the travel switch and fasten it with M2X10 cross recessed pan head screws.



2.



Plug cables for the travel switch.



3.



Install the front shell of FPD. When FPD is in the horizontal position, fit M4X16 screws on the four corners of shell from downside to upside. After the FPD is rotated to the vertical position, fasten the two screws in the middle.



- 215 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Screw hole



Screw hole







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on and enter into the system.



2.



Insert 1M grid and 1.8M grid respectively to check whether the replaced travel switch is correctly triggered. If not triggered, the travel switch should be adjusted in place till it is correctly triggered according to the steps described in the section above.



5.3.5 Replace Converter Assembly 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



30 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Converter



801-DR70-00055-00



Converter assembly



1



-



assembly







Safety



- 216 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



FPD and support arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Fit the grid.



2.



Rotate FPD to the vertical position and remove the M4x16 cross recessed pan head screw in the upside and middle of the front shell. Rotate FPD to the horizontal position and remove the other 5 M4x16 cross recessed pan head screws of the front shell. Then remove the shell.



3.



Remove two M4X8 combination screws. Then remove the fiber sensor driver assembly.



M4X8 combination screw



M3X8 combination screw







Fiber sensor driver



Installation



Refer to the adjustment and testing







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Remove the two M3X8 combination screws on the converter assembly. Connect the fiber and power cord to the new fiber sensor driver. Power on the system. And adjust the parameters of the fiber sensor driver, keeping the fiber sensor in proper sensing distance. Specific adjusting methods are as follows: a)



Power on the system and enter into DROC.



b)



Connect the cable of sensor to electrify the sensor. Continuously press the MODE button until the MODE indicator light ADJ (yellow) shows (refer to the figure below). - 217 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



c)



Move the HIGHLIGHT switch in the “+” or “-” direction. Press the HIGHLIGHT switch until the magnifier displays “120” (the display screen twinkles). Refer to the figure below.



d)



Continuously press the MODE button until the MODE indicator light RUN (green) shows. Then press and hold the MODE button and HIGHLIGHT switch for more than 2 seconds in one time until the screen shows “LOC”. The buttons are thereby locked.



e)



Fit the upper cover of magnifier and complete the settings. MODE button



HIGHLIGHT switch



2.



Fix the fiber sensor driver with M3X8 combination screws.



3.



Cover the FPD front shell assembly. Firstly, apply the screws to fix the four corners of the shell. Then rotate FPD to the vertical position to apply the screws in the middle.



5.3.6 Replace the Fiber Sensor 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Sensor driver



024-000007-00



Fiber sensor driver



1



-







Safety



- 218 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



FPD and support arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Turn off the power and fit the grid.



2.



Rotate FPD to the vertical position and remove the M4x16 cross recessed pan head screw in the upside and middle of the front shell.Rotate FPD to the horizontal position and remove the other 5 M4x16 cross recessed pan head screws of the front shell. Then remove the shell.



3.



Remove the thin nuts fixing photoelectric sensor and replace the photoelectric sensor.



Fiber sensor



Thin nuts







Installation



1.



Place the new fiber sensor into the hole and fix it with two thin nuts.



2.



Connect the fiber to the fiber sensor driver.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Adjust the parameters of the fiber sensor driver, keeping the fiber sensor in proper sensing distance.



Refer to Sec. 4.3.5 for more details.



2.



Fix the fiber sensor driver with screws.



3.



Cover the FPD front shell. Check whether the fiber sensor interfere with FPD front shell. If so, adjust the position of fiber sensor.



4.



Fix the four corners of the shell and rotate the FPD to vertical position. Then fit the two screws in the middle. - 219 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.3.7 Replace the Ion chamber 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



10 min



60 min



40 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



code











Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



AEC calibration jig



-



-



1



-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Ion chamber



DR70-10-82257



-



1



-



Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



FPD and support arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Turn off the power and remove the grid.Remove the top and front covers of stand column. Use screws to lock the stand column pulley so that FPD and the support arm assembly cannot move upward or downward.



（Refer to the maintenance of stand column



assembly）.



- 220 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



M5X12



hexagon



socket screw



2.



Rotate FPD to the vertical position and remove the M4x16 cross recessed pan head screw in the upside and middle of the front shell.



3.



Rotate FPD to the horizontal position and remove the other 5 M4x16 cross recessed pan head screws of the front shell. Then remove the shell.



4.



Disconnect the connection cables of the travel switch on grid holder and the photoelectric switch. Disassemble the eight M4X12 combination screws. Then remove the grid holder assembly.



5.



Disconnect the connection cable of ion chamber. Disassemble the eight M2.5X8 cross recessed pan head screws fixing ion chamber. Then remove the chamber.



Ion chamber



Detector







Installation



1.



Place a new ion chamber onto the upper surface of detector. Then fasten it by screw the metal plates on the four corners.



2.



Connect the cable of ion chamber. - 221 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



3.



Fit the grid holder and fasten it with screws. Connect the cables of the three travel switch on the grid holder.



4.



Cover the FPD front shell assembly. Firstly, apply the screws to fix the four corners of the shell. Then rotate FPD to the vertical position to apply the screws in the middle.







Completion of adjustment and testing



Refer to Sec. 6.2.5 AEC calibration of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual for details.



5.3.8 Replace the Detector 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



2







Examination period



10 min



60 min



300 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



code











Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



AEC calibration jig



-



-



1



-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Detector



DR50-10-79954



Description PIXIUM



4600



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



-



Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



FPD and support arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Refer to the step 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 in the section of Replace the ion chamber.



2.



Disconnect the fiber, ground cable, communication cable and data cable.



3.



Remove the five M4X10 hexagon socket screws fixing the detector assembly.



- 222 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



4.



Two people grasp the handles on both sides of the switching board of the detector and carry out the detector assembly.



Handles Handles



Detector assembly



Base plate of FPD



5.



Disassemble the eight hexagon socket cap head screws M4X10 on the bottom of FPD switching board. Then remove the detector and replace it with a new one.



When removing the detector, DO NOT apply force to the upper face of the detector.



M4X10 screw



FPD switching board







Installation



1.



Fasten the detector onto the FPD switching board by applying eight M4X10 screws from downside to upside.



2. Two people carry the detector assembly to the base plate of FPD and fasten it with M4X12 combination screws. 3. Connect the signal cable, control cable, ground wire and fiber of the detector. 4. Install the ion chamber and fasten it with M2.5X8 screws.Connect the cable of ion chamber. 5. Fit the grid holder and fasten it with M4X12 combination screws. Then connect the cables of travel switch. 6. Cover the FPD front shell assembly. Firstly, apply the screws to fix the four corners of the shell. Then rotate FPD to the vertical position to apply the screws in the middle.



- 223 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







Completion of adjustment and testing



Refer to Sec. 6.2.5 Detector calibration of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual for details.



5.3.9 Replace the Emergency OFF Switch 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



10 min



60 min



20 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Emergency OFF



M07-00136S---



-



-



-



switch







Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



FPD and support arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Refer to the step 1, 2, 3 and 4 in the section of Replace the ion chamber.



2.



Remove the three M4X8 combination screws fixing the emergency OFF switch. Then remove the emergency OFF switch assembly.



3.



Disassemble the connection cable of emergency OFF switch. Then remove the nuts fixing emergency OFF switch and replace it with a new one.



- 224 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Emergency OFF switch







Installation



1.



Fit the cable of emergency OFF switch.



2.



Fasten the emergency OFF switch onto the base plate of FPD with screws.



3. Fit the grid holder and fasten it with M4X12 combination screws. Then connect the cables of travel switch. 4. Cover the FPD front shell assembly. Firstly, apply the screws to fix the four corners of the shell. Then rotate FPD to the vertical position to apply the screws in the middle.







Completion of adjustment and testing



Power on the system and enter into DROC. Press the emergency OFF switch for testing its function.



5.3.10 Replace the Keyboard of FPD 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



10 min



60 min



20 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Keyboard of FPD



801-DR51-00163-00



-



1



-







Safety - 225 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHILE REPLACING PCBA, DO WEAR ANTISTATIC DEVICE SUCH AS ESD RING OR ANTISTATIC GLOVES.







Attached assembly



FPD and support arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Refer to the step 1, 2, 3 and 4 in the section of Replace the ion chamber.



2. Remove the five M4X10 hexagon socket screws fixing the detector assembly. Push the detector assembly by the side. 3. Disassemble the connection wire on the key PCBA. 4. Remove the M4X10 hexagon socket screws fixing the key PCBA. Then remove the PCBA.



Key PCBA (left)



Key PCBA (right)







Installation



1.



Remove six M3X8 combination screws off the key PCBA. Then replace the PCBA with new one.



2. Fit the new PCBA and apply the screws in loose way. Then adjust the gap between the microswitch and the silicone keypad on the PCBA. Fasten the screws after making keypad in good handfeel. 3. Remove the FPD assembly back and fasten it with screws. fibers.



- 226 -



Connect all the cables and



TROUBLESHOOTING



4. Fit the grid holder and fasten it with eight M4X12 combination screws. Then connect the cables of travel switch. 5. Cover the FPD front shell assembly. Firstly, apply the screws to fix the four corners of the shell. Then rotate FPD to the vertical position to apply the screws in the middle.







Completion of adjustment and testing



Power on the system and enter into DROC. Test all the keys on the replaced PCBA for the functions.



5.4 Rail Assembly 5.4.1 Replace the SID Drive Motor 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



2







Examination period



10 min



30 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Hex-key wrench 3



1



-



1



-



code Standard service tools



-



Standard service tools Lifter or stepladder







Hex-key wrench 6 -



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Replace the SID drive



M90-000188---



Motor step 3.6V



1



motor







Manufacturer



1.8°1.57Nm



Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM - 227 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN. 



BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.



To prevent user falling down, check whether the lifter or stepladder is in good quality and stable status before usage.







Attached assembly



Movable bridge assembly







Disassembly



1.



Push the movable bridge in place for easy disassembly. Then turn off the DigiEye 760 system.



2.



Disassemble the shell of the movable bridge drive system as shown below. After ascending to a certain height by stepladder or lifter, use hex-key wrench to remove 4 hexagon socket screws (M4×10) for installing the shell of movable bridge drive system.



Screw M4x10



Shell



of



movable



bridge drive system



3.



Pull out the cable plug in the back of the motor.



- 228 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Motor Cable plug 4.



Fine adjust the position of the movable bridge. Slowly push the movable bridge until it pass through the hole in the end of decelerator and the hexagon socket screw heads are exposed.



Decelerator Motor



Hole



Screw M4x12 Movable bridge 5.



Remove the four hexagon socket screws M4X12 connecting the motor and the decelerator to disassemble the motor by using hex-key wrench 3#. Then hold the motor - 229 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



with one hand and use hex-key wrench 5# to loosen the set screws with the other hand. Finally, pull out the motor.







Installation



1.



Adjust the position of the movable bridge. Slowly push the movable bridge until it pass through the hole in the end of decelerator and the hexagon socket screw heads are exposed.



2.



To install the motor, thread the shaft of motor through the hole of decelerator, make the motor installation hole well fit the screw hole of decelerator, then fit four M4X12 screws with spring washers, and finally fasten the set screws inside the decelerator.



3.



Insert the cable plug in the back of motor.



4.



Install the shell of movable bridge drive system as shown above. Fit the shell on the movable bridge using 4 hexagon socket screws (M4x10) with flat washer and spring washer.







Completion of adjustment and testing



Turn on the system and make movement in the SID direction. The movement is in normal status and no abnormal noise is made by the motor.



Disassembly of the movable bridge drive motor shell should be done by at least two people.



5.4.2 Replace the SID Decelerator and Clutch 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 2







Examination period



period 10 min



80 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Hex-key wrench (whole kit)



1



-



1



-



code Standard service tools



-



Lifter or stepladder



-



Feeler



Kit



1



Monkey wrench



pcs



1







Replace components



- 230 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



SID decelerator



032-000016-00



Planetary reducer



1



Manufacturer



casing Level I, i＝5, output shaft diameter φ15mm SID clutch



032-000008-00



Electromagnetic clutch (SID clutch)







1



Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.







Attached assembly



Movable bridge assembly







Disassembly



1.



Push the movable bridge in place for easy disassembly. Then turn off the DigiEye 760 system.



2.



Remove the cover of movable bridge drive system. Ascend a proper height by a stepladder or lifter. Then remove the cover of movable bridge drive system using hex-key wrench 3#.



3.



Pull out the cable plug in the back of motor.



4.



Loosen the screws on the potentiometer holder to disengage the potentiometer gear from the driven gear.



5.



Disassemble the fixing end of the synchronous belt and loosen the two hexagon socket screws M4X25 using wrench 3#. Remove the combination of the stationary rail end cap and the rail end block. And then disassemble the synchronous belt clamped block 2, where removing the screw 1 and 2 first and then loosening screw 3 and 4 (screw 1, 2, 3 and 4 are hexagon socket screws M4X16) for easy disassembly. Push the synchronous belt clamped block 2 and remove it. Put down the synchronous belt and thread it through the movable bridge drive system.



- 231 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Combination of the stationary rail end cap and the rail end block



Screw 1 and 2



Synchronous



belt



clamped block 2



Screw 3 and 4 Synchronous belt fixing end



6.



To disassemble the movable bridge drive system, remove the four hexagon socket screws M8X25 on the movable bridge drive system baseplate by hex-key wrench 6.



Movable bridge drive system



7.



Disassemble the motor clutch assembly on the movable bridge drive system. Loosen the two set screws on the brake lining shoe of the clutch and move the brake lining shoe backward for over 4mm.Turn over the movable bridge drive system by the angle of 90°(based on the position shown in the figure). Rem ove the two M6X16 screws under the baseplate. Then remove the motor clutch assembly on the movable bridge drive system.



- 232 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Motor clutch assembly Lining



Screw M6x16



8.



To disassemble the motor and the clutch, remove the four M4X12 screws connecting the motor and the decelerator with hex-key wrench 3, hold the motor with one hand and use hex-key wrench 5# to loosen the set screws with the other hand; then use hex-key wrench 2# to loosen two hexagon socket countersunk head screws M3X8 to remove the shaft-end presser plate of decelerator; finally, pull out the stator of clutch with a puller. Motor Key Circlip for hole



Stator Shaft-end



presser



plate of decelerator Decelerator Motor mounting plate Screw M5x16



Bearing Screw M4x10



Rotor Hexagon



socket



countersunk head screws M3X8



- 233 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Puller



9.



Dismantle the decelerator; remove the keys on the decelerator axis with nipper plier; use wrench 3 to unscrew 4 screws (M4x10); remove the stator on the clutch; use circlip plier to remove the circlip inside the stator of clutch; unscrew 4 hexagon socket screws (M5x16) with hex-key wrench 4 to remove the decelerator; finally, use circlip plier to pry out the bearing on the decelerator.







Installation



1.



Install the decelerator; sleeve the axis of decelerator with the bearing 6202zz; fix keys on the axis of decelerator; then install the whole on the motor mounting board;



Bearing 6202zz Key Decelerator



2.



Install the clutch stator and rotor; use snap ring plier to install the circlip into the clutch stator; then fit the whole onto the motor mounting board; knock the rotor into the axis of decelerator; finally, install the shaft-end presser plate onto the axis of decelerator and fit the hexagon socket countersunk head screws (note: use screw-thread glue before screwing);



- 234 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Stator



Rotor



Shaft-end presser



plate



of decelerator



3.



To install the motor, thread the shaft of motor through the hole of decelerator, make the motor installation hole well fit the screw hole of decelerator, then fit four M4X12 screws with spring washers, and finally fasten the set screws inside the decelerator.



4.



Install the whole of motor clutch; then fit it onto the drive assembly of movable bridge; use wrench 5 to screw the screws (be noted of the location relationship between motor mounting board and movable bridge drive system baseplate);



Motor mounting board



Hole



Movable bridge drive system baseplate



5.



Adjust the distance between lining shoe and rotor with feeler; fasten the set screws (note: apply screw-thread glue before installing screws);



6.



Install the movable bridge drive system onto the movable bridge (be noted of the location relationship between movable bridge drive system baseplate and movable bridge); then use flat washer and spring washer to fasten the M8x25 screws;



- 235 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Hexagon socket screw M8x25 Movable bridge drive system baseplate



7.



Roll the synchronous belt between the transition wheel and the synchronous belt pulley 5 of the movable bridge drive system; Transition wheel



Synchronous belt



Synchronous belt pulley 5



8.



Loosen the tension end of synchronous belt to the utmost with hex-key wrench 6;



- 236 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Tension end of synchronous belt



9.



Install the fixed end of synchronous belt; press synchronous belt between screw 1 and screw 2 on the synchronous belt clamped block 1 (As shown in the following figure, synchronous belt clamped block 1 is located above the synchronous belt and installed on the stationary rail); push in the synchronous belt clamped block 2; fasten screw 1 and 2; finally fasten the other two screws (note: strain the synchronous belt properly at this time);



Stationary rail Screw 1 and 2



Synchronous belt clamped block 2



Synchronous belt fixed end



10. Adjust the position of the movable bridge drive system; climb up the ladder to check if the synchronous belt is in the right middle of synchronous belt wheel 5; if not, loosen the screws applied to install the movable bridge drive system with wrench 6; adjust the position of the movable bridge drive system from side to side until the synchronous belt is located in the right middle of synchronous belt wheel; fasten the screws; finally, pull the synchronous belt in the level at the belt tension end with wrench 6; 11. Refer to the step 14~16 in the movable bridge installation of sec. 4.2 of Installation Manual to install the potentiometer and adjust it in the travel range. 12. Install the cover of movable bridge drive system as shown above; apply 4 M4x10 hexagon - 237 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



socket screws, flat washer and spring washer to install the cover of movable bridge drive system onto the movable bridge.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Open the system; press the fore/aft movement button; check if the clutch is normally attracted and the decelerator works normally.



2.



Power up and calibrate the potentiometer. For operation details, please refer to the contents related to the system configuration and calibration in sec. 6.2 of “DigiEye 760 Installation Manual”. Please conduct fore/aft distance calibration based on sec. 6.2.1.4.



Disassembly of the movable bridge drive motor shell should be done by at least two people.



5.4.3 Replace the SID Driven Synchronous Belt 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



2







Examination period



10 min



40 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Hex-key wrench



1



-



2



-



code Standard service tools



-



3 Lifter or stepladder







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Replace the SID



031-000003-00



Synchronous belt:



1



driven



opening PU L075,



synchronous belt



length of pitch line: 4150mm (white)







Safety



- 238 -



Manufacturer



TROUBLESHOOTING







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.







Attached assembly



Stationary rail assembly







Disassembly



1.



Push the movable bridge in place for easy disassembly. Then turn off the DigiEye 760 system.



2.



Dismantle the cover of movable bridge drive system. Ascend a proper height by stepladder or lifter; use hex-key wrench 3 to remove 4 hexagon socket screws (M4x10); then remove the cover of movable bridge drive system;



3.



Loosen the screws on the potentiometer holder to disengage the potentiometer gear from the driven gear.



4.



Disassemble the fixing end of the synchronous belt and unscrew the hexagon socket screws M4X25 using wrench 3#. Remove the linker of the stationary rail end cap and the rail end block. And then disassemble the synchronous belt clamped block 2, where removing the screw 1 and 2 first and then loosening screw 3 and 4 (screw 1, 2, 3 and 4 are hexagon socket screws M4X16) for easy disassembly. Push the synchronous belt clamped block 2 and remove it. Put down the synchronous belt and thread it through the movable bridge drive system.



5.



Dismantle the tension end of synchronous belt. Firstly, unscrew the hexagon socket screws M8X50 using wrench 6#; remove screw 1 and 2 using wrench 3# (screw 1, 2, 3 and 4 are hexagon socket screws M4X16); loosen the other two screws; push the synchronous belt clamped block 3; finally dismantle the tension end of synchronous belt;



- 239 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Tension



end



of



synchronous belt



Synchronous



belt



clamped block 3 Screw 3 and 4 Screw 1 and 2



6.



Draw out the synchronous belt. Normally, the belt will drop down; if not, draw out the belt.







Installation



1.



Install the tension end of synchronous belt. Press one end of synchronous belt with left hand; insert synchronous belt clamped block 3 into the space at the loosen screw 3 and 4; use hex-key wrench 3 to fasten screw 3 and 4; then fasten screw 1 and 2.Then use wrench# 6 to screw M8x50 screws into the synchronous belt clamped block (note: slightly screwed);



2.



Wear the synchronous belt. Thread the other end of synchronous belt through the gap between the guide wheel of movable bridge and the slot below the stationary rail;



- 240 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Slot



Synchronous belt



Guide wheel



3.



Thread the synchronous belt (For details, please refer to step 7 on installation in operation procedures of sec. 4.4.2.3);



4.



Install the fixed end of synchronous belt (For details, please refer to step 9 on installation in operation procedures of sec. 4.4.2.3);



5.



Adjust the position of movable bridge drive system (For details, please refer to step 9 on installation in operation procedures of sec. 4.4.2.3);



6.



Refer to the step 14~16 in the movable bridge installation of sec. 4.2 of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual to install the potentiometer and adjust it in the travel range.



7.



Install the cover of movable bridge drive system (For details, please refer to step 12 on installation in operation procedures of sec. 4.4.2.3);







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power up and calibrate the potentiometer. For operation details, please refer to the contents related to the system configuration and calibration in sec. 6.2 of “DigiEye 760 Installation Manual”. Please conduct fore/aft distance calibration based on sec. 6.2.1.4.



2.



Power on the system; press the handpiece fore/aft button; make sure that handpiece moves smoothly forward and backward and no noise exists.



Disassembly of the movable bridge drive motor shell should be done by at least two people.



5.4.4 Replace the Travel Switch 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1



Examination period



period 10 min



20 min



- 241 -



10 min



TROUBLESHOOTING







Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Hex-key wrench



1



-



code Standard service tools



-



3 Cross 错误！ 错误！超



Standard service tools



1



链接引用无效。 链接引用无效。 Lifter or stepladder







-



-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Replace the travel



M07-00143S---



Microswitch



1



-



switch







1



SS-5GL2



Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.







Attached assembly



Connector plate assembly 2







Disassembly



1.



Push the movable bridge in place for easy disassembly. Then turn off the DigiEye 760 system.



2.



Disconnect the cable connecting the travel switch; ascend a proper height by stepladder or lifter; then pull out the cable at the terminal behind the travel switch;



- 242 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Screw M2x10 Terminal Screw M4x10



3.



Dismantle the linker of the travel switch and its mounting plate. Use hex-key wrench to remove 2 hexagon socket screws (M4x10); remove the linker; remember the mounting direction of the travel switch on the mounting plate; Combination of the travel switch and its mounting plate



4.



Dismantle the travel switch. Use crosshead screwdriver to unscrew two cross recessed pan head screws M2X10; then remove the travel switch.







Installation



1.



To install the travel switch, firstly fit the travel switch on the mounting plate with crosshead screwdriver (note: the mounting direction should be consistent with the original);



2.



Preload the linker of the travel switch and its mounting plate. Use hex-key wrench 3 to preload the linker of the travel switch and its mounting plate on the connector plate 2;



3.



Adjust the position of travel switch. Push the movable bridge to make the travel switch close to the travel switch triggering slider on the stationary rail; move the linker of the travel switch and its mounting plate forward and backward; when the slider and the travel switch are triggered, the contact handle of travel switch is located in the position parallel - 243 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



to the stationary rail; fasten the screws with hex-key wrench 3;



Contact handle



Travel



switch



triggering slider Combination of the travel switch and the triggering slider



4.



Connect the cable of travel switch; and then insert the cable into the connector terminal behind the travel switch.







Completion of adjustment and testing



Power on the system; press the handpiece fore/aft movement button; when the handpiece moves to the rail end and contacts the travel switch, it is able to stop moving automatically.



5.4.5 Replace the Movable Bridge Moving Potentiometer Assembly 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 10 min



20 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Hex-key wrench



1



-



code Standard service tools



-



1.5 Cross 错误！ 错误！超



Standard service tools



1



链接引用无效。 链接引用无效。 Standard service tools Lifter or stepladder



Monkey wrench -



1 1



- 244 -



-



TROUBLESHOOTING







Replace components Item



Serial code



Replace the potentiometer







Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Movable bridge 801-DR70-00167-00



moving potentiometer



1



assembly



Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.







Attached assembly



Movable bridge drive assembly







Disassembly



1.



Push the movable bridge in place for easy disassembly. Then turn off the DigiEye 760 system.



2.



Dismantle the cover of movable bridge drive system. Ascend a proper height by stepladder or lifter; use hex-key wrench 3 to remove 2 hexagon socket screws (M4x10); then remove the cover of movable bridge drive system;



- 245 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Combination of the potentiometer and its mounting plate



Screw M4x10



Potentiometer gear 1



3.



Disconnect the potentiometer connecting cable; dismantle the linker of the potentiometer and its mounting plate; use hex-key wrench 3 to remove 2 hexagon socket screws (M4x10); finally, remove the linker of the potentiometer and its mounting plate;







Installation



1.



Move the movable bridge to the back of the rail (i.e. to the extreme position away from the stand column mounting wall);



2.



When the movable bridge moves forward from the backward extreme mechanical position, the gear on the drive assembly rotates clockwise in the arrow direction (as shown in the following figure), and the potentiometer gear 1 rotates in the inverse direction. When the movable bridge moves, the potentiometer gear is driven by the stepping motor.



Note:



Due to the limit travel of potentiometer, make sure that the potentiometer always rotates in the travel range to prevent it from damaging.



So, before the potentiometer assembly,



we need to make the potentiometer gear 1 rotate clockwise to the extreme position and then turn around.



- 246 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Potentiometer gear 1



3.



After the potentiometer gear 1 meshes in the corresponding position (confirmed in step 2), push the movable bridge movement potentiometer assembly in the meshing direction for installation. Finally, connect the potentiometer cables.



4.



Install the cover of movable bridge drive system.







Completion of adjustment and testing



Power on the system to calibrate the potentiometer. For operation details, please refer to the contents related to the system configuration and calibration in sec. 6.2 of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual. Please conduct fore/aft distance calibration based on sec. 6.2.1.4.



Disassembly of the movable bridge drive motor shell should be done by at least two people.



5.4.6 Replace the Movable Bridge Drive Assembly 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 2







Examination period



period 10 min



40 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



1



-



code Standard service tools



-



-



Hex-key



wrench (whole package) Lifter or stepladder







-



Replace components - 247 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Replace the



801-DR70-00019-01



Drive assembly of



1



movable bridge



Manufacturer



movable bridge



drive assembly







Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.







Attached assembly



Rail assembly







Disassembly



1.



Push the movable bridge in place for easy disassembly. Then turn off the DigiEye 760 system.



2.



Remove the cover of movable bridge drive system. Ascend a proper height by a stepladder or lifter. Then remove the cover of movable bridge drive system using hex-key wrench 3#.



3.



Pull out the cable plug in the back of motor.



4.



Loosen the screws on the potentiometer holder to disengage the potentiometer gear from the driven gear.



5.



Disassemble the fixing end of the synchronous belt and loosen the two hexagon socket screws M4X25 using wrench 3#. Remove the linker of the stationary rail end cap and the rail end block. And then disassemble the synchronous belt clamped block 2, where removing the screw 1 and 2 first and then loosening screw 3 and 4 (screw 1, 2, 3 and 4 are hexagon socket screws M4X16) for easy disassembly. Push the synchronous belt clamped block 2 and remove it. Put down the synchronous belt and thread it through the movable bridge drive system.



- 248 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Combination of the stationary rail end cap and the rail end block



Screw 1 and 2



Synchronous



belt



clamped block 2



Screw 3 and 4 Synchronous belt fixing end



6.



To disassemble the movable bridge drive system, remove the four hexagon socket screws M8X25 on the movable bridge drive system baseplate by hex-key wrench 6.







Installation



1.



Install the movable bridge drive system onto the movable bridge (be noted of the location relationship between movable bridge drive system baseplate and movable bridge); then use flat washer and spring washer to fasten the M8x25 screws;



Hexagon socket screws M8x25 Movable bridge drive system baseplate



- 249 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



2.



Check that the gear of potentiometer assembly does not mesh with the driving gear. Otherwise, loosen the mounting screws of the potentiometer assembly; roll the synchronous belt between the transition wheel and the synchronous belt pulley 5 of the movable bridge drive system; Transition wheel



Synchronous belt



Synchronous belt pulley 5



3.



Loosen the tension end of synchronous belt to the utmost with hex-key wrench 6;



Tension end of synchronous belt



4.



Install the fixed end of synchronous belt; press synchronous belt between screw 1 and screw 2 on the synchronous belt clamped block 1 (As shown in the following figure, synchronous belt clamped block 1 is located above the synchronous belt and installed on the stationary rail); push in the synchronous belt clamped block 2; fasten screw 1 and 2; finally fasten the other two screws (note: strain the synchronous belt properly at this time);



- 250 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Stationary rail Screw 1 and 2



Synchronous belt clamped block 2



Synchronous belt fixed end



5.



Adjust the position of the movable bridge drive system; climb up the ladder to check if the synchronous belt is in the right middle of synchronous belt wheel 5; if not, loosen the screws applied to install the movable bridge drive system with wrench 6; adjust the position of the movable bridge drive system from side to side until the synchronous belt is located in the right middle of synchronous belt wheel; fasten the screws; finally, pull the synchronous belt in the level at the belt tension end with wrench 6;



6.



Adjust and install the potentiometer and connect the cables according to the steps of “Replace movable bridge movement potentiometer assembly” ;



7.



Install the cover of movable bridge drive system.







Completion of adjustment and testing



Power on the system and calibrate the potentiometer. For operation details, please refer to the contents on the system configuration and calibration in sec. 6.2 of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual. Please conduct the fore/aft distance calibration based on sec. 6.2.1.4.



Disassembly of the movable bridge drive motor shell should be done by at least two people.



- 251 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.5 Traveling Carriage Assembly 5.5.1 Replace the Traveling Carriage Signal Acquisition Board 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



2











Examination period



10 min



30 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Lifter or stepladder



-



2



-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Traveling carriage



DR70-30-82081



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



signal acquisition board







Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN.







WHILE REPLACING PCBA, DO WEAR ANTISTATIC DEVICE SUCH AS ESD RING OR ANTISTATIC GLOVES.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.



- 252 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







Attached assembly



Traveling carriage assembly







Disassembly



1.



Power on the system and move the traveling carriage in place for easy disassembly. Then turn off the DigiEye 760 system.



2.



Put the lifter or stepladder in two sides of the traveling carriage assembly; unscrew the four hexagon socket countersunk head screws M4X8 that fixes the front shell; remove the front shell in the direction as shown in the figure;



3.



Then, remove the six hexagon socket countersunk head screws M4X8 that fixes the rear shell (note: During disassembly, hold the rear shell steady to prevent the rear shell from dropping down when all the screws are removed); remove the rear shell along the arrow direction and lay it aside.



4.



After the rear shell is disassembled, please refer to the following figure.



Screw



Rear shell



Disassembling direction of front shell



Front shell



Screw



Screw



Traveling carriage signal acquisition board



5.



Disconnect all the connectors



Screw Disconnect all the cables connecting the traveling carriage signal acquisition board; unscrew six cross recessed small pan head combination screws (M3X8); remove the traveling carriage signal acquisition board. - 253 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







Installation



1.



Prepare a new traveling carriage signal acquisition board; fix the acquisition board with six cross recessed small pan head combination screws (M3X8);



2.



Connect all the dismantled cables to the traveling carriage signal acquisition board.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on and start up the system; adjust the system to make all the functions of the system recover to normal status;



2.



Install and fasten the rear shell in the disassembly methods described above.



3.



Install and fasten the front shell in the disassembly methods described above.



4.



Power on the system to calibrate the potentiometer. For operation details, please refer to the contents related to the system configuration and calibration in sec. 6.2 of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual. Please conduct fore/aft distance calibration based on sec. 6.2.1.4.



At least two persons are needed for the installation of rear shell.



5.5.2 Replace the Traveling Carriage Motor Assembly 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



2







Examination period



10 min



30 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Bearing puller



1



Lifter or stepladder







-



2



-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Traveling carriage



801-DR70-00026-01



Traveling carriage



1



-



motor assembly



motor assembly



- 254 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.







Attached assembly



Traveling carriage assembly







Disassembly



1.



Dismantle the front shell and the rear shell of traveling carriage cover;



2.



Pull the stepping motor cable out of the stepping motor cable seat; Synchronous belt pulley 1



Synchronous belt pulley 2



Screw M5 Synchronous belt Stepping motor cable



- 255 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Synchronous belt pulley 2 Screw M5 Technological hole



Stepping Screw M4 motor



Set screw 3.



Screw M5



Motor mounting



Reducer box



board



Loosen the four M5X16 hexagon socket cap head screws; push the synchronous belt pulley towards the left and remove it;



4.



Loosen two M4X8 hexagon socket set screws (with cup point); remove the synchronous belt with the bearing puller (note: place a screw against the axis of reducer box; then put the bearing puller against the screw head).Unscrew four M5X16 hexagon socket cap head screws that fix the motor assembly; then remove the motor assembly.







Installation



1.



Use four M5X16 hexagon socket cap head screws to install the traveling carriage motor assembly in place; do not tighten the screws at this moment;



2.



Align the synchronous belt pulley 2 with the shaft key of reducer casing and push it in place;



3.



Install synchronous belt onto two belt pulleys; rotate the belt pulleys to align the pulley 1 with pulley 2 until the pulley will not be extruded to the pulley side during rotation;



4.



Push the motor assembly; tighten the synchronous belt; fasten four M5X16 hexagon socket cap head screws to fasten the motor assembly; then connect the stepping motor cables.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on the system; press the handpiece longitudinal movement button; check if the motor works normally.



2.



Install and fasten the rear shell in the disassembly methods described above.



3.



Install and fasten the front shell in the disassembly methods described above.



At least two persons are needed for the installation of rear shell.



- 256 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.5.3 Replace the Traveling Carriage Positioning Assembly 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



2











Examination period



10 min



30 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Lifter or stepladder



-



2



-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Traveling carriage



801-DR70-00185-00



Traveling carriage



1



-



positioning



positioning



assembly



assembly







Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.







Attached assembly



Traveling carriage assembly







Disassembly



1.



Start up the system; make the traveling carriage in standard thorax positioning or flat-bed - 257 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



positioning status (i.e. insert condition); then disconnect the cables of traveling carriage positioning assembly; 2.



Loosen 4 M6 screws and remove the traveling carriage positioning assembly; Screw M6 Traveling



carriage



positioning assembly



Cable







Installation



1.



Install the new traveling carriage positioning assembly onto the traveling carriage body frame with 4 M6 screws; connect the cables;



2.



Adjust the distance between the traveling carriage positioning assembly and position adjusting block (2+/-0.5mm); and then tighten the four M6 screws that fix the traveling carriage positioning assembly. Position adjusting block



M6 screw



2+/-0.5mm



Traveling



carriage



positioning assembly







Completion of adjustment and testing



Power on the system and check if the traveling carriage positioning assembly works normally.



5.5.4 Replace the Balancer 



Manpower demand



- 258 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



2







Examination period



10 min



240 min



20 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



1



-



Lifter Stepladder







-



1



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Balancer



801-DR70-00038-00



Model of spring balancer (in



1



-



the assembly): EWF-90







Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN.











WHEN REPLACING WIRE ROPE, WEAR GOGGLES.



Attached assembly



Traveling carriage assembly







Disassembly



1.



Dismantle the casing according to the steps of “Replace the traveling carriage signal acquisition board”;



- 259 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Detent pin



Push upward Force point Screw M4



Trunk cover



Wire rope clamp



Wire rope of



2.



Elevate the tube handgrip, and push the telescopic column upward to thebalancer limit position;



3.



Pull out the detent pin of balancer and place it in the lock groove; pull down the tube handgrip; then the balancer is locked;



4.



Elevate the lifter to contact the force point; slightly elevate the lifter with 2mm to help to disconnect the wire rope.



5.



Unscrew four M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws and remove the trunk cover;



6.



Unscrew two M5X16 hexagon socket cap head screws and remove the wire rope clamp (Note: It is not necessary to remove all the screws but only loosen them to a certain extent); then loosen the clamp of auxiliary wire rope; place the auxiliary wire rope aside.



While dismantling the clamp, you need to cover the telescopic column with an obstruction (e.g. newspaper) to prevent wrench or screw falling into the trunk.



Second channel slot of main reel Fore adjustable screw Transition wheel Reel shaft Wire rope clamp



Wire rope of balancer Safety roller - 260 -



Balancer Screw M12



TROUBLESHOOTING



7.



Dismantle two M12X35 hexagon socket cap head screws to remove the old balancer.



When the balancer is dismantled, it needs to be steadily carried out by two persons due to the weight of about 22kg.







Installation



1.



Use two M12X35 hexagonal socket head cap screws and spring and flat washers to place the new balancer in the mounting position;



2.



Tread the wire rope of balancer under through the safety roller; wire the main reel for a circle and then turn it around from the upside of transition wheel to thread it through the wire rope axle over the telescopic column;



The wire rope should be wound around the main reel from the third slot to the second slot. 3.



Clamp the wire rope with wire rope clamp; use two M5x16 hexagon socket cap head screws and spring washer 5 to tighten the clamp. Tighten the screws to the utmost.



- 261 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



When tightening the clamp, push the clamp close to the wire rope axle, strain the wire rope in one side, and elevate the bumper to help to strain the rope (two persons are needed). 4.



Wind the reel wire rope around the auxiliary reel slot one circle by one circle. When the wire rope reaches the penultimate slot, wind it to the transition wheel, and pull it to the telescopic column and across the wire rope axle.



First channel slot Auxiliary reel Wire rope of reel Penultimate channel slot



Wire rope of balancer



5.



Clamp the wire rope with wire rope clamp; use two M5x16 hexagon socket cap head screws and spring washer 5 to tighten the clamp. Tighten the screws to the utmost.



• When tightening the clamp, push the clamp close to the wire rope axle, strain the wire rope in one side, and enclasp the reel assembly to prevent it rotating and help to loosen the wire rope (two persons are needed).



• While installing the clamp, you need to cover the telescopic column with an obstruction (e.g. with newspaper) to prevent wrench or screw falling into the trunk. Once the clamp is tightened, remove the obstruction.



Bend radius of wire rope Wire rope clamp



Wire rope axle



as small as one can



Wire tie



- 262 Residual wire are inserted into the trunk 4



TROUBLESHOOTING



6.



Insert the residual wire into the trunk 4; use wire tie to tie the bended wire near the clamp (with two ties for twice); and cut the residual part of ties.



Make sure that the bend radius of wire rope is as small as one can when bundling the residual wire rope. 7.



Use four M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws to install the trunk cover in the mounting position;



8.



Unlock the lifter; draw out the detent pin of the balancer and place it to the loosened slot; then the balancer is able to be pulled.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Loosen two M3X10 hexagon socket cap head screws and spring washer 3; make inspection pressing plate and inspection block movable on the synchronous belt;



2.



Manually move the telescopic column vertically. When the distance from the end plate 1 of telescopic column (end plate of trunk 1) to the level of L-arm is 55mm (measure with tapeline as shown below), move the inspection presser plate and block until the block triggers the travel switch (noise occurs when the travel switch is triggered). Tighten the screws to fix the inspection presser plate and inspection block onto the synchronous belt. Note: Flatten spring washer indicates that the screws are tightened. The parts to press the washer are made of POM materials. Otherwise, they can be continuously screwed after the washer is flattened.



3.



Keep the travel switch triggered by the inspection block; screw up the travel switch assembly to tighten it;



- 263 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



4. Manually move the telescopic column vertically. When the distance from the end plate 1 of telescopic column (end plate of trunk 1) to the level of L-arm is 1,580mm (measure with tapeline as shown below), move the travel switch assembly until the inspection block triggers the travel switch (noise occurs when the travel switch is triggered). Tighten the screws of the travel switch to fix it;



- 264 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



If the travel switch still cannot be triggered until the regulating hole of the travel switch assembly 1 reaches the limit, repeat step 1~3 and adjust the regulating hole of the travel switch assembly 2. 5. Power up and calibrate the potentiometer. For operation details, please refer to the contents related to the system configuration and calibration in sec. 6.2 of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual. Please calibrate the height of X-ray tube based on sec. 6.2.1.5.



5.5.5 Replace the Potentiometer Assembly 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 2



Examination period



period 10 min



20 min



- 265 -



10 min



TROUBLESHOOTING











Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Stepladder



-



1



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Potentiometer



801-DR70-00168-00



Potentiometer assembly



1



-







Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN.







Attached assembly



Potentiometer assembly







Disassembly



1.



Pull the potentiometer connecting cable out of the cable connector; remove all the other cables helping to fix the potentiometer (if available) ;



- 266 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Potentiometer cable connector



Potentiometer assembly



Screw M5



2.



Unscrew two M5X12 hexagon socket cap head screws and remove the potentiometer assembly.







Installation



Use the two M5X12 hexagon socket cap head screws and spring and flat washers to slightly fit the new potentiometer onto the mounting position of the traveling carriage, where the gear is not meshed and the screws are not tightened.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



The initial position of the telescopic column is shown below. At this time, the handpiece tube locates in the top end. And the telescopic column will be pulled downward. The gear moving direction for meshing is shown below (in the traveling carriage assembly). Gear 2 rotates clockwise and gear 1 anticlockwise.



- 267 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Set screws



Initial position of the



Gear meshing



Gear 1 rotates



telescopic column



anticlockwise Clockwise



Gear 2 rotates clockwise



2.



As shown in the figure, manually rotate gear 1 clockwise till to the maximum travel of the potentiometer in this direction (Note: The maximum travel is 10 circles, where it obviously feels that the potentiometer is rotated in place. It cannot be rotated any more even if the gear is gently moved. If the potentiometer is forced to rotate, it will be damaged.). Rotate it again for 1.5 circle anticlockwise (observe the rotation position of the set screws on gear 1 to judge the reference value of 1.5 circle.)



3.



Mesh gear 1 and gear 2 until the tooth width of gear 1 is located in the middle of the tooth width of gear 2. Then tighten the set screws;



4.



Connect three cables to the potentiometer. And use one stainless M4X8 cross recessed pan head combination screws and ground wire clamp MRA-03 (No. M90-000166---) to clamp the shielding layer of signal line and fix it onto the ground wire clamp mounting hole.



- 268 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



SIGNAL



GND Ground wire clamp mounting hole VCC



5.



Power up and calibrate the potentiometer. For operation details, please refer to the contents related to the system configuration and calibration in sec. 6.2 of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual. Please calibrate the height of X-ray tube based on sec. 6.2.1.5.



5.5.6 Replace



the



Thorax-position



or



Level-position



Optocoupler 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1











Examination period



10 min



20 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Stepladder



-



1



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Optocoupler



011-000002-00



Photoelectric sensor



1



HONEYWELL



（HOA0880-T51）







Safety



- 269 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN.







Attached assembly



Photoelectric switch assembly







Disassembly



1.



In the power-on status, move the traveling carriage assembly right or left; check whether the chest position optocoupler or table-level position optocoupler or both the two optocouplers are required to be replaced; Move transversally



Screw M4



Chest position photoelectric switch assembly



2.



Level position photoelectric switch assembly



After determining the optocoupler to be replaced, disconnect the optocoupler cables and dismantle the photoelectric switch assembly by removing two M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws with hex-key wrench;



3.



Use crosshead screwdriver to loosen two cross recessed small pan head combination screws (M3X8) and remove the optocoupler.



- 270 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Pan head screw M3



Optocouple



Photoelectric switch frame







Installation



1.



Fit the new optocoupler onto the photoelectric switch frame with the two cross recessed small pan head combination screws (M3X8) to form the photoelectric switch assembly;



2.



Install the assembly in place with the two removed hexagon socket cap head screws (M4X10) as well as spring and flat washers. Leave the screws loosened and connect the cables to the connectors;



3.



In the power-on status, move the traveling carriage assembly right or left; open the light beam of collimator and align the beam with the center scale line on the housing of flat panel completely; then as shown adjust the photoelectric switch assembly until the switch is triggered while SID is displayed on the front-panel of handpiece; finally, tighten the screws.



Align the beam with the scale line



Housing



of



Collimator



flat panel







Completion of adjustment and testing



Power on the system and move the traveling carriage assembly right and left. The chest - 271 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



position and table-level position optocouplers are triggered normally.



5.5.7 Replace the Brake Assembly 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



2











Examination period



5 min



20 min



5 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Stepladder



-



1



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Brake assembly



801-DR70-00031-00



Brake assembly 1



1



-



Brake assembly



801-DR70-00077-00



Brake assembly 2



1



-







Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN.







Attached assembly



Brake assembly 1 is attached to traveling carriage assembly and brake assembly 2 attached to movable slideway assembly.







Disassembly



- 272 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



1.



Under the system startup condition, move the assembly horizontally at handgrip of handpiece to check whether brake assembly 1 or 2 needs to be replaced;



2.



Pull out the brake cable connectors; loosen four hexagon socket cap head screws (set screws for brake 1 are M6X20, and for brake 2 are M6X16); then remove the brake assemblies to be replaced;



Use monkey wrench to help add moment arm when unscrewing the set screws of brake assembly 1.



Screw M6



Screw M6 Brake assembly 2



Brake assembly 1



3.



Explosive view of brake assembly 1 is shown as follows (similar to that of brake assembly 2). When the friction block (DR70-20-82457) or the electromagnet (M90-100140---) needs to be replaced separately, assemble/disassemble it according to the following explosive view.



- 273 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Friction block



Electromagnet



Screw M4X10 Electromagnet mounting plate



Block Screw M5X10







Installation



1.



Install the new brake assembly in place with the four removed hexagon socket screws as well as spring and flat washers. Leave the screws loosened.



2.



Connect the brake assembly cables and be ready to power it up.







Completion of adjustment and testing



In the power-on status, adjust the space between brake assembly and profile slideway, while pressing the POWER ON switch. For the adjustment, one person will press and hold the power button (as shown below) while the other person will make adjustment at the rail. Use feeler to control the space between brake friction block and rail side. Select the feeler thickness in the range of 0.15~0.4mm. After the electromagnet is electrified, insert the feeler of proper thickness into the space between the friction block and profile surface. Compress the friction block and tighten the screws (M6X20) (For brake assembly 2, M6X16 set screws are used.); Power off the electromagnet and remove the feeler; Power on and power off the electromagnet to check the traveling carriage braking capability. If any point cannot be locked in the travel due to power failure, replace the feeler with that of other thickness for re-adjustment.



Brake assembly 2 POWER ON/OFF button



Brake assembly 1 POWER ON/OFF button - 274 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.6 Telescopic Column 5.6.1 Replace the Telescopic Column Assembly 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



4







Examination period



20 min



200 min



30 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Lifter



-



1



-



Stepladder



1



Traveling carriage mounting rack



1











Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Replace



DR70-30-101691



Telescopic



1



telescopic column



column



assembly



assembly



Manufacturer



Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







WHEN ASCENDING A HEIGHT BY A LADDER OR LIFTER, ENSURE THAT THE ACTIVITY SPACE IS ENOUGH TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM FALLING OR INJURY AND PREVENT ARTICLES DROPPING DOWN.







WHEN REMOVING WIRE ROPE, WEAR GOGGLES.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED



- 275 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.







Attached assembly



Host computer assembly (DR70-30-101743)







Disassembly



During the disassembly, fit the screws in the original position to prevent the screws missing. 1.



Push the traveling carriage assembly in place for easy disassembly. Then turn off the DigiEye 760 system.



M3X8 Hexagon socket countersunk Cover plate



head screws



2.



Pull down the telescopic column in place; unscrew the two hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M3X8) on the L-arm cover plate to remove the cover plate.



M3X8 Pan head Optocoupler



combination screw



mounting rack



3.



Loosen the four pan head combination screws (M3X8) on the optocoupler mounting rack; move the optocoupler mounting racks in both sides back to the end in the direction as shown above; then tighten the four set screws.



- 276 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Spool fixed support M4X8 Hexagon socket countersunk head screws



4.



Unscrew the four hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M4X8) of the spool fixed support; then remove the fixed support as well as the wire harness from the telescopic column. M4X8



Hexagon



socket



countersunk head screws



Rear shell of traveling



Front shell of traveling



carriage housing



carriage housing



5.



Two people work together to remove the 10 hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M4x8) of the front and rear shells of traveling carriage for the disassembly. Be noted to disassemble the front shell first.



M4X10 Hexagon socket screws Trunk cover



- 277 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



6.



One people stand in the lifter to remove the four M4X10 hexagon socket screws, and spring and flat washers; then remove the trunk cover from the traveling carriage;



M5X16 Hexagon socket screws



7.



Two people work together. One people push the telescopic column assembly near the upper limit position to align the mounting hole of the telescopic column fixed support A with that on support B. Meanwhile, the other people fix both the support A and B with two hexagon socket screws (M5X16), and spring an flat washers;



Safety pin



8.



Pull the safety pin of spring balancer out of the unlocking position to the lock position (a slot identified with ON label);



M6X20 Hexagon socket screws Handpiece assembly



L-arm adapter 2



- 278 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Electromagnetic bolt



9.



Two persons work together to hold the collimator in the tube assembly by lifter; remove six hexagon socket screws (M6X20), spring washer and flat washer of the L-arm adaptor 2; one person holds the handpiece assembly and draw the handpiece electromagnetic bolt away from the slot with flat blade screwdriver; the other person brings down the lifter slowly; after the lifter descends to the lowest, carry the handpiece assembly from the lifter to the floor (be noted that the handpiece assembly bottom should be cushioned by waste traveling carriageon); the placement shall not obstruct the disassembly of traveling carriage from the rails.



Telescopic column



With washer



Horizontal



or not



turntable



M5X16 Hexagon



assembly



socket screws



10. Remove the six hexagon socket screws (M5X16) and spring washer on the horizontal turntable assembly; dismantle the turntable assembly from the telescopic column; check whether there is washer between the turntable and the telescopic column; if there is, remove and keep it and record the mounting position; fit the washer back when the telescopic column is replaced;



M4X8



Hexagon



socket



countersunk head screws



- 279 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



11. Remove the four hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M4X8) on the barrel of the traveling carriage; then dismantle the barrel from the traveling carriage assembly.



Movable bridge



Upper limit wheel assembly M5X12 Hexagon socket screw



12. Loosen the two hexagon socket screws (M5X12) respectively on four sets of upper limit wheel assemblies; push the upper limit wheel assembly down to the limit position so that it is separated from the movable bridge;



Brake assembly M6X20 Hexagon socket screw



13. Remove the four hexagon socket screws (M6X20) and spring and flat washers from the brake assembly; pull out the wire and connectors of the brake; then dismantle the brake assembly from the traveling carriage;



Traveling carriage mounting



M8X25 Hexagon socket



rack



screw and nut



- 280 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



14. Place the traveling carriage mounting rack onto the lifter; slowly rise the lifter to align the four mounting holes; connect the mounting rack with traveling carriage assembly by four hexagon socket screws and nuts (M8X25);



Travel wheel assembly



Manual lifting point



15. Loosen the screws (M5X12) over the four groups of travel wheel assemblies respectively; slowly rise the lifter and pull the travel wheel assembly out of the rail slot. Due to weight imbalance on the lifter, the travel wheel leans in the position away from the lifter handgrip and cannot be pulled out of the rail slot. In this case, rise the traveling carriage frame at the manual lifting point (as shown above) and then pull out the travel wheel assembly;



Lifting point



16. Finally, check if there is any object obstructing the traveling carriage assembly descending from the rail. Then two persons work together; one person slowly brings the lifter down; the other one hold the mounting rack until the rack descends to the bottom. Four persons carry the traveling carriage to the floor by holding the lifting points at four corners of the mounting rack. Don not carry the steel angle bars at the bottom and be careful when the carriage is placed on the floor;



- 281 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



M3X10 Hexagon socket cap head screw Inspection block



17. Unscrew the two hexagon socket screws and spring washers of the inspection block; remove the inspection block from the sync belt;



M4X10 Hexagon socket screw



Traveling carriage cover fixed plate



18. Unscrew the four hexagon socket screws and spring and flat washers of traveling carriage cover fixed plate; then remove the fixed plate from the traveling carriage;



Wire rope Wire rope clamped block M5X16 Hexagon socket screw



- 282 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



19. Loosen the two hexagon socket screws (M5X16) respectively on the wire rope clamped blocks of the balancer and the reel; remove the clamped blocks from the wire ropes; place the two wire ropes aside. (note: simply loosen but not remove the screws on the clamped block);



Column support plate 2



Column support plate 1



20. Remove the 12 hexagon socket screws (M6X16) and spring and flat washers used to mount the traveling carriage and telescopic column onto the column support plate 1 and 2; dismantle the three column support plates; 21. Fill the space between the telescopic column bottom and the floor with a 148mm (thickness) pad to support the telescopic column, so that it is easier to dismantle the column subsequently.



M6X16 Hexagon socket screw



Locating pin



22. Pull the locating pin out of the traveling carriage; dismantle the six hexagon socket screws (M6X16) and spring and flat washers; remove the pad filled in the space between the telescopic column and traveling carriage (if any); there people work together (two people



- 283 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



clasp the telescopic column; the other people draw out the pad in the bottom of the telescopic column) to slowly carry the telescopic column out of the traveling carriage mounting rack and put it aside.







Installation



Locating pin



1.



Dismantle the three column support plates of the new telescopic column; three people work together (two people clasp the telescopic column, slowly move it onto the traveling carriage mounting rack and align the locating pin hole with that on the traveling carriage; the other people inserts the locating pin; the first two people still slightly hold the telescopic column to make sure that it will not escape from the locating pin);



M6X16



Hexagon



socket screw



2.



Screw on the four hexagon socket screws (M6X16), and spring and flat washers; people who hold the telescopic column can let go (Note: Do not tighten but pre-tighten the screws easily for subsequent adjustment);



- 284 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Column support plate 2 Column support plate 1



3.



Apply 14 hexagon socket screws (M6X16) and spring and flat washers to mount the telescopic column onto the traveling carriage by column support plate 1 and 2 (Note: Do not tighten but pre-tighten the screws easily for subsequent adjustment);



Slot 1 4.



Slot 2



Slot 3



Main reel



Transition wheel



Wire rope fixed axle



Lift the bumper assembly and place it onto the wire rope; wind the wire rope of the balancer around the main reel (Note: Wind the wire rope from slot 3 to slot2; then turn it around the transition wheel at the main reel side; pull the wire rope to the telescopic column and let it go through the wire rope fixed axle; straighten the wire rope and lift the bumper assembly to the limit position);



Wire rope splint



M5x16 Hexagon socket screw



- 285 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.



Use two hexagon socket screws and spring washers to slightly screw the two parts of the splint together; jam the splint with the wire rope and then tighten the screws (Note: The splint should be jammed as close as possible to the wire rope fixed axle and be tightened to avoid loosening.); Auxiliary reel



6.



Wire rope of reel



Wind the wire rope around the auxiliary reel circle by circle till to the second slot from the last; then wind the wire rope around the transition wheel and pull it to the telescopic column; jam the other splint with the wire rope and tighten the screws (Note: The splint should be jammed as close as possible to the wire rope fixed axle and be tightened to avoid loosening.);



Wire tie



7.



Insert the residual wire into the trunk 4; use wire tie to tie the bended wire near the splint (with two ties for twice); and cut the residual part of ties. Note: The bended radius should be as small as possible;



- 286 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



8.



Four people work together to carry the traveling carriage mounting rack onto the lifter; draw the four groups of traveling wheel assemblies in the innermost position; one people moves the lifter in place and then slowly rise it; the other people stands on the stepladder to see if there is any obstruction; stop rising the lifter when the it is almost close to the movable bridge;



Eccentric wheel assembly



Traveling wheel assembly



9.



Adjust the traveling carriage in place to make the four groups of traveling wheel assemblies align with the two groups of eccentric wheel assemblies; hold the traveling carriage assembly; slowly rise it to make the eccentric wheel fully enter the guideway of the movable bridge. Note: If the eccentric wheel cannot align at the slideway of the movable bridge, temporarily stop rising the lifter or even lower it a bit, move the lifter and rise the lifter again until the eccentric wheel assemblies are aligned;



- 287 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



M5X12 Hexagon socket screw



Manual lifting point



10. Rise the lifter until the lower surface of the traveling wheel is a little higher than the rail surface; then stop rising the lifter; draw out the four groups of traveling wheel assemblies and let them enter the guideway of the movable bridge; push the traveling wheel until the circlip on the axle is close to the mounting point;



then tighten the hexagon socket



screws (M5X12) over the axle of the traveling wheel; (Note: Due to weight imbalance on the lifter, the traveling wheel part away from the lifter handgrip inclines and is unable to be higher than the rail surface. In this case, manually lift the traveling carriage frame at the lifting point.);



11. Push the upper limit wheel upward until the roller contacts with the rail surface of the upper limit wheel; tighten the two hexagon socket screws (M5X12); respectively adjust the four groups of upper limit wheels; 12. Unscrew the four hexagon socket screws (M8X25) and nuts of the traveling carriage and its mounting rack; place the traveling carriage and the mounting rack on the floor;



- 288 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Inclinometer measured planes



Cushioned point



13. Adjust the telescopic column assembly upright with inclinometer; measure the angle between the two planes (as shown above) with the tolerance of 0.1°; if deviation exists, swing the telescopic column until the deviation is less than the tolerance; if needed, fill the pad (previously removed) again to adjust the angle; finally, tighten the 18 hexagon socket screws (M6X16) connecting the telescopic column with traveling carriage;



14. Install the two fixing plates and the drum. Pay attention to the installing direction.



M8X50 Hexagon socket screw



- 289 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



15. Install the dismantled brake assembly and connect the related wires (Note: In this case, slightly apply but not tighten the four hexagon socket set screws (M6X20) of the brake for the purpose that the braking force needs adjusting by power-up subsequently.); then move the traveling carriage to the place where is convenient for installing the handpiece assembly; tighten hexagon socket screws (M8X50) to stand the movable bridge so that the traveling carriage is unable to move freely and it is convenient for installing the handpiece assembly (Note: To prevent the movable bridge scratching for directly contact with the screw, fill the space between the screw and the movable bridge with a pad.);



Pay attention to the groove direction



of



these



two



electromagnetic bolts



16. Install the dismantled horizontal turntable assembly below the telescopic column with six hexagon socket screws (M5X16) (Be noted of the installing direction as shown below); place the pads between the turntable and the telescopic column in original manner (if any);



Make sure that the horizontal limited post is alignment with the bolt groove at the angle of 180°.



17. Fit the dismantled handpiece assembly onto the horizontal turntable with 6 hexagon socket screws (M6X26) and spring and flat washers (Note: Align the screws with the screw mounting hole in the direction shown below and then tighten the screws); If there was any pad dismantled between the turntable and L-arm adaptor 2 previously, place them in the original manner (Note: Pad position shall be in alignment with the holes and it shall not be the obstruction for the installation of screws.);



- 290 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



M5X16 hexagon socket screws



18. Unscrew the two hexagon socket screws (M5X16) and spring and flat washers on the telescopic column support and install the column cover (Note: Be careful to prevent the screws falling into the telescopic column; If the screws are not easy to unscrew, the handpiece assembly can be slightly lifted by one people so that the screws can be easily loosened.); 19. Pull out the safety pin of balancer and hit it to the unlocking point; loosen the hexagon socket screws (M8X50) standing the movable bridge so that the traveling carriage is able to move freely along the rails;



Spool fixed support



20. Pull the telescopic column downward in place; fix the removed wires to the telescopic column with spool fixed support; 21. Install the inspection block onto the synchronous belt with 2 hexagon socket screws (M3X10) and spring washers.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on the system and start the test procedures;



2.



Adjust the travel inspection switch of the telescopic column. For operation procedures, refer to Sec. 4.5.4;



3.



Adjust the braking force (i.e. adjust the interval between the brake assembly and the profile slideway); for the adjustment, one people presses and holds the Power button (as shown below) and the other people adjusts on the rails. Apply feeler to control the interval - 291 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



between the brake friction block and the rail side; the feeler thickness ranges from 0.15mm to 0.4mm;Power up the electromagnet and holds the Power button; jam the space between the friction block and the profile surface with the feeler of appropriate thickness; compact the friction block and M6X20 set screws (M6X16 set screws are used for the brake of rails); then power off the electromagnet and remove the feeler; Power on/off the electromagnet to test the performance of the brake; if any position in the travel is unable to lock after power-off, replace the feeler with a new one of other thickness to readjust until the brake runs normally at any point in the travel range. Power on/off



Power on/off button



button of the



of



brake of rails



traveling carriage



4.



the



brake



of



Brake



Feeler



Install the front and rear shells onto the traveling carriage assembly in the same manner with disassembly (two people work together).



At least two persons are needed for the installation of rear shell.



- 292 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.7 Handpiece Assembly 5.7.1 Replace the Tube Handgrip Assembly 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1











Examination period



10 min



30 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Handgrip



801-DR70-00070-00



assembly



Description Tube



handgrip



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



assembly (service



spare



part)







Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.



To prevent user falling down, check whether the lifter or stepladder is in good quality and stable status before usage.



- 293 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







Attached assembly



Tube assembly







Disassembly



1.



Remove the 6 hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M4x8) fixing the rear shell of tube; draw back the rear shell a short distance;



2.



Draw out the photoelectric switch connector of the tube handgrip;



3.



Loosen the four hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16) that fix the tube handgrip;



4.



Remove the handgrip assembly from the front.







Installation



1.



Insert the new handgrip assembly into the corresponding hole of tube front shell and pay attention to the wiring of the photoelectric switch;



When taking out and installing the handgrip assembly, take care of the surface of the corresponding hole of tube front shell to avoid it scratching. 2.



Use 4 hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16) to fasten the tube handgrip (Note: Don’t withhold any cable!).



3.



Connect the photoelectric switch connector of the new tube handgrip with corresponding cables;



4.



Apply six hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M4X8) to fit the tube rear shell to the original position.



Tube front shell



Handgrip assembly Hexagon socket cap head screw M5X16



Hexagon



socket



countersunk head



- 294 -



screw M4X8



Tube rear shell



TROUBLESHOOTING







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Hold the photoelectric switch of the handgrip assembly. In this case, all the brakes shall be released normally and the system is able to travel in a transversal, longitudinal or vertical manner; then release the photoelectric switch. All the brakes shall be locked and the system is unable to move.



5.7.2 Replace the Front Shell Assembly 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 2











10 min



30 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Replace components Item Front shell



Serial code DR70-30-101709



assembly







Examination period



period



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Front shell



1



-



assembly



Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS



•



NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO



•



SYSTEM FAILURE.



- 295 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



To prevent user falling down, check whether the lifter or stepladder is in good quality and stable status before usage.







Attached assembly



Tube assembly







Disassembly



1.



Loosen the M3 set screw and the fixing ring on the high-voltage cable connector. Remove 2 cables and place into the package. Cover the tube high-voltage cable connector using a end cap.



Set screw M3 HV cable connector HV cable connector fixed ring



2.



Remove the 6 hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M4x8) fixed on the rear shell of tube; remove the rear shell.



3.



Disconnect the photoelectric switch cable connector of tube handgrip as well as the corresponding wire-outlet connector of the front shell assembly;



4.



Unscrew the four hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16) that fix the tube handgrip; then remove the handgrip from the front;



5.



Loosen the four combination screws (M4X12) and two hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M4X8) that fix the front shell assembly; then remove the assembly.







Installation



1.



Align the new front shell assembly in the related mounting point; then fix it with four combination screws (M4X12) and two hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M4X8);



2.



Install the tube handgrip (Note: Don’t withhold the cable or damage the surface of front shell!); fix the handgrip with 4 hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16);



3.



Connect each cable in the front shell with related connector;



4.



Install the rear shell of tube by using 6 hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M4X8).



5.



Clean the high-voltage cable with alcohol and dust-free clothes and smear silicon on the surface. Remove the end cap of the tube cable connector and plug the high-voltage cable into the connector (be noted of the polarity). Before the cable is plugged in, the high-voltage cable connector must be plugged into the related groove of the tube cable - 296 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



connector. Afterwards, screw the fixing ring of high-voltage connector and fasten the M3 set screw.



- 297 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Front shell assembly



M4X12 combination screw



Handgrip



Hexagon



assembly



head screw M5X16



socket



cap



Hexagon socket cap



Rear shell



head screw M4X8



of tube







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Adjust and test each key on the handpiece to ensure that it works normally. Hold the photoelectric switch of the handgrip assembly. Then all the brakes shall be released normally and the system is able to travel in a transversal, longitudinal or vertical manner; then release the photoelectric switch. In this case, all the brakes shall be locked, the system is unable to move and the receiver of remote controller works normally.



5.7.3 Replace the Air-duct 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1











10 min



30 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Replace components Item Air-duct







Examination period



Serial code DR30-20-83215



Description Air-duct



Safety



- 298 -



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



TROUBLESHOOTING







•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS



•



NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO



•



SYSTEM FAILURE.



Attached assembly



Tube main body assembly







Disassembly



1.



Dismantle the assembly according to Sec. 4.7.2.



2.



Unscrew 2 combination screws (M4X8) and remove the air-duct.







Installation



1.



Replace the air-duct with a new one. Pay attention to the orientation of the air-duct for the installation, or otherwise the front shell assembly will be unable to install. Fasten the air-duct with 2 combination screws (M4X8).



2.



Install the assembly according to Sec. 4.7.2. Combination screw M4X8 Air-duct Cooling fan







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Adjust and test each key on the handpiece to ensure that it works normally. Hold the photoelectric switch of the handgrip assembly. Then all the brakes shall be released normally and the system is able to travel in a transversal, longitudinal or vertical manner; - 299 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



then release the photoelectric switch. In this case, all the brakes shall be locked, the system is unable to move and the receiver of remote controller works normally.



5.7.4 Replace the Cooling Fan 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1











10 min



10 min



Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Replace components



Cooling fan







30 min



Tools and testing devices



Item







Examination period



Serial code M90-100118---



Description Cooling fan



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS



•



NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO



•



SYSTEM FAILURE.



Attached assembly



Tube main body assembly







Disassembly



1.



Dismantle the assembly according to Sec. 4.7.2.



2.



Unscrew the four screws (M4X20) with washers; disconnect the fan cables; and remove the two cooling fans.







Installation



1.



Replace the cooling fans with new ones. Connect the fan cables, and fasten the fans by 4 screws (M4X20) with washers.



- 300 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



2.



Install the assembly according to Sec. 4.7.2.



Screw with washer Cooling fan Air-duct







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Adjust and test each key on the handpiece to ensure that it works normally. Hold the photoelectric switch of the handgrip assembly. Then all the brakes shall be released normally and the system is able to travel in a transversal, longitudinal or vertical manner; then release the photoelectric switch. In this case, all the brakes shall be locked, the system is unable to move and the receiver of remote controller works normally.



5.7.5 Replace the Tube Emergency OFF Switch Assembly (service spare part) 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 10 min



60 min



20 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



- 301 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







Replace components Item



Serial code



Emergency



801-DR70-00078-00



OFF switch



Description Tube



emergency



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



OFF switch assembly (service spare part)











Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS



•



NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO



•



SYSTEM FAILURE.



Attached assembly



Tube main body assembly







Disassembly



1.



Power on the system; rotate the handpiece to 0°; and then shutdown the system.



2.



Loosen the set screw M3 on the high voltage cable connector, remove two high voltage cable connectors and put into a packaging bag.



3.



Remove the six cross recessed countersunk head screws (M4X8) on the back shell of X-ray tube; remove the back shell and then you can find the emergency OFF switch.



4.



Unscrew the two cross recessed pan head screws with washers (M4X10) and then remove the emergency OFF switch.



5.



Remove the electrical terminals on emergency OFF switch.



- 302 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



X-ray tube



HV



cable



connector (2) Emergency



OFF



switch assembly







Installation



1.



Replace the emergency OFF switch with a new one; re-connect the new switch with related cables; install it back to X-ray tube support and fasten it with two cross recessed pan head screws with washer (M4X8).



2.



Put back the rear shell of X-ray tube and fasten it with six cross recessed countersunk head screws (M4X8).



3.



Reinstall the cable connectors and fasten them with set screws (M3).



Before tightening set screws on the HV cable connectors, screw the fixed loop at cable connectors first and tighten the set screws. Then, loosen the set screws and tighten the loop. Repeat the process until the loop can not be rotated anymore.



•







DO NOT CONNECT TO THE WRONG HV CABLE CONNECTOR.



Completion of adjustment and testing



Power on the system; press the emergency OFF switch after the startup of the system; check whether all the motion is forbidden and a prompt which indicates the emergency OFF switch is press appears in the interface of the handpiece; loosen the switch; and then the prompt disappears and the motion of the system can be normally controlled.



- 303 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.7.6 Replace the Tube Support Cover 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1











10 min







60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Tube support



DR70-20-82393



Tube support cover



1



-



cover







Examination period



(DR70-14)



Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS



•



NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO



•



SYSTEM FAILURE.



Attached assembly



Tube main body assembly







Disassembly



1.



Loosen the M3 set screw and the fixing ring on the high-voltage cable connector. Remove 2 cables and place into the package. Cover the tube high-voltage cable connector using a end cap.



2.



Remove the 6 hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M4x8) fixed on the rear shell of tube; remove the rear shell.



3.



Disconnect the photoelectric switch cable connector of tube handgrip as well as the corresponding wire-outlet connector of the front shell assembly;



4.



Unscrew the four hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16) that fix the tube handgrip;



- 304 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



then remove the handgrip from the front; 5.



Loosen the four combination screws (M4X12) and two hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M4X8) that fix the front shell assembly; then remove the assembly.



6.



Disconnect the cables of the emergency OFF switch and the cooling fans; dismantle the emergency OFF switch assembly, cooling fans, air-duct and support guide sleeve kit;



7.



Remove the two combination screws (M4X8), two hexagon socket cap head screws (M4X10) and spring washers that fix tube support cover; and then remove the tube support cover.



Emergency OFF switch assembly Cooling fan Air-duct Support



guide



sleeve kit Tube



support



cover







Installation



1.



Use 2 combination screws (M4X8), 2 hexagon socket cap head screws (M4X10) and spring washers to fasten the new tube support cover;



2.



Install emergency OFF switch assembly, cooling fans, air-duct and support guide sleeve kit, and connect related cables;



3.



Use 4 combination screws (M4X12) and 2 hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M4X8) to install the front shell assembly; connect related cables;



4.



Use 4 hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16) and spring washers to install the handgrip assembly; connect related cables;



5.



Install the rear shell of tube by using 6 hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M4X8).



6.



Clean the high-voltage cable with alcohol and dust-free clothes and smear silicon on the surface. Remove the end cap of the tube cable connector and plug the high-voltage cable into the connector (be noted of the polarity). Before the cable is plugged in, the high-voltage cable connector must be plugged into the related groove of the tube cable connector. Afterwards, screw the fixing ring of high-voltage connector and fasten the M3 set screw.



- 305 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Before tightening set screws on the HV cable connectors, screw the fixed loop at cable connectors first and tighten the set screws. Then, loosen the set screws and tighten the loop. Repeat the process until the loop can not be rotated anymore.



•



DO NOT CONNECT TO THE WRONG HV CABLE CONNECTOR.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Adjust and test each key on the handpiece to ensure that it works normally. Hold the photoelectric switch of the handgrip assembly. Then all the brakes shall be released normally and the system is able to travel in a transversal, longitudinal or vertical manner; then release the photoelectric switch. In this case, all the brakes shall be locked, the system is unable to move and the receiver of remote controller works normally.



5.7.7 Replace the Tube Rear Shell 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1











10 min



30 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Tube rear



801-DR70-00071-00



shell



Description Tube rear shell (DR70-14)(service spare part)







Examination period



Safety



- 306 -



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



TROUBLESHOOTING



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.



•



BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.



To prevent user falling down, check whether the lifter or stepladder is in good quality and stable status before usage.







Attached assembly



Tube assembly







Disassembly



1.



Power on the system; and lower the handpiece for easy disassembly of tube rear shell;



2.



Dismantle the assembly according to Sec. 4.7.2.







Installation



1.



Replace the tube rear shell;



2.



Install the assembly according to Sec. 4.7.2.







Completion of adjustment and testing



None



5.7.8 Replace the Collimator 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



10 min



120 min



60 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Standard service tools Collimator



testing



tool



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



-



1



-



1



-



1



-



07-661-7662



Collimator



(copperplate with scale)



testing



tool



(copperplate) X-ray deviation inspection



DR70-TF21-01



Radiation



- 307 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



tool



collimation testing tool



SID testing tool



DR50-K02



SID testing tool



1



-



Tapeline



HD3519



Tapeline



1



-



Goniometer/DP360



DP360



Goniometer



1



-



TES 1330A



Illuminometer



1



-



(inclinometer) or levelling instrument Illuminometer







Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Collimator



801-DR51-00184-00



Automatic collimator



1



-



AL02 II (service spare part)







Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



Tube assembly







Disassembly



1.



Under the power-up status of the system, rotate the handpiece to 0°position; then cut off the power;



2.



Unscrew the set screws that fix the lamp cover of the collimator; remove the lamp cover; pull out the air plug of collimator cables;



3.



Rotate the handpiece to 90°position;



4.



Use lifter to bear the collimator; loosen 3 set screws and release the detent lever of the collimator; lower the lifter; and remove the collimator;







Installation



1.



Replace the collimator with a new one;



2.



Use lifter to rise the collimator to the mounting position; switch out the detent lever and have it blocked into corresponding slot; tighten the three set screws until the collimator is unable to descend; release the detent lever and have the collimator freely rotate to block into the slot; tighten the set screws again to fix the collimator;



3.



Insert the air plug of the collimator in place; power on the system; then rotate the handpiece to 0°position; - 308 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



4.



Use flat blade screwdriver to install the lamp cover onto the collimator.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Check whether the illuminant and the windows in both directions run normally;



3.



Conduct calibrations according to Sec. 6.2.7.2 “X-RAY BEAM ALIGNMENT METHODS” of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual.



5.7.9 Replace the Bulb of Collimator 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



10 min



30 min



30 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



1



-



1



-



Collimator testing tool (copperplate



07-661-7662



Collimator



with



testing



scale) X-ray



tool



(copperplate) deviation



DR70-TF21-01



inspection tool



Radiation collimation testing tool



Tapeline



DR50-K02



SID testing tool



1



-



Goniometer/DP360



HD3519



Tapeline



1



-



DP360



Goniometer



1



-



(inclinometer)



or



leveling instrument Illuminometer







Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Bulb of



M90-000192---



Halogen bulb: 150W



1



SIEMENS



collimator



24V



G6.35 bulb socket







Safety



- 309 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.



•







BE CAREFUL TO PREVENT BURNING WHILE REPLACING THE BULB IN COLLIMATOR AS IT IS GETTING HOT IN USE.



Attached assembly



Handpiece assembly







Disassembly



1.



Power on the system; rotate the handpiece to 0°p osition; and then shutdown the system.



2.



Remove three slotted screws on the rear cover of the bulb in collimator and take off the rear cover.



Rear cover of collimator



3.



Remove the screws on the protective cover of the bulb in collimator and take off the cover of the bulb.



Collimator



bulb



protective cover



- 310 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



4.



Take out the broken bulb and replace it with a new one.



Bulb of collimator







Installation



1.



Place the square bulge of the bulb at the groove of the lamp socket and have it located in the horizontal position and the center. Insert the bulb with enough pressure to ensure it is settled.



Please wear protection gloves or other cloth during installation as the oil on one's fingers may smear the bulb. 2.



Install the protective cover of the bulb of collimator with screws.



3.



Install the rear cover of collimator and fasten it with three slotted screws.



4.



Restart the system to check if the bulb works normally, and then shutdown the system.







Completion of adjustment and testing



Conduct calibrations according to Sec. 6.2.7.2 “X-RAY BEAM ALIGNMENT METHODS” of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual.



5.7.10 Replace the X-ray Tube 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



120 min



10 min



220 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Standard service tools



Serial code -



Description - 311 -



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



TROUBLESHOOTING



AEC calibration jig



DR50-J01-01



AEC calibration jig



1



-



Collimator testing tool



07-661-7662



Collimator



1



-



1



-



(copperplate



with



testing



tool (copperplate)



scale) X-ray



deviation



DR70-TF21-01



inspection tool



Radiation collimation testing tool



DR50-K02



SID testing tool



1



-



HD3519



Tapeline



1



-



DP360



Goniometer



1



-



Illuminometer



TES 1330A



Illuminometer



1



-



Aluminium ladder



Gray



SID testing tool Tapeline Goniometer/DP360 (inclinometer)



or



levelling instrument level



Aluminium ladder



testing plate Line pair card







07-535



Line pair card



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



X-ray tube



801-DR70-00090-00



X-ray tube (service



1



-



spare part)







Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







BE CAREFUL TO PREVENT BURNING WHILE REPLACING THE BULB IN COLLIMATOR AS IT IS GETTING HOT IN USE.







Attached assembly



Tube main body assembly







Disassembly



1.



Loosen the M3 set screw and the fixing ring on the high-voltage cable connector. Remove 2 HV cable connectors and place them into the package. Cover the tube high-voltage cable port using an end cap;



- 312 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



2.



Remove the 6 hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M4x8) fixed on the rear shell of tube; remove the rear shell.



3.



Unscrew the four hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16) that fix the tube handgrip; then disconnect the handgrip photoelectric switch cable and remove the handgrip;



4.



Unscrew the two hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M4X8) and four combination screws (M4X12) that fix the tube front shell; remove the front shell;



5.



Remove the two combination screws (M4X8) and two hexagon socket cap head screws (M4X10); disconnect the cables of cooling fans and emergency OFF switch; remove the support cover kit;



6.



Unscrew the set screws that fix the lamp cover of the collimator; remove the lamp cover; pull out the air plug of collimator cables;



7.



Use lifter to bear the collimator; loosen 3 set screws and release the detent lever of the collimator; lower the lifter; and remove the collimator;



8.



Unscrew the three screws on the side cover of tube cables; remove the side cover; disconnect the corresponding cables of tube;



9.



Unscrew the four hexagon socket cap head screws (M6X25) that fix the tube; remove the flange; and finally remove the tube.







Installation



1.



Replace the tube;



2.



Use 4 hexagon socket cap head screws (M6X25) to fix the flange and the tube;



3.



Connect tube related cables; use 3 screws to fix the side cover of tube cables;



4.



Use lifter to rise the collimator to the mounting position; tighten the three set screws until the collimator is unable to descend; release the detent lever and have the collimator freely rotate to block into the slot; tighten the set screws again to fix the collimator;



5.



Insert the air plug of collimator cables in place; use set screws to fix the lamp cover of collimator;



6.



Use two combination screws (M4X8) and two hexagon socket cap head screws (M4X10) to fix the support cover kit; insert the cables of cooling fans and emergency OFF switch in place;



7.



Use two hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M4X8) and four combination screws (M4X12) to fix the tube front shell; connect the tube front shell with related cables;



8.



Use four hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16) to fix the handgrip of tube; plug the cables of handgrip photoelectric switch in place;



9.



Install the rear shell of tube by using 6 hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M4X8);



10. Clean the high-voltage cable with alcohol and dust-free clothes and smear silicon on the surface. Remove the end cap of the tube cable connector and plug the high-voltage cable into the connector (be noted of the polarity). Before the cable is plugged in, the high-voltage cable connector must be plugged into the related groove of the tube cable connector. Afterwards, screw the fixing ring of high-voltage connector and fasten the M3 set screw.



- 313 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Before tightening set screws on the HV cable connectors, screw the



fixed



loop at cable connectors first and tighten the set screws. Then, loosen the set screws and tighten the loop. Repeat the process until the loop can not be rotated anymore.



DO NOT CONNECT TO THE WRONG HV CABLE CONNECTOR.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Adjust and test each key on the handpiece to ensure that it works normally. Hold the photoelectric switch of the handgrip assembly. Then all the brakes shall be released normally and the system is able to travel in a transversal, longitudinal or vertical manner; then release the photoelectric switch. In this case, all the brakes shall be locked, the system is unable to move and the receiver of remote controller works normally.



3.



Conduct calibrations according to Sec. 6.1.6 “X-RAY TUBE SEASONING” of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual.



4.



Conduct AEC calibrations according to Sec. 6.2.5 “AEC CALIBRATION” of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual;



5.



Conduct the detector calibrations according to Sec. 6.2.6 “DETECTOR INITIAL CALIBRATION” of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual;



6.



Conduct calibrations according to Sec. 6.2.7.2 “X-RAY BEAM ALIGNMENT METHODS” of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual.



5.7.11 Replace the Photoelectric Switch of Tube Handgrip 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components



- 314 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Item



Serial code



Photoelectric



M90-100136---



switch of tube



Sensor 2~25mm



handgrip







Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



distance light-on



max20mA



Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



Handgrip assembly







Disassembly



1.



Conduct the disassembly according to step 1~4 of Sec. 4.7.1.3;



2.



Remove the photoelectric switch cover;



3.



Loosen the two cross recessed screws (M2X10);



4.



Remove the photoelectric switch; and pull out the cables from the hose.







Installation



1.



Have the new photoelectric switch go through the steel tube, with wire output from the end;



2.



Use two cross recessed screws (M2X10) to fix the photoelectric switch;



3.



Close the photoelectric switch cover;



4.



Conduct the installation according to step 1~4 of Sec. 4.7.1.3. Tube handle



Tube handgrip



Photoelectric switch Upper



cover



of



photoelectric switch



- 315 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Hold the photoelectric switch of the handgrip assembly and check whether all the brakes are released normally and the system is able to travel in transversal, longitudinal and vertical manner; then release the photoelectric switch and check whether all the brakes are locked and the system can not move.



5.7.12 Replace the Tube Front Shell 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Tube front



801-DR70-00080-00



shell







Description Tube



front



shell



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



(service spare part)



Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



Tube front shell assembly







Disassembly



1.



Conduct the disassembly according to step 1~4 of Sec. 4.7.2.3; remove the front shell assembly;



2.



Disconnect the cables of the right, left and lower keys of handpiece;



3.



Unscrew the six combination screws (M3X8) that fix the right, left and lower keys; remove



- 316 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



the keys; 4.



Unscrew the combination screws (M3X8) that fix the remote controller pressing plate; remove the plate; disconnect the cables of the receiver of remote controller; then remove the receiver;



5.



Remove the two combination screws (M3X8) of the wire protective clamps in both sides;



6.



Unscrew the four combination screws (M3X8) that fix the monitor assembly; and remove the monitor assembly and the cables.







Installation



1.



Replace the tube front shell;



2.



Install the monitor assembly into the tube front shell; locate the monitor assembly; use four combination screws (M3X8) to fix the monitor assembly;



3.



Fix the wire protective clamps in both sides with two combination screws (M3X8);



4.



Install the receiver of remote controller in place and compact it with remote controller pressing plate; fasten the pressing plate with combination screws (M3X8); connect the cables of the receiver;



5.



Fasten the right, left and front lower key kits with six combination screws (M3X8); and connect the corresponding cables;



6.



Conduct the installation according to step 1~5 of Sec. 4.7.2.3.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Adjust and test each key on the front shell assembly to ensure that they work normally. Hold the photoelectric switch of the handgrip assembly. Then all the brakes shall be released normally and the system is able to travel in a transversal, longitudinal or vertical manner; then release the photoelectric switch. In this case, all the brakes shall be locked, the system is unable to move and the receiver of remote controller works normally.



5.7.13 Replace the Right, Left and Lower Key Kits 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components - 317 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Item



Serial code



Left key kit



801-DR70-00088-00



Description Left



control



assembly



key



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



1



-



1



-



(service



spare part) Right key kit



801-DR70-00087-00



Right



control



assembly



key



(service



spare part) Front lower



801-DR70-00089-00



key kit



Lower



control



assembly



key



(service



spare part)







Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



Tube front shell assembly







Disassembly



1.



Conduct the disassembly according to step 1~5 of Sec. 4.7.2.3; remove the front shell assembly;



2.



Disconnect the cables of the right, left and lower keys of handpiece;



3.



Unscrew the six combination screws (M3X8) that fix the right, left and lower keys; remove the keys;







Installation



1.



Replace the right, left and lower key kits;



2.



Fasten the right, left and front lower key kits with six combination screws (M3X8); and connect the corresponding cables;



3.



Conduct the installation according to step 1~5 of Sec. 4.7.2.3.



- 318 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Right key kit



Front



lower



Combination



Right key kit



screws M3X8



key kit







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Adjust and test each key of front shell assembly to ensure that thy work normally.



5.7.14 Replace the Infrared Receiver 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Infrared receiver



801-DR51-00164-00



Description IR



receiver



board



(service spare part)







Safety



- 319 -



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



TROUBLESHOOTING



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



Tube front shell assembly







Disassembly



1.



Conduct the disassembly according to Sec. 4.7.2.3; remove the front shell assembly;



2.



Unscrew the combination screws (M3X8) that fix the remote controller pressing plate; remove the plate; disconnect the cables of the receiver of remote controller; then remove the receiver;







Installation



1.



Replace the infrared receiver;



2.



Install the receiver of remote controller in place and compact it with remote controller pressing plate; fasten the pressing plate with combination screws (M3X8); connect the cables of the receiver;



3.



Install the assembly according to Sec. 4.7.2.3.



Tube front shell



Combination screws M3X8



Remote controller receiver



Remote controller pressing plate







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Adjust and test each key on the front shell assembly to ensure that they work normally. Hold the photoelectric switch of the handgrip assembly. Then all the brakes shall be released normally and the system is able to travel in a transversal, longitudinal or vertical manner; then release the photoelectric switch. In this case, all the brakes shall be locked, the system is unable to move and the receiver of remote controller works normally.



- 320 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.7.15 Replace the Monitor Assembly 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Monitor Assembly



801-DR70-00173-00



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Handpiece monitor



1



-



assembly (with wire) (service spare part)







Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



Tube front shell assembly







Disassembly



1.



Conduct the disassembly according to Sec. 4.7.2.3; remove the front shell assembly;



2.



Disconnect the cables of right, left and lower keys of handpiece as well as the cables of remote controller receiver;



3.



Remove the two combination screws (M3X8) of the wire protective clamps in both sides;



4.



Unscrew the four combination screws (M3X8) that fix the monitor assembly; and remove the monitor assembly and the cables.







Installation



1.



Replace the monitor assembly and its cables;



2.



Install the monitor assembly into the tube front shell; locate the monitor assembly; use - 321 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



four combination screws (M3X8) to fix the monitor assembly; 3.



Fix the wire protective clamps in both sides with two combination screws (M3X8); block corresponding cables into the clamps;



4.



Connect the cables of the receiver of remote controller as well as those of each key;



5.



Install the assembly according to Sec. 4.7.2.3. Tube front shell



Monitor assembly Combination Cable clamp



screws M3X8







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Adjust and test each key on the front shell assembly to ensure that they work normally. Hold the photoelectric switch of the handgrip assembly. Then all the brakes shall be released normally and the system is able to travel in a transversal, longitudinal or vertical manner; then release the photoelectric switch. In this case, all the brakes shall be locked, the system is unable to move and the receiver of remote controller works normally.



5.7.16 Replace the LCD Backlight Inverter 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



10 min



30 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



LCD backlight



801-DR51-00114-00



8.4-inch LCD backlight



1



-



- 322 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



inverter



inverter



(D-PEAK)



(service spare part)







Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



Monitor assembly







Disassembly



1.



Conduct the disassembly according to Sec. 4.7.2.3; remove the front shell assembly;



2.



Unscrew 3 combination screws (M3X8) that fix the PCB cover of screen; then remove the cover;



3.



Disconnect the cables of LCD backlight inverter; unscrew the two cross recessed screws (M2X6) that fix the LCD backlight inverter; and then remove the inverter.







Installation



1.



Replace the LCD backlight inverter;



2.



Fasten the LCD backlight inverter with two cross recessed screws (M2X6); connect the cables of the inverter;



3.



Fasten the PCB cover of the screen with three combination screws (M3X8);



4.



Install the assembly according to Sec. 4.7.2.3.



Front shell of tube PCB cover Cross



recessed



LCD backlight inverter pan head screw M2X6







Completion of adjustment and testing - 323 -



Combination screw M3X8



TROUBLESHOOTING



1.



Power on.



2.



Adjust and test each key on the front shell assembly to ensure that they work normally. Hold the photoelectric switch of the handgrip assembly. Then all the brakes shall be released normally and the system is able to travel in a transversal, longitudinal or vertical manner; then release the photoelectric switch. In this case, all the brakes shall be locked, the system is unable to move and both the display screen and touch screen work normally.



5.7.17 Replace the LCD Drive Control Board 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



10 min



30 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



LCD drive



801-DR51-00256-00



control board



Description 8.4-inch



LCD



control (D-PEAK)



drive



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



board (service



spare part)







Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



Monitor assembly







Disassembly



1.



Conduct the disassembly according to Sec. 4.7.2.3; remove the front shell assembly;



- 324 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



2.



Unscrew 3 combination screws (M3X8) that fix the PCB cover of screen; then remove the cover;



3.



Disconnect the cables of LCD drive control board; unscrew the five combination screws that fix LCD drive control board; and remove the control board.







Installation



1.



Replace the LCD drive control board;



2.



Fasten the LCD drive control board with five combination screws (M3X8); connect the cables of the LCD drive control board;



3.



Fasten the PCB cover of the screen with three combination screws (M3X8);



4.



Install the assembly according to Sec. 4.7.2.3.



PCB cover Combination



LCD



screw M3X8



control board



drive







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Adjust and test each key on the front shell assembly to ensure that they work normally. Hold the photoelectric switch of the handgrip assembly. Then all the brakes shall be released normally and the system is able to travel in a transversal, longitudinal or vertical manner; then release the photoelectric switch. In this case, all the brakes shall be locked, the system is unable to move and both the display screen and touch screen work normally.



5.7.18 Replace the Human-machine Interface Board 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1



Examination period



period 10 min



30 min



- 325 -



20 min



TROUBLESHOOTING







Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Human-machine



801-DR70-00162-00



Human-machine



1



-



interface board



interface board (service spare part)







Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



Monitor assembly







Disassembly



1.



Conduct the disassembly according to step 1~5 of Sec. 4.7.2.3; remove the front shell assembly;



2.



Unscrew 3 combination screws (M3X8) that fix the PCB cover of screen; then remove the cover;



3.



Disconnect the cables of human-machine interface board; unscrew the four combination screws (M3X8) that fix the human-machine interface board; and finally remove the interface board.







Installation



1.



Replace the human-machine interface board;



2.



Fix the human-machine interface board with four combination screws; connect the corresponding cables;



3.



Fasten the PCB cover of the screen with three combination screws (M3X8);



4.



Install the assembly according to Sec. 4.7.2.3.



- 326 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



PCB cover Combination



Human-machine



screw M3X8



interface board







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Adjust and test each key on the front shell assembly to ensure that they work normally. Hold the photoelectric switch of the handgrip assembly. Then all the brakes shall be released normally and the system is able to travel in a transversal, longitudinal or vertical manner; then release the photoelectric switch. In this case, all the brakes shall be locked, the system is unable to move and both the display screen and touch screen work normally. The remote controller and the emergency OFF switch of X-ray tube shall work normally.



5.7.19 Replace the Touch Screen Controller 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Touch screen



801-DR51-00255-00



controller



Description Resistance screen



- 327 -



touch controller



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



TROUBLESHOOTING



RS-232



interface



(service spare part)







Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



Monitor assembly







Disassembly



1.



Conduct the disassembly according to Sec. 4.7.2.3; remove the front shell assembly;



2.



Unscrew 3 combination screws (M3X8) that fix the PCB cover of screen; then remove the cover;



3.



Disconnect the cables of human-machine interface board; unscrew the four combination screws (M3X8) that fix the human-machine interface board; and finally remove the interface board.



4.



Disconnect the cables and unscrew the two combination screws (M3X8) to remove the touch screen controller;







Installation



1.



Replace the touch screen controller;



2.



Fasten the touch screen controller with two combination screws (M3X8) and connect the corresponding cables;



3.



Fix the human-machine interface board with four combination screws; connect the corresponding cables;



4.



Fasten the PCB cover of the screen with three combination screws (M3X8);



5.



Install the assembly according to Sec. 4.7.2.3.



- 328 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



PCB cover Combination Human-machine



screw M3X8



interface board



Touch screen controller







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Adjust and test each key on the front shell assembly to ensure that they work normally. Hold the photoelectric switch of the handgrip assembly. Then all the brakes shall be released normally and the system is able to travel in a transversal, longitudinal or vertical manner; then release the photoelectric switch. In this case, all the brakes shall be locked, the system is unable to move and both the display screen and touch screen work normally.



5.7.20 Replace the Locknut 3 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item Locknut 3



Serial code DR70-20-82339



Description Locknut 3 - 329 -



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



TROUBLESHOOTING







Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



L-arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Lock the spring balancer;



2.



Place a lifter in the lower front of the tube; rise the lifter to bear the bottom of collimator;



3.



Pull the cable, which enters into the tube assembly from the cable clamp, out of the outlet a bit;



4.



Remove the four hexagon socket cap head screws (M6X16) that fix the tube assembly;



5.



Move the lifter backward a bit (about 15mm) to have the tube assembly escape from L-arm assembly;



6.



Unscrew the locknut 3 with monkey wrench.







Installation



1.



Replace the locknut 3 with new one; and tighten it with the torque of 230kgfmm;



2.



Push the lifter until the locknut 3 stretches into the small hole of tube support and the tube support fits the terminal pad well;



3.



Fasten the tube assembly onto the L-arm assembly with 4 hexagon socket cap head screws (M6X16);



4.



Lower the lifter and release the spring balancer.



Hexagon socket cap head screw M6X16



Tube assembly



Locknut 3



Terminal pad of tube - 330 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







Completion of adjustment and testing



None



5.7.21 Replace the Cable Clamp Assembly 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Cable clamp



801-DR70-00063-00



Cable clamp assembly



1



-



assembly







(service spare part)



Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.



To prevent user falling down, check whether the lifter or stepladder is in good quality and stable status before usage.







Attached assembly



L-arm assembly



- 331 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







Disassembly



1.



Remove two hexagon socket cap head screws (M3X10) and then remove the cable jamming ring 1;



2.



Remove two hexagon socket cap head screws (M3X10) and then remove the cable jamming ring 2;



3.



Remove two hexagon socket cap head screws (M6X16) and then remove the lower half of the cable clamp;



4.



Hold the cables (one people) to prevent them dropping down for avoidance of large tension;



5.



Remove three hexagon socket cap head screws (M4X10) and then remove the cable clamp holder as well as the upper half of cable clamp.







Installation



1.



Install the new cable clamp assembly with 3 hexagon socket cap head screws (M4X10);



2.



Unscrew two hexagon socket cap head screws (M6X16) and remove the combination of the cable jamming 1&2 and the lower half of the cable clamp;



3.



Remove two hexagon socket cap head screws (M3X10) and then remove the cable jamming ring 1;



4.



Clamp the cable properly with the combination of the cable jamming 1&2 and the lower half of the cable clamp; fasten the combination with 2 hexagon socket cap head screws (M3X10) to tighten the cable;



5.



Hold the clamped cable to align the ring formed between the upper and the lower half of cable clamp; and finally tighten the lower half of cable clamp with two hexagon socket cap head screws (M6X16).



- 332 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Tube assembly



Combination



of



Lower half of



support plate and



Hexagon socket cap



cable clamp



head screw M6X16



upper half of cable



clamp Cable jamming ring 2 Hexagon socket cap head screw M3X10



Cable jamming ring 1







Completion of adjustment and testing



None



5.7.22 Replace the Limit Pin 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 10 min



30 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







Replace components Item Limit pin







-



Serial code DR70-20-82377



Description Limit pin



Safety



- 333 -



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



TROUBLESHOOTING







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.



To prevent user falling down, check whether the lifter or stepladder is in good quality and stable status before usage.







Attached assembly



L-arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Lock the spring balancer;



2.



Use a lifter to bear the collimator and loosen the three set screws of collimator;



3.



Lower the lifter and dismantle the collimator (not necessary to disconnect the cables);



4.



Remove the limit pin with flat blade screwdriver.







Installation



1.



Apply a bit of glue evenly on the threaded part of new limit pin; install it with flat blade screwdriver; tighten it until its end face is in the same level of the end face of tube terminal pad;



2.



Use a lifter to bear the collimator to the mounting position; fasten the collimator with 3 set screws;



3.



lower the lifter; release the detent lever of collimator; rotate the collimator until the detent lever exactly block in place;



4.



Unlock the spring balancer.



- 334 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



L-arm assembly



Collimator



Limit pin







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Check if all the functions of the collimator are normal.



5.7.23 Replace the Terminal Pad of Tube 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







Replace components Item Terminal pad of tube







-



Serial code DR70-20-82369



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Terminal pad



1



-



of tube



Safety



- 335 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.



To prevent user falling down, check whether the lifter or stepladder is in good quality and stable status before usage.







Attached assembly



L-arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Lock the spring balancer;



2.



Remove the three hexagon socket cap head screws (M4X10) that fix the cable clamp assembly; one people holds the cable clamp assembly (with cables) to prevent the cables dropping down for avoidance of too large tension;



3.



Place a lifter in the lower front of the tube; rise the lifter to bear the bottom of collimator;



4.



Loosen the four hexagon socket cap head screws (M6X16) that fix the tube assembly; pull the lifter frontward to have the tube assembly escape from the L-arm assembly; one people is reserved to hold the cable clamp assembly and the cables, avoiding the cables pulled that may lead to turnover of tube assembly;



5.



Remove the locknut 3 and draw out the terminal pad of tube;



6.



Remove the limit pin on the terminal pad with flat blade screwdriver.







Installation



1.



Apply the glue evenly on the threaded part of the limit pin;



2.



Insert the new terminal pad of tube to the shaft (Note: The key 8X6X20 shall be directed at the keyway);



3.



Use locknut 3 to tighten the terminal pad with the torque of 200kfgmm;



4.



Connect the tube assembly to the terminal pad with four hexagon socket cap head screws (M6X16); then lower down the lifter;



5.



Connect the cable clamp assembly and the cables to the terminal pad with three hexagon socket cap head screws (M4X10);



6.



Unlock the spring balancer.



- 336 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Hexagon socket cap head screws M4X16 Terminal pad of tube



Tube assembly



Locknut 3



Hexagon socket cap head screw M6X16







Completion of adjustment and testing



None



5.7.24 Replace the Shaft Sleeve 3 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 2







Examination period



period 10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







Replace components Item Shaft sleeve 3







-



Serial code DR70-20-82373



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Shaft sleeve 3



1



-



Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT



- 337 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE. 



BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.



To prevent user falling down, check whether the lifter or stepladder is in good quality and stable status before usage.







Attached assembly



L-arm assembly







Disassembly



Dismantle the terminal pad of tube according to sec. 4.7.23.3; 10. Remove the key 8X6X20 and the shaft sleeve 3.







Installation



Replace the shaft sleeve 3; install the new one in place; fit the key 8X6X20 onto the shaft; 11. Conduct installation according to the steps in sec. 4.7.23.3.



Hexagon socket cap head screws M4X16 Tube assembly



Terminal pad of tube



Key 8X6X20



Shaft sleeve 3



Locknut 3



Hexagon socket cap head screws M6X16







Completion of adjustment and testing



None



- 338 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.7.25 Replace the Key 8X6X20 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



2







Examination period



10 min



90 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







Replace components Item Key 8X6X20







-



Serial code DR70-20-82359



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



Key 8X6X20



Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.



To prevent user falling down, check whether the lifter or stepladder is in good quality and stable status before usage.







Attached assembly



L-arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Dismantle the terminal pad of tube according to sec. 4.7.23.3;



2.



Remove the key 8X6X20.



- 339 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







Installation



1.



Replace the key 8X6X20;



2.



Conduct installation according to the steps in sec. 4.7.23.3.







Completion of adjustment and testing



None



5.7.26 Replace the Drive Unit Assembly 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 2







Examination period



period 10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item Drive unit



Serial code DR70-30-101750



assembly







Description Drive



unit



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



assembly



Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.



To prevent user falling down, check whether the lifter or stepladder is in good quality and stable status before usage.



- 340 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







Attached assembly



L-arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Lock the spring balancer;



2.



Remove the three hexagon socket cap head screws (M4X10) that fix the cable clamp assembly; one people holds the cable clamp assembly (with cables) to prevent the cables dropping down for avoidance of too large tension;



3.



Place a lifter in the lower front of the tube; rise the lifter to bear the bottom of collimator;



4.



Loosen the four hexagon socket cap head screws (M6X16) that fix the tube assembly; pull the lifter frontward to have the tube assembly escape from the L-arm assembly; one people is reserved to hold the cable clamp assembly and the cables, avoiding the cables pulled that may lead to turnover of tube assembly;



5.



Remove the locknut 3 and draw out the terminal pad of tube;



6.



Remove the key 8X6X20 and the shaft sleeve 3.



7.



Remove the two combination screws (M3X8) for the disassembly of L-arm back cover;



8.



Remove 4 hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16); disconnect the cables of motor; remove the motor assembly;



9.



Disconnect the cables of the clutch and the brake;



10. Unscrew the four hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X25) that fix the clutch mounting plate; and finally remove the drive unit assembly.







Installation



1.



Replace the drive unit assembly with new one; pass the cables from the cable channel to the back side of L-arm adaptor 1; fasten the clutch mounting plate of the drive unit assembly with 4 hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X25);



During the installation, the ball bearing shall be away from the stand column and be directed at the keyway; the gears shall engage with each other smoothly during the insertion.



2.



Install the shaft sleeve 3 and the key 8X6X20;



3.



Connect the terminal pad of tube to the shaft (Note: The key 8X6X20 shall be directed at the keyway);



4.



Use locknut 3 to tighten the terminal pad with the torque of 200kfgmm;



- 341 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.



Connect the tube assembly to the terminal pad with four hexagon socket cap head screws (M6X16); then lower down the lifter;



6.



Connect the cable clamp assembly and the cables to the terminal pad with three hexagon socket cap head screws (M4X10);



7.



Connect the cables of the clutch, the brake and the motor and fasten them with cable clamp behind the motor;



8.



Fasten the motor assembly with four hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16) and meanwhile, push the motor to have the gears closely mesh with each other;



9.



Unlock the spring balancer. Hexagon socket cap head screw M5X25



L-arm adaptor 1



Drive unit assembly







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Adjust the limit switch for the vertical rotation to enter into the calibration; rotate the handpiece to 92°position (measured with inclinomete r); adjust the potentiometer gear 1 while loosening the potentiometer and switch assembly to make the gears separated with each other; adjust the microswitch in the right side (facing the hanpiece) so that it can contact the touch pin and be triggered when it is located just in the middle of the regulator slot; rotate the handpiece to 80°; then leave it ro tate freely to check whether the microswitch is triggered in the range of 92~93°; if not, readjust the microswitch. Rotate the handpiece to -22°; adjust the microswitch in the le ft side (facing the hanpiece) so that it can contact the touch pin and be triggered; rotate the handpiece to -10°; then leave it rotate freely to check whether the microswitch is triggered in the range of -22~23°; if not, readjust the microswitch.



3.



Calibrate the angle of the handpiece according to sec. 6.2.1.3 “TUBE ANGLE CALIBRATION” of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual.



- 342 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.7.27 Replace the L-arm Adaptor 1 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



2







Examination period



10 min



90 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item L-arm adaptor



Serial code DR70-20-82381



1







Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



L-arm adaptor



1



-



1



Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.



To prevent user falling down, check whether the lifter or stepladder is in good quality and stable status before usage.







Attached assembly



L-arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Dismantle the adaptor according to Sec. 4.7.26.3;



2.



Loosen one earthing combination screw (M4X8) and remove the ground cable; - 343 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



3.



Loosen the combination screw (M4X8) that fasten the ground cable clamp and all the cables;



4.



Loosen the two combination screws (M3X8) that fasten the potentiometer and travel switch assembly; remove the potentiometer and travel switch assembly;



5.



Unscrew the four hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16) that fasten the motor baseplate; remove the motor mounting baseplate;



6.



Remove three hexagon socket cap head screws (M8X25) and then remove the L-arm adaptor 1.







Installation



1.



Fasten the new L-arm adaptor 1 with 3 hexagon socket cap head screws (M8X25); pay attention to the aligning of brim and curved surface to ensure the installing position;



2.



Fasten the motor mounting baseplate to the L-arm adaptor 1 with four hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16);



3.



Fasten the potentiometer and travel switch assembly with two combination screws (M3X8);



4.



Fix the ground cable clamp in both sides with one combination screw (M4X8);



5.



Fix the ground cable with one combination screw (M4X8);



6.



Attach the cable buckle to the L-arm adaptor 1;



7.



Conduct the installation according to Sec. 4.7.26.3. Potentiometer L-arm adaptor 1



and



travel switch assembly L-arm



back



cover



Motor mounting baseplate Motor assembly Cover plate



Drive unit assembly



L-arm adaptor 2







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on. - 344 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



2.



Adjust the limit switch for the vertical rotation to enter into the calibration; rotate the handpiece to 92°position (measured with inclinomete r); adjust the potentiometer gear 1 while loosening the potentiometer and switch assembly to make the gears separated with each other; adjust the microswitch in the right side (facing the hanpiece) so that it can contact the touch pin and be triggered when it is located just in the middle of the regulator slot; rotate the handpiece to 80°; then leave it ro tate freely to check whether the microswitch is triggered in the range of 92~93°; if not, readjust the microswitch. Rotate the handpiece to -22°; adjust the microswitch in the le ft side (facing the hanpiece) so that it can contact the touch pin and be triggered; rotate the handpiece to -10°; then leave it rotate freely to check whether the microswitch is triggered in the range of -22~23°; if not, readjust the microswitch.



3.



Calibrate the angle of the handpiece according to sec. 6.2.1.3 “TUBE ANGLE CALIBRATION” of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual.



5.7.28 Replace the Motor Mounting Baseplate 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools











-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Motor



DR70-20-82363



Description Motor



mounting



mounting



baseplate



baseplate



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT - 345 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE. 



BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.



To prevent user falling down, check whether the lifter or stepladder is in good quality and stable status before usage.







Attached assembly



L-arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Remove the two combination screws (M3X8) for the disassembly of L-arm back cover;



2.



Remove 4 hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16); disconnect the cables of motor; remove the motor assembly;



3.



Remove four hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16) and then remove the motor mounting baseplate.







Installation



1.



Replace the motor mounting baseplate. Use four hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16) to fasten the baseplate to the L-arm adaptor 1;



2.



Connect the motor cables; fasten the motor assembly to the motor mounting baseplate with four hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16); compress the motor assembly during the installation to have the gears adequately mesh;



3.



Buckle the L-arm back cover and fasten it by using 2 combination screws M3X8.



- 346 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Hexagon



socket



cap



head screw M5X16



Combination screw M3X8 L-arm adaptor 1 Rear cover of L-arm



Motor mounting baseplate



Motor assembly







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Press the auto-rotation key of the handpiece; and check if the motor runs normally.



5.7.29 Replace the L-arm Motor Assembly 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



L-arm motor



801-DR70-00066-00



assembly



Description L-arm



motor



assembly (service spare part)



- 347 -



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



TROUBLESHOOTING







Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.



To prevent user falling down, check whether the lifter or stepladder is in good quality and stable status before usage.







Attached assembly



L-arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Remove the two combination screws (M3X8) for the disassembly of L-arm back cover;



2.



Remove 4 hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16); disconnect the cables of motor; remove the motor assembly.







Installation



1.



Replace the motor assembly with new one. Connect the cables of motor; fasten the motor assembly to the mounting baseplate with 4 hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16); compress the motor assembly during the installation to have the gears adequately mesh;



2.



Buckle the L-arm back cover and fasten it by using 2 combination screws M3X8.



- 348 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Hexagon socket cup head screw M5X16



Combination screw M3X8



Motor assembly Rear cover of L-arm



Motor mounting baseplate







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Press the auto-rotation key of the handpiece; and check if the motor runs normally.



5.7.30 Replace the Potentiometer and Travel Switch Assembly of L-arm 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



The potentiometer



801-DR70-00064-00



Description The



potentiometer



and



and travel switch



travel switch assembly of



assembly of L-arm



L-arm (service spare part)



- 349 -



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



TROUBLESHOOTING







Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.



To prevent user falling down, check whether the lifter or stepladder is in good quality and stable status before usage.







Attached assembly



L-arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Remove the two combination screws (M3X8) for the disassembly of L-arm back cover;



2.



Remove two combination screws (M3X8); disconnect the cables of the potentiometer and travel switch; and finally remove the potentiometer and travel switch assembly.







Installation



1.



Replace the potentiometer and travel switch assembly. Firstly, rotate the potentiometer gear 2 to locate the potentiometer in one end; then turn it around for 1.5 circle to locate the potentiometer in the center; connect the cables of the potentiometer and travel switch assembly; fasten the assembly to the L-arm adaptor 1 with two combination screws (M3X8);



2.



Adjust the limit switch for the vertical rotation to enter into the calibration; rotate the handpiece to 92°position (measured with inclinomete r); adjust the potentiometer gear 1 while loosening the potentiometer and switch assembly to make the gears separated with each other; adjust the microswitch in the right side (facing the hanpiece) so that it can contact the touch pin and be triggered when it is located just in the middle of the regulator slot; rotate the handpiece to 80°; then leave it ro tate freely to check whether the microswitch is triggered in the range of 92~93°; if not, readjust the microswitch. Rotate the handpiece to -22°; adjust the microswitch in the le ft side (facing the hanpiece) so that it



- 350 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



can contact the touch pin and be triggered; rotate the handpiece to -10°; then leave it rotate freely to check whether the microswitch is triggered in the range of -22~23°; if not, readjust the microswitch. 3.



Calibrate the angle of the handpiece according to sec. 6.2.1.3 “TUBE ANGLE CALIBRATION” of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual.



4.



Buckle the L-arm back cover and fasten it by using 2 combination screws M3X8.



Potentiometer and travel switch assembly



Combination screw M3X8



L-arm back cover



Combination screw M3X8







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Press the auto-rotation key of the handpiece; and check if the motor runs normally or rotates to -20°and 90°position.



5.7.31 Replace the Bolt Assembly 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components - 351 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Bolt assembly



801-DR70-00065-00



Bolt assembly



1



-



(service spare part)







Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



L-arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Remove the two combination screws (M3X8) for the disassembly of L-arm back cover;



2.



Remove 4 hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16); disconnect the cables of motor; remove the motor assembly.



3.



Remove two hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M3X8) to dismantle the coverplate;



4.



Loosen the four combination screws (M3X8); draw the grooved switch back to the end; pull out the cables of the electromagnet and the grooved photoelectric switch;



5.



Remove the four hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16) and pull out the bolt assembly upward.







Installation



1.



Replace the bolt assembly with new one and fasten it with 4 hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16);



2.



Loosen the four combination screws (M3X8); stretch the grooved switch frontward to the end; tighten the four combination screws (M3X8); connect the cables of the electromagnet and the grooved photoelectric switch;



3.



Fasten the cover plate with two hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M3X8);



4.



Connect the motor cables; fasten the motor assembly to the motor mounting baseplate with four hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16); compress the motor assembly during the installation to have the gears adequately mesh;



5.



Buckle the L-arm back cover and fasten it by using 2 combination screws M3X8.



- 352 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Hexagon socket countersunk head screw M3X8 Cover plate Hexagon socket cap head screw M5X16 Bolt assembly



L-arm adaptor 2







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



When the handpiece is in thorax position, the monitor displays 0°; then draw out the bolt; when the handpiece is in the table-level position, the monitor displays 90°.



5.7.32 Replace the L-arm Back Cover 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Back cover of



801-DR70-00068-00



L-arm back



1



-



L-arm



cover



(service



spare part)







Safety - 353 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.



To prevent user falling down, check whether the lifter or stepladder is in good quality and stable status before usage.







Attached assembly



L-arm assembly







Disassembly



Remove the two combination screws (M3X8) for the disassembly of L-arm back cover.







Installation



1.



Replace the L-arm back cover;



2.



Buckle the L-arm back cover and fasten it by using 2 combination screws M3X8.







Completion of adjustment and testing



None



5.7.33 Replace the L-arm Adaptor 2 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 10 min



30 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components - 354 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Item L-arm adaptor 2







Serial code DR70-20-82382



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



L-arm adaptor 2



1



-



Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.



To prevent user falling down, check whether the lifter or stepladder is in good quality and stable status before usage.







Attached assembly



L-arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Lock the spring balancer;



2.



Remove the two combination screws (M3X8) for the disassembly of L-arm back cover;



3.



Remove 4 hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16); disconnect the cables of motor; remove the motor assembly.



4.



Remove two hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M3X8) to dismantle the coverplate;



5.



Loosen the four combination screws (M3X8); draw the grooved switch back to the end; pull out the cables of the electromagnet and the grooved photoelectric switch;



6.



Remove the four hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16) and pull out the bolt assembly upward.



7.



Place a lifter below the collimator and rise the collimator by the lifter; protect the handpiece assembly from turning over (one manpower needed);



8.



Remove the three hexagon socket cap head screws (M8X25) that fasten the L-arm adaptor 1 to adaptor 2;



9.



Remove the six hexagon socket cap head screws (M8X25) that fasten the L-arm adaptor 2 to the horizontal turntable assembly; and finally remove the L-arm adaptor 2.







Installation



1.



Replace the L-arm adaptor 2 with new one; then fasten it to the horizontal turntable with 6



- 355 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



hexagon socket cap head screws; 2.



Fasten the bolt assembly to the L-arm adaptor 2 with 4 hexagon socket cap head screws;



3.



Fasten the L-arm adaptor 1 to adaptor 2 with three hexagon socket cap head screws (M8X25);



4.



Connect the cables of the electromagnet and the photoelectric switch; push the holder of grooved switch in place and tighten it with four combination screws (M3X8);



5.



Connect the motor cables; fasten the motor assembly to the motor mounting baseplate with four hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16); compress the motor assembly during the installation to have the gears adequately mesh;



6.



Put the L-arm back cover in place and tighten it with 2 combination screws;



7.



Fasten the cover plate with two hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M3X8);



Hexagon socket countersunk head screws M3X8 Cover plate Horizontal turntable assembly



Hexagon socket cap



Bolt assembly



head screw M5X16



L-arm adaptor 2







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Press the auto-rotation key of the handpiece; and check if the motor runs normally or rotates to -20°and 90°position.



3.



When the handpiece is in thorax position, the monitor displays 0°; then draw out the bolt; when the handpiece is in the table-level position, the monitor displays 90°.



4.



Adjust and test the pitching angle of handpiece in the related method;



5.



Adjust and test the horizontal rotation angle of handpiece in the related method.



5.7.34 Replace the Horizontal Turntable Assembly 



Manpower demand



- 356 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



2







Examination period



10 min



120 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Horizontal



801-DR70-00039-00



Horizontal-rotation



1



-



rotation assembly



turntable assembly (service spare part)







Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







BEFORE THE REPLACEMENT, ENSURE THAT THE BRAKE IS LOCKED WITHOUT POWER SUPPLY.



To prevent user falling down, check whether the lifter or stepladder is in good quality and stable status before usage.







Attached assembly



Handpiece assembly







Disassembly



1.



Lock the spring balancer;



2.



Remove two hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M3X8) to dismantle the coverplate;



3.



Loosen the four combination screws (M3X8); draw the grooved switch back to the end;



- 357 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



re-tighten the four combination screws (M3X8); 4.



Place a lifter below the collimator and rise the collimator by the lifter;



5.



Remove the six hexagon socket cap head screws (M6X20) that fasten the L-arm adaptor 2 to the horizontal turntable assembly; lower down the lifter to have the tube assembly and the L-arm assembly a distance from the horizontal turntable; (Note: One people keep holding the handpiece assembly to prevent it turning over.)



6.



Dismantle the six hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16) that fasten the horizontal turntable assembly; remove the turntable assembly (The turntable assembly may be tightly combined with the telescopic column. It may be knocked down with uniform force in the opposite side);







Installation



1.



Replace the horizontal turntable assembly with new one; then fasten it to the telescopic column with hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16) (Be noted of the direction of the turntable assembly);



2.



Rise the tube assembly and the L-arm assembly by a lifter until they are exactly inserted into the horizontal turntable assembly;



3.



Fasten the L-arm adaptor 2 to the turntable assembly with 6 hexagon socket cap head screws (M6X20); then lower down the lifter;



4.



Loosen the four combination screws (M3X8); stretch the grooved switch frontward in place; re-tighten the four combination screws (M3X8);



5.



Fasten the bolt assembly to the L-arm adaptor 2 with 4 hexagon socket cap head screws;



6.



Fasten the L-arm adaptor 1 to adaptor 2 with three hexagon socket cap head screws (M8X25);



7.



Connect the cables of the electromagnet and the photoelectric switch; push the holder of grooved switch in place and tighten it with four combination screws (M3X8);



8.



Fasten the cover plate with two hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M3X8);



9.



Unlock the spring balancer.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on the system;



2.



Adjust the pitching angle of handpiece in the related method;



3.



Adjust the horizontal angle of handpiece in the method for calibrating the horizontal rotation angle;



4.



Press the auto-rotation key of the handpiece; and check if the motor runs normally or rotates to -20°and 90°position.



- 358 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.



When the handpiece is in thorax position, the monitor displays 0°; then draw out the bolt; when the handpiece is in the table-level position, the monitor displays 90°.



5.7.35 Replace the 3-loop Potentiometer of L-arm 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



10 min



45 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item 3-loop



Serial code M90-100130---



potentiometer



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Precise multi-loop



1



-



potentiometer



of L-arm







Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



Potentiometer and travel switch assembly







Disassembly



1.



Conduct the disassembly according to step 1~2 of sec. 4.7.30.3.



2.



Loosen the two set screws (M3) on the potentiometer gear 2; then remove the gear 2;



3.



Unscrew the locknut of potentiometer; remove the potentiometer as well as the flat washer (M10) on it.







Installation



1.



Have the new potentiometer put on the M10 flat washer and fasten it with locknut; (Note: - 359 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Align the convex on the potentiometer with the hole on the mounting rack); 2.



Put the potentiometer gear 2 on the shaft; then tighten the two set screws (M3);



3.



Rotate the potentiometer gear 2 to the end; then turn it over for 1.5 circle until it reaches to the normal mounting position;



4.



Conduct the installation according to step 3~4 of sec. 4.7.30.3.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Adjust the limit switch for the vertical rotation to enter into the calibration; rotate the handpiece to 92°position (measured with inclinomete r); adjust the potentiometer gear 1 while loosening the potentiometer and switch assembly to make the gears separated with each other; adjust the microswitch in the right side (facing the hanpiece) so that it can contact the touch pin and be triggered when it is located just in the middle of the regulator slot; rotate the handpiece to 80°; then leave it ro tate freely to check whether the microswitch is triggered in the range of 92~93°; if not, readjust the microswitch. Rotate the handpiece to -22°; adjust the microswitch in the le ft side (facing the hanpiece) so that it can contact the touch pin and be triggered; rotate the handpiece to -10°; then leave it rotate freely to check whether the microswitch is triggered in the range of -22~23°; if not, readjust the microswitch.



3.



Calibrate the angle of the handpiece according to sec. 6.2.1.3 “TUBE ANGLE CALIBRATION” of Digieye 760 Installation Manual.



5.7.36 Replace the Microswitch of L-arm 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



1 



Examination period



period



10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description - 360 -



Quantity



Manufacturer



TROUBLESHOOTING



Microswitch of



M07-00143S---



L-arm







Subminiature



2



-



microswitch DIP



Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



Potentiometer and travel switch assembly







Disassembly



1.



Conduct the disassembly according to sec. 4.7.30.3；



2.



Dismantle the four cross recessed pan head screws (M2X10) that fasten the travel switch; and then remove the switch;







Installation



1.



Replace the travel switch with new one; then fasten it with 4 cross recessed pan head screws (M2X10);



2.



Conduct the installation according to step 3~4 of sec. 4.7.30.3.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Adjust the limit switch for the vertical rotation to enter into the calibration; rotate the handpiece to 92°position (measured with inclinomete r); adjust the potentiometer gear 1 while loosening the potentiometer and switch assembly to make the gears separated with each other; adjust the microswitch in the right side (facing the hanpiece) so that it can contact the touch pin and be triggered when it is located just in the middle of the regulator slot; rotate the handpiece to 80°; then leave it ro tate freely to check whether the microswitch is triggered in the range of 92~93°; if not, readjust the microswitch. Rotate the handpiece to -22°; adjust the microswitch in the le ft side (facing the hanpiece) so that it can contact the touch pin and be triggered; rotate the handpiece to -10°; then leave it rotate freely to check whether the microswitch is triggered in the range of -22~23°; if not, readjust the microswitch.



3.



Calibrate the angle of the handpiece according to sec. 6.2.1.3 “TUBE ANGLE CALIBRATION” of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual.



5.7.37 Adjust the Pitching Angle of Handpiece 



Manpower demand



- 361 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



2







Examination period



10 min



120 min



-



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



code







Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Inclinometer



DP360



Inclinometer



1



-



Replace components Item 0.2mm



Serial code 042-001022-00



washer for



Description



Quantity



0.2mm washer for



4



Manufacturer



adaptor 2



adaptor 2 Washer for



DR70-20-101627



Washer for adaptor 2



3



-



adaptor 2







Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



/







Operation procedures



1.



Loosen the M3 set screw and the fixing ring on the high-voltage cable connector. Remove 2 cables and place into the package. Cover the tube high-voltage cable connector using an end cap.



- 362 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Set screw M3 HV cable connector HV cable connector fixed ring



2.



Remove the 6 hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M4x8) fixed on the rear shell of tube; remove the rear shell.



3.



When the tube is in 90°position, measure the ang le of the cover plate of tube support with inclinometer; measure the horizontal angle by the red line (as shown below) respectively for two times and take the average reading (θ). Measure



the



horizontal angle



4.



calculate the pad height needed (h＝80 * tan θ). Because there are two kinds of pads used for the adjustment, calculate the quantities of 0.5mm and 0.2mm pads needed respectively by “h” (0.5mm & 0.2mm).



5.



h/0.5＝x.y, the digit y is rounded; if y=9, the quantity (a) of 0.5mm pads needed is “x+1”; or else, “x”.



6.



（h-a*0.5）/0.2＝z, the digit behind z is rounded. The quantity (b) of 0.2mm pads needed is “z”.



7.



Lock the balancer; - 363 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



8.



Remove two hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M3X8) to dismantle the coverplate;



9.



Loosen the four combination screws (M3X8); draw the grooved switch back to the end; re-tighten the four combination screws (M3X8);



10. Place a lifter below the collimator and rise the collimator by the lifter; 11. Remove the six hexagon socket cap head screws (M6X20) that fasten the L-arm adaptor 2 to the horizontal turntable assembly; lower down the lifter to have the tube assembly and the L-arm assembly a distance from the horizontal turntable; 12. Place a 0.5mm and b 0.2mm pads in the threaded holes;



Pad



group



for



angle calibration



13. Push the bolt assembly to the end of the bolt; draw back the bolt; and insert 5# hex-key wrench into the bolt assembly to stabilize the bolt relative location with the back end. Ensure that the pads align with the screw mounting holes to avoid the obstruction of screw installation. 14. Rise the lifter; put the horizontal turntable assembly on the L-arm adaptor 2; install the L-arm assembly with 6 groups of D6 flat washer, D6 spring washer, and hexagon socket cup head screw (M6X20) (referenced torque: 75~90kgf.cm). 15. Pull out the 5# wrench; insert the bolt assembly; 16. Loosen the four combination screws (M3X8); stretch the grooved switch frontward in place; re-tighten the four combination screws (M3X8); 17. Fasten the cover plate with two hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M3X8); 18. Install the back shell of tube by using 6 hexagon socket countersunk head screws M4X8. 19. Clean the high-voltage cable with alcohol and dust-free clothes and smear silicon on the surface. Remove the end cap of the tube cable connector and plug the high-voltage cable into the connector (be noted of the polarity). Before the cable is plugged in, the high-voltage cable connector must be plugged into the related groove of the tube cable connector. Afterwards, screw the fixing ring of high-voltage connector and fasten the M3 set screw.



- 364 -



TROUBLESHOOTING







Completion of adjustment and testing



None



5.7.38 Adjust the Initial Horizontal Rotation Angle of the Handpiece 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



2







Examination period



10 min



120 min



-



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools











-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



-



-



-



-



Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



/







Operation procedures



1.



Rotate the handpiece in the thorax position (SID=1.8m); press the light window switch of the



collimator and then a “田” light window is observed; stick a 10mm high TMP



adhesive tape in the middle of the vertical axis; 2.



move the handpiece to the position with SID of 0.9m; press the light window switch of the collimator and then a “田” light window is observed; stick a 10mm high TMP adhesive tape in the middle of the vertical axis;



3.



measure the distance (S2) between the two high TMP adhesive tapes; stick another high



- 365 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



TMP adhesive tap in the position twofold S2 away from the first adhesive tape (as shown below); Alignment edge of the 2nd high



TMP adhesive tape 2nd high TMP adhesive tape 1st high



TMP



adhesive tape Alignment edge of the



1st high TMP



3rd



S2



adhesive tape



adhesive tape



2XS2 4.



remove two hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M3X8) to dismantle the cover plate;



5.



loosen the three locknuts of the horizontal stopper block;



Note: Firstly, loosen the first locknut; then pull out the bolt in motor-driven manner; rotate the handpiece assembly to the second locknut position and loosen the locknut; finally rotate the handpiece assembly to the third locknut position and loosen the locknut. 6.



rotate the handpiece in horizontal manner until the vertical axis center line of the collimator light window locates in the edge of the 3rd high TMP adhesive tape; re-tighten the three locknuts that fasten the horizontal stopper block;



7.



fasten the cover plate with two hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M3X8);



The location of the telescopic column shall not change during the rotation of handpiece.







Completion of adjustment and testing - 366 -



high



TMP



TROUBLESHOOTING



None



5.7.39 Replace the L-arm Assembly 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



2







Examination period



10 min



90 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



L-arm



801-DR70-00172-00



L-arm assembly



1



-



assembly



(service spare part)







Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



Handpiece assembly







Disassembly



1.



Shut down the system; rotate the handpiece to a proper height; lock the spring balancer;



2.



remove the L-arm back cover;



3.



dismantle the motor assembly; dismantle all the cable connectors and the ground fixed points that are embedded into the L-arm assembly;



4.



remove the three hexagon socket cap head screws (M4X10) that fix the cable clamp assembly; one people holds the cable clamp assembly (with cables) to prevent the cables dropping down for avoidance of too large tension;



5.



place a lifter in the lower front of the tube; rise the lifter to bear the bottom of collimator;



- 367 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



6.



remove 2 hexagon socket cap head screws (M3X10) and the cable jamming 1; remove 2 hexagon socket cap head screws (M3X10) and the cable jamming 2; remove 2 hexagon socket cap head screws (M6X16) and the lower half of the cable clamp; remove 3 hexagon socket cap head screws (M4X10), and cable clamp holder as well as the upper half of cable clamp;



7.



loosen the four hexagon socket cap head screws (M6X16) that fix the tube assembly; pull the lifter frontward to have the tube assembly escape from the L-arm assembly; one people is reserved to hold the cable clamp assembly and the cables, avoiding the cables pulled that may lead to turnover of tube assembly;



8.



remove the cover plate; loosen the four crosshead screws that fix the photoelectric switch; push the photoelectric switch of the bolt assembly to the end along the motor assembly; then tighten the four crosshead screws;



9.



one people clasps the L-arm assembly; the other people removes the six M6 screws below the adaptor 2 of L-arm and put the main parts of L-arm assembly in place;



10. one people holds the horizontal turntable assembly; the other people removes the six M5 screws that fix the horizontal turntable assembly and put the turntable assembly in place.







Installation



1.



Replace the horizontal turntable assembly on the new L-arm assembly and fasten it to the trunk 4 with six M5 screws; (Note: Notch A shall be in alignment with the blue line in the opposite side of the end plate);



Notch A



End plate



2.



Check if the limit column on the connection shaft is the closest to the end plate;if not, adjust the limit column to the closest position to the end plate; push the end of the bolt assembly to draw back the bolt; insert 5# hex-key wrench into the bolt assembly to stabilize the bolt relative location with the back end;



3.



remove the cover plate; check if the photoelectric sensor of the new L-arm bolt assembly locates in the position close to the motor assembly; if not, adjust the photoelectric sensor in place; one people clasps the L-arm assembly with the L-arm adaptor 1 in the opposite



- 368 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



position of the end plate; align the bolt with the notch A; put the L-arm adaptor 2 on the turntable assembly and align the screws of the adaptor 2 with the threaded hole on the connection shaft; the other people use 6 groups of D6 flat washer, D6 spring washer, M6X20 hexagon socket cup head screw to fasten the L-arm assembly to the horizontal turntable assembly; while installing the screws, tighten the them based upon the general order;



DO NOT damage any coating during the installation.



4.



place the tube assembly (with cables) onto the lifter and rise it in place; fasten the tube assembly to tube terminal pad by using 4 hexagon socket cap head screws (M6X16); then lower down the lifter;



5.



remove the cable jamming ring 1&2 and lower half of the cable clamp on the new L-arm assembly; clamp the cable properly with the combination of the cable jamming 1&2 and the lower half of the cable clamp; fasten the combination with 2 hexagon socket cap head screws (M3X10) to tighten the cable;



6.



hold the clamped cable to align the ring formed between the upper and the lower half of cable clamp; and finally tighten the lower half of cable clamp with two hexagon socket cap head screws (M6X16).



7.



remove the L-arm back cover and the motor assembly; connect all the cables and the ground terminals; tie and fasten the cables; install the motor assembly back;



8.



Adjust the two photoelectric sensors of the bolt assembly to locate it in the position close to the horizontal turntable assembly; then fasten them and unlock the balancer.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Adjust the pitching angle and the horizontal rotation angle according to sec. 4.7.38 and 4.7.39;



3.



calibrate the vertical rotation angle of the handpiece;



4.



install the cover plate and L-arm back cover.



5.7.40 Replace the Photoelectric Sensor 



Manpower demand



- 369 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



10 min



60 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item Photoelectric



Serial code 011-000002-00



sensor



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Photoelectric sensor;



1



-



custom terminal for external cables (length 260mm)-bolt assembly and photoelectric switch







Safety



•



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



L-arm assembly







Disassembly



1.



Remove the two combination screws (M3X8) for the disassembly of L-arm back cover;



2.



Remove 4 hexagon socket cap head screws (M5X16); disconnect the cables of motor; remove the motor assembly.



3.



Remove two hexagon socket countersunk head screws (M3X8) to dismantle the cover plate;



4.



Loosen the two combination screws (M3X8) of the old photoelectric sensor; remove the sensor and its rack; disconnect the cables;



5.



Dismantle the two screws that fasten the photoelectric sensor to the rack; and finally remove the sensor.







Installation



1.



Replace the photoelectric sensor with new one; then fasten it to the rack with 2 screws;



2.



Install the rack in the related position of the bolt assembly and push it frontward to the end; - 370 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



leave the photoelectric sensor away from the motor assembly; fasten the photoelectric sensor rack with 2 combination screws (M3X8); 3.



Connect the cables of the photoelectric sensor and the motor assembly; install the motor assembly in place;



4.



Install the cover plate and L-arm back cover.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Power on.



2.



Rotate the handpiece in horizontal manner; the rotating angle shall be normally displayed in the upper right of the monitor.



- 371 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



5.8 Accessory Box 5.8.1 Replace the Slideway 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1















Examination period



0 min



25 min



0 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Slideway 1



DR51-20-82736



Slideway 1



1



Slideway 2



DR51-20-82737



Slideway 2



1



Slideway 3



DR51-20-82738



Slideway 3



1



Slideway 4



DR51-20-82739



Slideway 4



1



Manufacturer



Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







BEFORE



THE



REPLACEMENT,



REMOVE



THE



ACCESSORY BOX AND PUT IT IN THE SAFE PLACE.







Attached assembly



Accessory box



- 373 -



GRID



FROM



THE



TROUBLESHOOTING







Disassembly L-shaped



Housing



support



Stopper



Slideway Shrapnel Screw (M3X6) that fix shrapnel and stopper Slideway fixed screw M4X12 Rear cover Wall board Screw M3X6 of rear cover



1.



Remove the accessory box from the wall board and place it in a workable platform;



2.



Remove the ten small pan head combination screws (M3X6) on the rear cover of the accessory box with crosshead screwdriver; dismantle the rear cover;



3.



Remove two pan head combination screws (M4X12) on the slideway to be replaced; remove the slideway from the housing;



4.



Remove four small pan head combination screws (M3X6) that fix the shrapnel and the stopper from the slideway; and finally remove the slideway.







Installation



1.



Install the stopper and the shrapnel in the corresponding positions in both sides of the new slideway with four combination screws (M3X6);



2.



Install the slideway on the L-shaped support of the housing inside-out; tighten it with two set screws (M4X12);



3.



Fasten the rear cover to the back of the accessory box housing by applying 10 set screws (M3X6) in the 10 holes of the rear cover;



4.



Hang the accessory box on the wall board; then push it transversely to completely insert it into the groove of the wall board support leg.







Completion of adjustment and testing



None



- 374 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



After installation, the accessory box shall be securely hung on the wall board.



5.8.2 Replace the Stopper 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1















Examination period



0 min



25 min



0 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Stopper



DR51-20-82741



Stopper



4



Manufacturer



Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







BEFORE



THE



REPLACEMENT,



REMOVE



THE



GRID



FROM



THE



ACCESSORY BOX AND PUT IT IN THE SAFE PLACE.







Attached assembly



Accessory box







Disassembly



1.



Remove the accessory box from the wall board and place it in a workable platform;



2.



Remove the ten small pan head combination screws (M3X6) on the rear cover of the accessory box with crosshead screwdriver; dismantle the rear cover;



3.



Remove two pan head combination screws (M4X12) on the slideway to be replaced; - 375 -



TROUBLESHOOTING



remove the slideway from the housing; 4.



Remove four small pan head combination screws (M3X6) that fix the shrapnel and the stopper from the slideway; and finally remove the stopper.







Installation



1.



Install the new stopper and the shrapnel in the corresponding positions in both sides of the slideway with four combination screws (M3X6);



2.



Install the slideway on the L-shaped support of the housing inside-out; tighten it with two set screws (M4X12);



3.



Fasten the rear cover to the back of the accessory box housing by applying 10 set screws (M3X6) in the 10 holes of the rear cover;



4.



Hang the accessory box on the wall board; then push it transversely to completely insert it into the groove of the wall board support leg.







Completion of adjustment and testing



None



After installation, the accessory box shall be securely hung on the wall board.



5.8.3 Replace the Shrapnel 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1















Examination period



0 min



25 min



0 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Shrapnel



DR51-20-82733



Shrapnel



4



Safety



- 376 -



Manufacturer



TROUBLESHOOTING







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







BEFORE



THE



REPLACEMENT,



REMOVE



THE



GRID



FROM



THE



ACCESSORY BOX AND PUT IT IN THE SAFE PLACE.







Attached assembly



Accessory box







Disassembly



1.



Remove the accessory box from the wall board and place it in a workable platform;



2.



Remove the ten small pan head combination screws (M3X6) on the rear cover of the



3.



Remove two pan head combination screws (M4X12) on the slideway needed for replacing



accessory box with crosshead screwdriver; dismantle the rear cover; the shrapnel; remove the slideway from the housing; 4.



Remove four small pan head combination screws (M3X6) that fix the shrapnel and the stopper from the slideway; and finally remove the shrapnel.







Installation



1.



Install the new shrapnel and the stopper in the corresponding positions in both sides of the slideway with four combination screws (M3X6);



2.



Install the slideway on the L-shaped support of the housing inside-out; tighten it with two set screws (M4X12);



3.



Fasten the rear cover to the back of the accessory box housing by applying 10 set screws (M3X6) in the 10 holes of the rear cover;



4.



Hang the accessory box on the wall board; then push it transversely to completely insert it into the groove of the wall board support leg.







Completion of adjustment and testing



None



After installation, the accessory box shall be securely hung on the wall board.



- 377 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



CHAPTER 6 ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



IF IT IS NECESSARY TO DISCONNECT THE GROUND WIRE FOR THE MAINTENANCE, RE-CONNECT IT AND USE MULTIMETER TO CONFIRM THE GROUNDING STATUS AFTER THE MAINTENANCE.



6.1 Operator Console 6.1.1 Replace the Operator Control Panel 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 0 min



15 min



0 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Operator Control



-



-



1



-



Panel







Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO - 379 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



Operator console internal parts







Disassembly



18. Turn OFF the power supply of the system; 19. Open the front door of the Operator Console; 20. Unscrew the four M3 nuts that used to fix the outside box of operator control board, remove the external cover;



M3 nuts



21. Pull out all the cable plugs on operation control panel; 22. Dismantle the six M3X8 small pan head screws on operation control panel, remove the Board.



Operator Control Panel



Operator control panel set screw



- 380 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING







Installation



1.



Align the position of the new operator control panel with the six studs before it is fastened.



2.



Fixed with six M3X8 small pan head combination screws;



3.



Connect all cable plugs of the connected board;



4.



Fitted with the external cover, screw 4 nuts.







Completion of adjustment and testing



No need to adjust and test.



6.1.2 Replace the Host Computer 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



0 min



15 min



0 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools











-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Host computer



DR51-30-82894



-



1



-



Softdog



023-000055-00



-



1



Safenet



Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



Operator console assembly







Disassembly - 381 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



1.



Turn OFF the power supply of the system;



2.



Open the front door of the Operator Console;



Back door of the Operator Console



Host computer Front door of the Operator Console



3.



Remove the back door of the operator console;



4.



Pull out all the host computer cable plugs;



5.



Remove the host computer from the operator console;







Installation



1.



Place the new host computer into the cabinet of operator console;



2.



Connect the optical fiber (DR70-20-101583) to the optical jack;



3.



Connect the PC start line (DR30-20-83592) to the Start Board;



4.



Connect the FPD communication cable (DR70-20-101581) to the COM1 port;



5.



Connect the generator serial port transfer cable (DR70-20-101584) to the COM2 port;



6.



Connect the synchronous signal cable (DR70-20-101580) to the COM3 port;



7.



Use the Start Board serial port patch cord (DR70-20-101585) to connect the interface start board to COM4;



8.



Connect to Internet;



9.



Connect the monitor to VGA signal cable;



10. Connect the host computer with 220V power cord . 11. Insert the new Softdog, the previous Softdog needs to be refreshed to be used again.



- 382 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



Operator console 220V Power cord



Internet Cable



Connect the FPD and image acquisition workstation with communication line (COM1) Start Board serial VGA signal cable



port patch cord DR70-20-101585



PC start cable DR30-20-83592



Fiber Optic Cable DR70-20-101583



Sync signal cable (COM3) DR70-20-101580



Generator serial port transfer cable DR70-20-101584







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Start and Restart the computer respectively after the installation is completed to confirm the normal operation. If blue screen appears during the process, insert the serial port expansion card, acquisition card and network card in sequence to confirm no defective contact; Follow-up maintenance to avoid any crash on PC.



2.



Enter DROC. Click “My Computer” with the right mouse button. And select “Manage” → “Device Manager” → “sound, video and game controllers” to confirm the presence of ACQ4600. If ACQ4600 is present, it indicates that no drive exists and no test is done to confirm whether the exposure can acquire image. Verify all hardware serial ports are configured correctly.



(If the replaced device does not have the acquisition card, replace



the acquisition card and see "Section 8.3.1.2" to install the driver, and copy the key file from the software key disk that is attached to the FPD to the DROC Installation Directory; Or find and copy the file “PxManagerKey_ACQXXXXXXXXXX.pwd” from the DROC Installation Directory of old host computer to the DROC Installation Directory of new host computer). - 383 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



3.



Re-process the detector calibration.



4.



See "Section 8.3.1.7" to complete all the configurations such as the connection of PACS.



5.



See "Section 8.5 " to finish the import of the image data.



6.1.3 Replace the 4-Serial-port Expansion Card 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 0 min



30 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



4-serial-port



801-DR51-00226-00



4-serial-port



1



-



expansion card



expansion card







Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



Host computer







Disassembly



1.



Turn off the power of the system; Open the front door of the operator console;



2.



Remove the back door of the operator console; Pull out all the host computer cable plugs;



3.



Remove the host computer from the operator console; Dismantle the side cover of the host computer; - 384 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



4.



Remove the 4-serial-port expansion card.



4-serial-port expansion card







Installation



1.



Install the new 4-serial-port expansion card to the host computer;



2.



Fit the side cover of the host computer; Place the host computer back into the operator console;



3.



Connect all the cable plugs on the host computer; Install the back door of the operator console.



4.



Shut the front door of the Operator Console;







Completion of adjustment and testing



Start up the computer; Check whether the serial ports are connected correctly.



6.1.4 Replace the Startup Interface Board 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



0 min



30 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Startup interface



801-DR51-00227-00



Startup



1



-



board



interface board - 385 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING







Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



Host computer







Disassembly



1.



Turn off the power of the system; Open the front door of the operator console;



2.



Remove the back door of the operator console; Pull out all the host computer cable plugs;



3.



Remove the host computer from the operator console; Dismantle the side cover of the host computer;



4.



Remove the startup interface board;



Startup interface board







Installation



1.



Install the new startup interface board to the host computer;



2.



Fit the side cover of the host computer; Place the host computer back into the operator console;



3.



Connect all the cable plugs on the host computer; Install the back door of the operator console.



4.



Shut the front door of the Operator Console;







Completion of adjustment and testing



Start up the computer for a check.



- 386 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



6.1.5 Replace the Display Card 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



0 min



30 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Display Card



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Display card



023-000086-00



GeForce HDMI 512MB PCI-E Double Screen







Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



Host computer







Disassembly



1.



Turn off the power of the system; Open the front door of the operator console;



2.



Remove the back door of the operator console; Pull out all the host computer cable plugs;



3.



Remove the host computer from the operator console; Dismantle the side cover of the host computer;



4.



Remove the display card.



- 387 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



Display card







Installation



1.



Install the new display card to the host computer;



2.



Fit the side cover of the host computer; Place the host computer back into the operator console;



3.



Connect all the cable plugs on the host computer; Install the back door of the operator console.



4.



Shut the front door of the Operator Console;







Completion of adjustment and testing



Start up the computer for a check.



- 388 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



6.2 System Control Cabinet 6.2.1 Replace 380VAC Transformer 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



10 min



30 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



380VAC



801-DR51-00106-00



Transformer 3KVA



1



-



transformer



3PHASE 380V/220V







Safety







ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







THE WEIGHT OF 380VAC TRANSFORMER IS 37.5KG, PLEASE TAKE THE MOST CARE IN MOVING IT.







Attached assembly



System control cabinet internal parts







Disassembly



1.



Turn OFF the power supply of the system;



2.



Open the three doors of the system control cabinet, remove the four M4X8 pan head combination screws of the upper mounting panel;



3.



Pull out one-third of the upper mounting panel, remove the rest that is connected to FPD - 389 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



linear power supply and UPS; 4.



Remove the upper mounting panel together with FPD linear power supply and UPS from the system control cabinet;



Upper



mounting



panel set screw M4 UPS FPD



linear



power supply



Upper mounting panel



5.



Remove the 380VAC transformer enclosure;



6.



Remove the terminal connection and ground wire on the 380VAC Transformer;



7.



Remove the four M8X16 hexagon socket cap head screws that is used to fix the 380VAC transformer;



8.



Remove the transformer from the system control cabinet with care.



380VAC Transformer set screw



Transformer



Grounding transformer







Installation



1.



Move the new transformer to the original location of the old transformer (note the direction), do not damage the cables when moving;



2.



Align the position of the transformer with the four mounting holes and fix it with the original - 390 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



four M8X16 hexagon socket screws; 3.



Connect the transformer input and output cables to its corresponding terminals;



4.



Connect the ground wire of transformer to the ground column;



5.



Install the transformer enclosure;



6.



Install the upper mounting panel together with the FPD linear power supply and UPS to the original location, connect the cables.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



First test the 380V input voltage of the transformer primary side; it has to be within the range of 380±10%.



2.



Test the secondary side A, B, C, E path 220V AC voltage; it has to be within the range 220V±10%.



3.



Test the D path 30V AC voltage; it has to be within the range 30V±10%.



4.



Then measure if there is short circuit in the input and out terminals of contractors.



5.



If there is no short circuit, connect to the cables of the transformer output terminals. Turn on the machine for running.



6.2.2 Replace 24V ON/OFF Power Box 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



10 min



20 min



0 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



24V ON/OFF



DR70-30-82154



-



1



-



power box







Safety - 391 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



System control cabinet internal parts







Disassembly



1.



Turn OFF the power supply of the system;



2.



Open the three doors of the system control cabinet, remove the four M4X8 pan head combination screws of the upper mounting panel;



3.



Pull out one-third of the upper mounting panel, remove the rest that is connected to FPD linear power supply and UPS;



4.



Remove the upper mounting panel together with FPD linear power supply and UPS from the system control cabinet;



Upper



mounting



panel set screw M4 FPD linear power supply



UPS Upper mounting panel



5.



Remove the power input and output cables on the 24V ON/OFF power supply box;



6.



Remove the four M4X8 cross recessed pan head combination screws used to fix the 24V ON/OFF Power Supply Box;



7.



Remove the 24V ON/OFF Power Supply Box from the system control cabinet with care.



- 392 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



Input cable



24V ON/OFF Power Supply Box



Output cable



Set screw







Installation



1.



Move the new 24V switching mode power supply box to the original location of the power box;



2.



Align with the four mounting holes; fix it with the original four M4X8 cross recessed pan head combination screws.



3.



Connect the input and output cables to the corresponding terminals and straighten out the cables;



4.



Install the upper mounting panel together with the FPD linear power supply and UPS to the original location, connect the cables.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Complete the replacement and installation, connect the cables of two sets of input terminals, and turn on the 220V power supply box manually. Observe whether the three LED lights located next to the two sets of output terminals are lighten up, and examine if the output voltage are around 24V.If it is around 24, it is normal.



2.



As shown below: 10-13 and 14-17 is the output of the Driver terminal 24V, as shown in the figure, the test pen is inserted into the test unit to examine if 24V load circuit is short circuit.If not, you can connect the driver terminal output cable to the 24V power supply box.19-22 and 23-26, with the same terminal measurement method.



- 393 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



24V ON/OFF Power



24V ON/OFF Power



Supply Box drive port



Supply Box drive port



Test unit



3.



It can be run on electricity.



6.2.3 Replace FPD Linear Power Supply 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



5 min



10 min



300 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



code







Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



AEC calibration jig



-



-



1



-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



FPD linear



0000-10-11144



Power 220VAC



1



-



power supply



Input 24V 3A + 5.15V 3A Output







Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.



- 394 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING







Attached assembly



System control cabinet internal parts







Disassembly



1.



Turn OFF the power supply of the system;



2.



Open the three doors of the system control cabinet, turn off the UPS;



3.



Remove the shield of FPD linear power supply terminal block;



4.



Disconnect the cables on the front and back terminal block;



5.



Unscrew the four M4X12 cross recessed pan head combination screws that is used to fix the FPD linear power supply;



6.



Remove the FPD linear power supply from system control cabinet.



Terminal block FPD



linear



power supply Set screw M4







Installation



1.



Move the new FPD linear power supply to the original position (note the front and back direction);



2.



Align with the four mounting holes; fix it with the original four M4X12 cross recessed pan head combination screws.



3.



Connect the input and output cables to the corresponding terminals and straighten out the cables;







Completion of adjustment and testing



First only connect the 220V power cord (three cords), then turn on UPS. Use the multimeter to test the output terminals as below table: - 395 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



Position of two Test Pens Value (V) Red Test Pen



Black Test Pen



S1



S1 GND



approx. 24.10



24V



24V GND



approx. 24.15



S2



S2 GND



approx. 5.15



+5V



+5V GND



approx. 5.2



S3



S3 GND



approx. 5.15



－5V



－5V GND



approx. 5.2



The above figure is for reference only, if the numerical values are close to the above, you can continue to connect the cables of output terminal. then turn on the power. Pre-heat the FPD for more than 30 min, turn ON the machine to check whether it can make exposure and image acquisition. To achieve the best performance 30 of FPD or perform the detectors calibration, the power is required to be ON for more than 4 hours.



6.2.4 Replace the UPS Power 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



5 min



10 min



300 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



code











Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



AEC calibration jig



-



-



1



-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



UPS power



0000-10-11145



-



1



APC



Safety



- 396 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



System control cabinet internal parts







Disassembly



1.



Turn OFF the power supply of the system;



2.



Open the three doors of the system control cabinet, turn off the UPS;



3.



Pull out the power cord for UPS power supply input and output;



4.



Remove the four M4X12 cross recessed pan head combination screws of the two UPS fixed strips;



5.



Remove the UPS power supply from the system control cabinet.



M4 set screw



UPS Power



UPS fixed strips







Installation



1.



Move the new UPS power to the original position;



2.



Fixed with the UPS fixed strips;



3.



Insert the input and output lines to the corresponding sockets.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



First, check if the plug are connected properly before connecting the cables.



- 397 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



2.



and then connect the input power cord, switch on B5.



3.



Press



,



(online) the indicator light starts flashing, then the warm light is still blinking.Finally



powered) lights up while extinguished, and



(battery



always light up. (This step should follow the lamps on the right



side to keep on lightened up.) 4.



Finally, connect the output power cord.Connect to the power.Examine if the flat panel linear power supply 220V input is normal, the normal value should be around 230V.



6.2.5 Replace the AC Contactor 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



0 min



10 min



0 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools











-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



AC contactor



M90-100126---



ABB contactor



4



-



Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO - 398 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



System control cabinet internal parts







Disassembly



1.



Turn OFF the power supply of the system;



2.



Open the left door of the System Control Cabinet;



3.



Remove the cables on the fault AC contactor;



AC contactor



4.



Put a smaller size screwdriver into the release equipment, leveraging in the direction pointed by the thick head arrow shown in the below figure. Then AC contactor can be released from the DIN installation slideway;



5.



Remove the AC contactor from the DIN slideway.



Release system Force direction







Installation - 399 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



1.



Align the fillister of the new AC contactor with the DIN slideway from the top and press it with force, until the contactor assembly is installed on in the slideway;



2.



Re-connect the cables dismantled from the contactor.







Completion of adjustment and testing



No need to adjust and test.



6.2.6 Replace the Relay 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



0 min



5 min



0 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Relay



M07-00137R---



Cable package of



4



-



relay







Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



System control cabinet internal parts







Disassembly



1.



Turn OFF the power supply of the system;



2.



Open the left door of the System Control Cabinet; - 400 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



3.



Pull open the relay circlip, remove the relay.



Relay circlip Relay







Installation



1.



Pull open the relay circlip, insert the new relay into the relay socket;



2.



Buckle the relay circlip.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Turn on power for testing.



2.



Turn on the power, use the operator console button to turn on the machine and press the button. Under the condition that no press on the emergency OFF switch of the system control cabinet and the operator console, observe if the LED indicator of relay is lighten up. Use the same method to check on others.



6.2.7 Replace the Stepping Motor Driver 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 0 min



15 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components - 401 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



Item Telescopic



Description



801-DR70-00099-00



Telescopic



trunk stepping



trunk stepping



motor driver



motor driver



assembly



assembly



Handpiece



801-DR70-00100-00



Handpiece



rotation stepping



rotation



motor driver



stepping motor



assembly



driver assembly



SID stepping







Serial code



801-DR70-00101-00



SID



motor driver



stepping motor



assembly



driver assembly



Quantity



Manufacturer



1



-



1



1



Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



System control cabinet internal parts







Disassembly



1.



Turn OFF the power supply of the system;



2.



Open the three doors of the System Control Cabinet;



3.



Pull out the terminal base of the driver downward to separate the terminals with the driver.



4.



Remove the four M3X8 cross recessed pan head combination screws on both sides of driver to dismantle one driver.



- 402 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



Handpiece rotation stepping



Telescopic trunk stepping



SID stepping motor



motor driver assembly



motor driver assembly



driver assembly



Terminal base



Set screws



Stepping motor driver







Installation



1.



Fix new stepping motor driver in the original position with screws.



2.



Plug each terminal in original order.







Completion of adjustment and testing



Power on and test if the related motion is normal.



6.2.8 Replace the Signal Switching Board 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 0 min



15 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description - 403 -



Quantity



Manufacturer



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



Signal switching board







801-DR51-00166-00



-



1



-



Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



System control cabinet internal parts







Disassembly



1.



Turn OFF the power supply of the system;



2.



Open the three doors of the System Control Cabinet;



3.



Pull out all the connectors on the signal switching board.



4.



Remove the eight M3X8 small pan head combination screws; then remove the signal switching board from the rear side of system control cabinet.



Connectors



Fit screw



Signal switching board







Installation



1.



Use screws to fix the new signal switching board on the mounting rack in the rear side of the system control cabinet.



2.



Plug each connector in original order.







Completion of adjustment and testing



No need to adjust and test.



- 404 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



6.2.9 Replace the Device Interface Board 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 0 min



15 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Device Interface Board



801-DR70-00098-00



-



1



-







Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



System control cabinet internal parts







Disassembly



1.



Turn OFF the power supply of the system;



2.



Open the right door of System Control Cabinet;



3.



Remove all the cable plugs attached on device interface board;



4.



Remove the seven M3X8 small pan head combination screws from the fixed board, remove the board.



- 405 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



Set screws M3



Device interface board







Installation



1.



Align the position of the new device interface board with the seven studs to fasten it.



2.



Fixed with seven M3X8 pan head combination screws;



3.



Connect all cable plugs of the connected board in the original method.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Adjustment steps:



2.



Before turning on the power, use the short-circuit test function of multimeter to test: whether the TP1, TP2, TP4 and AGND are short circuit, whether the TP3, TP5, TP6 and GND are short circuit. The following steps are prohibited in short circuit. It is required to replace the board.



3.



Connect to the power, the observed power indicator light D73, D75, D76, D77 light up; D1, D59, D80, D81 should not lighten up;



4.



Use the multimeter to measure the voltage of the TP1 ~ TP6 test unit, record in the following table, the test voltage values should fall into the voltage range, as show in below table: Serial No.



5.



Test unit



Reference voltage



1



TP1



24V±2V



2



TP2



14V±2V



3



TP3



5V±0.15V



4



TP4



5V±0.15V



5



TP5



3.3V±0.1V



6



TP6



1.2V±0.1V



Actual voltage



Memo



Turn on the IPC, open the embedded software, if the D58 and D61 are flashing, it indicates that CAN communication cable and the board work normal, test completed.



Note: When testing the TP voltage test point in Step 2, refer to TP1, TP2, TP4 and AGND for testing. Refer to TP3, TP5, TP6 and GND for testing. - 406 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



6.2.10 Replace the Device Drive Board 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 0 min



15 min



10 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools











-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Device Drive Board



801-DR51-00161-00



-



1



-



Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



System control cabinet internal parts







Disassembly



1.



Turn OFF the power supply of the system;



2.



Open the right door of System Control Cabinet;



3.



Remove all the cable plugs that connected to the device drive board;



4.



Remove the six M3X8 small pan head combination screws from the fixed board, remove the board.



- 407 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



Set screw M3



Device drive board







Installation



1.



Align the position of the new device drive board with the six studs before it is fastened.



2.



Fixed with six M3X8 pan head combination screws;



3.



Connect all cable plugs of the connected board.







Completion of adjustment and testing



Adjustment steps: 1.



Connect to the power, use the multimeter to measure whether the pin 1, 3 of J3 of connector is short circuit; whether it is short circuit between the diode D6 negative and AGND; whether the connector between the pin 2 of J1 and AGND is short circuit. The following steps are prohibited if any one of them is short circuit; It is required to replace the board;



2.



Connect to the power, D41, D42 and D18 should be lighten up;



3.



Use the multimeter to measure the voltage between negative D6 and AGND (V+12) and the voltage between pin 2 of J1 and AGND (V+5), and record these values; the required test voltage should fall in the reference voltage range, as shown in the following table: Serial No.



4.



Test unit



Reference voltage



1



V+12



12V±1.2V



2



V+5



5V±0.25V



Actual voltage



Memo



Turn on the IPC and open the embedded software. If FPD rotates, moves (upward and downward) and stops in a normal way, it indicates that the device drive board works normally. Test ends.



6.2.11 Replace the IPC Control Box 



Manpower demand - 408 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 0 min



15 min



40 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



code Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Tapeline



-



-



1



-



Goniometer/DP360



-



-



1



-



(inclinometer)



or



levelling instrument







Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



IPC assembly







Disassembly



1.



Turn OFF the power supply of the system;



2.



Open the right door of System Control Cabinet;



3.



Remove all the cable plugs connected to the IPC control box;



4.



Remove the four M4 hexagon nuts used to fix the IPC control box, remove the IPC control box.



- 409 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



IPC control box



Set screw M4







Installation



1.



Align the position of the new IPC control box with the four studs before it is fastened.



2.



Fixed with four M4 hexagon nuts;



3.



Connect all the cable plugs to the IPC control box.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Refer to “Sec. 7.1 Touch Screen Activation”.



2.



Refer to Sec. 6.2.1 of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual for location calibration.



6.2.12 Replace the IPC System 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 0 min



10 min



40 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



code Standard service tools



-



-



1



-



Tapeline



-



-



1



-



Goniometer/DP360



-



-



1



-



(inclinometer)



or



levelling instrument







Replace components - 410 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



IPC



801-DR70-00143-00



IPC system (DR70)



1



-



system (DR70)







Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



IPC assembly







Disassembly



1.



Turn OFF the power supply of the system;



2.



Open the right door of System Control Cabinet;



3.



Unscrewed the seven M3X8 small pan combination screws that are used to fix the IPC control box cover.



4.



Remove the IPC control box enclosure.



IP control box



Set screw M3



5.



Press the self-lock system located at the left side of the CF card slot, the CF card will pop-up and it can be extracted.



- 411 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



Self-lock system



CF card







Installation



1.



Insert new CF card into the slot in accordance with the following directions.Until the CF card is fully inserted,



the self-lock system in the left side will pop up;



Press along this direction



- 412 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



2.



Put on the cover, and fix it with seven M3X8 small pan head combination screws;







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Refer to “Sec. 7.1 Touch Screen Activation”.



2.



Refer to Sec. 6.2.1 of DigiEye 760 Installation Manual for location calibration.



6.2.13 Replace the IPC Power Supply Backplane PCBA 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



0 min



10 min



0 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



IPC power



801-DR51-00208-00



IPC power supply



1



-



supply



backplane PCBA



backplane PCBA







Safety



- 413 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



IPC assembly







Disassembly



1.



Turn OFF the power supply of the system;



2.



Open the right door of System Control Cabinet;



3.



Unscrewed the seven M3X8 small pan combination screws that are used to fix the IPC control box cover.



4.



Remove the four cable plugs connected to IPC backplane; unscrew five M3X8 small pan head combination screws. Screws



24V to 5V/12V convert module



IPC power supply backplane



5.



Replace IPC power supply backplane (24V switching 5V/12V module welded on the IPC power supply backplane).







Installation



1.



Align the position of the new IPC power supply backplane with the six studs before it is fastened.



2.



Fixed with five M3X8 combination screws (note: do not fasten screws on top of the CF, or it will affect the movement when inserting and removeing the CF Card) ;



3.



Connect all the cable plugs to the IPC control box.



4.



Fasten IPC cover, and tighten the seven M3X8 set screws.







Completion of adjustment and testing



1.



Adjustment steps:



2.



Connect to the power, use the short circuit test function in multimeter to measure if the



pin 4 and 5 of J1 is short circuit; Whether it is short circuit between pin 1,2 of J4 and - 414 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



J5; The following steps are prohibited in short circuit; it is required to replace the board. 3.



Connect to the power, use the multimeter to measure if the voltage between pin 4 and 5 of J1 is within the range of 24V ± 1V;



4.



Press the Start button of IPC, measure whether the voltage between pin 1, 2 of J4, J5 is within the range of 12V±1V and whether the voltage in front of pin 1 and 5 of J1 is within the range of 12V±0.5V;



5.



Observe if the IPC has a normal startup and the embedded software operates properly; test completed.



Note: Adjustment steps are required to be completed before the IPC cover is fastened.



6.2.14 Replace the 24V Standby Power Supply Board 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



0 min



15 min



0 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



24V Standby



801-DR51-00118-00



-



1



-



power supply board







Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



System control cabinet assembly



- 415 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING







Disassembly



1.



Turn OFF the power supply of the system;



2.



Open the right door of System Control Cabinet;



3.



Remove the four M4 hexagon nuts that are used to fix the 24V standby power supply box cover; remove the power supply box cover;



M4 nut



4.



Remove all the connected cables from the board;



5.



Remove the four M3 screws from the fixed board; remove the board.



M3X8 screw



24V Standby power supply box







Installation



1.



Use the four M3 set screws to fix the new 24V standby power board to original position of - 416 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



the board; 2.



Connect all the cables to the power supply panel;



3.



Put on the power box cover and fix it with four M4 hexagon nuts;







Completion of adjustment and testing



Adjustment steps: 1.



Connect to the power, use the short circuit test file in multimeter to measure if the pin 1, 3 of J1 is short circuit; Whether it is short circuit between pin 1,2 of J2; The following steps are prohibited in short circuit; it is required to replace the standby power panel;



2.



Connect to the power, use the direct current test file in multimeter to measure if the voltage of pin 1, 3 of J1 is within the range of 220±20VAC; Use the direct current test file in multimeter to measure if the voltage of pin 1, 2 of J2 is within the range of 24V±1VDC;



3.



If the voltage testing in Step 2 is within the range, the testing is completed.



Note: Adjustment steps are required to be completed before the power supply box cover is put on.



6.2.15 Replace the 220V Output and Wiring Duct 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



0 min



10 min



0 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



220V output



009-000925-00



-



1



-



and wiring duct







Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE. - 417 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING







Attached assembly



System control cabinet assembly







Disassembly



Remove all the connected wires on the wiring harness.







Installation



For the system control cabinet of DigiEye 760, wiring harness installation is required to follow the operation steps below: 1.



There are two terminals respectively in the joint positions of 3L2 and 5L3 of the AC contactor KC1 (labeled KC1-3L2/51 and KC1-5L3/51). Cut the terminals and the cable.As shown below:



Cut off near the KC1-3L2/51



tape



KC1-5L3/51



2.



There will be two groups of terminals at Terminal 2 and Terminal 5 in the terminal row, with one group of blue and brown cables and the other of black and red cables. shown below:



- 418 -



As



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



3.



Cut off the group of blue and brown cables and connect the other group cables to corresponding terminals as shown below:



Cut off near the tape



4.



The rest of the cables installed in place in accordance with the location and tag.



6.2.16 Replace the IPC Board Intel Celeron M 600 with Memory Stick 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



5 min



30 min



15 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



IPC board Intel



801-DR51-00206-00



IPC board Intel



1



-



Celeron M 600



Celeron M 600 with



with memory



memory stick



stick







Safety



- 419 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



System control cabinet assembly







Disassembly



1.



Turn OFF the power supply of the system;



2.



Open the right door of System Control Cabinet;



3.



Unscrew the seven M3X8 small pan combination screws that are used to fix the IPC control box cover.



4.



Pull out the cables on the startup interface board; unscrew 4 DB9 studs; remove the startup interface board;



5.



Pull out the connection cables on the double-port isolation CAN interface module and all the cables on the IPC board.



6.



Unscrew 4 screws and remove the IPC board from the IPC backplane (with double-port isolation CAN interface module).



7.



Unscrew 3 screws from the IPC board and remove double-port isolation CAN interface module;



8.



Remove 3 M3 studs from the IPC board.







Installation



1.



Fit M3 studs onto the new IPC board with Intel Celeron M600 with memory stick;



2.



Insert the double-port isolation CAN interface module into the IPC board and use 3 screws to fix it;



3.



Align the IPC board with each hole of the IPC cover backplane and install it into the backplane; then fix it with 4 combination screws;



4.



Connect all the cables on the startup interface board, the double-port isolation CAN - 420 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



interface module and IPC board; check the correctness of the jumper and DIP on the double-port isolation CAN interface module; 5.



Fit the IPC control box cover and close the right door of the system control cabinet.







Completion of adjustment and testing



Adjusting and testing steps: 1.



After installation, re-start IPC and confirm whether it works normally.



2.



If IPC works normally, after entering the embedded software, control each operation and



3.



If no problem occurs, perform the touch screen test and location calibration. Refer to Sec.



motion by software and check whether there is any problem during the operation; “6.1.5 Touch screen and key functional test“ and Sec. “6.2.1 Location calibration” of DigiEye760 Installation Manual, respectively for touch screen testing methods and location calibration methods.



6.2.17 Replace the Double-port Isolation CAN Interface Module 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



5 min



30 min



15 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Double-port



801-DR51-00207-00



Double-port



1



-



isolation CAN



isolation CAN



interface



interface module



module







Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE. - 421 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING







Attached assembly



System control cabinet assembly







Disassembly



1.



Turn OFF the power supply of the system;



2.



Open the right door of System Control Cabinet;



3.



Unscrew the seven M3X8 small pan combination screws that are used to fix the IPC control box cover.



4.



Pull out the cables on the startup interface board; unscrew 4 DB9 studs; remove the startup interface board;



5.



Pull out the connection cables on the double-port isolation CAN interface module; remove the three screws fixing the double-port isolation CAN interface module; and pull the module off the IPC board.



3 M3X8 cross recessed small pan head combination screws



CAN module







Installation



1.



Align the pins of new double-port isolation CAN interface module with the pin slot on the IPC board to insert; fix it with 3 screws;



2.



Insert the CH#1 jumper cap on the CAN interface module into No. 7 position and CH#2 into No. 6 position; insert the jumper caps at JP5 and JP6 into two pins; for DIP switch settings, Position 1, 3, 6 ON, and 2, 4, 5 OFF;



- 422 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



3.



Install the startup interface board by the four DB9 connector installation studs accompanied by startup interface board;



4.



Connect all the cables on the startup interface board and on the double-port isolation CAN interface module;



5.



Fit the IPC control box cover and close the right door of the system control cabinet.







Completion of adjustment and testing



Adjusting and testing steps: After installation, re-start IPC and check whether all communication is normal.



6.2.18 Replace the Startup Interface Board 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 5 min



30 min



15 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components - 423 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



Startup



801-DR51-00227-00



Startup interface



1



-



interface board







board



Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



System control cabinet assembly







Disassembly



1.



Turn OFF the power supply of the system;



2.



Open the right door of System Control Cabinet;



3.



Unscrew the seven M3X8 small pan combination screws that are used to fix the IPC control box cover.



4.



Pull out the cables on the startup interface board; unscrew 4 DB9 studs; remove the startup interface board; DB9 connector mounting stud DB9 connector



Startup interface board







Installation



1.



Unscrew the DB9 connector installation studs on the new startup interface board; insert the DB9 connector into the corresponding installation hole; fix it with 4 DB9 connector installation studs;



2.



Connect all the cables on the startup interface board;



3.



Install the IPC control box enclosure. - 424 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



4.



Close the right door of the system control cabinet.







Completion of adjustment and testing



Adjusting and testing steps: 1.



After installation, start up the IPC by “ON/OFF” key; check whether IPC is started normally and the indicator light on the startup interface board is lighten up normally;



2.



If the startup function is normal, shut down the IPC by “ON/OFF” key; check whether the IPC is shut down normally and the indicator light on the startup interface board is lighten up normally.



6.2.19 Replace the 24V Power Supply Board (PCBA) 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel 1







Examination period



period 5 min



30 min



15 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



24V power



801-DR51-00117-00



24V power supply



1



-



supply board



board (PCBA)



(PCBA)







Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



System control cabinet assembly







Disassembly



1.



Power off the system; open the right door of the system control cabinet; - 425 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



2.



Dismantle the power supply protection board; disconnect the 220V power supply cord and the cables of B24V2GND, B24V2, B24V1 and B24V1GND plugs;



remove the 220V



output and wiring duct from 24V ON/OFF power cabinet (refer to the figure of Sec. “24V power compartment soleplate (PCBA)” for specific positioning of cables); 3.



Unscrew the four M4X8 screws from the system control cabinet and remove the 24V ON/OFF power cabinet;



4.



Remove the front plate of the 24V ON/OFF power cabinet; unscrew the three screws fixing the damaged 24V power supply board; draw out the damaged 24V power supply board;



5.



Remove the damaged 24V power supply board from the power supply board holder.







Installation



1.



Fit the new 24V power supply board onto the power supply board holder;



2.



Insert the newly installed power supply board holder into the corresponding position of the 24V ON/OFF power cabinet and fix it with 3 screws;



3.



Install the front plate of the 24V ON/OFF power cabinet;



4.



Install the 24V ON/OFF power cabinet in the system control cabinet; connect the 220V power supply cord and all the cables of B24V2GND, B24V2, B24V1 and



B24V1GND



plugs; fit the fan power supply wires in both sides; arrange 220V output and wiring duct; 5.



Install the power protection board and close the right door of the system control cabinet.







Completion of adjustment and testing



Adjusting and testing steps: The steps are the same with those in Sec. “5.2.20 Replace the power compartment soleplate (PCBA)”.



6.2.20 Replace the Power Compartment Soleplate (PCBA) 



Manpower demand Number of



Preparation period



Troubleshooting



personnel



period



1







Examination period



5 min



30 min



15 min



Tools and testing devices Item



Serial



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



-



1



-



code Standard service tools







-



Replace components Item



Serial code



24V power



801-DR51-00160-00



Description



Quantity



Manufacturer



24V power



1



-



- 426 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



compartment



compartment



soleplate



soleplate (PCBA)



(PCBA)







Safety



ONLY USE COMPONENTS PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO REPLACE ANY COMPONENT. OTHERWISE, IT MAY LEAD TO SYSTEM FAILURE.







Attached assembly



System control cabinet assembly







Disassembly



1.



Power off the system; open the right door of the system control cabinet;



2.



Remove the power supply protection board; disconnect the 220V power supply cord; dismantle all the cables of B24V2GND, B24V2, B24V1 and B24V1GND plugs; pull out the fan power supply wires in both sides;



3.



Unscrew the M3 combination screws and remove the 24V power compartment soleplate (PCBA);



4.



Dismantle the four power supply protection board supports on the 24V power compartment soleplate (PCBA);



- 427 -



ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING



B24V1



B24V2







Installation



1.



3.



Fit the new power protection board supports onto the 24V power compartment soleplate (PCBA); and then install the 24V power compartment soleplate (PCBA) onto the power compartment box base; Connect the 220V power supply cord, all the cables of B24V2GND, B24V2, B24V1 and B24V1GND plugs, and fan power supply wires in both sides; Install the power protection board and close the right door of the system control cabinet.







Completion of adjustment and testing



2.



Adjusting and testing steps: 1. After installation, power on the system control cabinet by “ON/OFF” switch and check whether all the boards are normally powered; 2. Use multimeter to measure the 220V power supply voltage, voltage between B24V2 and B24V2GND, and voltage between B24V1 and B24V1GND; check whether these voltages are normal.



- 429 -



REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS



CHAPTER 7



REPLACEMENT OF



GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS



7.1 Position of Generator Board SAEC Architectural Adapter Plates (AAP) HT Control panel



变 Filament Drive Board



DRAC Control panel



AEC Control panel Interface Control panel ATP Control panel



7.2 Replacement of key components and Boards 7.2.1 Replace EPROM-U24 on ATP Control panel Name of Parts: ATP Control panel EPROM-U24 Tools: Standard tools, Anti-static equipments



- 431 -



REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS











THE GENERATOR MUST BE POWERED OFF BEFORE PARTS REPLACEMENT, WAIT AT LEAST 3 MINUTES FOR THE MAIN CAPACITOR DISCHARGED COMPLETELY AND PROCEED WITH THE PARTS REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT. CONNECTING THE POWER OR SWITCH ON THE GENERATOR IS PROHIBITED UNLESS THE MANUAL INSTRUCTS TO DO SO.



Please wear anti-static gloves or take any appropriate measures when replacing parts or Boards.



Replacement steps: 1. Turn off the generator and the main power, switch 3024SW2-3 of ATP control panel to ON, set Service mode. 2.



Turn on the generator, enter into the Techservice, record the settings of WS1, WS2; Record the value of E01~E32.



3.



Turn off the generator and main power, remove the U24 chip from the old ATP board (remove with care to avoid broken pin).



4.



Check whether the new chip EPROM-U24 has the "U24" label, check the software version on the label is correct.



5.



Use the new EPROM-U24 to replace the old chip, insert to the correct place (note the correct direction of the chip to avoid anti-insert)



6.



Turn on the generator, "E10" will be wrongly reported after few seconds (due to the replacement of U24.



7.



Error reset and hold down the reset button until the fault code E10 disappeared, the normal start up will be completed after that.



8.



Use Techservice to set the WS1, WS2 and E01~E32 same as the old settings before replacing the old chip.



9.



Turn off the generator and main power, switch A3024SW2-3 of ATP control board to OFF, set into Application mode.



7.2.2 Replace the U5 (Microprocessor+ROM)



on



HT



Name of Parts: HT Control panel - U5 (Microprocessor+ROM) Tools: Standard tools, Anti-static equipments



- 432 -



Control



Panel



REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS











THE GENERATOR MUST BE POWERED OFF BEFORE PARTS REPLACEMENT, WAIT AT LEAST 3 MINUTES FOR THE MAIN CAPACITOR DISCHARGED COMPLETELY AND PROCEED WITH THE PARTS REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT. CONNECTING THE POWER OR SWITCH ON THE GENERATOR IS PROHIBITED UNLESS THE MANUAL INSTRUCTS TO DO SO.



Please wear anti-static gloves or take any appropriate measures when replacing parts or Boards.



Replacement steps: 1. Turn off the generator and the main power, switch 3024SW2-3 of ATP control panel to ON, allowed to enter into Service mode. 2.



Turn on the generator, enter into the Techservice, record the value of E01~E32.



3.



Turn off the generator and the main power, remove the U5 chip from the HT control panel (remove with care to avoid broken pin).



4.



Check whether the new chip has the "U5" label, check the software version on the label is correct.



5.



Use the new U5 chip to replace the old chip, insert to the correct place (note the correct direction of the chip to avoid anti-insert).



6.



Use Techservice to set the WS1, WS2 and E01~E32 same as the old settings before replacing the old chip. - 433 -



REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS



7.



Follow the instruction provided in the Manual to process the "Number mA Calibration".



8.



Turn off the generator and main power, switch A3024SW2-3 of ATP control panel to OFF, set into Application mode.



7.2.3 Replace DRAC Control Panel Microprocessor U17 Name of Parts: DRAC Control Panel - Microprocessor U17 Tools: Standard tools, Anti-static equipments











THE GENERATOR MUST BE POWERED OFF BEFORE PARTS REPLACEMENT, WAIT AT LEAST 3 MINUTES FOR THE MAIN CAPACITOR DISCHARGED COMPLETELY AND PROCEED WITH THE PARTS REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT. CONNECTING THE POWER OR SWITCH ON THE GENERATOR IS PROHIBITED UNLESS THE MANUAL INSTRUCTS TO DO SO.



Please wear anti-static gloves or take any appropriate measures when replacing parts or Boards.



Replacement steps: 1. Check whether the new chip has the "U17" label. Check the software version on the label is correct. 2.



Turn off the generator and main power, remove the U17 chip from the old HT control panel (remove with care to avoid broken pin).



3.



Use the new U17 to replace the old chip, insert to the correct place (note the correct direction of the chip to avoid anti-insert)



4.



Turn on the generator.



5.



After turning off the generator for 10 seconds, the LED DL1 on DRAC control panel is in - 434 -



REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS



OFF mode, it indicates the normal operation of U17.



7.2.4 Replace ATP Control Panel Name of Parts: ATP Control panel Tools: Standard tools, Anti-static equipments JP9 JP10 JP11



AEC control panel (Dotted Region)



SW4 JP12 JP5



ATP Control panel JP4 JP19



JP13



SW2



SW3



JP18 JP17JP16 JP15JP14



SW1



JP3 JP2 JP1











THE GENERATOR MUST BE POWERED OFF BEFORE PARTS REPLACEMENT, WAIT AT LEAST 3 MINUTES FOR THE MAIN CAPACITOR DISCHARGED COMPLETELY AND PROCEED WITH THE PARTS REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT. CONNECTING THE POWER OR SWITCH ON THE GENERATOR IS PROHIBITED UNLESS THE MANUAL INSTRUCTS TO DO SO.



- 435 -



REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS



Please wear anti-static gloves or take any appropriate measures when replacing parts or Boards.



Replacement steps: 1. Turn off the generator and main power, align the DIP switch and patch cord settings of the new ATP board with the old one. 2.



Switch 3024SW2-3 of the old board to ON, enter into Service mode.



3.



Turn on the generator, enter into the Techservice, record the settings of WS1, WS2; Record the value of E01~E32.



4.



Turn off the generator and main power.



5.



Remove the AEC control panel from the old ATP control panel (see the Section "Replacing the AEC Control Panel").



6.



Record and remove the add-ons from the old board, remove the old ATP and U24 chip from the generator and old ATP board respectively (remove with care to avoid broken pins).



7.



Insert the U24 chip on the new ATP board (note the correct direction of the chip to avoid anti-insert)



8.



Install the new ATP board on the generator, install the AEC cotrol panel (see the Section " Replacing the AEC Control Panel").



9.



Connect the associated add-ons of all boards. Switch 3024SW2-3 of the new board to ON, allowed to enter into Service mode.



10. Use Techservice to set WS1, WS2 and E01~E32 same as the old board. 11. Turn off the generator and main power, switch A3024SW2-3 to OFF, set into Application mode.



7.2.5 Replace AEC Control Panel Name of Parts: AEC Control Panel Tools: Standard tools, Anti-static equipments, AEC calibration fixture



- 436 -



REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS



JP4



JP3



JP2











 



JP1



THE GENERATOR MUST BE POWERED OFF BEFORE PARTS REPLACEMENT, WAIT AT LEAST 3 MINUTES FOR THE MAIN CAPACITOR DISCHARGED COMPLETELY AND PROCEED WITH THE PARTS REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT. CONNECTING THE POWER OR SWITCH ON THE GENERATOR IS PROHIBITED UNLESS THE MANUAL INSTRUCTS TO DO SO.



Please wear anti-static gloves or take any appropriate measures when replacing parts or Boards. Place the AEC Control panel on top of the ATP Control panel.



Replacement steps: 1. Turn off the generator and main power, reference the patch cord location of the board to cross check with the new AEC control panel. (JP1, JP2, JP3, JP4). 2.



Remove the set screw of AEC control panel and ATP control panel, retain the nuts in the appropriate place to prevent board falling.



3.



Remove the flat cable on the AEC control panel, gently pull the verticle connector that is connected to the ATP control panel at the back of the board.



4.



Replace the new AEC control panel.



5.



Install set screw.



6.



Turn on the generator.



7.



Refer to Installation Manual, “Section 6.2.5 AEC calibration" for AEC calibration



8.



Completion of adjustment and testing. - 437 -



REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS



7.2.6 Replace HT Control Panel Name of Parts: HT Control panel Tools: Standard tools, Anti-static equipments



JP1~JP4



JP5 JP6



SW2











THE GENERATOR MUST BE POWERED OFF BEFORE PARTS REPLACEMENT, WAIT AT LEAST 3 MINUTES FOR THE MAIN CAPACITOR DISCHARGED COMPLETELY AND PROCEED WITH THE PARTS REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT. CONNECTING THE POWER OR SWITCH ON THE GENERATOR IS PROHIBITED UNLESS THE MANUAL INSTRUCTS TO DO SO.



Please wear anti-static gloves or take any appropriate measures when replacing parts or Boards.



Replacement steps: 1. Turn off the generator and main power, align the DIP switch and patch cord settings of the HT control panel with the old one. 2.



Set the ATP control panel 3024SW2-3 to ON, allowed to enter into the service mode.



3.



Turn on the generator, enter into the Techservice, record the value of E01 ~ E32.



4.



Turn off the generator and main power, record and dismantle all the add-ons off the old board, remove the old HT control panel from the generator.



5.



Remove the U5 chip from HT control panel (remove with care to avoid broken pin).



6.



Insert the U5 chip to the same position on the new HT control panel (note the correct direction of the chip to avoid anti-insert). - 438 -



REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS



7.



Install the new HT control panel on the generator, reinstall the associated add-ons of the boards.



8.



Start the generator, enter into the Techservice, observe whether the value of E01 ~ E32 is consistent with the record, if not, then modify the value for the record.



9.



Follow the instruction provided in the Manual to process the "Number mA Calibration".



10. Turn off the generator and main power, set 3024SW2-3 of the ATP control panel to OFF, set into the application mode.



7.2.7 Replace Filament Driver Board Name of Parts: Filament driver board Tools: Standard tools, Anti-static equipments



W1











THE GENERATOR MUST BE POWERED OFF BEFORE PARTS REPLACEMENT, WAIT AT LEAST 3 MINUTES FOR THE MAIN CAPACITOR DISCHARGED COMPLETELY AND PROCEED WITH THE PARTS REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT. CONNECTING THE POWER OR SWITCH ON THE GENERATOR IS PROHIBITED UNLESS THE MANUAL INSTRUCTS TO DO SO.



Please wear anti-static gloves or take any appropriate measures when replacing parts or Boards.



Replacement steps: 1. Turn off the generator and main power, reference the location of the patch cord on the old board to check if the location of the patch cord on the new filament driver board is correct (W1). - 439 -



REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS



2.



Remove the add-ons on the old filament driver board.



3.



Remove the set screws on the fixed board and box.



4.



Replace the new Board.



5.



Reinstall set screw.



6.



Reinstall the associated add-ons connected to the boards.



7.



Follow the instruction provided in the Manual to process the "Number mA Calibration".



7.2.8 Replace the Interface Control Panel Name of Parts: Interface Control panel Tools: Standard tools, Anti-static equipments



W1 W2











THE GENERATOR MUST BE POWERED OFF BEFORE PARTS REPLACEMENT, WAIT AT LEAST 3 MINUTES FOR THE MAIN CAPACITOR DISCHARGED COMPLETELY AND PROCEED WITH THE PARTS REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT. CONNECTING THE POWER OR SWITCH ON THE GENERATOR IS PROHIBITED UNLESS THE MANUAL INSTRUCTS TO DO SO.



Please wear anti-static gloves or take any appropriate measures when replacing parts or Boards.



Replacement steps: 1. Turn off the generator and main power, reference the location of the patch cord on the old board to check if the location of the patch cord on the new interface control panel is correct - 440 -



REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS



(W1, W2). 2.



Label and remove the add-ons on the old board.



3.



Remove the set screws on the old board and box.



4.



Replace the new Board.



5.



Reinstall set screw.



6.



Reinstall the associated add-ons of the boards.



7.2.9 Replacement of High-pressure Fuel Tank Name of Parts: High-pressure fuel tank Tools: Standard tools, Anti-static equipments











THE GENERATOR MUST BE POWERED OFF BEFORE PARTS REPLACEMENT, WAIT AT LEAST 3 MINUTES FOR THE MAIN CAPACITOR DISCHARGED COMPLETELY AND PROCEED WITH THE PARTS REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT. CONNECTING THE POWER OR SWITCH ON THE GENERATOR IS PROHIBITED UNLESS THE MANUAL INSTRUCTS TO DO SO.



Please wear anti-static gloves or take any appropriate measures when replacing parts or Boards.



Replacement steps: 1. Turn off the generator and main power, label and remove all the cables connected to fuel tank. Out of which, the cables connected to converter module are P1, P3, and "Shield"(SHLD), Gound wire (GND) directly connected to the chassis. 2.



Replace the new high-pressure fuel tank, reconnect the cables that disconnect in Step 1. - 441 -



REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS



DO NOT open the oil cap, the high voltage transformer does not require inspection.



3.



Turn on the main power and generator.



4.



Choose the testing on some mA and kV, and follow the instruction provided in the Manual to process the "Number mA Calibration".



5.



Record task LOG to indicate the date and reason of changing fuel tank, and label the name of the responsible engineers and changing date on the new fuel tank to record the comprehensive information.



7.2.10 Replace DRAC Control Panel Name of Parts: DRAC Control panel Tools: Standard tools, Anti-static equipments



SW1 SW2 SW3



SW4











THE GENERATOR MUST BE POWERED OFF BEFORE PARTS REPLACEMENT, WAIT AT LEAST 3 MINUTES FOR THE MAIN CAPACITOR DISCHARGED COMPLETELY AND PROCEED WITH THE PARTS REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT. CONNECTING THE POWER OR SWITCH ON THE GENERATOR IS PROHIBITED UNLESS THE MANUAL INSTRUCTS TO DO SO.



Please wear anti-static gloves or take any appropriate measures when replacing parts or Boards.



Replacement steps: - 442 -



REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS



1.



Turn off the generator and main power, record the actual status of DIP switch and patch cord location on old board.



2.



Record and remove all the add-ons and cables connected to the boards.



3.



Remove 4 set screw。



4.



Replace the new Board.



5.



Reinstall 4 set screws.



6.



Reinstall all the associated add-ons and cables connected to the boards.



7.



Reference to the DIP switch and the location of the patch cord on old board to check with the DIP switch and the location of the patch cord on the new DRAC control panel.



8.



Remove the U17 from the old board and install on the new board.



9.



Turn on the main power and generator.



10. Do the functional check for the devices such as tube anode acceleartion, operation and braking etc.



7.2.11 Replace AEC AAP Name of Parts: AEC AAP Tools: Standard tools, Anti-static equipments



JP12 JP11



JP16~JP13 JP8~JP1 JP9 JP10











THE GENERATOR MUST BE POWERED OFF BEFORE PARTS REPLACEMENT, WAIT AT LEAST 3 MINUTES FOR THE MAIN CAPACITOR DISCHARGED COMPLETELY AND PROCEED WITH THE PARTS REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT. CONNECTING THE POWER OR SWITCH ON THE GENERATOR IS PROHIBITED UNLESS THE MANUAL INSTRUCTS TO DO SO.



Please wear anti-static gloves or take any appropriate measures when replacing parts or Boards.



- 443 -



REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS



Replacement steps: 1. Turn off the generator and main power, record the location of the patch cord on the old AEC AAP. 2.



Record and remove the associated add-ons of the boards.



3.



Remove 4 set screws。



4.



Replace the new Board.



5.



Reinstall 4 set screws.



6.



Reinstall the associated add-ons of the boards.



7.



Reference to the location of the patch cord on old board to check with the location of the patch cord on the new AEC AAP.



8.



Turn on the power and then generator.



9.



Select different settings of ionization chamber, process few exposure to check whether the selection is correct, to do the function check on the equipments.



7.2.12 Replace Inverter Module Name of Parts: Inverter module Tools: Standard tools, Anti-static equipments



Charged/Discharged Board



IPM Drive Board



Input rectifier board



Grounding



- 444 -



REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS



Output power cord



Input Rectifier board Input power cord Grounding



ENSURE THERE IS NO RESIDUE CHARGE IN THE MAIN CAPACITOR OF INVERTER MODULE. OBSERVE THE INDICATOR LIGHT ON CHARGED/DISCHARGED DETECTOR, USUALLY IT IS 3 MINUTES AFTER POWER OFF, THE COMPLETELY EXTINGUISHMENT INDICATES COMPLETION OF THE DISCHARGE.











THE THE THE THE



THE GENERATOR MUST BE POWERED OFF BEFORE PARTS REPLACEMENT, WAIT AT LEAST 3 MINUTES FOR THE MAIN CAPACITOR DISCHARGED COMPLETELY AND PROCEED WITH THE PARTS REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT. CONNECTING THE POWER OR SWITCH ON THE GENERATOR IS PROHIBITED UNLESS THE MANUAL INSTRUCTS TO DO SO.



Please wear anti-static gloves or take any appropriate measures when replacing parts or Boards.



Replacing steps: 1. Turn off the generator and main power, open the cover of generator. 2.



Remove set screws of front panel door, and open front panel door.



3.



Dismantle the set screws of the DRAC control panel, remove the DRAC control panel.



- 445 -



REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS



Converter module



Front panel door DRAC Control panel 4.



Label and dismantle the socket connectors and cables below:



    



The associated cables of tube connect to the generator 11TS2. Ground wire connects to the DRAC control panel. Suspended add-ons J7. DRAC control panel socket connector J4. Cable J2-1 and J2-2 on DRAC Interface Board.



J7



The fixed block of DRAC rear module



The associated cables of tube connect to 11TS2



J2-1 and J2-2



5.



Gound wire J4 Remove the fixed block locates at rear side of DRAC module, remove DRAC module。



6.



Remove the shield in the front of the converter module.



7.



Record and dismantle the IPM driver board (J1 & J2) and the associated cables of the - 446 -



REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS



charged \ discharged power board (P1 & P2).



P1&P2



J1&J2



8.



Record and remove the cables on high-voltage transformer (P1, P2-Shield, P3).



P2-Shield P1 P3



9.



At the back of the generator, remove two set screws that used to fix the backplate, remove the backplate.



10. Remove the screws at the back of generator, remove the backplate. 11. At the back of the generator, reference to the below figure to loosen the connection in the appropriate place, remove the connection with the rectifier and use the hexagon SPACER to fix the power cord. - 447 -



REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS



Hexagon SPACER



12. Remove the ground wire (yellow and green lines) connected to the chassis.



13. The most practical method to remove the converter module is to first loosen the two lower screws shown in the figure, then loosen the two upper screws. Use one hand to hold the converter module when loosen the upper screws to prevent the falling of the bottom of the components.



- 448 -



REPLACEMENT OF GENERATOR KEY COMPONENTS



Due to the weight of the converter moduel, it should be removed from the front of generator.



14.



Install a new inverter module and screws, connect with the associated add-on and cables.



Ensure all cable connections are properly connected with safety.



15. Reinstall the shield locates in front of the converter module. 16. Reinstall DRAC Control panel. Install two fixed blocks locate at the rear of DRAC module. Put into the DRAC control panel and set screw. 17. Connect the DRAC control board with the associated add-on and cables.



Ensure all cable connections are properly connected with safety.



18. Close the front plate and fix with the box. 19. Reinstall and fasten the back plate, put on the external cover of generator. - 449 -



TOUCH SCREEN ACTIVATION AND MOTION CONTROL SOFTWARE INSTALLATION



CHAPTER 8 TOUCH SCREEN ACTIVATION AND MOTION CONTROL SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 8.1 Touch Screen Activation 1.



2.



Note: Activate the touch screen when the IPC board is replaced. During the startup of the system, press the IKEY button. The following screen is displayed.



Figure 8-1 Activation of the Touch Screen Press the cross line (shown in the figure above) with the fingertip or a finger-shape object (with no sharp head, to avoid scratching the screen). A red spot appears on the right side of the screen. Operate in the same way. Afterwards, the red spot appears on the bottom on the screen. Continue the same operation. Then, it appears on the left side of the screen. Continue the same operation. At last, when the red spot appears on the center of the screen, continue the same operation. After the touch screen is activated, the startup screen is displayed.



8.2 Motion Control Software Installation 1.



Open the IPCFTServer folder on the IPC desktop, run IPCFTServer.exe by double clicking.



- 451 -



TOUCH SCREEN ACTIVATION AND MOTION CONTROL SOFTWARE INSTALLATION



2.



Shut down the control console software in the control console computer, and enter the installation menu. Select RFTClient.exe and modify IP as 222.222.222.223, then click connect. If the two drive icons C, D are shown on the left and the connect icon turns grey, the connection is successful.



3.



Set drive D as remote directory in the IPC, as shown in the following Figure.



- 452 -



TOUCH SCREEN ACTIVATION AND MOTION CONTROL SOFTWARE INSTALLATION



4.



If the Remote directory on the right bottom shows D: \, the setting is successful. Click Upload as the following Figure.



- 453 -



TOUCH SCREEN ACTIVATION AND MOTION CONTROL SOFTWARE INSTALLATION



5.



Select the built-in software installation files in the control console computer, the files will be transmitted after clicking "OK". When Upload completed appears, the files have been successfully transmitted, as shown in the following Figure.



- 454 -



TOUCH SCREEN ACTIVATION AND MOTION CONTROL SOFTWARE INSTALLATION



6.



Select built-in installation files in drive D of IPC by the touch screen or the mouse (if connected), and double click “DRE-X.X.X-setup.exe” to enter the following screen, then click “Next” to proceed;



7.



Select DR51 in the pull-down menu, and click "Next" to proceed;



- 455 -



TOUCH SCREEN ACTIVATION AND MOTION CONTROL SOFTWARE INSTALLATION



8.



Click “Browse” to determine destination folder, otherwise “C: \Program\DRE” will be the destination folder by default, then click “Install” to proceed;



9.



The waiting interface is shown as follows.



- 456 -



TOUCH SCREEN ACTIVATION AND MOTION CONTROL SOFTWARE INSTALLATION



10. Click "Close" to finish the installation when the setup is completed.



11. Right click taskbar on windows desktop, select properties. The "Taskbar and Start Menu Properties" window pops up, then select "Auto-hide the taskbar". Click "OK" to exit.



12. Cancel screen saver. Right click on desktop, select properties —— Screen Saver —— and modify the screen saver as "None". 13. Click "Run" in the Start menu on Windows desktop, and enter "cmd" in the window, then - 457 -



TOUCH SCREEN ACTIVATION AND MOTION CONTROL SOFTWARE INSTALLATION



click "OK" or press Enter on keyboard.



14. Type in “ewfmgr c: -enable” and press Enter; 15. Type in “ewfmgr c: -commit” and press Enter; 16. Shut down the window to exit. 17. Click "Start-Shut down-Restart-OK" to restart the IPC. The IPC will be directed to motion control software screen right after restarting. 18. To exit from the motion control software screen, repeat step 13,14. Restart after shut down.



8.3 Motion Control Software Upgradation 1.



Open the IPCFTServer folder on the IPC desktop, run IPCFTServer.exe by double clicking.



2.



Shut down the control console software in the control console computer, and enter the installation menu. Select RFTClient.exe and modify IP as 222.222.222.223, then click connect. If the two drive icons, C and D, are displayed on the left and the connect icon turns grey, the connection is successful. - 458 -



TOUCH SCREEN ACTIVATION AND MOTION CONTROL SOFTWARE INSTALLATION



3.



Set drive D as remote directory in the IPC on the console, as shown in the following Figure.



4.



If the Remote directory on the right bottom of the console shows D: \, the setting is successful. Click Upload as the following Figure.



- 459 -



TOUCH SCREEN ACTIVATION AND MOTION CONTROL SOFTWARE INSTALLATION



5.



Select the new version built-in software installation files in the computer of the control console, the files will be transmitted after clicking "OK". When "Upload completed" appears, the files have been successfully transmitted, as shown in the following Figure.



- 460 -



TOUCH SCREEN ACTIVATION AND MOTION CONTROL SOFTWARE INSTALLATION



6.



Select built-in installation files in drive D of IPC, and double click “DRE-X.X.X-setup.exe” to enter the following screen, then click “Next” to proceed;



7.



Select Uninstall before installing



- 461 -



TOUCH SCREEN ACTIVATION AND MOTION CONTROL SOFTWARE INSTALLATION



8.



When uninstallation is finished, select DR51in the pull-down menu, and click "Next" to proceed;



9.



Click “Browse” to determine destination folder, otherwise “C: \Program\DRE” will be the destination folder by default, then click “Install” to proceed;



- 462 -



TOUCH SCREEN ACTIVATION AND MOTION CONTROL SOFTWARE INSTALLATION



10. The waiting screen is shown as follows.



11. Click "Close" to finish the installation when the setup is completed.



- 463 -



TOUCH SCREEN ACTIVATION AND MOTION CONTROL SOFTWARE INSTALLATION



12. Double click commit.bat on IPC desktop. If there is no shortcut, carry out step 13, 14, and 15 to produce the same outcome. 13. Click "Run" in the Start menu on Windows desktop, and enter "cmd" in the window, then click "OK" or press Enter on keyboard.



14. Type in “ewfmgr c: -commit” and press Enter; 15. Shut down the window to exit. 16. Click "Start-Shut Down-Restart-OK" to restart the IPC. The IPC will be directed to motion control software screen directly after restarting. Confirm the version number of the IPC software at the starting screen: if it is identical with the new version number, the upgradation is successful. 17. After operating tension calibration and positioning calibration, the machine is ready for usage.



- 464 -



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE 9.1 Installation and Recovery of the Operation System 9.1.1 System Recovery Note: Before the recovery, create backups for the data on disk C needed to save. You can control the DOS interface by the keyboard: TAB key: switch the control; Enter key: confirm; Direction key: select 1.



Before start up or re-start the system, insert disk U. Input “ghost83.exe” until “C:\>_” is display after the startup. Then click “Enter” to enter into the ghost interface.



2.



After entering the ghost interface, select Local->Check->Image File and click “Enter” for the ghost image to be used for the recovery. Then a dialog “Proceed with image file integrity check?” pops up. Click Yes. After the check, if the dialog “Image file passed integrity check” pops up, it indicates that all the image files are correct. Then click “Enter” and proceed to the following steps. Otherwise, the image files shall not be used for the recovery.



3.



Return to the ghost operating interface. Select Local->Partition>From Image and click - 465 -



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



“Enter”.



4.



Select the ghost image files to be used for the recovery; switch to Route ① by TAB; select the partition to save the ghost images by the drop-down arrow (generally saved on disk D and the images on disk U can also be used); switch to Route ① by TAB, select the images to be



used, switch to Save by TAP and click “Enter”.



5.



View the image information; and click “Enter” after confirming the image is correct. - 466 -



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



6.



Choose the hard disk for the recovery. When disk U exists, several options may appear. Check the size of the disk. Select the disk by direction key and then click “Enter”.



7.



Choose the partition on the disk for the recovery. Disk C is intended for recovery. Check the size of the disk. After selecting the partition by direction key, click “Enter”.



- 467 -



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



8.



Switch to Yes by TAB and click “Enter” to confirm the recovery (The original data of disk C will be covered).



9.



Switch to Reset Computer by TAB. Pull out the disk U after clicking “Enter”. And the computer will be restarted to enter into Windows. Finally, check if the recovery is successful.



- 468 -



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



9.2 DROC Setup Menu 9.2.1 The Function of Key Programs Type DR major



Key programs DRController.exe



Function description is the major controlling module of DROC software, coordinating the operation of every



components



sub-module PatientManagement.exe



is the patient information management module of DROC, which is responsible for inputting, consulting, modifying, deleting and checking the previously taken photos of patients and so forth.



PrintManagement.exe



Provide the film setting management, printing and sending of DICOM images. On on hand, the UI interface is user-friendly, for the operator may conduct different types of film setting upon the image; on the other hand, the operator may send the image with accomplished film settings to DICOM to print.



Exam.exe



As a sub-system of DROC, Exam.exe provides many functions, including selecting and adding the



examination



agreement,



editing



and



checking the thumbnail image, running and checking



the



communicating - 469 -



parameter with



the



configuration, generator,



and



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



configuring the flat-panel detector and status display. Additionally, it also handles hardware device communications, synchronized control panel communications, and device motion controlling. View.exe



The frame program of image subsystem, providing screens and drivers for the operation of image subsystem.



DICOM service



Diagnose or confirmation program



DICOMAPP.exe



Provides configuration of DICOM services



GenDiagnose.exe



High voltage generator diagnosis



DetDiagnose.exe



Detector diagnosis



SynDiagnose.exe



Synchronized control device diagnosis



DAPDiagnose.exe



DAP diagnosis



ConDiagnose.exe



Operator console diagnosis



IPCDiagnose.exe



IPC communication diagnosis



DICOMVerification.exe



Verify whether the opposite party support DICOM service



Compensation.exe



Compensation curve



ImgTools.exe



Image processing



ManualDMUpdate.exe



The tool that is used to calibrate dead pixel and faulty wire in detector calibration



Sentinel_System_Driver



Softdog driver



_Installer_7.4.0.exe Sentinel_Keys_License_



Softdog client-side



Manager_1.2.0(English). exe vncviewer.exe WinVNC.exe Others



The program for remote desktop connection Activate the program



for



remote desktop



connection RFTClient.exe



Client-side of uploading and downloading files



RFTServer.exe



Activate the service of remote uploading and downloading files



FxdConverter.exe



Conversion tool for image files(Fxd and Raw)



SystemConfig.exe



The system configuration module of DROC software, responsible for configuring various parameters of the system and saving them in XML format.



uninst-droc.exe



Uninstall software



ProductConfig.exe



Product configuration program



SystemLogger.exe



Log recording program



DrService.exe



Log service program



- 470 -



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



9.2.2 Functions of Key Folders File name configfiles



Address



Function



D: \DROC



Saving all configuration files and back-up configuration files



database



D: \DROC



Saving



database



and



back-up



database detectorreff



D: \DROC



Saving flat-panel detector calibration files



imagefiles



D: \DROC



Saving the taken DICOM images



Logs



D: \DROC



System operation log



RecycleBin



D: \DROC



Temporal saving of the deleted images



CompensateCurve



D: \DROC



Saving the compensating curve of screen



Export



D: \



Temporal directory for backup image information



Config



D:\DROC



Directory of detector configuration files



config_3543



D:\DROC\config\config_3543



Keeps the configuration file and key file of the 3543 detector



tetdconfig



D:\DROC



Keeps the configuration file and key file of the TOSHIBA detector



9.3 Recovery of the Control Console Software 9.3.1 Recovery for the Re-Installed System 9.3.1.1 Install serial port driver 1.



Insert the serial port into PCI slot, and the system will automatically detect PCI I/O card. Put the driver CD that goes along the serial port in CD-ROM, click "NEXT" or select install PCI serial port via device manager.



2.



Enter the Found New Hardware Wizard, select "No, not this time" and click "Next".



3.



Select "Install from a list or specific location" and click "Next".



4.



Select "Search removable media" and click "Next".



5.



Select the first item and click "Next".



6.



The prompt box "Hardware installation" pops up, click "Continue anyway".



7.



Click "Finish" to complete the setup of MosChip PCI Multi-IO Controller.



8.



In the new prompt box of "Found New Hardware Wizard", repeat step 1-6 to finish the setup of MosChip Bridge. - 471 -



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



9.



In the new prompt box of "Found New Hardware Wizard", repeat step1-6 for four times to finish the four installations of MosChip PCI Serial Port.



10. When all setups are done, four more com ports will appear in “Device Manger→Port"



9.3.1.2 Install burning program 1.



Run the Nero setup program “setup.exe” in the CD attached with the CD burner. Select Nero 7 Essentials.



2.



Select "Next".



3.



Select "I agree to the terms in the agreement" and click "Next".



4.



Fill in the column of "User name" and "Organization, then click "Next".



5.



Take the “Standard installation", and click "Next".



6.



Keep "DirectX 9.0C" selected, and click "Next".



7.



Click "Yes".



8.



Click "Install".



9.



When the following screen appears, do not take any action and wait.



10. Select "Next". 11. Select "Finish" and the setup is completed.



9.3.1.3 Install DROC program 1.



Back up the flat key files (with suffix as .key) in the installation directory of DROC to other folders.



2.



Click “DROC-XX.XX.XX.XXXX (indicating the version number, and the last field is the SVN number) -setup.exe” to enter the setup wizard and then click Next.



- 472 -



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



3.



Since the old DROC version is installed in drive D and will not be uninstalled after re-installation, it is necessary to uninstall the old one first. On the following screen, select "Uninstall before installing", and then click Next.



4.



On the Uninstall DROC screen, click Uninstall.



- 473 -



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



5.



On the Uninstallation Complete screen, click Show details, to see the uninstallation information. Click Close to complete partial uninstallation.



6.



Select DR70 form the “Select the type of install” drop-down list, and then click Next.



7.



Choose the install location as the destination folder by default (usually cannot be modified), and then click Next. (Notice: Select the disk with larger space to reserve space for the future images) - 474 -



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



8.



When the following screen appears, do not take any action and wait.



9.



Click “Finish” to complete the setup.



- 475 -



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



10. Copy flat key files and save them under the DROC installation directory



9.3.2 Recovery for the Non Re-Installed System 9.3.2.1 Rapid recovery 1.



Run the DROC installation program without un-installing the previous version, and install it under the same folder in order to cover the previous files.



2.



Repeat 1~4 steps in "Section 8.3.1 Install DROC Programs" of "Chapter 8.3.1.6 Recovery after System Re-installation"Errors resulted from damage of configuration files can not be solved, because such method keeps the original configuration files and database. If the error can not be solved after rapid recovery, refer to "Section 8.3.2.2 Re-installation"



9.3.2.2 Re-installation 1.



After uninstalling DROC, do not re-install instantly but save database, detectorreff, imagefiles, flat key files, and part of configfiles under the installation directory, then delete the rest files.



2.



Configuration files that need to be kept in Configfiles (It does not need to be kept if the user has made no change):



3.



SysConf_ExposureParam.xml Exposure parameter chart



4.



SysConf_ImgProcessParam.xml Image processing mode configuration



5.



Notice: For the meaning and function description of each program, please refer to Section 2.5 of Maintenance Manual. - 476 -



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



6.



Run the setup program of DROC, repeat Step1~4 and Step 5~10 in "Section 8.3.1.6 Install DROC Program" of "Section 8.3.1 Recovery after re-installing the system" in order to finish the installation of the software, and re-set the unsaved configuration respectively.



9.4 Database Back-Up and Recovery Back-up method: Every time when the software starts running, the database files will be automatically saved under the back-up directory and the back-up database in last three days will also be kept. Hence, no manual operation is needed. Recovery method: Enter Windows interface, and open database back-up directory (Such as: D: \DROC\database), then copy the database files to be recovered in order to cover the database used when the software is running as shown in the figure below: Note: Those with dates are back-up database, and droc.mdb is the current database. If requiring to recover to the back-up database on 11-Dec-2008, copy the document “droc.20081211.mdb” directly and rename it to “droc.mdb” to cover the original.



9.5 Image Recovery after the Re-Installation of the Control Console Software 1.



Run the DROC software.



2.



On "History image" screen of control console software, click



, and the data



recovery windows pops up. The user may either select “Recover the whole disc” or “Recover the selected record” to re-adjust the image.



- 477 -



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



3.



After image recovery, click



.



9.6 Log System Configuration Prerequisites: 1. You have the rights of the service engineer. 2. Log in to the DROC software.



Click



on the right side of the DROC screen and then select



the system configuration screen, select Log System Configuration.



- 478 -



. On



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



Delete the log: Select from the Set



the



log



saving



drop-down list.



time:



Select



the



log



saving



days



from



the



drop-down list. Export the log: Click click



. Select the saving path of the log to be exported, and then



.



Note: The export log is a .zip file. The log contains the database, configuration file, and DROC version information. In this system, the log cannot be exported to the disc at present.



9.7 Updating PCB Software 1.



Start up DROC.



2.



Click



on the right side of the screen, and then select



. If you are



logged in as a normal user, then you cannot start the update function and a prompt - 479 -



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



window will be present as follows:



If you are logged in as a customer service user, then a prompt window will be present as follows:



3.



Click



to start the updating tool “BoardUpdate Tool. exe”. And the DROC



program will be closed. Then a window will be present as follows:



- 480 -



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



4.



Click



, a pop-up window for IPC address and port configuration will be present.



5.



After completing the configuration, click “Check”. If “Connecting IPC successed!” window - 481 -



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



pops up, save and quit.



6.



Click “Browse” to select the update package as shown below:



- 482 -



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



7.



Confirm the board and the version to be updated. If no problem, click “Start” to update. Refer to the figures below:



- 483 -



MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADATION OF THE CONTROL CONSOLE SOFTWARE



8.



Update is successful. Restart the device.



- 484 -



AEC CALIBRATION



CHAPTER 10 AEC CALIBRATION Note: If the deviation adjustment in Chapter 8 cannot satisfy the requirements, please follow the steps in this section for calibration. This section describes how to calibrate SEDECAL generator, and the AEC function during the combination usage with VACUTEC ion chamber.







X-ray exposure is needed during the calibration process. Please take proper safety precautions and individual protection.







Nobody is allowed to stay in the exam room during exposure. Make sure that the door of the exam room is closed during exposure.







Do not contact the generator with any electric conductive body during hardware configuration on the generator.







Due to the differences of the 3-field and the 5-field ion chambers in testing contents, select the appropriate testing method based on the actual configuration.







For the calibration of 5-field ion chamber, it should be performed in two groups of Undertable position (field selected: Left(3), Center(2), Right(5)) and thorax position (field selected: Left(5), Center(2), Right(4)).



10.1 Preparation Calibration tools: AEC calibration tool—21 mm Al. additional prefilter (aluminum panel) Note: The 21 mm Al. additional prefilter is composed of 10 mm, 5 mm, 4 mm, and 2 mm aluminum panels. Before AEC calibration, check the following preparation: 1. The installation and connection of the system are correct. The X-ray tube has been calibrated and supports accurate and stable exposure. 2. The detector has been calibrated. The output image is well-proportioned and stable, with no bad points or bad lines. 3. Make sure that the ion chamber cable is connected to the jumper J1 of AEC Adaptation Board A3263, as shown below.



- 485 -



AEC CALIBRATION



Ion chamber cable AEC



Adaptation



Board



HV tank



4. Set dip switch 3024 SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board in “On” position to permit the generator service mode, as shown in figure (d) below. 5. Place the jumper JP3 on the AEC Control Board in position “A”, as shown in figure (c). Note: ATP Console CPU Board and AEC Adaptation Board are on the back of the generator’s front panel. To check the related connection position, open the front panel of the generator according to the steps below. Disconnect the main power of the generator first. Do not touch the boards inside, and make good electrostatic protection. 1) Demount the outer cover of the generator, and screw off the screws fastening the front panel of the generator, as shown in figure (a); 2) Gently open the front panel of the generator; 3) Figure (b) shows the position of ATP Console CPU Board and AEC Adaptation Board inside the generator.



Fastening screws on the front panel of the generator



Generator front panel



（a）



- 486 -



AEC CALIBRATION



Jumper JP3 on AEC Control Board



Back of the front panel



AEC Adaptation Board



（c）



ATP Console CPU Board



（b）



（d）



Switch 3024 SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board



6. Make sure that the system control cabinet has been powered on. The tube-collimator assembly control system can start up normally. No error message is shown on the screen. 7. Adjust the tube-collimator assembly to proper height. Slightly touch the switch button of collimator light and adjust the light field control button or knob to regulate the light field to the maximum size. 8. Adjust the system to Undertable position. The detector is level (0 degree), and the tube-collimator assembly is right on the top of the detector. 9. Power on the generator. Press “Start” → “Programs” → “TechService” →TechService to access the Generator Service Mode (GSM) screen. 10. After normal startup of the generator, “98” appears at the RESET ERROR column. Press RESET ERROR to reset. 11. Click the button [Manual Calibration] on the GSM screen to enter the WS selection screen, as shown below.



12. Click [Up] or [Down] to select a Workstation configured for the Ion Chamber. When “2” - 487 -



AEC CALIBRATION



appears in the box, click [OK] to access the Manual Calibration screen, which is shown in the figure below.



13. Keep pressing △ at the mA column, until “E04” appears in the box.



14. Click the button [Read] of the Calibration Value column, and the corresponding reading is shown in the box (record the initial data to the Attached List 1). Click △ or ▽ to regulate the value. When “060” appears in the box, click [Store] to save the data. 15. Keep pressing △ at the mA column, until “E08” appears in the box (record the initial data to the Attached List 1). Repeat step 16, when the reading is “006”, click [Store] to save the data. 16. Keep pressing △ at the mA column, until “E12” appears in the box (record the initial data to the Attached List 1). Repeat step 16, when the reading is “025”, click [Store] to save the data. 17. Click [Manual Calibration] and return to the GSM screen.



- 488 -



AEC CALIBRATION



10.2 Balance Adjustment For Three Field Detectors Calibration tools: AEC calibration tool—5 mm Al. additional prefilter (aluminum panel) Calibration steps: 1. Adjust the collimator to proper position, and then place a 5 mm aluminum panel in the collimator filter holder. 2. Turn on the collimator light. Make sure that the light has been fully covered by the aluminum panel. 3. Adjust the system to Undertable position. The detector is level (0 degree), and the tube-collimator assembly is right on the top of the detector. Set SID to 180 cm. 4. Click [Manual Calibration] on the GSM screen to enter the WS selection screen. 5. Click [Up] or [Down] to select a Workstation configured for the Ion Chamber. When “2” appears in the box, click [OK] to access the Manual Calibration screen. 6. Enter in user mode inside calibration mode by pressing the button [Go to User Mode].



7. Click the button [RAD] at the Main Menu to select it. Click △ and ▽ of the kVp, mA, ms column respectively to set kVp: 070; mA: 0040; ms: 0500. 8. Click the button [AEC] at the Main Menu to enter the AEC mode screen, as shown below.



- 489 -



AEC CALIBRATION



9. At the AEC parameters setting column, respectively set Areas: Left, Right, Center; Film Screen: Medium; Density: 0. 10. Press the handswitch to make an exposure. If the button



flashes green, it indicates



that the exposure is completed. The actual exposure parameters will be shown on the top right corner of the screen.



11. Make sure if the corresponding value of kVp and mA in the Actual Exposure Parameters column are 070, 40 respectively. If inconsistent, return to step 7. 12. If consistent, read the value corresponding to the ms column, and record it into the Attached List 1. 13. Keep other settings unchanged, and click [Right] and [Center] in the Areas zone to deselect them. Only [Left] is kept being selected. Repeat the process from step 10 to 12. 14. Keep other settings unchanged, and click [Right] in the Areas zone to select it. Click [Left] to deselect it. Only [Right] is selected. Repeat the process from step 10 to 12. 15. Keep other settings unchanged, and click [Center] in the Areas zone to select it. Click - 490 -



AEC CALIBRATION



[Right] to deselect it. Only [Center] is selected. Repeat the process from step 10 to 12. Note: Select at least one field; otherwise, the exposure parameters need to be re-set as in step 7. 16. Return to step 7. When at step 9, change the film screen to “Slow”. Repeat the operation from step 7 to step 15. 17. Return to step 7. When at step 9, change the film screen to “Fast”. Repeat the operation from step 7 to step 15. 18. Calculate the average value of the exposure time (ms) under the same Film Screen setting, and enter the data into the Attached List 1. 19. Take the calculated average value as reference, and judge if the exposure time deviation of different detector field (with the same Film Screen) is ± 7% (average value). 20. If inconsistent, follow the steps below. a) Adjust the potentiometer corresponding to different field according to the deviation. Note: For this ion chamber, adjust the potentiometer by turning it clockwise will increase the exposure time of the corresponding field detector; yet turning it counterclockwise will decrease the exposure time.



Right field potentiometer Ion chamber potentiometer



Left field potentiometer



Ion chamber



Center field potentiometer



b) Re-measure from step 7 to step 12 (only to measure the unsatisfied settings combination) c) Implement the operation in step 18. 21. If the exposure time deviation of different detector field (with the same Film Screen) is ± 7% (average value), then the balance adjustment for the ion chamber’s three field detectors is completed.



10.3 Ion Chamber Density Contrast Test Calibration tools: AEC calibration tool—10 mm Al. additional prefilter (aluminum panel) Calibration steps: 1. Adjust the collimator to proper position. Remove the 5 mm aluminum panel and place a 10 mm aluminum panel in the collimator filter holder. 2. Turn on the collimator light. Make sure that the light has been fully covered by the aluminum panel. 3. Adjust the system to Undertable position. The detector is level (0 degree), and the - 491 -



AEC CALIBRATION



tube-collimator assembly is right on the top of the detector. Set SID to 180 cm. 4. Click [Exit] or [Close] to return to the GSM screen. 5. Click [Manual Calibration] on the GSM screen to enter the WS selection screen. 6. Click [Up] or [Down] to select a Workstation configured for the Ion Chamber. When “2” appears in the box, click [OK] to access the Manual Calibration screen. 7. Enter in user mode inside calibration mode by pressing the button [Go to User Mode]. 8. Click the button [RAD] at the Main Menu to select it. Click △ and ▽ of the kVp, mA, ms column respectively to set kVp: 070; mA: 0032; ms: 0500. 9. Click the button [AEC] at the Main Menu to enter the AEC mode screen. At the AEC parameters setting column, respectively set Areas: Left, Right, Center; Film Screen: Medium; Density: +4. 10. Press the handswitch to make an exposure. Record the actual exposure time (ms) in the Attached List 2 after exposure. 11. Keep other settings unchanged. Set Density as +3, +2, +1, 0, -1, -2, -3, and -4 respectively, and record the actual exposure time (ms) in the Attached List 2 after exposure. 12. Take the calculated value when Density is 0 as reference. Divide the Actual Exposure Time by the Actual Exposure Time (when Density=0) to get the Actual Proportionality Coefficient of all densities, and record the data into the Attached List 2. Note: Actual Proportionality Coefficient = Actual Exposure Time / the Actual Exposure Time (when Density=0) 13. Judge if the Actual Proportionality Coefficient is within the given range. If yes, it is judged as qualified. Note: If not, it is judged as unqualified. Test the generator’s AEC Control Board A3012, which might be damaged.



10.4 EI Expected Value Adjustment Under 70kV Calibration tools: AEC calibration tool—21 mm Al. additional prefilter (aluminum panel) Note: The 21 mm Al. additional prefilter is composed of 10 mm, 5 mm, 4 mm, and 2 mm aluminum panels. Calibration steps: 1. Adjust the collimator to proper position. Remove the 10 mm aluminum panel and place a 21 mm aluminum panel in the collimator filter holder. 2. Turn on the collimator light. Make sure that the light has been fully covered by the aluminum panel. 3. Adjust the system to Undertable position. The detector is level (0 degree), and the tube-collimator assembly is right on the top of the detector. Set SID to 180 cm. 4. Click [Exit] or [Close] to return to the GSM screen. 5. Click [Manual Calibration] on the GSM screen to enter the WS selection screen. 6. Click [Up] or [Down] to select a Workstation configured for the Ion Chamber. When “1” appears in the box, click [OK] to access the Manual Calibration screen. 7. Click [Exit] or [Close] to exit from TechService. 8. Enter into the DROC program to add an emergency check. Double-click the emergency check item to access the Exposure & Exam Screen. 9. Click “TIME” and set mS to 500. Click “AEC” and set kV: 70; mA: 64; Density (DEN): 0 - 492 -



AEC CALIBRATION



respectively. Select all three field areas.



Field area selection



10. Press the handswitch to make an exposure. The actual ms and EI value of the image will be shown on the screen. Record the value to the Attached List 3. Save the image and then exit from DROC program. 11. If the EI variation value of the image under AEC exposure is 490~530, the EI expected value adjustment is qualified. Fill in “√” at the corresponding column in the Attached List. 12. If the EI variation value of the image under AEC exposure is not 490~530, fill in “×” at the corresponding column in the Attached List, and implement the following operation: 1) Save the image and exit from the DROC program. 2) Press “Start” → “Programs” → “TechService” →TechService at the computer to access the GSM screen. Press RESET ERROR to start TechService. 3) Enter in Manual-calibration mode by pressing the button [Manual Calibration] at the GSM screen of TechService program. Click [Up] or [Down] to select the Workstation. When “1” appears in the box, click [OK] to access the Manual Calibration screen. Keep pressing △ at the mA column. When “E04” appears in the box, click the button [Read] of the Calibration Value column to get the Calibration Value. Click △ or ▽ to regulate the value according to the deviation. When “060” appears in the box, click [Store] to save the data. Note: Adjust the E04 value. Increase the E04 value if the EI value is too small; or decrease the E04 value in reverse. The regulation extent may refer to the corresponding data in the generator’s leave-factory report, and make proper regulation according to the deviation change in measurement. 4) Enter the E04 value into the Attached List 3, and return to step 7. Repeat the steps thereafter.



10.5 AEC KV Compensation Adjustment To maintain constant EI value regardless of the kV at which a film is exposed, the generator provides kV compensation. Follow the steps below to make adjustment. Calibration tools: AEC calibration tool—21 mm Al. additional prefilter (aluminum panel) Calibration steps: 1. Make sure that the 21 mm aluminum panel has been placed in the collimator filter holder. Adjust the system to Undertable position. Set SID to 180 cm. - 493 -



AEC CALIBRATION



2. Exit from the DROC program. 3. Press “Start” → “Programs” → “TechService” →TechService at the computer to access the GSM screen. Press RESET ERROR to start TechService. 4. Enter in Manual-calibration mode by pressing the button [Manual Calibration] at the GSM screen of TechService program. Click [Up] or [Down] to select the Workstation. When “1” appears in the box, click [OK] to access the Manual Calibration screen. Keep pressing △ at the mA column, until “E08” appears in the box. Click the button [Read] of the Calibration Value column to get the Calibration Value. Click △ or ▽ to regulate the value according to the deviation. When “060” appears in the box, click [Store] to save the data. 5. Click [Exit] or [Close] to exit from TechService. 6. Enter into the DROC program to add an emergency check. Double-click the emergency check item to access the Exposure & Exam Screen. 7. Click “AEC”. Set Density (DEN) to 0 and select all three field areas. Set the AEC exposure parameters according to the table below, and make an exposure. Enter the actual exposure time (ms) and the EI value of the image of the corresponding combination in the Attached List 4 after exposure. If the exposure time is 500 ms, check whether the exposure parameters setting is correct.



- 494 -



AEC CALIBRATION



Field selection



Density



3 field areas



KVp



mA



60



80



70



64



80



40



90



32



100



32



110



32



120



25



0



8. If the EI value of the image under various exposure parameters (in the table above) is no higher than ±100 of the EI value under 70 kV and 64 mA, the adjustment is qualified. Fill in “√” in the corresponding result column. Note: EI variation value = actual EI value of the image – EI value of the image under 70 kV and 64 mA 9. If it is not within the range of ±100, the adjustment is unqualified. Fill in “×” in the corresponding result column, and make the following adjustment: 1) Exit from the DROC program. 2) Press “Start” → “Programs” → “TechService” →TechService at the computer to access the GSM screen. Press RESET ERROR to start TechService. 3) Enter in Manual-calibration mode by pressing the button [Manual Calibration] at the GSM screen of TechService program. Click [Up] or [Down] to select the Workstation. When “1” appears in the box, click [OK] to access the Manual Calibration screen. Keep pressing △ at the mA column, until “E08” appears in the box. Click the button [Read] of the Calibration Value column to get the Calibration Value. Click △ or ▽ to adjust the E08 (compensation curve) value according to the deviation. When regulate to a value, click [Store] to save the data. Note:



•



When adjusting the E08 (compensation curve) value, if the EI value at low kV (lower than 70 kV) is too low, and the EI value at high kV (higher than 70 kV) is too high, decrease the E08 value.



•



If the EI value at low kV has is too high, and the EI value at high kV is too low, increase the E08 value.



4) Click [Exit] or [Close] to exit from TechService. 5) Return to step 6 and repeat the steps thereafter.



10.6 Exit The Service Mode 1. Turn the generator power off and cut off the 3-phase power. 2. Set dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board back to “Off” position, and exit the service mode.



- 495 -



AEC MODE EI DEVIATION INSPECTION



CHAPTER 11 AEC MODE EI DEVIATION INSPECTION 11.1 Testing 70 kV-EI Deviation Calibration tools: none Calibration steps: 1. Adjust the system to Undertable position, and set SID to 100 cm. 2. Run the DROC program to access the Registry & Exam Screen, and then click the button to access the Exposure & Exam Screen. Select a view for exam. 3. Select AEC mode, adjust kV to 70. Close the door of the exam room, and then make exposure. 4. Open the acquired digital image, and read the EI value at the top of the display screen. Click the marker



to add the annotation “AEC70KV-EI testing 1”, and then click



to accept the image and return to the Exam & Exposure screen. 5. Remain the setting in step 3, and make an exposure again. Read the EI value of the image, and click the marker



to add the annotation “AEC70KV-EI testing 2”. Click



to accept the image and return to the Exam & Exposure screen. 6. Repeat step 5 and add the annotation “AEC70KV-EI testing 3”. Then click



to



save the image. 7. Click



and return to the Exam & Exposure Screen. The click



the History Image Screen. Select the emergency exam item. Click



to access and the



edit box pops up. 8. Modify the patient name to “AEC70kV SID100”. Click



to save the edited



information and exit. 9. Count the deviation between the EI values of three exposures, which should be within -10% to +10%.



11.2 Testing 120 kV-EI Deviation Calibration tools: none Calibration steps: - 496 -



AEC MODE EI DEVIATION INSPECTION



1. Adjust the system to Undertable position, and set SID to 180 cm. 2. Run the DROC program to access the Registry & Exam Screen, and then click the button to access the Exposure & Exam Screen. Select a view for exam. 3. Select AEC mode, adjust kV to 120. Close the door of the exam room, and then make exposure. 4. Open the acquired digital image, and read the EI value at the top of the display screen. to add the annotation “AEC120KV-EI testing 1”, and then click



Click the marker



to accept the image and return to the Exam & Exposure screen. 5. Remain the setting in step 3, and make an exposure again. Read the EI value of the image, and click the marker



to add the annotation “AEC120KV-EI testing 2”. Click



to accept the image and return to the Exam & Exposure screen. 6. Repeat step 5 and add the annotation “AEC120KV-EI testing 3”. Then click



to



save the image. 7. Click



and return to the Exam & Exposure Screen. The click



the History Image Screen. Select the emergency exam item. Click



to access and the



edit box pops up. 8. Modify the patient name to “AEC120kV SID180”. Click



to save the edited



information and exit. 9. Count the deviation between the EI values of three exposures, which should be within ±10%.



- 497 -



ERROR LISTING



CHAPTER 12 ERROR LISTING 12.1 Mechanical Error Mechanical error refers to the error that occurs in any mechanical components, and usually there are six cases: 1.



Mechanical motion components malfunction or are blocked: This is a frequent error, mostly due to rustiness as a result of moist, bad lubricant, or belated clearance of foreign embedding. When the case is less serious, the friction force may increase and therefore limits the movement of the machine. Worse still, the machine or its assembly is stuck or too rusty to move at all, and even damaged. To avoid this type of error, the machine should be cleaned and lubricated regularly by the maintainer, and the ambient environment should be kept dry.



2.



The precision of assembly changes: This is because of assembly abrasion resulted from long-time usage. When the assembly is abraded, its stability reduces and it may swing in motion. This type of error is due to natural loss of the component and therefore the assembly or component should be replaced when its life span expires. Precision changes that caused by natural loss require timely precision adjustment, and it is also necessary to carry out lubrication, examination and maintenance of the mechanical motion assembly.



3.



Deformation, rupture, and fraction of the assembly: This type of error is usually caused by improper operation, such as collision, extrusion, or unbalanced pressure upon certain assembly due to inappropriate adjustment. To avoid this type of man-made error, train the operator before he/she operates the machine. This type of mechanical error can only be solved by replacing the damaged assemblies.



4.



Loosen or disconnected assembly connectors: For example, rivets, screws, bolts, and nuts are loosen and disconnected as a result of long term usage. For this type of error, the maintainer need to maintain the machine regularly and tighten the fix and connect screws.



5.



Improper mechanical installation: Unfastened connection of tube and collimator (including the connection of screws) that leads to errors in related assemblies. Make sure the connection is fastened during installation.



6.



Imperfect after-sales service: When periodic after-sales service maintenance is conducted, the device is not be cleaned and lubricated, related key components are - 498 -



ERROR LISTING



not adjusted and tested, and screws are not fastened.



- 499 -



ERROR LISTING



12.2 Electric Error 12.2.1Power Supply Error Diagnosis Switch on the power distribution cabinet, and press the Unit ON/OFF Switch located on the operator console, and then the system should be powered on. If any abnormal situation is found in the power supply, please follow the instructions below to examine and solve electric errors.



12.2.1.1 If the Unit ON/OFF indicator light on the operator console is not on, the system fails to be powered on. Possible reason: 1. The wire that connects the Unit ON/OFF indicator light on the operator console is disconnected or damaged. 2. The indicator light on the operator console is damaged 3. The control panel of operator console is under abnormal condition 4. The 24V power supply from the system control cabinet to the control panel of operator console is abnormal Solutions: 1. Open the operator console, check if the wire that connects Unit ON/OFF Switch is disconnected or damaged. 2. By using a multimeter, test if the power supply to the indicator light on the operator console is 24VDCIf the power supply is normal, replace the indicator light on the operator console. 3. By using a multimeter, check whether the 24V power supply to the control panel of the operator console is normal. If the power supply is abnormal, it indicates that the 24v output of the standby power for the system control cabinet is abnormal; if the power supply is normal, replace the control panel of the operator console.



12.2.1.2 When exposure is ready, the generator ready (green) indicator light on the operator console is not on Possible reason: 1. Check if the wire that connects the green indicator light on the operator console is disconnected or damaged 2. The control panel of operator console is under abnormal condition 3. The PC of operator console is under abnormal condition 4. The device interface board is under abnormal condition 5. The generator is under abnormal condition Solutions: 1. Check if the wire that connects the green indicator light on the operator console is disconnected or damaged 2. Check if the generator is signaling GEN_READY after the handbrake is pulled down. If the GEN_READY signal is not transmitted, the generator has mechanical error; if the GEN_READY signal is transmitted, carry out step 3 - 500 -



ERROR LISTING



3. Check if the DR10 software in the operator console PC receives the exposure ready signal transmitted by the device interface board. If not, the error is in the device interface board; if yes, carry out step 4 4. Check the Exam.log in the running DR10 software on the PC on the operator console, make sure if the DR10 software is sending exposure ready signal (Prep on) to the control panel of the operator console via serial port. If yes, the error is in DR10 software; if not, the error is in the control panel of the operator console.



12.2.1.3 During exposure, the generator loading (yellow) indicator light on the operator console is not on Possible reason: 1. Check if the wire that connects the green indicator light on the operator console is disconnected or damaged 2. The control panel of operator console is under abnormal condition 3. The PC of operator console is under abnormal condition 4. The generator is under abnormal condition Solutions: 1. Check if the wire that connects the green indicator light on the operator console is disconnected or damaged 2. Check if the DR10 software on the PC of operator console receives the exposure signal transmitted by the generator. If not, the error is in the generator. If yes, carry out step 3 3. Check the Exam.log in the running DR10 software on the PC on the operator console, make sure if the DR10 software is sending exposure signal (bucky move now) to the control panel of the operator console via serial port. If no, an error exists in DR10 software; if yes, an error exists in the control panel of the operator console.



12.2.1.4 The green indicator light on system control cabinet is not on Possible reason: 1. Emergency OFF switch on the system control cabinet is pressed down; 2. The wire that connects the green indicator light in the system control cabinet is disconnected or damaged 3. The 24VDC output of the standby power of the system control cabinet is abnormal 4. The F4 fuse in the system control cabinet is damaged 5. The C220VAC output of the T1 transformer of the system control cabinet is abnormal 6. The F1 fuse on the 380V input end of the system control cabinet Solutions: 1. Check if the emergency OFF switch on the system control cabinet is pressed down; if yes, unscrew it; 2. Open the system control cabinet, check if the wire that connects the green indicator light is disconnected or damaged 3. By using a multimeter, check if the 24Vstd-by output of the standby power of the system control cabinet is normal - 501 -



ERROR LISTING



4. By using a multimeter, check if the F4 fuse in the system control cabinet blows 5. By using a multimeter, check if the C220VAC output of the T1 transformer of the system control cabinet is normal 6. By using a multimeter, check if the F1 fuse blows



12.2.1.5 The ON/OFF indicator lights on the hardware device board are not on (including stand column, traveling carriage, human-machine interface board, device interface board, IPC) Possible reason: 1. The wire that connects the hardware device board and the corresponding socket on the system control cabinet is disconnected or damaged 2. The B24VDC output of the ON/OFF power switch of the system control cabinet is under abnormal condition 3. The KC2 contactor of the system control cabinet is damaged or not attracted 4. The F2 fuse in the system control cabinet is damaged 5. The A220VAC output of the T1 transformer of the system control cabinet is abnormal 6. The F1 fuse on the 380V input end of the system control cabinet Errors in hardware device board Solutions: 1. Check if the power supply wire for the connection board is disconnected or damaged 2.



By using a multimeter, check if the B24VDC output of the ON/OFF power switch of the system control cabinet is normal



3. By using a multimeter, check if KC2 is attracted 4. By using a multimeter, check if the F2 fuse in the system control cabinet blows 5. By using a multimeter, check if the A220VAC output of the T1 transformer is normal 6.



By using a multimeter, check if the F1 fuse blows



7. If the error can not be identified after conducting the steps above, replace the hardware device board



12.2.1.6 The ON/OFF indicator lights on the stepping motor driver are not on Possible reason: 1. Emergency OFF switch on the operator console is pressed down 2. The wire that connects the stepping motor driver and the corresponding socket on the system control cabinet is disconnected or damaged. 3. The A24VDC output of the ON/OFF power switch of the system control cabinet is under abnormal condition 4. The KC1 current contactor of the system control cabinet is damaged or not attracted 5. The F2 fuse in the system control cabinet is damaged 6. The A220VAC output of the T1 transformer of the system control cabinet is abnormal 7. The F1 fuse on the 380V input end of the system control cabinet is damaged - 502 -



ERROR LISTING



8. The stepping motor driver is damaged Solutions: 1. Check if the operator console emergency OFF switch is pressed, if yes, unscrew it. 2. Check if the wire that connects the stepping motor driver for power supply is disconnected or damaged 3.



By using a multimeter, check if the A24VDC output of the ON/OFF power switch of the system control cabinet is normal



4.



By using a multimeter, check if the KC1 is attracted



5.



By using a multimeter, check if the F2 fuse in the system control cabinet blows



6.



By using a multimeter, check if the A220VAC output of the T1 transformer is normal



7.



By using a multimeter, check if the F1 fuse blows



8.



If the error can not be identified after conducting the steps above, replace the stepping motor driver



12.2.1.7 The FPD power indicator light is not on Possible reason: 1. The wire that connects the flat panel and the system control cabinet power is disconnected or damaged 2. The 24V and ±5V output of the system control cabinet linear power is abnormal 3. The system control cabinet UPS is under abnormal condition 4. The B5 current contactor of the system control cabinet is damaged or not attracted 5. The F3 fuse in the system control cabinet is damaged 6. The B220VAC output of the T1 transformer of the system control cabinet is abnormal 7. The F1 fuse on the 380V input end of the system control cabinet is damaged Solutions: 1. Check if the wire that connects the flat-panel detector for power supply and the system control cabinet linear power supply is disconnected and damaged 2. By using a multimeter, check if the 24V and ±5V output of the system control cabinet linear power is normal 3. By using a multimeter, check if the 220VAC input and output of the UPS are normal 4. By using a multimeter, check if the B5 current contactor on the system control cabinet is attracted 5. By using a multimeter, check if the F3 fuse in the system control cabinet blows 6. By using a multimeter, check if the B220VAC output of the T1 transformer of the system control cabinet is normal 7. By using a multimeter, check if the F1 fuse in the system control cabinet blows



12.2.1.8 No synchronous signal for flat panel power frequency Possible reason: 1. The the synchronous signal wire that connects the flat panel and the system control cabinet is disconnected or damaged - 503 -



ERROR LISTING



2. The device interface board fails 3. UPS input and output is under abnormal condition 4. The B5 current contactor of the system control cabinet is damaged or not attracted 5. The F3 fuse in the system control cabinet is damaged 6. The B220VAC output of the T1 transformer of the system control cabinet is abnormal 7. The F1 fuse on the 380V input end of the system control cabinet is damaged Solutions: 1. Check if the synchronous signal wire that connects the flat-panel detector and the system control cabinet is disconnected or damaged 2. By using a multimeter, check if the 220V input of the J6 socket on the device interface board is normal. If yes, the circuit that extracts power frequency signal on the device interface board is abnormal, so replace the device interface board; 3. By using a multimeter, check if the 220VAC input and output of the UPS are normal 4. By using a multimeter, check if the B5 current contactor on the system control cabinet is attracted 5.



By using a multimeter, check if the F3 fuse in the system control cabinet blows



6. By using a multimeter, check if the B220VAC output of the T1 transformer of the system control cabinet is normal 7.



By using a multimeter, check if the F1 fuse in the system control cabinet blows



12.2.1.9 The operator console ON/OFF indicator light is not on Possible reason: 1. The wire that connects J3 of the operator console control panel and D9 of the system control cabinet is disconnected or damaged 2. The 24VDC output of the standby power of the system control cabinet is abnormal 3. The F4 fuse in the system control cabinet is damaged 4. The C220VAC output of the T1 transformer of the system control cabinet is abnormal 5. The F1 fuse on the 380V input end of the system control cabinet is damaged 6. The operator console control panel is damaged Solutions: 1. The wire that connects the J3 of operator console control panel and the D9 of the system control cabinet is disconnected or damaged 2. By using a multimeter, check if the 24VDC output of the standby power of the system control cabinet is normal 3.



By using a multimeter, check if the F4 fuse in the system control cabinet blows



4. By using a multimeter, check if the C220VAC output of the T1 transformer of the system control cabinet is normal 5. By using a multimeter, check if the F1 fuse in the system control cabinet blows 6. If the error can not be identified after conducting the steps above, replace the - 504 -



ERROR LISTING



operator console control panel



12.2.1.10 On the computer of operator console, the monitor power indicator light is not on Possible reason: 1. The wire that connects the computer of operator console, monitor and system control cabinet is disconnected or damaged 2. The KC4 contactor of the system control cabinet is damaged or not attracted 3. The F6 fuse in the system control cabinet is damaged 4. The E220VAC output of the T1 transformer of the system control cabinet is abnormal 5. The F1 fuse on the 380V input end of the system control cabinet is damaged Solutions: 1. Check if the wire that connects the computer of operator console, monitor and system control cabinet is disconnected or damaged 2. By using a multimeter, check if the KC4 of the system control cabinet is attracted 3.



By using a multimeter, check if the F6 fuse in the system control cabinet blows



4. By using a multimeter, check if the E220VAC output of the T1 transformer of the system control cabinet is normal 5.



By using a multimeter, check if the F1 fuse in the system control cabinet blows



12.2.1.11 The FOA (field of view) indicator light on the automatic collimator is not on Possible reason: 1. The wire that connects the automatic collimator and the system control cabinet is disconnected or damaged 2. The F5 fuse in the system control cabinet is damaged 3. The D30VAC output of the T1 transformer of the system control cabinet is abnormal 4. The F1 fuse on the 380V input end of the system control cabinet is damaged 5. The automatic collimator is damaged Solutions: 1. Check if the wire that connects the automatic collimator and the system control cabinet is disconnected or damaged 2.



By using a multimeter, check if the F5 fuse in the system control cabinet blows



3. By using a multimeter, check if the D30VAC output of the T1 transformer of the system control cabinet is normal 4.



By using a multimeter, check if the F1 fuse in the system control cabinet blows



5. If the error can not be identified after conducting the steps above, replace the collimator Note: For the disassembly and replacement of all the wires or components, please refer to the sections on dissembly and replacement of Maintenance Manual.



- 505 -



ERROR LISTING



12.2.2TRAVELING CARRIAGE SIGNAL ACQUISITION BOARD ERROR DIAGNOSIS 12.2.2.1 Listing of signal acquisition board digital tube Table 12-1 Listing of signal acquisition board digital tube Code 00



Description



Code



Normal condition



14



Description Undertable-position wall-stand-position



and photoelectric



switches of traveling carriage are triggered simultaneously 01



CAN initialization failure



15



Undertable-position



photoelectric



switch of traveling carriage is triggered 02



CAN connection failure



16



Wall-stand-position



photoelectric



switch of traveling carriage is triggered 03



CAN transmission error



17



Undertable-position wall-stand-position switches



of



and photoelectric



handpiece



are



triggered simultaneously 04



CAN receiving error



18



Undertable-position



photoelectric



switch of handpiece is triggered 05



SID



distal



near-by



triggered



19



simultaneously 06



Wall-stand-position



photoelectric



switch of handpiece is triggered



SID distal limit position triggered



20



Handpiece rotation potentiometer is damaged



07



SID



nearby



limit



position



21



triggered 08



Upper and lower potentiometers of telescopic trunk is damaged



Upper and lower limit position of telescopic



trunk



22



are



Potentiometers in the front and back of SID are damaged



simultaneously triggered 09



Upper limit position of telescopic



23



trunk triggered 10



Communication



error



converter chip



Lower limit position of telescopic



24



Code is being updated online



25



Code online updating fails



of



26



External SDRAM error



of



27



External FLASH error



trunk triggered 11



Maximum and minimum limit positions for handpiece rotation are triggered simultaneously



12



Maximum



limit



position



handpeice rotation is triggered 13



Minimum



limit



of



position



- 506 -



AD



ERROR LISTING



handpeice rotation is triggered



12.2.2.2 Listing of indicator light and test unit on the traveling carriage signal acquisition board Table 12-2 Listing of indicator lights on the traveling carriage signal acquisition board Indicator



Prompt under



Indicator



Prompt under



description



normal



description



normal



condition D6



Analog 5V power



condition



On



D24



indicator light



Minimum



travel



limit in the front



Off



when



triggered



and back of SID D7



Analog 14V power



On



D25



indicator light



Upper



limit



position



of



Off



when



triggered



telescopic trunk D8



Digital 5V power



On



D26



indicator light



Maximum



travel



limit in the front



Off



when



triggered



and back of SID D9



Digital 3.3V power



On



D27



Reservation



D28



CAN



indicator light D16



Wall-stand-position



On



photoelectric



blocked



switch



when



receiving



indicator light



of



Flash



during



CAN communication



handpiece D17



Undertable-position



On



photoelectric



blocked



switch



when



D29



CAN transmitting



Flash



indicator light



CAN



of



communication



handpiece D18



Undertable-position



On



photoelectric



blocked



when



D30



Reservation



when



D33



Reservation



when



D34



Reservation



when



D35



Reservation



D36



Reservation



D39



24V



switch of traveling carriage D19



Wall-stand-position



On



photoelectric



blocked



switch of traveling carriage D20 D21



Lower limit position



Off



of telescopic trunk



triggered



Maximum



Off



angle



limit of handpiece



triggered



rotation D22



Reservation



D23



Minimum



angle



limit of handpiece



during



Off



when



triggered



power



indicator light



rotation - 507 -



On



ERROR LISTING



Table 12-3 Listing of test units on traveling carriage signal acquisition board Name



Description



Name



Description



TP3



Digitally



TP17



Digitally



TP4



Digitally



TP18



Simulated



TP5



Digital



TP19



Simulated



TP20



Output



1.2V



power



indicator light TP6



Simulated



signal



of



CAN



receiver TP8



Simulated 14V power



TP21



Receiving signal of CAN receiver



TP9



Simulated



TP22



Simulated



TP10



PWM signal of ON/OFF



TP23



Digitally



TP24



SPI clock signal of AD



power TP11



Compensation signal of ON/OFF power



TP12



acquisition chip



CAN Interrupt signal



TP25



Signal received by SPI of AD



acquisition



chip



to



external TP13



Electric



level



of



CAN



TP26



differential signal is high TP14



Electric



level



of



AD acquisition chip



CAN



TP27



differential signal is low TP15



SPI partly-selected signal of Signal output by SPI of AD acquisition chip to external



Input signal of upper and



TP30



Input



signal



of



lower potentiometers of



potentiometers of handpiece



telecopic trunk



along the front and back of rails



TP16



Simulated



TP31



Input signal of handpiece rotation potentiometer



- 508 -



ERROR LISTING



12.2.2.3 Location diagram of indicator lights and test units on the traveling carriage signal acquisition board



- 509 -



ERROR LISTING



12.2.2.4 Error diagnosis steps 1. Tool: multimeter; 2. According to the external connection graph, make sure the connection of wires on the signal acquisition board is correct; 3. Refer to "Display list of digital tube on traveling carriage signal acquisition board " in Section 7.2.1.2 for error identification and correction, check the number displayed on the digital tube; 4. If the error can not be identified with reference to "Display list of digital tube on traveling carriage signal acquisition board", check the table of "Listing of indicator lights on traveling carriage signal acquisition board" and "Listing of test units on traveling carriage signal acquisition board" in Section 7.2.1.3. By using multimeter, further identify the error (note: the location diagram of indicator lights and test units in Section 7.2.1.4 is meant for the maintainer to locate the specific position of indicator lights and test units. 5. By carrying out the steps above, the error can basically be identified. By replacing components, repair welding or replacing panels, re-burning software and so forth, the error can be solved. Note: For the disassembly methods of boards and electrical parts, please refer to the related sections in this manual.



12.2.3HUMAN-MACHINE



INTERFACE



BOARD



ERROR



DIAGNOSIS 12.2.3.1 Listing of indicator lights and test units on human-machine interface board Table 12-4 Listing of indicator lights on the human-machine interface board Indicator description



Prompt under normal condition



D1 D2



+12V indicator light FPGA



On



configuration



failure



Off



FPGA configuration success



On



indicator light D3



indicator light D4



VDD_SLV(3.3V)



indicator



On



light D5



VCC（5V）indicator light



On



D6



VCCINT(1.2V) indicator light



Off



D7



VDD(3.3V) indicator light



On



D8



Collimator



Flick during collimator CAN



D9 D10



CAN



receiving



indicator light



communication



IPC CAN receiving indicator



Flash



light



communication



Collimator CAN transmitting



Flick during collimator CAN



indicator light



communication - 510 -



during



CAN



ERROR LISTING



D11 D15



IPC



CAN



transmitting



Flash



during



indicator light



communication



Emergency OFF switch signal



On when triggered



CAN



indicator light D16



Handgrip



sensor



signal



On when triggered



indicator light D17



Unused for reservation



Off



D18



Unused for reservation



Off



D19



Unused for reservation



Off



Table 12-5 Listing of test units on the human-machine interface board Test unit description CLK



FPGA clock input signal



Test unit description DGND3



Systematically



(25MHz) +12V



12V input



DGND4



Systematically



VCC



5V voltage



DGND5



Systematically



VDD



3.3V voltage



VCCINT



1.2V voltage



DGND1



Systematically



VDD_SLV



3.3V voltage



DGND2



Systematically



- 511 -



ERROR LISTING



12.2.3.2 Location diagram of indicator human-machine interface board



lights



and



test



units



on



12.2.3.3 Error diagnosis steps 1. Tool: multimeter; 2. According to the external connection diagram in Section 7.2.2.1, make sure the connection - 512 -



ERROR LISTING



of wires on the human-machine interface board is correct; 3. Refer to the "Listing of indicator lights on the human-machine interface board" and "Listing of test units on the human-machine interface board" in Section 7.2.2.2 for identifying the error by using the multimeter and indicator lights (note: the location diagram of indicator lights and test units in Section 7.2.2.3 is meant for the maintainer to locate the specific position of indicator lights and test units. 4. By carrying out the steps above, the error can basically be identified. By replacing components, repair welding or replacing panels, re-burning software and so forth, the error can be solved. Note: For the disassembly methods of boards and electrical parts, please refer to the related sections in this manual.



12.2.4Device Interface Board Error Diagnosis 12.2.4.1 Listing of indicator lights and test units on the device interface board



D1



Indicator



Indicator



description



description



Enabling



signal



generator1.



of



D29



Alert



Indicator description



inputting



D53



DigiEye 760 traveling



During



signal of the rotation



carriage



enabling, the light is



motor on DIGIEYE



braking signal along



on, otherwise, off.



560



arm,



the Y axis direction.



for



The light is on when



swivel



unused reservation



running



the brake is pulled, it is off when the brake is released



D4



Exposure



signal



of



D30



Alert reset signal of



D54



Enabling



signal



of



560



flat



generator 2. During



DIGIEYE 560 SID



DIGIEYE



exposure, the light is



motor, unused for



panel.



on, otherwise, off.



reservation



enabling, the light is



During



on, otherwise, off. D5



2REDAY signal of the



D31



High-speed DIGIEYE



signal



D55



560



The speed signal of



generator, the light is



of



DIGIEYE



on when it is ready,



swivel arm rotation



panel movement. The



otherwise, off.



motor



light



movement.



is



560 on



high-speed movement



high-speed



and off in low-speed



movement and off



movement



low-speed



movement Exposure



signal



of



D32



in



The light is on in



in D6



flat



Low-speed signal of



generator 1. During



DIGIEYE



560



exposure, the light is



swivel arm rotation



on, otherwise, off.



motor



movement.



The light is on in - 513 -



D56



Reservation signal



ERROR LISTING



low-speed movement and off in



high-speed



movement D7



1REDAY signal of the



D33



Direction



of



D57



generator, the light is



DIGIEYE



560



flat-panel motor alert



on when it is ready,



swivel arm motor



input. The light is on



otherwise, off.



rotation. The light is



when alerting, and off



on



when



in



counterclockwise



DIGIEYE



560



the



alert



is



released



rotation, and off in clockwise rotation. D10



FPGA



configures



D34



Alert



resetting



D58



CAN



bus



ERROR signal. The



signal of the rotation



communication



light



motor on DIGIEYE



prompts, flick during



560



communication



is



on



if



the



configuration and



off



fails, if



the



swivel



arm,



unused



configuration



for



reservation



succeeds D11



FPGA



configures



NCEO light



signal.



The



on



the



is



if



D35



High-speed of



signal



D59



Enabling



signal



of



560



generator 2. During



lifting



enabling, the light is



DIGIEYE



swivel



arm



configuration



motor



movement.



succeeds, and off if



The light is on in



the configuration fails.



high-speed



on, otherwise, off.



movement and off in



low-speed



movement D12



Moving



speed



of



D36



DR70 telescopic trunk



Low-speed signal of DIGIEYE



D61



560



swivel



arm



motor



movement.



CAN



bus



communication



lifting



prompts, flick during communication



The light is on in low-speed movement and off in



high-speed



movement D13



DigiEye760 telescopic



D37 trunk



DIGIEYE Swivel arm



560 lifting



moving direction. The



motor



light



direction. The light



is



on



when



moving



descending, and off



is



on



when



when ascending



descending, and off when ascending - 514 -



D62



Reservation always on



signal,



ERROR LISTING



D14



DigiEye



760



telescopic



D38



resetting



trunk



signal of the lifting



running stepper motor



motor on DIGIEYE



alert



560



reset



signal,



unused



for



D63



Reservation



signal,



always on



arm, for



reservation



Moving



speed



DigiEye



760



along



swivel



unused



reservation D15



Alert



the



X



of



D39



DigiEye



760



rails



flat-panel



axis



motor



direction



rotation



Reservation



signal,



always on



operates.



The



light



during and



D64



is



on



operation,



off



when



it



ceases D16



D17



The moving direction



D40



Direction of DigiEye



D65



running



status



of DigiEye 760 rails



760 flat-panel motor



signal of fan 1. The



along the X axis. The



rotation. The light is



light is on when the



light is on when it



on



fan is blocked, and off



moves forward, and



counterclockwise



when the fan works



off when it moves



rotation, and off in



normally



backward



clockwise rotation.



Stepping motor alert reset



signal



DigiEye axis,



D41



when



760



moves



Motor



speed



the



rails



for



D66



status



of



light is on when the



DigiEye 760 FPD



fan is blocked, and off when the fan works normally



signal



D42



when



DigiEye



760



motor



rotates,



unused



DigiEye flat-panel



760



handpiece



running



signal of fan 2. The



for



Stepping motor alert reset



The



vertical



movement



along the X unused



in



reservation D18



The



The



for



light



during



reservation



and



off



D67



The



running



status



lifting



signal of fan 3. The



operates.



light is on when the



is



on



fan is blocked, and off



operation,



when the fan works



when



it



normally



ceases D19



Stepping running when



motor



D43



direction DigiEye



handpiece



760



rotates.



DigiEye 760 FPD



D73



24V



indicator



light,



lifting motor moving



always on when it is



direction. The light



powered on



is



on



when



The light is on when it



descending, and off



moves clockwise, and



when ascending



off when it moves counterclockwise D20



Speed of the stepping



D44



Motor



speed



for



rotation



of



motor when DigiEye



the



760



DigiEye 760 FPD



handpiece



- 515 -



D75



Simulated



5V



indicator light, always on when it is powered



ERROR LISTING



rotates D21



on



Stepping motor alert



DIGIEYE



560



input when DigiEye



flat-panel



rotating



760 telescopic trunk



direction. The light



runs,



is on in clockwise



unused



D45



for



D76



Digital



5V



indicator



light, always on when it is powered on



movement, and off



reservation



in counterclockwise movement D22



Stepping motor alert



D46



DigiEye



760



input when DigiEye



traveling



760



rails



moves



operates the clutch



along



the



axis,



along the X axis.



for



The light is on when



X



unused reservation



the



D77



carriage



clutch



Digital 3.3V indicator light, always on when it is powered on



is



attracted, and off when the clutch is released. D23



Stepping motor alert



D47



DigiEye



760



input when DigiEye



handpiece



760



the clutch. The light



handpiece



on



D80



rotates



rotates, unused for



is



when



reservation



clutch is attracted,



Inverted signal of the five-field ion chamber



the



and off when the clutch is released. D24



Alert input signal of



D48



DigiEye



760



the lifting motor on



traveling



DIGIEYE 560 swivel



brakes in the X axis



arm,



direction. The light



unused



for



reservation



is



D81



off



when



brakes,



and



Portrait signal of the five-field ion chamber



carriage



it on



when it releases the brake D25



DIGIEYE



560



D49



DigiEye



760



D82



The



running



status



handpiece motor alert



telescopic trunk lifts



signal of fan 4. The



input,



the clutch. The light



light is on when the



is



unused



for



reservation



the



fan is blocked, and off



clutch is attracted,



on



when



when the fan works



and off when the



normally



clutch is released. D26



High-speed signal of DigiEye



560



D50



The



clutch



vertical



for



movement



handpiece



of



DigiEye



movement. The light



FPD. The light is on



is on in high-speed



when the clutch is - 516 -



760



D83



Flat-panel 1 READY signal. The light is on if ready, otherwise, off.



ERROR LISTING



movement and off in



attracted, and off



low-speed movement



when the clutch is released.



D27



Low-speed signal of DIGIEYE



D51



Electrical



560



signal



handpiece



plug



of



D84



DigiEye



Flat-panel 2 READY signal. The light is on



760 handpiece



if ready, otherwise, off.



movement. The light is on in high-speed movement and off in low-speed movement D28



DigiEye



handpiece



D52



Braking



signal



of



motor direction signal.



DigiEye



The light is on when



handpiece rotation.



SID



The light is on when



decreases



movement,



and



760



off



it brakes, and off



when SID increases



when the brake is



movement.



released



Note: Indicators identified with DigiEye 560 are not used in DigiEye 760. So no consideration for those indicators is needed. Table 12-6 Listing of test units on the device interface board Test unit description TP1



Test unit description



24V input



TP11



Enabling



signal



of



the



generator TP2



Simulated 14V



TP12



Synchronous signal for flat panel power frequency



TP3



Digital 5V



TP13



Exposure signal



TP4



Simulated 5V



TP15



Digitally



TP5



Digital 3.3V



TP16



Simulated



TP6



Digital 1.2V



TP18



Unused



TP7



SDRAM clock



TP19



Unused



TP8



CAN bus clock (12MHz)



TP20



Digitally



TP9



RS232 testing signal



TP21



Simulated



TP10



The



generator



Ready



signal



- 517 -



ERROR LISTING



12.2.4.2 Location diagram of indicator lights and test units on the device interface board



12.2.4.3 Error diagnosis steps 1. Tool: multimeter; 2. According to the external connection diagram in Section 7.2.3.1, make sure the connection of wires on the device interface board is correct; 3. Refer to the "Listing of indicator lights on the device interface board" and "Listing of test units on the device interface board" in Section 7.2.3.2 for identifying the error by using the multimeter and indicator lights (note: the location diagram of indicator lights and test units in Section 7.2.3.3 is meant for the maintainer to locate the specific position of indicator lights and test units. 4. By carrying out the steps above, the error can basically be identified. By replacing components, repair welding or replacing panels, re-burning software and so forth, the error can be solved. Note: For the disassembly methods of boards and electrical parts, please refer to the related sections in this manual.



- 518 -



ERROR LISTING



12.2.5Device Drive Board Error Diagnosis 12.2.5.1 Device drive board external connection graph



12.2.5.2 Listing of indicator lights and test units on the device drive board Indicator



Prompt



Indicator - 519 -



Prompt



ERROR LISTING



description



D27



First



brake



enabling D28



Second Third



brake



Fourth



under



normal



normal



condition



condition



On



during



D37



On



DC servo motor direction



during



D38



Unused



D39



Unused



D40



DC servo motor



On



direction



speed



enabling brake



enabling D30



description



enabling



enabling D29



under



On



during



enabling brake



enabling



On



during



enabling



speed



at



fast



signal D31



First



clutch



enabling D32



Second Third



clutch



Fourth



clutch



Unused



D36



Unused



Unused



On



during



D43



Unused



On



during



D18



+5V power



On



D41



+12V power



On



D42



+24V power



On



enabling clutch



enabling D35



D44



enabling



enabling D34



during



enabling



enabling D33



On



On



during



enabling



Test unit description MOS_G1



PWM pulse of DigiEye 760 FPD lifting motor



LIFT_DIR



Rotation of DigiEye 760 FPD lifting motor



MOS_G1



PWM pulse of DigiEye 760 FPD rotating motor



ROT_DIR



Rotation of DigiEye 760 FPD rotating motor



VREF1



DigiEye 760 FPD lifting motor overcurrent protection reference voltage



VREF2



DigiEye



760



FPD



rotating



motor



overcurrent



protection reference voltage SI1



DigiEye 760 FPD lifting motor current test unit (0.033V: 1A)



SI2



DigiEye 760 FPD rotating motor current test unit (0.033V: 1A)



COMP1



DigiEye 760 FPD lifting motor overcurrent protection output (low electric level: protection)



COMP2



DigiEye



760



FPD



rotating



motor



overcurrent



protection output (low electric level: protection) DCVL



DigiEye 560 drive rate voltage on detector rotation servo motor



Note: Indicators identified with DigiEye 560 are not used in DigiEye 760. So no consideration for those indicators is needed. - 520 -



ERROR LISTING



12.2.5.3 Location diagram of indicator lights and test units on the device drive board



- 521 -



ERROR LISTING



12.2.5.4 Error diagnosis steps 1. Tool: multimeter; 2. According to the external connection diagram in Section 7.2.4.1, make sure the connection of wires on the device drive board is correct; 3. Refer to the "Listing of indicator lights on the device drive board" and "Listing of test units on the device drive board" in Section 7.2.4.2 for identifying the error by using the multimeter and indicator lights (note: the location diagram of indicator lights and test units in Section 7.2.4.3 is meant for the maintainer to locate the specific position of indicator lights and test units. 4. By carrying out the steps above, the error can basically be identified. By replacing components, repair welding or replacing panels, re-burning software and so forth, the error can be solved. Note: For the disassembly methods of boards and electrical parts, please refer to the related sections in this manual.



12.2.6Error Diagnosis in the Operator Console Control Panel 12.2.6.1 Listing of indicator lights and test units on operator console control panel Indicator description D8



220V power channel A. The light turns on to indicate the channel is closed, and off to indicate the channel is disconnected



D1



220V power channel B. The light turns on to indicate the channel is closed, and off to indicate the channel is disconnected



D7



220V power channel C. The light turns on to indicate the channel is closed, and off to indicate the channel is disconnected



D6



220V power channel D. The light turns on to indicate the channel is closed, and off to indicate the channel is disconnected



D5



Emergency OFF switch signal. The light turns off to indicate emergent stop occurs, and on to indicate no emergent stop occurs.



D73



24V power indicator light. The light is turns on to indicate +24V network is powered on, and off to indicate the network is powered off.



D75



+5V power indicator light. The light turns on to indicate +5V_A network is powered on, and off to indicate the network is powered off.



D76



Vcc(+5V) power indicator light. The light turns on to indicate Vcc network is powered on, and off to indicate the network is powered off.



D77



Vdd(+3.3V) power indicator light. The light turns on to indicate Vdd network is powered on, and off to indicate the network is powered off.



D39



PRE indicator light. The light turns on to indicate PRE signal is sent out, and off to indicate the signal is not sent out.



D40



RUN indicator light. The light turns on to indicate RUN signal is sent out, and off to indicate the signal is not sent out.



D41



EXP indicator light. The light turns on to indicate EXP signal is sent out, and off to indicate the signal is not sent out.



D36



Generator power-on indicator light. The light is on to indicate the power-on - 522 -



ERROR LISTING



signal is sent out, and off to indicate the signal is not sent out. D37



Generator power-off indicator light. The light is on to indicate the power-off signal is sent out, and off to indicate the signal is not sent out.



D31



IPC ON/OFF signal indicator light. The light is on to indicate the IPC ON/OFF signal is sent out, and off to indicate the signal is not sent out.



D32



PC ON/OFF signal indicator light. The light is on to indicate the PC ON/OFF signal is sent out, and off to indicate the signal is not sent out.



D42



Generator status indicator light. The light is on to indicate the generator is powered on, off to indicate the generator is powered off.



D10



Power-on signal indicator light. The light is on to indicate the power-on signal is received, and off to indicate the signal is not received.



D11



PC status indicator light. The light is on to indicate PC is startup, and off to indicate it is shutdown.



D29



IPC status indicator light. The light is on to indicate IPC is startup, and off to indicate it is shutdown.



D3



Indicator light for operator console control panel software running status. The light flickers to indicate the software runs normally, otherwise, to indicate the software does not run.



D30



Indicator light for operator console control panel FPGA configuration status. The light is on to indicate FPGA logic configuration is completed, and off to indicate the logic configuration is not successful.



D38



Buzzer status indicator light. The light is on to indicate the buzzer sounds, otherwise, to indicate it is silent. Test unit description



GND



Digitally



AGND



Simulated



GND1



Digitally



GND2



Digitally



GND3



Digitally



GND4



Digitally



+24V_OUT



+24V power



+14V_A



+14V power



+5V_A



+5V power



VCC



Vcc power



VDD



Vdd power



CHA



220V channel A startup signal. low electric level indicates startup, or else, shutdown



CHB



220V channel C startup signal. low electric level indicates startup, or else, shutdown



CHC



220V channel B startup signal. low electric level indicates startup, or else, shutdown



CHD



220V channel D startup signal. low electric level indicates startup, - 523 -



ERROR LISTING



or else, shutdown GEN-TXD



Serial-port signal. Generator sends the signal to PC. The signal electric level change is associated with the transmitted data.



GEN-RXD



Serial-port signal. PC sends the signal to PC. The signal electric level change is associated with the transmitted data.



PC_TX



Serial-port signal. Operator console control panel sends the signal to PC. The signal electric level change is associated with the transmitted data.



PC_RX



Serial-port signal. Operator console control panel sends the signal to PC. The signal electric level change is associated with the transmitted data.



BUZZER



Buzzer work signal. Low electric level signal indicates that buzzer sounds, and high electric signal indicates that buzzer is silent.



Note: As DigiEye 760 model adopts the SEDECAL generator, contents of test unit and indicator light related to EMD generator need not be considered.



- 524 -



ERROR LISTING



12.2.6.2 Location diagram of indicator lights and test units on operator console control panel



- 525 -



ERROR LISTING



12.2.6.3 Error diagnosis steps 1. Tool: multimeter; 2. According to the external connection diagram in Sec. 7.2.5.1, make sure the connection of wires on the control panel of the operator console is correct; 3. Refer to the "Listing of indicator lights on the operator console control panel" and "Listing of test units on the operator console control panel" in Section 7.2.5.2 for identifying the error by using the multimeter and indicator lights (note: the location diagram of indicator lights and test units in Section 7.2.5.3 is meant for the maintainer to locate the specific position of indicator lights and test units. 4. By carrying out the steps above, the error can basically be identified. By replacing components, repair welding or replacing panels, re-burning software and so forth, the error can be solved. Note: For the disassembly methods of boards and electrical parts, please refer to the related sections in this manual.



- 526 -



ERROR LISTING



12.2.7Stand Column Signal Acquisition Board Error Diagnosis 12.2.7.1 Display listing of codes on stand column signal acquisition board digital tube Code 00



Description



Code



Normal condition



14



Description Undertable-position wall-stand-position



and photoelectric



switches of traveling carriage are triggered simultaneously 01



CAN initialization failure



15



Undertable-position



photoelectric



switch of traveling carriage is triggered 02



CAN connection failure



16



Wall-stand-position



photoelectric



switch of traveling carriage is triggered 03



CAN transmission error



17



Undertable-position wall-stand-position switches



of



and photoelectric



handpiece



are



triggered simultaneously 04



CAN receiving error



18



Undertable-position



photoelectric



switch of handpiece is triggered 05



SID



distal



near-by



triggered



19



simultaneously 06



Wall-stand-position



photoelectric



switch of handpiece is triggered



SID distal limit position triggered



20



Handpiece rotation potentiometer is damaged



07



SID



nearby



limit



position



21



triggered 08



Upper and lower potentiometers of telescopic trunk is damaged



Upper and lower limit position of telescopic



trunk



22



are



Potentiometers in the front and back of SID are damaged



simultaneously triggered 09



Upper limit position of telescopic



23



trunk triggered 10



Communication



error



converter chip



Lower limit position of telescopic



24



Code is being updated online



25



Code online updating fails



of



26



External SDRAM error



of



27



External FLASH error



trunk triggered 11



Maximum and minimum limit positions for handpiece rotation are triggered simultaneously



12



Maximum



limit



position



handpeice rotation is triggered 13



Minimum



limit



of



position



handpeice rotation is triggered



- 527 -



AD



ERROR LISTING



12.2.7.2 Listing of indicator lights and test units on the stand column signal acquisition board Indicator



Prompt under



Indicator



Prompt under



description



normal



description



normal



condition D1



condition



TOP_LED



Normal



indicator light



movement:



D23



1.8M grid sensor



Off



indicator light



triggered



Maximum



Off



when



always on; Failure: flickers; Chain movement: always on; D2



FPGA



On



D24



angle



configuration



limit indicator light



success indicator



for FPD rotation



when



triggered



light D8



Unused



for



Off



D30



reservation D9



Unused



for



Off



D31



On



indicator



On



indicator



On



Digital VCC (+5V)



On



+12V light



Unused



for



Off



D32



reservation D11



indicator



light



reservation D10



+24V



+5V_A light



Handgrip sensor



On



signal



triggered



indicator



when



D33



indicator light



light in the right side



of



stand



column D12



Handgrip sensor



On



signal



triggered



indicator



when



D34



of



VDD



On



(+3.3V) indicator



light in the left side



Digital light



stand



column D13



Fiber signal



sensor indicator



On



when



D35



triggered



transmitted



light D14



bus



Flash



data



CAN



indicator light



CAN received



D15



CAN



bus



Flash



data



CAN



during



Unused



communication for



Off



for



Off



reservation



indicator light



communication



FPD emergency



Off



OFF



triggered



switch



D36



when



D37



Unused reservation



indicator light D16



Ascending switch



foot



indicator



On



when



D38



triggered



FPGA



Off



configuration



light



error - 528 -



during



indicator



ERROR LISTING



light D17



Descending foot



On



switch



triggered



indicator



when



D40



Unused



for



Off



for



Off



reservation



light D18 D19



Grid



sensor



Off



indicator light



triggered



FPD



Off



ascending



top limit indicator



when



D41



reservation when



D42



triggered



light D20



FPD descending



Off



bottom



triggered



limit



Unused



when



D43



Fiber



sensor



On while it is in



ON/OFF indicator



the undertable



light



position



Stand



column



Off



emergency OFF



indicator light



switch



when



triggered



indicator



light D21



Minimum



angle



limit indicator light



Off



when



D44



triggered



Fiber sensor 12V



On while it is in



indicator light



the undertable



for FPD rotation D22



position



1M grid sensor



Off



indicator light



triggered



Name



when



Description



Name



Description



+24V



Simulated +24V



AGND1



Simulated



+14V



Simulated +14V



ANGD2



Simulated



+12V



Simulated +12V



ANGD3



Simulated



+5V_A



Simulated +5V



ANGD4



Simulated



DGND1



Digitally



ADIN1



Potentiometer



filtered



analog voltage signal for vertical movement of FPD (up and down) DGND2



Digitally



ADIN2



Potentiometer



filtered



analog voltage signal for rotation of FPD DGND3



Digitally



AIN1



Potentometer voltage



signal



analog for



FPD



rotation VCC



Digital +5V



AIN2



Potentiometer



analog



voltage signal for vertical movement of FPD VDD



Digital +3.3V



CAN_X1



CAN controller clock input signal (12MHz)



VCCINT



Digital +1.2V



FPGA_X1



FPGA clock input signal (25MHz)



12V_SWITCH



Fiber sensor 12V power supply signal - 529 -



ERROR LISTING



12.2.7.3 Location diagram of indicator lights and test units on the stand column signal acquisition board



12.2.7.4 Error diagnosis steps 1. Tool used: Multimeter 2. According to the external connection diagram in Sec. 7.2.6.1, make sure the connection of wires on the signal acquisition board is correct; 3. Refer to "Display list of digital tube on stand column signal acquisition board" in Section 7.2.6.2 for error identification and correction, check the number displayed on the digital tube; 4. If the error can not be identified with reference to "Display list of digital tube on stand column signal acquisition board", check the table of "Listing of indicator lights on stand column signal acquisition board" and "Listing of test units on stand column signal acquisition board" in Section 7.2.6.3. By using multimeter, further identify the error (note: the location diagram of indicator lights and test units in Section 7.2.6.4 is meant for the maintainer to locate the specific position of indicator lights and test units. 5. By carrying out the steps above, the error can basically be identified. By replacing components, repair welding or replacing panels, re-burning software and so forth, the error can - 530 -



ERROR LISTING



be solved. Note: For the disassembly methods of boards and electrical parts, please refer to the related sections in this manual.



12.3 System Control Cabinet Error Error description



Possible reason



Error diagnosis and Solutions



1. No 3-phase voltage



1. Measure the voltage of 3-phase



2. Three-phase input



input and check if it is 380V;



fuse blows



2. Check if the fuse of 3-phase input is



3. 380VAC Transformer fails Power indicator light is off



blown; 3. Check if the voltage of the 380VAC



4. Sigle-phase fuse blows



transformer output terminal is correct; 4. Check if the single-phase fuse is



5. Power supply board



blown;



of water inlet pump



5. Check the input and output of the



fails



power board of the inlet pump;



6. Indicator light fails



6. Check if the indicator light is damaged.



Contactor cannot be



1. Contactor error 2.



1. Press corresponding contactor



Disconnection in



switch and check if there is any



contactor controlling part



voltage at both ends of A1 and A2 of the contactor. If yes, the error is in the



attracted



contactor. If no, check if there is any open circuit in the wires of the controlling part in the contactor. 1. The relay controlling



1. Test if there is 24V DC voltage at



The switch can



circuit is open 2. Relay



the 13 and 14 terminals. If yes, the



control the contactor,



error



error is in the relay. If no, check the



but the relay does not



3. The operator console



relay controlling circuit



work



control panel fails



2. Check whether the operator console control panel is damaged



No 24V DC voltage



1. 24V ON/OFF power



1. Disconnect the voltage output plug



cabinet error 2. 220V



of the 24V ON/OFF power cabinet,



power input error 3.



and power it on to see if the voltage



Short circuit in load



output indicator light is on. If yes, there is short circuit in the load; if no, there is error in the 220V voltage input wire or the 24V ON/OFF power cabinet.



SID cannot be



1. Failure of stepping



1. Based on the status of red and



adjusted for the



motor driver



green indicators on the driver, find the



rotation and vertical



2. Failure of control



problems against the instructions on



movement of



circuit



the driver. If both the indicator lights - 531 -



ERROR LISTING



handpiece



are off, check the power supply of the driver. 2. Check if the device interface board is damaged



Power indicator light



1. No input voltage at the



1. Test if there is any input voltage at



on the device



board 2. Device



the board. If no, the error is in power



interface board is not



interface board error



input. If yes, the error is in the device



on



interface board.



Power indicator light



1. No input voltage at the



1. Test if there is any input voltage at



on the device



board 2. Device drive



the board. If no, the error is in power



interface board is not



board error



input. If yes, the error is in the device



on



No linear output



drive board. 1. UPS error 2. Flat



1. Check if there is 220V output



panel linear power error



voltage at UPS. If yes, the error is in the FPD linear power supply. If no,



voltage at the flat



re-check if there is 220V input voltage



panel



at UPS. If yes, the error is in UPS; if no, check its forward stage circuit. 1. IPC error



IPC fails to start up



2.



No power input



1. Pull out the IPC power input plug and measure to check if there is 24V voltage; if yes, IPC fails; if no, check the power input circuit.



1. Failure of device drive



1. When pressing the key that controls



board



rotation or vertical movement of



Motor for the vertical



2. Device interface



detector, see if the relay on the device



movement or rotation



board error 3. Motor



drive board works; if no, check if error



of detector fails



error



is in the device interface board or device drive board; if yes, check if the motor is damaged.



- 532 -



ERROR LISTING



12.4 Generator Error When there is any error in running the generator, error information will be displayed on screen of the control console software (DROC). Generator error code and error message will be introduced as follows.



12.4.1ERROR INTRODUCTION The Generator contains many self-diagnostic routines which greatly facilitate troubleshooting. Self-diagnostic



functions



require



that



all



microprocessors



function



correctly.



Each



microprocessor contains LEDs that indicate its correct operation.



As a general rule, the first step in any troubleshooting procedure is to verify correct Power Supply Voltages and perform a visual inspection of all Boards and Cable connections.



On arrival in the X-ray Room, the Service Engineer should carry out the following operations: 



If the Generator cannot be powered up, run the troubleshooting for Error Code E01.







If the Generator can be Powered up:




Check which Error Code is displayed on the Console and run the troubleshooting routines for the last Error Code displayed.








If it is not, try to reproduce the failure in the conditions reported by the Operator. It is possible that the Error Code displayed is different from either that indicated by the Operator. In all cases, run the troubleshooting routines for the last Error Code displayed.



When any major component, such as a X-ray Tube, HV Transformer or Circuit Board, is replaced in the system, perform the respective Configuration and Calibration procedures. For the replacing procedures of each part, please refer to “The replacement of the main parts for the Generator” in Chapter 3 of the Maintenance Manual.



12.4.2General Cautions







MAKE SURE THAT THE MAIN CAPACITORS OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER. DO NOT CONTAIN ANY RESIDUAL CHARGE. WAIT UNTIL THE LIGHT EMITTING DIODES ON THE CHARGE-DISCHARGE MONITOR BOARDS ARE OFF, APPROX. 3 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT IS TURNED OFF.







THIS GENERATOR IS PERMANENTLY CONNECTED TO THE POWER LINE,



- 533 -



ERROR LISTING



AND POWERED ON UNLESS THE SAFETY SWITCH INSTALLED IN THE ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET IS OFF. WHEN THE GENERATOR IS POWERED, THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE TRANSFORMER 6T2 (GENERATOR CABINET) IS ON.







INTERNAL PARTS OF THE GENERATOR (ALL FUSES, LINE CONTACTOR (6K5), INPUT TRANSFORMER (6T2), ON/OFF RELAY (3K3) AND LF-RAC MODULE) ARE PERMANENTLY POWERED ON THROUGH POWER LINE ALTHOUGH THE CONTROL CONSOLE IS OFF. BE SURE THAT THE SAFETY SWITCH IS OFF BEFORE HANDLING ANY INTERNAL PART OF THE EQUIPMENT.



•



EXCWPT FOR SPECIAL INSTRUCIONS, PLEASE DO NOT POWER THE GENERATOR BY SWITCH BOARD (WITH MAIN POWER OFF) OR START THE SYSTEM.



•



ALWAYS HAVE THE “IPM DRIVER BOARD” CONNECTED IN THE GENERATOR PREVIOUS TO MAINS POWER IS ACTIVATED IN IT. IF THE “IPM DRIVER BOARD” IS NOT CONNECTED, PERMANENT DAMAGE WILL OCCUR TO IGBTS.



12.4.3General Procedures 12.4.3.1 Low DC Voltage Power Supply Test The Generator operates from a Low DC Voltage Power Supply located in the Front Panel (MOD. 3) of the Generator Cabinet, as shown in the picture below:



Turn the Generator ON and with a Digital Multimeter measure between: 



P2-3 (+) and P2-4 on the HT Controller Board. Check that the voltage at this point is +5 ±0.2 VDC. If required, adjust voltage with the +5 VDC Adjustment Potentiometer on the - 534 -



ERROR LISTING



Power Supply Board. 



P2-2 (+) and P2-4 on the HT Controller Board. Check that the voltage at this point is +12 ±0.1 VDC. If required, adjust voltage with the +12 VDC Adjustment Potentiometer on the Power Supply Board.







P2-1 (--) and P2-4 on the HT Controller Board. Check that the voltage at this point is --12 ±0.1 VDC (this voltage must be --12.7 ±0.1 VDC if the Console is provided with a Graphic Display). If required, adjust voltage with the --12 VDC Adjustment Potentiometer on the Power Supply Board.



The ATP Console CPU Board operates from a 12 VDC Non-Regulated Supply located in the Generator Cabinet that supplies to a 5 VDC Switching Regulator located in the ATP Console CPU Board. Turn the Generator ON and with a Digital Multimeter measure between: 



TS1-30 (GND) and TS1-29 (+12 V Unr.) on the Generator Cabinet. Check that the voltage at this point is +12 ±1.5 VDC.







TP GND and TP +5 on the ATP Console CPU Board. Check that the voltage at this point is +5 ±0.2 VDC.



12.4.3.2 Microprocessors and General Operation The following LEDs indicate the proper operation of each Microprocessor in the Generator: 



The LED DS1 located on the HT Controller Board blinks fast during power up, then slows to a steady blink of about 2 per second, indicating that the Microprocessor U5 is operating normally.







The LED DS2 located on the ATP Console CPU Board normally blinks at the same rate as LED DS1 on the HT Controller Board, indicating that the Console Microprocessor U30 is operating correctly.



- 535 -



ERROR LISTING



Also observe the following LEDs to facilitate general troubleshooting: 



When LED DS1 located on the Interface Control Board is ON (lit), it indicates that the Generator is ON.







The LED DS1 located on the ATP Console CPU Board is normally ON (lit), indicating that theWatch-Dog Timer of the Console is operating and insuring the correct timing of data communications with the HT Controller Board.



12.4.4Error Codes ERROR CODE



DISCRIPTION



“- - - - - -”



SYSTEM FAILURE. FATAL ERROR



E01



FAILURE IN POWER UP ROUTINE. NO COMMUNICATION LINK BETWEEN HT CONTROLLER BOARD AND ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD.



E03



FAILURE IN POWER UP ROUTINE. ALL WORKSTATIONS ARE UNCONFIGURED.



E04



“PREP” SIGNAL RECEIVED WITHOUT CONSOLE ORDER.



E06



“PREP” OR/AND “EXPOSURE” ORDERS ACTIVATED DURING POWER UP ROUTINE.



E08



WRONG DATA FOR X-RAY TUBE-1.



E09



GENERATOR OVERLOAD. ARCING OR IGBT FAULT.



E10



EEPROM CORRUPTED OR NO INITIALIZED ON ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD



OR



ON



HT



CONTROLLER



BOARD. WRONG



DATA



CALIBRATION. E11



NO VOLTAGE IN CAPACITOR BANK.



E12



NO mA DURING EXPOSURE OR mA OUT OF TOLERANCE. WRONG FILAMENT CURRENT.



E13



NO kVp DURING EXPOSURE OR kVp OUT OF TOLERANCE.



E14



EXPOSURE SIGNAL WITHOUT X-RAY EXPOSURE CONSOLE COMMAND.



E15



NO CURRENT ON FILAMENT. WRONG SELECTION OF FOCAL SPOT DETECTED DURING “PREP”.



E16



INVALID VALUE OF: kVp, mA OR kW.



E17



COMMUNICATION ERROR BETWEEN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD AND HT CONTROLLER BOARD.



E18



ROTOR RUNNING WITHOUT ORDER OR ROTOR ERROR.



E19



mA DETECTED WITHOUT “EXPOSURE” ORDER.



E20



kVp DETECTED WITHOUT “EXPOSURE” ORDER.



E21



WRONG TUBE-1 SELECTION.



E23



CALIBRATION DATA NOT STORED.



E24



THE BUCKY HAS NOT BEEN DETECTED TO BE MOVING.



E27



FAILURE IN CONSOLE EPROM. BAD CHECKSUM.



E33



NO COMMUNICATION LINK BETWEEN GENERATOR AND SERIAL - 536 -



ERROR LISTING



CONSOLE OR PC UNIT E34



TECHNIQUE ERROR.



E35



DOOR OPEN.



E36



HEAT UNITS. OVERHEATING.



E37



TUBE OVERLOAD.



E50



INTERRUPTED EXPOSURE.



E51



DRAC -- CHECKSUM FAILURE OR EPROM CORRUPTED



E52



DRAC -- MICROCONTROLLER RAM FAILURE.



E53



DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT DC BUS VOLTAGE AT LOW LEVEL VOLTAGE (220 VAC).



E54



DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT DC BUS VOLTAGE AT HIGH LEVEL VOLTAGE (480 VAC).



E55



DRAC -- EXCESSIVE DC BUS VOLTAGE AT HIGH LEVEL VOLTAGE (480 VAC OR 380 VAC).



E56



DRAC -- EXCESSIVE REFERENCE VOLTAGE.



E58



DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.



E59



DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.



E60



DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.



E61



DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.



E62



DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.



E63



DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.



E64



DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.



E65



DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.



E66



DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.



E67



DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.



E68



DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.



E69



DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.



E70



DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.



E71



DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.



- 537 -



ERROR LISTING



E72



DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.



E73



DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.



E74



DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.



E75



DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.



E76



DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.



E77



DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.



E78



DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.



E79



DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.



E80



DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.



E81



DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.



E83



DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN DC BRAKE.



E87



DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM



E88



DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE RUNNING AT 3300 RPM



E89



DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM



E90



DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE RUNNING AT 10000 RPM



E91



DRAC -- INCORRECT MEASURE AT IPRINC (CH2)



E92



DRAC -- INCORRECT MEASURE AT IAUX (CH3)



E93



DRAC -- INCORRECT MEASURE AT ICOM (CH4)



E98



DIP SWITCH 3024SW2-3 ON ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD SET FOR CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION MODE ACTIVE (SERVICE MODE).



12.4.5Description of Errors ERROR CODE: “- - - - - - ” DESCRIPTION : System failure. ERROR TYPE : Fatal error. Generator must be switched off. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators APPEARS WHEN : This indication may appear at any time together with another Error Code



- 538 -



ERROR LISTING



on the Console. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. ACTIONS Turn the Generator OFF, wait a few seconds and turn it ON. ERROR CODE:



E01



DESCRIPTION : Failure in power up routine. No communication link between HT Controller Board and ATP Console CPU Board. ERROR TYPE : Fatal error. Generator can not continue with power up. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators APPEARS WHEN : Only during initialization phase. If it appears during normal functioning of equipment, it means that a problem has caused a power off in the Console. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication link between ATP Console and HT Controller Boards during power ON and the Generator is not able to make Exposures.If Led 1 of the HT Controller remains lit, it means that HT Controller has not been started. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES The Console has been suddenly switched OFF by operator or by a loss of the main power. The Microprocessor U5 on the HT Controller Board has not started-up. The communication link between ATP Console Board and HT Controller Board is not reliable. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check DC supplies. 2. Check the software version in case of update or change the ATP Console or HT Controller Boards. Check and replace if necessary U5 on HT Controller and U24 on ATP Console Board. 3. Check continuity between terminals 2, 3, 5 and 6 on J3 of ATP Console Board and P1-4, P1-11, P1-15, P1-10 of HT Controller Board. Check with special care connector 6J3 of the Generator. 4. Switch OFF, wait a few seconds and switch ON again to reset the Error Code. 5. If not fixed after previous steps, check Led DS1 on HT Controller Board when powering the equipment, if it has not turned off, replace HT Controller Board. 6. If Led DS1 is off, check with an oscilloscope the following signals: HT-C CLK, HT-C DAT, C-HT CLK and C-HT DAT in order to find a possible defective component at any of both Boards (HT Controller and ATP Console). Replace the Board where the defective component is found. ERROR CODE:



E03



DESCRIPTION : Failure in power up routine. All workstation are unconfigured.



- 539 -



ERROR LISTING



ERROR TYPE : Fatal error. Generator can not continue with power up. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators. APPEARS WHEN : Only during initialization phase. If it appears during normal functioning of equipment, it means that a problem has caused a power off in the Console. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed.It has not been possible to establish a correct communication link between ATP Console and HT Controller Boards during power ON and the Generator is not able to make Exposures. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES All workstations have been configured as tube=0. The EEPROM (U18) on ATP Console Board is defective. The ATP Console Board is not able to communicate with U18. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Configure the workstations as referred in Service Manual. 2. Change U18 and configure the workstations as referred in Service Manual. 3. If not fixed after previous steps, replace ATP Console Board and configure the workstations. ERROR CODE:



E04



DESCRIPTION : “Prep” signal received without Console order. ERROR TYPE : Informative. Generator re-start automatically once error is solved. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators. APPEARS WHEN : At any moment once initialization phase is over. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication link between ATP Console and HT Controller Boards. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES The Generator receives the “Prep” signal without a Console command. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check continuity between P1-3 onHTController Board and J3-4 on ATP Console Board.Check with special care connector 6J3 of the Generator. 2. If all is correct, check signal from P1-3 to U5 on HT Controller Board. 3. If the signal is OK, replace HT Controller Board. ERROR CODE:



E06



DESCRIPTION : “Prep” or/and “Exposure” orders activated during power-up routine. ERROR TYPE : Informative. Generator re-start automatically once error is solved. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators



- 540 -



ERROR LISTING



APPEARS WHEN : At any moment once initialization phase is over. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication link between ATP Console and HTController Boards. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES The Generator has been detected “Prep” or “Exposure” signals during initialization. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. In Generators equipped with “Prep” and “Exposure” keys on the Console, check that not object is activating the function. Also check for possible damages on keys. 2. Check damages on flat cable with connector J9. 3. In Generators with external Handswitch, check contacts, cable and connectors. 4. If the error remains, check continuity between TS1-37 and J2-17 on ATP Console Board and TS1-36 and J2-4 also on ATP Console Board. 5. If not solved yet, replace the ATP Console Board. ERROR CODE:



E08



DESCRIPTION : Wrong data for X-ray Tube-1. ERROR TYPE : Fatal error. Generator can not continue with power up. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators APPEARS WHEN : Only during initialization phase. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication link between ATP Console and HTController Boards during power ON. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Wrong configuration of X-ray Tube-1. Corrupted calibration data. Data on Extended Memory Location E02 are larger than the maximum allowed. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check data in Extended Memory Location E02. 2. If it is OK, replace U3 on HT Controller Board. ERROR CODE:



E09



DESCRIPTION : Generator overload. Arcing or IGBT fault. ERROR TYPE : Informative. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators APPEARS WHEN : During the exposure and In Stand-by, INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : This error may appear at the Console as “E09” Error Code or as a “Generator Overload” indication. During exposure an



- 541 -



ERROR LISTING



over current on the IGBT‘s of the HV Inverter Module has been detected. This may be produced by and arc or mal-function on the HV Circuitry. In stand-by, the Console is continuously displaying “E09” or “Generator Overload” due to a defective or overheated IGBTs Module. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Symptom-1: G Defective X-ray Tube. G Defective HV Transformer or HV Cable. G Defective IGBT module. G Defective HT Controller. Symptom-2: G Extremely high Duty Cycle on Rad and Fluoro operation. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS A. PRELIMINARY 1. Select minimum kVp , minimum mA, and 80 ms (for example 40 kVp, 10mA, and 80 ms). Make preparation and check that anode rotates in the X-ray Tube. If the anode is not rotating correctly, check the starter and the Stator connections. 2. In case the anode is rotating correctly, make an exposure: If “09” or “GeneratorOverload” appears follow procedure in paragraph B (Inverter Module Test). If not, follow step-3. 3. Increment kVp in 10 kVp steps, select the same mA and time. Make an exposure: 



If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears, or the exposure is cut before 80ms, then follow procedure in paragraph C (HV Transformer Test).







If not, keep on increasing the kVp in 10 kVp steps (60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120 and 125kVp for 125 kVp HV Transformers; and 130, 140, 150 kVp for 150 kVp HV Transformers) making Exposures at each kVp selected.








If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears or the exposure is cut before 80 ms at any kVp selected, follow procedure in paragraph C (HV Transformer Test).








If “E09” or “Generator Overload” has not appeared at the maximum kVp or the exposurewas not cut before 80ms , it means that HV Transformer andHV Cables are OK. Then follow the procedure in paragraph E. In this case high mA causes E09 or “Generator Overload”.



B. INVERTER MODULE TEST 1. Power off Generator and mains. 2. Remove the cover from the Generator Cabinet. 3. Wait for the DC Bus of the Inverter to be fully discharged. When it is fully discharged the Leds on the Charge-Discharge Monitor Board will be completely turned off. 4. When Leds are off make a jumper between DC-BUS+ and DC--BUS--. Make sure that there is less than 10 VDC across the BUS. (Refer to Illustration 4-1 to see where to make the - 542 -



ERROR LISTING



jumper). 5. Measure with a Multimeter in Diode (or ohms) between C2E1 (positive polarity) and E2 or C1(negative polarity) in both IGBTs (refer to Illustration 4-1 for more details). Repeat the measure with different polarity between C2E1 (negative polarity) and E2 or C1 (positive polarity). Voltage should be around 0.3 V (or the resistance must be a high impedance) for the IGBT to be OK. Normally when an IGBT is broken the voltage is = 0 volts (or the resistance is zeroOhms) or very close. Illustration Jumper and Measurement Points



- 543 -



ERROR LISTING



Jumper between DC-BUS+and DC-BUS--



E2



C2E1



3--PHASE LINE POWERED GENERATOR 6. Repeat the measurements done in step 5 for the other IGBT.



Don’t forget to remove the jumper across the DC Bus after all measurements are made, otherwise the Inverter will suffer serious damage. 7. If any of the IGBTs are short-circuited, replace the IGBT. 8. If both IGBTs are OK, remove both shielded cable that connect the Inverter to the HV Transformer: P1, P3 and SHLD (P2) . Isolate the three wires completely from each other and from the metal sheet or ground. Make sure that wires are perfectly isolated and that no short-circuit is made otherwise serious damages could result. 9. Set Dip-switch 3000SW2--2 in ON position at the HT Controller Board. 10. Turn ON mains and Generator. 11. Make an exposure: 



If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appear or the exposure has not been cut before 80ms, change (if possible) the whole Inverter. If it is not possible check capacitor C9 and choke L1 of the inverter (normally placed at the backside of the inverter). If both seem OK, change both IGBTS and IPM Drivers (Do not forget to re--connect both shielded cables to the HV Transformer (P1, P2 and P3).







If “E09” or “Generator Overload“ does not appear and the exposure has not been cut before 80 ms, re--connect both shielded cables to the H. Voltage Transformer (P1, P2 and P3).Follow the procedure in paragraph C (High Voltage Transformer Test).



At the end of an Exposure and right after releasing the Handswitch, error “E13” is shown on the Console (this is normal, reset and continue).



- 544 -



ERROR LISTING



12. Turn OFF mains and Generator. 13. Set Dip-switch 3000SW2-2 in OFF position at the HT Controller Board. Re-connect both shielded cables that connect the Inverter to the HV Transformer P1, P3 and SHLD (P2). Illustration Flowchart for B: Inverter Module Test



C. HV TRANSFORMER TEST 1. Connect the scope as follows: 



G CH.1 on + mA (TP14) on HT Controller Board. - 545 -



ERROR LISTING







G CH.2 on - mA (TP13) on HT Controller Board.







G Base Time in 10 ms per division and 1 V per division



2. Turn ON mains and Generator. Set Dip-switch 3000SW2-4 in ON position at the HV Controller Board. Select 50 kVp, 25 mA and 50 ms. 3. Make an exposure and check that both waveforms are almost symmetric (a difference of±10% is normal). 



If it is OK, follow procedure in step-4.







If it is not OK, check:




that in the mA Test Point of the HV Transformer the jumper is correctly placed and secure.








that connector J1 is correctly placed and secure in the HV Transformer.








continuity between J1-D and P4-7, J1-E and P4-6, J1-Band P4-2, and J1-C andP4-1.Check that they are correctly connected and secure.








if after these actions the waveform is not OK, replace HV Transformer.



4. Turn OFF Generator and mains. 5. Remove HV Cables from the HV Transformer (anode and cathode) and fill the HV Receptacles with oil. 6. On the HT Controller Board, make a jumper FIL (TP8) and + 5 V (TP2). 7. Turn ON mains and Generator. Select 50 kVp, 50 mA and 50 ms. 8. Connect the scope as following: 



CH.1 on + kV (TP11) on HT Controller Board.







CH.2 on --kV (TP12) on HT Controller Board.







Base time in 10 msec. per division and 2 V per division.



9. Make an Exposure and check that both waveforms are symmetric. 10. Make exposures from 50 kVp to 110 kVp with the same Exposure Time and check that all kVp waveform are symmetric and the values are similar according the table below.



11. Select the maximum kVp allowed (depending on the tube type) and maximum Exposure Time allowed but NEVER go over the 110--130 kVp limit. Make several Exposures and check that waveforms are correct. If the waveforms are not symmetric within ± 10% at any point, replace the HV Transformer. 12. Repeat the above procedure for the X-ray Tube-2 if the room has two tubes. 13. If everything is OK, it means that HV Transformer is OK and the problem could be in the - 546 -



ERROR LISTING



X-ray Tube or in the HV Cables. To know when the Tube begins to arc follow procedure in paragraph D. At any case, X-ray Tube must be replaced. 14. Set on the HT Controller Dip-switch SW2 position 4 in OFF and remove jumper between FIL (TP8) and + 5 V (TP2). D. X-RAY TUBE TEST After the performance of the above referred test everything is found OK, the Service Engineer may want to know the actual status of the tube. Perform the following procedure in order to determine the point in which the X-ray Tube begins to arc, it is strongly recommended to replace the tube as soon as possible to prevent potential damage to the Generator. 1. Select minimum kVp and minimum mA and 100 ms. 2. Make an exposure. 3. Increment kVp in 10 kVp steps, select same mA and time. Make an exposure. 



If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears follow procedure in step C.1 (HV Transformer Test).







If not, keep on incrementing the kVp in steps of 10 kVp (60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120 and 125 kVp for 125 kVp HV Transformers; and 130, 140, 150 kVp HV Transformers) making exposures at each kVp selected.




If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears at any kVp selected it means that the tube has dielectric problems above the selected kVp.








If “E09” or “Generator Overload” does not appear up to maximum kVp, it means that arcing may be due to mA or kW, follow procedure in step-4.



4. Select minimum kVp and minimum mA. Increment the mA one station and make an Exposure. Keep on incrementing the mA station (making exposures) until “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears. This will give an idea of the maximum mA allowed by the tube without arcing. If “E09” or “Generator Overload” does not appear follow step-5. 5. If the tube still does not arc, the problem is related to kW=KV*mA. Make selections on the Console at 100ms incrementing kVandmA. Apointwill be reached inwhich “E09” or “Generator Overload” will appear. This will give an idea on the approximate value of kVp and mA that can be handled by the X-ray Tube. Also, this value may change when the tube heats up. E. RANDOM “E09” OR “GENERATOR OVERLOAD” If everything is OK and random “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears, check: 1. That the signal IGBT FAULT on Pin 3 of P5 on the HT Controller Board is not low (logic 0) in stand-by and during the exposure. If there is noise, check loose connection between Pin 3 of P5 on HT Controller Board, and Pin 4 of J2 in both IPM Driver Boards 2. If IGBT FAULT is active during an exposure, try to isolate when it occurs. It may be due to noise coming from any device outside the Generator (Bucky, Fluoro devices, etc.). Or it may occur when selecting a high power Exposure and the voltage of the main line goes down more than 10%(in this case check the part number of the IPMDriverBoard, itmust beA3063-03 or greater). ERROR CODE:



E10



DESCRIPTION : EEPROM corrupted or not initialized on ATP Console CPU Board or on



- 547 -



ERROR LISTING



HT Controller Board. Wrong data calibration. ERROR TYPE : Fatal Error during power up (when EEPROM U3 on HT Controller Board is corrupted or not initialized).Informative error during power up (when EEPROM U18 on ATP Console Board is corrupted or not initialized or when EPROM U24 on ATP Console Board has been changed). In both cases, “E10” appears together with “E34” Error Code or “Technique Error” indication. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators. APPEARS WHEN : Only during initialization phase. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Generator does not continue with start up. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES EEPROM U3 on HT Controller Board corrupted or no initialized. EEPROM U18 on ATP Console Board corrupted or no initialized. EPROM U24 on ATP Console Board has been changed. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. If EPROM U24 in the ATP Console Board has been replaced, reset the Error Code to acknowledge that the NVRAM has been initialized. 2. If the error does not reset, turn the Generator OFF and set Dip-switch A3024SW2-3 in ON position to allow Service Mode. Turn the Generator ON and enter in workstations configuration and check as referred in Service Manual (do not forget to exit from Configuration mode to store the workstation configuration). 3. If the problem is still present, and “E10” error appears together with “E34” Error Code or “Technique Error” indication, replace ATP Console Board. 4. If the problem is still present and only “E10” error appears on the Console, replace HT Controller Board. ERROR CODE:



E11



DESCRIPTION : No voltage in the Capacitor Bank. ERROR TYPE : Informative. “Prep” is not allowed. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators APPEARS WHEN : Only during initialization phase or when pressing “PREP”. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : It was not possible to perform “Prep” or “Exp”. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES No voltage in the Capacitor Bank (5C1, 5C2, 5C3, 5C4) of the Generator Cabinet. Defective Charge/Discharge Monitor Board. Precharge K6 contactor located inside the Generator Cabinet is not energized. Main line fuses F3 and/or F4 are blown. “--CHRG” signal of Pin 7 on connector P1 on HT Controller Board is not present. Exposition parameters selected above IGBT maximum current (only software versions before V2.R06)



- 548 -



ERROR LISTING



Cables disconnected accidentally or damaged connectors. Test Switch SW1 of the Generator Cabinet is in “Test” position (only for Factory use). This is only applicable to old Generators. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS A. IF LED DS1 IN CHARGE/DISCHARGE MONITOR LIGHTS Check Capacitors Voltage, 



If it is OK, check that P1-7 on HT Controller is at logic level “0”. (0.75 V for Generators with 1 Charge/ Discharge Monitor Board and 1.5 V for Generators with 2 Charge/Discharge Monitor Boards).




If it is OK (logic level 0), replace HT Controller Board.








If it is not OK, check links between P1-7 on HT Controller Board and P1-2 in Charge/Discharge Monitor Board #1 and P1-1 in Charge/Discharge Monitor Board #1 and P1-2 in Charge/Discharge Monitor Board #2,











If it is OK, replace defective Charge/Discharge Monitor Board.







If it is not OK, repair connection.



If voltage in capacitors is not OK, check VAC on AC1, AC2 and AC3 at InputRectifier Board (for Battery Powered Generators check battery voltage).




If VAC is not OK, verify input connections and input fuses.








If VAC is OK, disconnect BUS+ and BUS-- at Input Rectifier Board and check VDC. 



If VDC is not OK, replace defective component (CR1, CR2, CR3) at Input Rectifier Board.







If VDC is OK, check and replace defective component at Generator Cabinet.



B. IF LED DS1 DOES NOT LIGHT AND IT IS NOT A BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR. 



Check input VAC on 6LF1,




If VAC is OK, replace a defective component at Input Rectifier Board (CR2, CR3 or CR1).








If VAC on 6LF1 is not OK, check that contactor 6K5 is ON. 



If 6K5 is ON, check VAC on T1,T2 and T3 (in 6K5).



-- If voltage is OK, replace defective 6R1. -- If voltage is not OK, replace the defective fuse (F3, F4 or F5). 



If Contactor 6K5 is not ON, check if signal +24VPSU is OK.




If it is not OK, check and/or replace 3F6 and 6T2.








If +24VPSU is OK, check that signal --LINE CONT is at 0 VDC, 



if --LINE CONT is OK, replace 6K5.







If --LINE CONT is not OK, check continuity in J3-10 at ATP Console Board. -- If --LINE CONT is OK at ATP Console Board, repair connection between J3-10 and “A” in 6K5.



- 549 -



ERROR LISTING



-- If --LINE CONT is not OK at ATP Console Board, replace ATP Console Board. ERROR CODE:



E12



DESCRIPTION : No mA during exposure or mA out of tolerance. Wrong filament current. ERROR TYPE : Informative. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators APPEARS WHEN : After exposition. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Error 12 appears after the Exposure to alert the operator that the mA at the start of the exposure has not been correct. During the first 10 ms the Generator applies constant filament current to the tube.This current is proportional to the current already calibrated for thatmA station at the kVp selected for that Exposure (filament numbers). Near the end of these 10ms, theHTController reads themA and if they are found to be 30% under or over what has been selected, it sends error 12 to the Console. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Calibration data for kVp and mA is not correct causing error E12. The mA jumper on the HV Transformer is open, or it is not making good contact. The mA read at the beginning of the exposure is 50% of the correct value (because one branch is open). There is a problem on the reading of the mA. No correct heating prior to the Exposure. The filament has not reached its correct temperature and the mA at the start of the exposure is low. It usually occurs when the “Prep” and “Exp” buttons are pressed down at the same time. Making an exposure immediately after getting out of calibration mode in extended memory. +5 VDC , +12 VDC or --12 VDC Power Supplies ofHT Control Board (mesured at TP2, TP3 and TP4 of this Board) have excesive ripple or VDC measured is not correct. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Connect a scope to the following Test Points on the HTControl Board and check that the voltage is correct, if not adjust it with the respective Potentiometer in the Power Supply Board (refer to Section 2.1 -- Low DC Voltage Power Supply Test): 



TP2 (+5 VDC) on HT Control Board is adjusted with R12 Pot. in the Power Supply Board.







TP3 (+12 VDC) on HT Control Board is adjusted with R26 Pot. in the Power Supply Board.







TP4 (--12 VDC) on HT Control Board is adjusted with R25 Pot. in the Power Supply Board.



2. Check calibration data for the mA Open Loop (filament numbers) as stated in the Service Manual for all combinations of kVp and mA when this error appears. With a scope connected to the Test Point TP5 (mA) on the HT Control Board check that the mA read is within the ratio of 1V=100 mA (±5%) for V2 and V3 software versions, for V4 and - 550 -



ERROR LISTING



up the ratio is 1V=10mA from minimum mA to 80 mA and 1V=100mA from 100 mA to the maximum rating. If it is not, the cause could be that the mA second test is not measuring correctly, or a wrong measurement performed in the Generator. (Refer to step 3). 3. Check that the jumper in the mA Test Point of the HV Transformer is correctly placed and secure. 4. With a scope check that during the entire Exposure signals on Test Points TP13 (--mA) andTP14 (+mA) on the HT Control Board connectors are symmetrical (±10%). If one is found missing or not symmetrical, measure on Pin 6 and 7 of J4 on the HT Control Board. If they are symmetrical on both Points, the problem could be on the HT Control Board. If they are not correct, check that the connections made on the HV Transformer in J1-E, D, K terminals for Compact Generators (in TB1, terminals 1, 4 and 5 for no Compact Generators) are correctly connected and secure. Also check that the GND wire is connected to GND stud. If connections are correct the problem is in the HV Transformer. 5. Connect a scope to Test Point TP5 (mA) on the HT Control Board. Check that when an exposure is made by pressing at the same time the “Prep” and “Exp” controls, the mA at the beginning of exposure is low. Check that when the exposure is made by pressing first the “Prep” control and then the “Exp” control, the mA at the beginning of exposure is correct. 6. For High Speed Generators: When performing the test for High Speed Generators check that the self-maintainingmode is not active. In order to check if the problem disappears, select the highest mA station for Small Focus and the lowest kVp allowed for this mA station (a.e. 40 kVp, 150 mA, SF). Make an Exposure by pressing at the same time the ”Prep” and “Exp” controls; check that the mA reading at the beginning of the Exposure is correct. Do the same for Large Focus (a.e. 50 kVp, 500mA, LF). If it is not correct, reprograma step over at the time for each case, and test again. ERROR CODE:



E13



DESCRIPTION : No kVp during exposure or kVp out of tolerance. ERROR TYPE : Informative. May abort exposition. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators APPEARS WHEN : During and after exposures. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : No kVp during exposure. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES This error assumes that the fault is not on the IGBT and is not due to arcing in the X-ray Tube. Defective HV Transformer. Defective HT Controller Board. Defective IPM Driver Boards. Poor connection on the IPM Driver Boards. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS



- 551 -



ERROR LISTING



1. Check 5 VDC between P1-4 and P1-3 (GND) in both IPM Driver Boards. 2. Check 115 VAC between Pins 1 and 2 of connector P2 on the same Boards. 3. If it is OK, check if the -kVp (TP12) and +kVp (TP 11) Test Points on the HT Controller Board are symmetrical. If they are not, check signals -- kV and + kV (in Compact Generators between P4-1 and J1-B at HV Transformer and also between P4-2 and J1-C at HV Transformer) (in no Compact Generators between P4-1 and TB1-3 at HV Transformer and also between P4-2 and TB1- 4at HV Transformer) if they are OK, replace the HV Transformer. 4. Check the connectors on the IPM Driver Boards. Check continuity in P3-1 (-kV DR1), P3-2 (--kVDR2) and those signals in IPMDriver Boards. Check with a scope in TP17 (1V=33.33kVp), if value is OK, replace HT Controller Board; if value is not OK, replace IPM Driver Boards. 5. If kVp value and time is OK and “E13” appears, check that for software version V3 and up the Dip-switches of A3024SW3 are all in OFF position at ATP Console Board. ERROR CODE:



E14



DESCRIPTION : Exposure signal without X-ray Exposure Console command. ERROR TYPE : Informative. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators APPEARS WHEN : During and after exposition. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Exposure signal without X-ray Exposure Console command. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES The “Exp” signal is grounding on the HT Controller Board. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Remove the connector J1 on HT Controller Board and check grounding of Pin 6 of P1. 2. If so, replace the HT Controller Board. 3. If it is not, remove the connector J3 on the Console, and check Pin 1 on connector J3 on the Generator Cabinet. 4. If GND, replace the communication cable J3; if not, replace the ATP Console Board. ERROR CODE:



E15



DESCRIPTION : No current on Filament. Wrong selection of Focal Spot detected during “Prep”. ERROR TYPE : Informative. Does not allow “Prep”. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators APPEARS WHEN : At any moment. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : No current detected on Focal Spot (Filaments Off). ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES A -- There is no power supplied to the Filament Board or poor connection on the Cathode HV Cable or defective Filament Transformer inside the HV Transformer or defective HV Switch inside the HV Transformer (if the system is equipped with two tubes)



- 552 -



ERROR LISTING



B -- Wrong signal --FIL1 ACK ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS A. THERE IS NOT SUPPLY IN FILAMENT BOARD, OR POOR CONNECTION ON THE CATHODE HV CABLE, OR DEFECTIVE FILAMENT TRANSFORMER, OR DEFECTIVE HV SWITCH. •



•



For Generators with two tubes:



•



-- if the error appears in both tubes, go to step 1.



•



-- if the error appears in only one tube, interchange HV Cables.



•



-- if error remains when selecting the same tube from Console,



replace HV •



Transformer, if does not appear go to step 8.



1. Check through the X-ray tube window to see if the selected filament is On. Check both circuits to detect which one is causing the error code. 2. If none lit when selected, check in the DC output on the BR1 rectifier (324 Dc approx.) or input voltage (220 VAC approx.). If input voltage is OK and output voltage is not OK, replace rectifier. If it is OK go to step 3. 3. Check if the Led’s DS1 and DS2 are lit ON in the Filament Board. If they are not, replace the Board. 4. If everything is OK, check DC voltage between P2-4 and P2-1 (324 DC approx.). If not enough voltage detected, review circuit between BR1 and T2 transformer. Replace Filament Board if defective. 5. If it is OK, check the AC voltage between Pin 4 on connector P3 (on Filament Board Fil. Sup.)and Pins 15 or 16 (depends on filament selection) on connector P4 on Interface Control Board. The range should be between 90 and 200 VAC. 6. If not, check the voltage on Pin 17 of connector P4 at Interface Control Board and Pin 4 of connector P3 at Filament Board, also Check P14 of connector P4. If no voltage present, replace the Interface Control Board. 7. If it is OK, check continuity between HV Transformer connector and Interface Board. 8. If it is OK, check continuity of HV Cable connector (between common C and S (Small Focus)and between common C and L (Large focus). The OHM value should be very low in both cases( 0.01 approx.) 9. If it is OK, replace the HV Transformer. If it is not OK, check all connections from HV Cable to the tube. Replace cable if necessary. 10. If HV Cable is OK, check tube filaments. Replace Tube if necessary. B. WRONG SIGNAL --FIL1 ACK Perform the following diagnosis if after pressing “Prep” the Error Code “E15” appears on the Console and after reseting it, the Console displays Error Code “E04”.



- 553 -



ERROR LISTING



•



•



1.FIL1 corresponds to the Focal Spot of Tube1.



•



2.When choosing FIL1 for RAD(Radioscopy) module tube, FIL1 SLC



is activated; for R&F(Radioscopy & Fluroscopy) module tube, FIL1 SLC is activated when choosing PREP. ERROR CODE:



E16



DESCRIPTION : Invalid value of : kVp, mA or kW. ERROR TYPE : Informative. Does not allow “Prep” or “Exp”. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators APPEARS WHEN : In “Prep” INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Selected mA or kVp are not correct. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Wrong maximum kVp configuration. Wrong software compatibility on the Generator Cabinet and Console.



- 554 -



ERROR LISTING



When pressing “Prep” during calibration of Open Loop mA with a technique that overpasses the Generator power kVp/mA. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check switch 5 of SW2 on HT Controller Board (125 kVp in open position and 150 kVp in closed position). 2. Check the software version on U5 of HT Controller Board and U24 of ATP Console Board. 3. Set calibration datamanually as per calibration procedure table “mAcalibration number change”at calibration section in this manual. ERROR CODE:



E17



DESCRIPTION : Communication error between ATP Console CPU Board and HT Controller Board. ERROR TYPE : Fatal Error. Generator opens line contactor that remains in a endless loop. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators APPEARS WHEN : Once initialization phase is over at any moment. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : No communication link between Console and Generator Cabinet. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Defective communication cable between Console and Generator Cabinet (J3). Noise on the bucky circuitry. Defective HT Controller Board or defective ATP Console Board. The “Prep” signal from Console to HT Controller is short--circuited to ground. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Turn Generator OFF/ON. 2. If E01 appears, follow procedure for E01. 3. If E01 does not appear, it is an intermittent error due an external device, install a R--C filter in the power supply and at bucky start circuitry. 4. If error persists, replace HT Controller or ATP Console Boards. ODE ERROR CODE:



E18



DESCRIPTION : Rotor running without order or Rotor error. ERROR TYPE : Fatal Error. Generator opens line contactor that remains in a endless loop. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators APPEARS WHEN : At any moment. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : The X-ray tube is not rotating while “Prep” is active, then the exposures are inhibited or the X-ray tube anode is rotating without Console command. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Defective relay K1 (solid State) on the low speed module. Signal –RTR on HT Controller Board is active.



- 555 -



ERROR LISTING



Defective HT Controller or Low Speed Control Boards. ± 12 VDC power supplies missing on HT Controller Board. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS In Stand-by: 1. Check if the signal RTR Test Point (TP6 on HT Controller ) is logic “0”. If yes, check if K1 works properly. 2. If it is OK, check if the ± 12 VDC power supplies are correct. 3. If it is OK, replace the H. T. Controller. 4. If not logic “0” check K1 at Low Speed Module. 5. If K1 defective, replace. In “Prep”: (Rotor error/E18). When Console has not “ Rotor Error” indication , E18 Appears. ERROR CODE:



E19



DESCRIPTION : mA detected without “Exp” command. ERROR TYPE : Fatal Error. Generator opens line contactor that remains in a endless loop. It is necessary to turn off the equipment. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators APPEARS WHEN : In stand-by or during initialization. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Current in tube without ”Prep” command. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES ± 12 VDC power supplies missing on the H. T. Controller Board. Defective H. T. Controller. mA signal on H T Controller is active. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check ± 12 VDC power supplies. 2. Check a logic level “0” in TP5.Check also a level logic “0” in TP13, TP14 connector P4-6 y P4-7. 3. If it is OK, replace the HT Controller or Filament Drive Boards one by one. ERROR CODE:



E20



DESCRIPTION : kVp detected without “Exp” command. ERROR TYPE : Fatal Error. Generator opens line contactor that remains in a endless loop. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators. APPEARS WHEN : In stand-by or during initialization. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : kVp detected without “Exp” command. When E20 appears on Console (E20) means that the error can not be solved without turning off the equipment. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES --12 VDC power supply missing.



- 556 -



ERROR LISTING



Defective HT Controller Board. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check --12 VDC power supply. 2. Check logic level “0” in TP7 and TP11, TP12, P4-1 and P4-2. 3. If it is OK, replace HT Controller Board. ERROR CODE:



E21



DESCRIPTION : Wrong Tube-1 selection. ERROR TYPE : Informative. Does not allow working unless the error is solved or other tube is selected. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators. APPEARS WHEN : At any moment mainly after initialization or when changing tube selection. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Wrong tube 1 selection. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES The –HT INTLK is not grounding (tube 1 selection). Defective HV Switch inside the HV Transformer (two tubes option). The --HT INTLK is missing. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS Only for one tube option (Compact Generators): 1. Check the –HT INTLK in 6J3-13 (Generator Cabinet), it should be “0” VDC on tube 1 selection. 2. If it is not OK, check Jumper between 6J3-13 and 6J3-16 (GND). 3. If 6J3-13 = 0, check 6J3--13 on ATP Console Board. 4. If not “0” in J3-13, check link betweenTB1-9 and J3-13, if voltage = “0” andE21 appears, replace ATP Console Board. ERROR CODE:



E23



DESCRIPTION : Calibration data not stored ERROR TYPE : Indicative although it is almost impossible to find if not provoked. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators. APPEARS WHEN : When trying to save a calibration data. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Calibration data not stored. Calibration value intended to be stored has not been properly recorded. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES This problem may be shown randomly. This problem is continuos or occurs frequently and the communication link between the Generator Cabinet and the Console is too noisy. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Store data again.



- 557 -



ERROR LISTING



2. Check communication cables. 3. Route communication cables in a different way. ERROR CODE:



E24



DESCRIPTION : The Bucky has not been detected to be moving. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposition. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators. APPEARS WHEN : At the beginning of exposition. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Wrong Exposure signal from Buckies. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Malfunction of the bucky. Wrong wiring of the bucky. Wrong bucky selection. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS



ERROR CODE:



E27



DESCRIPTION : Failure in Console EPROM. Bad checksum. ERROR TYPE : Fatal Error. Generator does not start. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators APPEARS WHEN : During Console initialization. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : The Console performs a checksum procedure of EPROM when it has been configured to a non-allowed calibration and it has found this value to be incorrect. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 558 -



ERROR LISTING



POSIBLE CAUSES The Console has been configured in a non communication mode. The non volatile RAM does not calculate and compare the Console checksum. The EPROM (U24) has been corrupted. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check if dip--switch SW2 on ATP Console is correctly configured per Service Manual. 2. If error remains, replace the non--volatile RAM (U23) on ATP Console. 3. If error remains, replace the EPROM (U24) on ATP Console. ERROR CODE:



E33



DESCRIPTION : No communication link between Generator and Serial Console or PC Unit. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with Serial Console. APPEARS WHEN : At any moment. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Serial Communication Error. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Connecting cable between Console and Generator is loosen or damaged. Damaged ATP Console CPU Board or Serial Console. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check connection cable between connector J7/J8 from ATP Console CPU Board to connector J5 of Compatibility Module (as per Generator model) and then check cable from J5 to Serial Console. 2. If error remains, check ATP Console CPU Board and Serial Console, replace defective part found. ERROR CODE:



E34 - TECHNIQUE ERROR



DESCRIPTION : Technique error. ERROR TYPE : Informative without acoustic alarm or Fatal after exposition. It does not allow exposition. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators. APPEARS WHEN : At any moment after parameter selection or after exposition. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Indicated with warning “Technique error” in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of Consoles E34 appears in display. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES The calibration for that parameters is wrong. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. If it occurs with time parameters close to 1mS, it means that the cable capacity is excessive for a short exposition. Also the calibration for that parameters is wrong. Check Service Manual



- 559 -



ERROR LISTING



Section: Exposure Time Adjustment. 2. If it happens at Fluoroscopy mode with ABC, it means that the equipment is not able to perform that operation. Perform Jumper W1 in Fluoro CPU. 3. If it happens after exposition, it means a failure in exposition timer and backup has been cut. Dangerous. Reset APR and reconfigure values. ERROR CODE:



E35 - DOOR OPEN



DESCRIPTION : Door Open. ERROR TYPE : Informative. It may inhibit Exposition depending on the configuration of SW1.2 at Console. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators. APPEARS WHEN : At any moment. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Indicated with warning “Door Open” in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of Consoles E35 appears in display. Does not allow “Prep” and “Exp”. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES 1) The door of the exam room is open or the cable is disconnected or not installed normally. 2) The generator tank is damaged ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Close the door. 2. If that is not the reason for the error, check Jumper TS1-22 & TS1-23. See Installation Manual Section: Door Interlock Signal. 3. Replace the generator tank. ERROR CODE:



E36 – HEAT UNITS



DESCRIPTION : Tube Overheating. ERROR TYPE : Informative without acoustic alarm. Does not allow expositions. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators. APPEARS WHEN : At any moment. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Indicated with warning “Heat Unit” in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of Consoles E36 appears in display. Does not allow “Prep” and “Exp”. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES The thermostat of the selected tube is opened due a housing overheating, the thermostat is disconnected, or the thermostat does not exist but the respective signal is not connected to ground. It also may appear during the calibration process due to the high number of starting. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check correct installation of signal Thermostat/Presostat. If tube has not this signal, perform



- 560 -



ERROR LISTING



a Jumper of the signal to ground. 2. Wait until temperature is lowered. ERROR CODE:



E37



DESCRIPTION : Tube Overload. ERROR TYPE : Informative without acoustic alarm. Does not allow Exposition. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators. APPEARS WHEN : After “Exp” due to Tube overheating. After changing radiographic parameters. In some Consoles this error may not appear as they are provide with an automatic blocking that disable parameters above tube capacity. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Indicated with warning “Tube Overload” in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of Consoles E37 appears in display. Exposures are not allowed. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES 1. Parameters selected for a new exposition are above tube capacity. (Heat Units or Rating). 2. Capacity Line frequency is wrong. (see SW1.1 at Console) or Tube selected in extended position E02 or E18 is not correct. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Wait for Tube to cool and Heat Units available increase or modify Exposition parameters. 2. If Heat Units of tube are 100% and E37 or “Tube Overload” warning appear: Check 3024SW1.1 on ATP Console. See Configuration Chapter in Service Manual and Test Switches or verify the X-Ray Type Selection: E02 for Tube 1 and E18 for Tube 2 in Configuration Chapter of Service Manual. ERROR CODE:



E50



DESCRIPTION : Interrupted Exposure. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators. APPEARS WHEN : When operator releases “EXP” button before exposure time has ended. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E50 appears on Console. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Operator releases “EXP” button before exposure time has ended. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Press the respective button on the Console to reset the Error indication. 2. Repeat the exposure. 3. If error remains, check Handswitch or “EXP” button and replace what is wrong. ERROR CODE:



E51



DESCRIPTION : Checksum failure or EPROM corrupted.



- 561 -



ERROR LISTING



ERROR TYPE : Indicative. System does not allow exposition. APPLICABLE TO : Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : After self-test. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : At power On, after the Generator autocheck, E51 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES DRAC program memory corrupted. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Replace U17 on Control DRAC Board. ERROR CODE:



E52



DESCRIPTION : Microcrontroller RAM failure. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Exposure is not allowed. APPLICABLE TO : Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC APPEARS WHEN : After self-test. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : At power On, after the Generator autocheck, E52 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES U17 on Control DRAC Board is defective. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS Replace U17 on Control DRAC Board. ERROR CODE:



E53



DESCRIPTION : Insufficient DC BUS voltage at low level voltage (220 VAC). ERROR TYPE : Indicative. System does not allow exposition. APPLICABLE TO : Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC APPEARS WHEN : INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E53 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Voltage between J2--1 and J2--2, on Control DRAC Board, is low or absent. Voltage at TP18 is < 1.1 VDC. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check VDC on J2-1 and J2-2 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB, it must be higher than 200 VDC. 2. If it is not OK, perform Error 11 checking. 3. If it is OK, check FILT 1, F3 and F4 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB. 4. If it is not OK, replace F3 or F4 or INTERFACE DRAC PCB. 5. If it is OK, Check VDC on J2-1 and J2-2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. 6. If it is not OK, replaceCable between J2 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB and J2



- 562 -



ERROR LISTING



CONTROLDRAC PCB. 7. If it is OK, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB. ERROR CODE:



E54



DESCRIPTION : Insufficient DC BUS voltage at high level voltage (480 VAC). ERROR TYPE : Indicative. System does not allow exposition. APPLICABLE TO : Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC APPEARS WHEN : INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E54 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Voltage between J2--1 and J2--2, on Control DRAC Board, is low (out of range). Voltage at TP18 is < 2.48 VDC. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check VDC on J2-1 and J2-2 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB, it must be higher than 447 VDC. 2. If it is not OK, perform Error 11 checking. 3. If it is OK, check FILT 1, F3 and F4 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB. 4. If it is not OK, replace F3 or F4 or INTERFACE DRAC PCB. 5. If it is OK, Check VDC on J2-1 and J2-2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. 6. If it is not OK, replaceCable between J2 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB and J2 CONTROLDRAC PCB. ERROR CODE:



E55



DESCRIPTION : Excessive DC BUS voltage at 480 or 380 VAC. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. System does not allow exposition. APPLICABLE TO : Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC APPEARS WHEN : INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E55 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Voltage between J2--1 and J2--2, on Control DRAC Board, is high (out of range). Voltage at TP18 is > 4.92 VDC. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check the input voltage to the Generator at TS2--20, TS2--21 and TS2--22, it must be according to specifications max. 480 VAC + 10%. If it is not OK, check Input Power Line. 2. If Power Input is OK, check the DC Voltage between J2--1 and J2-2 on ContROL DRAC PCB, it should be less than 890 VDC. 3. If Voltage is < 890 VDC replace CONTROL DRAC PCB. 4. If voltage is > 890 VDC, switchOFF and disconnect J2--1 and J2-2 on ContROL DRAC . Switch oN and measure voltage in DC BUS +/--. 5. If not OK, check Power Module and FILT1 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB. Replace defective part. (Power Module or FILT1 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB).



- 563 -



ERROR LISTING



ERROR CODE:



E56



DESCRIPTION : Excessive reference voltage. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E56 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive reference voltage. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check voltage at TP15, it must be 0V. 2. If not 0V, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB. ERROR CODE:



E58



DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in the main winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at Low Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During acceleration of the anode at low speed, E58 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in the main winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB. 3. Check Stator TubeWinding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 4. Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. 5. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary). 6. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse •



In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the



Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.



- 564 -



ERROR LISTING







In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



7. Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a.



If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube.



b.



If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator.



c.



If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable.



d.



If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”.



e.



If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer.



f.



If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



ERROR CODE:



E59



DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in the auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at Low Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During acceleration of the anode at low speed, E59 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in the auxiliary winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to TubeFamily Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB. 3. Check Stator TubeWinding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 4. Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. 5. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary). 6. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse •



In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope



and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.



- 565 -



ERROR LISTING







In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



7. Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube. b. If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator. c. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable. d. If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”. e. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer. f. If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB. ERROR CODE:



E60



DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at Low Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During acceleration of the anode at low speed, E60 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check Stator TubeWinding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 3. Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2. 4. Check Winding impedance in transformers (auxiliary). 5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse •



In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope



and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as thesePoints are High Voltage with respect to Ground. 



In the same PCB measure PTR1-2, 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse. If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



- 566 -



ERROR LISTING



ERROR CODE:



E61



DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in the main winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at Low Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During acceleration of the anode at low speed, E61 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in the main winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check Stator TubeWinding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 3. Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2. 4. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main). 5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse •



In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the



Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground. 



In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



ERROR CODE:



E62



DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in the main winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at High Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During acceleration of the anode at low speed, E62 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in the main winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS



- 567 -



ERROR LISTING



1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB. 3. Check Stator TubeWinding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 4. Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. 5. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary). 6. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse •



In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope



and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground. 



In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



7. Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a)



If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube.



b)



If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator.



c)



If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable.



d)



If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”.



e)



If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer.



f)



If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



ERROR CODE:



E63



DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in the auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at High Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During acceleration of the anode at high speed, E63 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in the auxiliary winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to



- 568 -



ERROR LISTING



Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB. 3. Check Stator TubeWinding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 4. Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. 5. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary). 6. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse •



In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope



and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground 



In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



7. Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a)



If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube.



b)



If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator.



c)



If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable.



d)



If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”.



e)



If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer.



f)



If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



ERROR CODE:



E64



DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at High Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During acceleration of the anode at high speed, E64 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.



- 569 -



ERROR LISTING



2. Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 3. Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2. 4. Check Winding impedance in transformers (auxiliary). 5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse •



In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope



and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground. 



In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



ERROR CODE:



E65



DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in the main winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at High Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During acceleration of the anode at high speed, E65 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check Stator TubeWinding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 3. Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2. 4. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main). 5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse •



In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the



Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.



- 570 -



ERROR LISTING







In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



ERROR CODE:



E66



DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in the main winding running at 3300 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at Low Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During running of the anode at low speed, E66 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in the main winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB. 3. Check Stator TubeWinding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 4. Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. 5. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary). 6. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse •



In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope



and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground. 



In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



7. Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a)



If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube.



b)



If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator.



c)



If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable.



d)



If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”.



e)



If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer.



f)



If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



- 571 -



ERROR LISTING



ERROR CODE:



E67



DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in the auxiliary winding running at 3300 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at Low Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During running of the anode at low speed, E67 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in the auxiliary winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB. 3. Check Stator TubeWinding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 4. Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. 5. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary). 6. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.







In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



7. Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube. b. If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator. c. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable. d. If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”. e. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer. f. If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB. ERROR CODE:



E68



- 572 -



ERROR LISTING



DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding running at 3300 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at High Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During running of the anode at low speed, E68 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check Stator TubeWinding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 3. Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2. 4. Check Winding impedance in transformers (auxiliary). 5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between:



P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground. 



In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



ERROR CODE:



E69



DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in the main winding running at 3300 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at High Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During running of the anode at low speed, E69 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in the main winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.



- 573 -



ERROR LISTING



2. Check Stator TubeWinding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 3. Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2. 4. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main). 5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.







In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



ERROR CODE:



E70



DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in the main winding running at 10000 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at High Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During running of the anode at high speed, E70 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in the main winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB. 3. Check Stator TubeWinding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 4. Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. 5. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary). 6. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and



- 574 -



ERROR LISTING



the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground. 



In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



7. Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube. b. If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator. c. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable. d. If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”. e. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer. f. If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB. ERROR CODE:



E71



DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in the auxiliary winding running at 10000 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at High Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During running of the anode at high speed, E71 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in the auxiliary winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB. 3. Check Stator TubeWinding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 4. Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. 5. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary). 6. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between:



P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control



- 575 -



ERROR LISTING



DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground. 



In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



7. Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube. b. If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator. c. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable. d. If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”. e. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer. f. If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB. ERROR CODE:



E72



DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding running at 10000 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at High Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During running of the anode at high speed, E72 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check Stator TubeWinding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 3. Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2. 4. Check Winding impedance in transformers (auxiliary). 5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between:



P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground. 



In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If



- 576 -



ERROR LISTING



any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB. ERROR CODE:



E73



DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in the main winding running at 10000 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at High Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During running of the anode at high speed, E73 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in the main winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check Stator TubeWinding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 3. Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2. 4. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main). 5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between:



P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground. 



In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



ERROR CODE:



E74



DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in the main winding braking at 3300 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at Low Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During braking operation of the anode at low speed, E74 is displayed. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in the main winding is detected. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



- 577 -



ERROR LISTING



ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB. 3. Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 4. Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. If winding in TS2 is not OK, replace TS2. 5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.







In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



6. Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube. b. If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator. c. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable. d. If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”. e. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer. f. If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB. ERROR CODE:



E75



DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in the auxiliary winding braking at 3300 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at Low Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During braking operation of the anode at low speed, E75 is displayed. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in the auxiliary winding is detected. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



- 578 -



ERROR LISTING



ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB. 3. Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 4. Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. If winding in TS2 is not OK, replace TS2. 5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.







In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



6. Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube. b. If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator. c. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable. d. If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”. e. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer. f. If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB. ERROR CODE:



E76



DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding braking at 3300 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at Low Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During braking operation of the anode at low speed, E76 is displayed. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to



- 579 -



ERROR LISTING



Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 3. Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2. 4. Check Winding impedance in transformers (auxiliary). 5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.







In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



ERROR CODE:



E77



DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in the main winding braking at 3300 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at Low Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During braking operation of the anode at low speed, E77 is displayed. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in the main winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 3. Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2. 4. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main). 5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.



- 580 -



ERROR LISTING







In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



ERROR CODE:



E78



DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in the main winding braking at 10000 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at High Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During braking operation of the anode at high speed, E78 is displayed. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in the main winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB. 3. Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 4. Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. If winding in TS2 is not OK, replace TS2. 5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between:



P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground. 



In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



6. Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube. b. If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator. c. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable. d. If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of



- 581 -



ERROR LISTING



Control DRAC and Press “PREP”. e. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer. f. If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB. ERROR CODE:



E79



DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in the auxiliary winding braking at 10000 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at Low Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During braking operation of the anode at high speed, E79 is displayed. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in the auxiliary winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB. 3. Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 4. Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. If winding in TS2 is not OK, replace TS2. 5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.







In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



6. Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube. b. If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator. c. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable. d. If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”.



- 582 -



ERROR LISTING



e. If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer. f. If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB. ERROR CODE:



E80



DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding braking at 10000 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at Low Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During braking operation of the anode at high speed, E80 is displayed. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 3. Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2. 4. Check Winding impedance in transformers (auxiliary). 5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.







In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



ERROR CODE:



E81



DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in the main winding braking at 10000 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at high Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During braking operation of the anode at high peed, E81 is displayed. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in the main winding is detected.



- 583 -



ERROR LISTING



---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 3. Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2. 4. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main). 5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.







In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



ERROR CODE:



E83



DESCRIPTION : Excessive current in DC Brake. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During Anode braking in DC voltage. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : During braking operation of the anode with DC voltage, E83 is displayed. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in the main or auxiliary winding is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 on INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB. 3. Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 4. Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. If winding in TS2 is not OK, replace TS2. ERROR CODE:



E87



DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in common wire during acceleration up to 3300 RPM.



- 584 -



ERROR LISTING



ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During acceleration of Anode at Low Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E87 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in common wire is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check Stator TubeWinding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 3. Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2. 4. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary). 5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.







In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



ERROR CODE:



E88



DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in common wire running at 3300 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : Running the Anode at Low Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E88 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in common wire is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check Stator TubeWinding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 3. Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2. 4. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary).



- 585 -



ERROR LISTING



5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between:



P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground. 



In the same PCB measure PTR1-2, 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



ERROR CODE:



E89



DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in common wire during acceleration up to 10000 RPM. ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : During acceleration of the Anode at High Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E89 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in common wire is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check Stator TubeWinding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 3. Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2. 4. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary). 5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.







In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



ERROR CODE:



E90



DESCRIPTION : Insufficient current in common wire running at 10000 RPM.



- 586 -



ERROR LISTING



ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : Running the Anode at High Speed. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E90 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in common wire is detected. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 on ContROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation. 2. Check Stator TubeWinding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications. 3. Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2. 4. Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary). 5. Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: 



Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2--1 and J2--2 at Control DRAC as these Points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.







In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.



ERROR CODE:



E91



DESCRIPTION : Incorrect signal measure in IPRINC (CH2). ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : In Stand-by situation. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E91 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES The system is detecting current through main wire and it should be zero. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check the voltage at TP1 and TP17 on Control DRAC Board. It should be 0V. ERROR CODE:



E92



DESCRIPTION : Incorrect signal measure in IAUX (CH3). ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures.



- 587 -



ERROR LISTING



APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : In Stand-by situation. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E92 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES The system is detecting current through auxiliary wire and it should be zero. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check the voltage at TP3 and TP16 on Control DRAC Board. It should be 0V. ERROR CODE:



E93



DESCRIPTION : Incorrect signal measure in ICOM (CH4). ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposures. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC. APPEARS WHEN : In Stand-by. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E93 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES The system is detecting current through main wire and it should be zero. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Check the voltage at TP1, TP3 and TP36 on Control DRAC Board. It should be 0V. ERROR CODE:



E98



DESCRIPTION : Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 on ATP Console Board set for Configuration and Calibration Mode Active. ERROR TYPE : Informative. It allows normal operation. APPLICABLE TO : All Generators. APPEARS WHEN : After turning on the Control Console. INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : E98 appears at console display. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POSIBLE CAUSES Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 on ATP Console Board set in “ON” position. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIONS 1. Reset the error condition by pressing the respective button on the Console. Keep in mind that this error will appear each time theGenerator is turnedOFF/ON during service procedures (configuration, calibration, etc.) whenever Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 on ATP Console Board is in “ON” (closed) position (for service mode allowed). 2. When servicing is finished and the Generator is ready for normal operation, turn the Generator OFF and set Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 on ATP Console Board in “OFF” (open) position (operation mode).



- 588 -



ERROR LISTING



12.5 Software Prompts 12.5.1Control Console Software Prompts Control console software prompts are listed in the table below, error description will be displayed on the screen of the image acquisition station: Error



Description



Solution



The flat-panel



During the startup process, error



Power off the flat-panel detector



detector



occurs when reading calibration



and restart it.Press “ALT+F4” or



files and it stops on the startup



“ESC” to enter the program;



screen



restart the computer and detector



Fail in displaying the start-up



Re-install the software without



program during start-up. After



unloading



entering the software, the process



Press “ALT+F4” if startup image



can not be restarted via the



remains and the control console



process manager.



software cannot be accessed.



Configuration



The startup process is normal, but



Recover configuration file.If the



file error



it fails to jump to some pages



software has no response, press



during operation



“ALT+TAB”. If the error persists



fails



to start up Process failure



after



the



recovery,



previous



one.



unload



and



re-install it. Database



file



damage



Input correct user name and



Re-start the computer. Press F8



password, notifying that the user



during the start-up of Windows to



is inexistent.



enter the SAFE mode. Then replace the current database file with the backup database file.



Motion control



The



communication



with



the



function



system



cabinet



is



cabinet (after fully powerdown),



unavailable



interrupted;



network



close down the motion control



connection with IPC is shown as



software to access the system



disconnected



desktop. Unplug and plug the



control the



Re-start



the



system



control



system control cabinet net line.



12.5.2Motion Control Software Prompts During normal operation, the touch screen will display prompt information. In case of system failure, please first check the prompt information on the touch screen, and then take corresponding actions as follows:



No. IPC101



Prompt message X-ray tube reaches the maximum height



Action Prompt message



- 589 -



ERROR LISTING



IPC102 IPC103 IPC104



X-ray tube reaches the minimum height X-ray tube reaches the maximum angle X-ray tube reaches the minimum angle



Prompt message Prompt message Prompt message



Maximum distance between IPC105



X-ray tube and stand



Prompt message



column Minimum distance between IPC106



X-ray tube and stand



Prompt message



column IPC107 IPC108 IPC109 IPC110



IPC201



IPC202



IPC203



IPC204



IPC205



IPC206



IPC207 IPC208 IPC209



Reach maximum detector height Reach minimum detector height Reach maximum detector height Reach minimum detector angle X-ray tube reaches the upper limit height X-ray tube reaches the lower limit height X-ray tube reaches the upper limit angle X-ray tube reaches the lower limit angle



Prompt message Prompt message Prompt message Prompt message Height re-calibration for X-ray tube is needed. If the error persists, inform the maintainer. Height re-calibration for X-ray tube is needed. If the error persists, inform the maintainer. Angle re-calibration for X-ray tube is needed. If the error persists, inform the maintainer. Angle re-calibration for X-ray tube is needed. If the error persists, inform the maintainer.



Upper limit distance



Distance re-calibration between X-ray tube



between X-ray tube and



and stand column is needed. If the error



stand column



persists, inform the maintainer.



Lower limit distance



Distance re-calibration between X-ray tube



between X-ray tube and



and stand column is needed. If the error



stand column



persists, inform the maintainer.



Reach upper limit detector



Detector height re-calibration is needed. If



height



the error persists, inform the maintainer.



Reach lower limit detector



Detector height re-calibration is needed. If



height



the error persists, inform the maintainer.



Reach upper limit detector



Detector angle re-calibration is needed. If



angle



the error persists, inform the maintainer. - 590 -



ERROR LISTING



IPC210 IPC1001 IPC1002



Reach lower limit detector



Detector angle re-calibration is needed. If



angle



the error persists, inform the maintainer.



Error: Steel wire is



Shut down the system and inform the



abnormal



maintainer



Reach suspending position



Prompt message



Warning: System stopped IPC1003



moving, please release the emergency OFF switch at the X-ray tube Warning: System stopped



IPC1004



moving, please release the emergency OFF switch at the detector



IPC1005



Reach ikey-specified position Warning: System stopped



IPC1006



moving, please release the emergency OFF switch at the stand column



IPC1007



IPC1008



IPC2408



Warning: abnormal X-ray tube movement Reach the designated position Some key is pressed during startup.



Release the X-ray tube emergency OFF switch. If the error persists, inform the maintainer. Release the emergency OFF switch at the detector. If the error persists, inform the maintainer. Prompt message Release the emergency OFF switch at the stand column. If the error persists, inform the maintainer. Check if there is any obstruction when the handpiece moves upward and downward. If the error persists, inform the maintainer. Prompt message Check if any key is pressed or does not upspring. If the error persists, inform the maintainer.



IPC1201



Reach suspending position



Prompt message



IPC1202



Reach suspending position



Prompt message



IPC1203



Reach suspending position



Prompt message



IPC1204



Reach suspending position



Prompt message



IPC1205



Reach suspending position



Prompt message



Severe error: reading



Restart the system. If the error persists,



configuration file failure



inform the maintainer.



Severe error: CAN



Restart the system. If the error persists,



initialization failure



inform the maintainer.



IPC901 IPC902



Severe error: CAN IPC800



handshaking failure – stand



Restart the system. If the error persists,



column signal acquisition



inform the maintainer.



board Severe error: CAN IPC801



handshaking failure –



Restart the system. If the error persists,



traveling carriage signal



inform the maintainer.



acquisition board - 591 -



ERROR LISTING



Severe error: CAN IPC802



handshaking failure – device interface board



Restart the system. If the error persists, inform the maintainer.



Severe error: CAN IPC803



handshaking failure –



Restart the system. If the error persists,



man-machine interface



inform the maintainer.



board Severe error: CAN IPC804



handshaking failure – all boards



IPC805



Restart the system. If the error persists, inform the maintainer.



Severe error: illegal



Restart the system. If the error persists,



calibration data



inform the maintainer.



Severe error: Launching IPC806



control console



Restart the system. If the error persists,



communication service



inform the maintainer.



failure IPC807



Note: updating…。



Prompt message



IPC601



Reach minimum SID



Prompt message



IPC602



Reach maximum SID



Prompt message



Too close between the IPC603



detector and the telescopic trunk Too close between the



IPC604



X-ray tube and the stand column



IPC605



IPC402 IPC403 IPC404 IPC405 IPC406 IPC407



Prompt message. Be cautious that no collision occurs during the movement. Prompt message. Be cautious that no



too low



collision occurs during the movement.



stopped, please remove the objects on the detector surface



IPC401



collision occurs during the movement.



The height of the detector is Warning: system moving



IPC606



Prompt message. Be cautious that no



Check if there is any object blocking the photoelectric switch on the detector surface. If the error persists, inform the maintainer.



Too close among



Prompt message. Be cautious that no



assemblies or to the floor



collision occurs during the movement.



Too close among



Prompt message. Be cautious that no



assemblies or to the floor



collision occurs during the movement.



Too close among



Prompt message. Be cautious that no



assemblies or to the floor



collision occurs during the movement.



Too close among



Prompt message. Be cautious that no



assemblies or to the floor



collision occurs during the movement.



Too close among



Prompt message. Be cautious that no



assemblies or to the floor



collision occurs during the movement.



Too close among



Prompt message. Be cautious that no



assemblies or to the floor



collision occurs during the movement.



Too close among



Prompt message. Be cautious that no - 592 -



ERROR LISTING



IPC408 IPC409 IPC410



IPC701



IPC702



IPC703



IPC704



assemblies or to the floor



collision occurs during the movement.



Too close among



Prompt message. Be cautious that no



assemblies or to the floor



collision occurs during the movement.



Too close among



Prompt message. Be cautious that no



assemblies or to the floor



collision occurs during the movement.



Too close among



Prompt message. Be cautious that no



assemblies or to the floor



collision occurs during the movement.



This action requires X-ray



Move it until the indicated level angel and



tube in horizontal 0 degree



the icon of AB position corresponds to the



and in A position. Please



prompt position. If the error persists, inform



move in place first.



the maintainer.



This action requires X-ray



Move it until the indicated level angel and



tube in horizontal 90 degree



the icon of AB position corresponds to the



and in B position. Please



prompt position. If the error persists, inform



move in place first.



the maintainer.



This action requires X-ray



Move it until the indicated level angel and



tube in horizontal 0 degree



the icon of AB position corresponds to the



and in B position. Please



prompt position. If the error persists, inform



move in place first.



the maintainer.



This action requires X-ray



Move it until the indicated level angel and



tube in horizontal 90 degree



the icon of AB position corresponds to the



and in A position. Please



prompt position. If the error persists, inform



move in place first.



the maintainer.



Movement prohibited, IPC1503



abnormal detector angle potentiometer, type: 1 Movement prohibited,



IPC1504



abnormal detector height potentiometer, type: 1 Movement prohibited,



IPC1505



abnormal rail fore/aft potentiometer, type: 1 Movement prohibited,



IPC1506



abnormal X-ray vertical angle potentiometer, type: 1 Movement prohibited,



IPC1507



abnormal X-ray tube height potentiometer, type: 1 Movement prohibited,



IPC1511



abnormal detector angle potentiometer, type: 2 Movement prohibited,



IPC1512



abnormal detector height potentiometer, type: 2



Restart the system. If the error persists, inform the maintainer. Restart the system. If the error persists, inform the maintainer. Restart the system. If the error persists, inform the maintainer. Restart the system. If the error persists, inform the maintainer. Restart the system. If the error persists, inform the maintainer. Restart the system. If the error persists, inform the maintainer. Restart the system. If the error persists, inform the maintainer.



- 593 -



ERROR LISTING



Movement prohibited, IPC1513



Restart the system. If the error persists,



abnormal rail fore/aft



inform the maintainer.



potentiometer, type: 2 Movement prohibited, IPC1514



Restart the system. If the error persists,



abnormal X-ray vertical angle potentiometer, type: 2 Movement prohibited,



IPC1515



abnormal X-ray tube height potentiometer, type: 2 Movement prohibited,



IPC521



abnormal X-ray tube height potentiometer, type: 3 Movement prohibited,



IPC522



angle potentiometer, type: 3 Movement prohibited,



Movement prohibited, abnormal detector height potentiometer, type: 3 Movement prohibited, abnormal detector angle potentiometer, type: 3



Restart the system. If the error persists, inform the maintainer.



inform the maintainer.



inform the maintainer.



potentiometer, type: 3



IPC525



inform the maintainer.



Restart the system. If the error persists,



abnormal rail fore/aft



IPC524



Restart the system. If the error persists,



Restart the system. If the error persists,



abnormal X-ray vertical



IPC523



inform the maintainer.



Restart the system. If the error persists, inform the maintainer. Restart the system. If the error persists, inform the maintainer.



12.5.2.1 Error description: “Severe error": CAN bus failure, error code: 1" Error type: Severe error Possible reason: 1. Abnormal power supply at the signal acquisition board of stand column 2. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of stand column 3. CAN bus connected to the signal acquisition board of stand column is disconnected Solutions: 1. Check the direct current power supply at the signal acquisition board of stand column:



Use



a



multimeter



or



check



if



the



indicator



light



(D30,D31,D32,D33,D34) on the signal acquisition board is on; If the power supply is abnormal, conduct power error diagnosis and correct the error. If the power supply is normal, proceed to step 2; 2. Check the connection between IPC and the CAN bus on the signal acquisition board of stand column: If the wire is misconnected or disconnected, unplug and plug the wire again; If the CAN bus connection is normal, carry out step 3; 3. Check whether the indicator lights of D14 and D35 on the signal acquisition board of stand column flicker. If not, replace the signal acquisition board of - 594 -



ERROR LISTING



stand column.



12.5.2.2 Error description: “Severe error": CAN bus failure, error code: 2" Error type: Severe error Possible reason: 1. Abnormal power supply at the signal acquisition board of traveling carriage 2. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of traveling carriage 3. CAN bus connected to the signal acquisition board of traveling carriage is disconnected Solutions: 1. Check the direct current power supply at the signal acquisition board of traveling carriage: Use a multimeter or check if the indicator light (D6,D7,D8,D9) on the signal acquisition board of traveling carriage is on; If the power supply is abnormal, conduct power error diagnosis and correct the error. If the power supply is normal, proceed to step 2; 2. Check the connection between IPC and the CAN bus on the signal acquisition board of traveling carriage: If the wire is misconnected or disconnected, unplug and plug the wire again; If the CAN bus connection is normal, carry out step 3; 3. Check whether the indicator lights of D28 and D29 on the signal acquisition board of traveling carriage flicker. If not, replace the signal acquisition board of traveling carriage.



12.5.2.3 Error description: “Severe error": CAN bus failure, error code: 3" Error type: Severe error Possible reason: 1. The device interface board is under abnormal condition 2. Hardware device error or software failure in the device interface board 3. CAN bus connected to the device interface board is disconnected Solutions: 1. Check the direct-current power supply at the device interface board: Use a multimeter or check if the indicator light (D73,D75,D76,D77) on the device interface board is on; If the power supply is abnormal, conduct power error diagnosis and correct the error. If the power supply is normal, proceed to step 2; 2. Check the connection between IPC and the CAN bus on the device interface board: If the wire is misconnected or disconnected, unplug and plug the wire again; If the CAN bus connection is normal, carry out step 3; 3. Check the indicator light D58 and D61 on the device interface board. If they do not flicker, replace the device interface board.



12.5.2.4 Error description: “Severe error": CAN bus failure, error code: 4" Error type: Severe error Possible reason: 1. Power supply at the human-machine interface board is abnormal 2. Hardware device error or software failure in the human-machine interface



- 595 -



ERROR LISTING



board 3. CAN bus connected to the human-machine interface board is disconnected Solutions: 1. Check the direct current power supply at the human-machine interface board: Use a multimeter or check if the indicator light (D1,D4,D5,D7) on human-machine interface board is on; If the power supply is abnormal, conduct power error diagnosis and correct the error. If the power supply is normal, proceed to step 2; 2. Check the connection between IPC and the CAN bus on the human-machine interface board: If the wire is misconnected or disconnected, unplug and plug the wire again; If the CAN bus connection is normal, carry out step 3; 3. Check the indicator light D9 and D11 on the human-machine interface board. If they do not flicker, replace the human-machine interface board.



12.5.2.5 Error description: “Severe error": CAN bus failure, error code: 5" Error type: Severe error Possible reason: 1. CAN bus connected to the IPC is disconnected or damaged Solutions: 1.



Check if the wire connected to the IPC CAN interface board is loosen or damaged, unplug and plug the wire again or replace the wire.



12.5.2.6 Error description: “Severe error: illegal calibration data" Error type: Severe error Possible reason: 1. Calibration data error or calibration failure Solutions: 1. Inform the maintainer to re-calibrate.



12.5.2.7 Error description: “Severe error: control console connecting failure" Error type: Severe error Possible reason: 1. Network wire error, incorrect connection mode 2. DROC does not run or network communication is not enabled. Solutions: 1. Examine if the network wire connection is normal by checking if IPC can exchange data with PC 2. Run DROC and configure its connection with IPC



12.5.2.8 Error description: “Severe error: CAN initialization failure" Error type: Severe error Possible reason: 1. CAN interface card is loosen 2. Driver program uninstalled or failure 3. CAN interface card is damaged - 596 -



ERROR LISTING



Solutions: 1. Check if the CAN card is tightly inserted, unplug and plug it again if necessary. 2. Restart the CAN card installation driver program 3. Replace the CAN interface card



12.5.2.9 Error description: “Severe error: reading configuration file failure" Error type: Severe error Possible reason: 1. Lack configuration file or the format of configuration file is incorrect Solutions: 1. Re-install the application program



12.5.2.10 Error description: “Warning: system moving stopped, please release the emergency OFF switch at the X-ray tube” Error type: warning information Possible reason: 1. The emergency OFF switch at the handpiece is pressed 2. The wire that connects the human-machine interface board and the tube top emergency OFF switch is disconnected or damaged 3. The emergency OFF switch at the handpiece is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure in the human-machine interface board Solutions: 1. Check if the emergency OFF switch is pressed, if yes, release it. If no, proceed to step 2; 2. Open the tube cover, check if the wire that connects the human-machine interface board and the emergency OFF switch is disconnected or damaged. If the connection is abnormal, unplug and plug the wire or replace the wire; if the connection is normal, proceed to step 3; 3. Check the D15 indicator light on the human-machine interface board. If the D15 indicator light is always on no matter the emergency OFF switch is pressed or released, the emergency OFF switch is damaged, so replace the emergency OFF switch. If the D15 indicator light is on when the emergency OFF switch is pressed, and it turns off still with warning message when the emergency OFF switch is released, the error is in the human-machine interface board, so replace the human-machine interface board.



12.5.2.11 Error description: “Warning: system moving stopped, please release the emergency OFF switch at the detector” Error type: warning information Possible reason: 1. The flat-panel emergency OFF switch is pressed 2. The wire that connects the signal acquisition board of stand column and the flat-panel emergency OFF switch is disconnected or damaged 3. The flat-panel emergency OFF switch is damaged



- 597 -



ERROR LISTING



4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of stand column Solutions: 1. Check if the emergency OFF switch is pressed, if yes, release it. If no, proceed to step 2; 2. Open the cover of flat-panel detector (FPD), check if the wire that connects the signal acquisition board of stand column and the emergency OFF switch is disconnected or damaged. If the connection is abnormal, unplug and plug the wire or replace the wire; if the connection is normal, proceed to step 3; 3. Check the D15 indicator light on the signal acquisition board of stand column. If the D15 indicator light is always off no matter the emergency OFF switch is pressed or released, the emergency OFF switch is damaged, so replace the emergency OFF switch. If the D15 indicator light is off when the emergency OFF switch is pressed, and it turns on still with warning message when the emergency OFF switch is released, the error is in the signal acquisition board, so replace the signal acquisition board.



12.5.2.12 Error description: “Warning: system moving stopped, please release the emergency OFF switch at the stand column” Error type: warning information Possible reason: 1. The stand column emergency OFF switch is pressed 2. The wire that connects the signal acquisition board of stand column and the stand column emergency OFF switch is disconnected or damaged 3. The stand column emergency OFF switch is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of stand column Solutions: 1. Check if the emergency OFF switch is pressed, if yes, release it. If no, proceed to step 2; 2. Open the front cover of motion signal acquisition box, check if the wire that connects the stand column signal acquisition board and the emergency OFF switch is disconnected or damaged. If the connection is abnormal, unplug and plug the wire or replace the wire; if the connection is normal, proceed to step 3; 3. Check the D43 indicator light on the signal acquisition board of stand column. If the D15 indicator light is always off no matter the emergency OFF switch is pressed or released, the emergency OFF switch is damaged, so replace the emergency OFF switch. If the D15 indicator light is off when the emergency OFF switch is pressed, and it turns on still with warning message when the emergency OFF switch is released, the error is in the signal acquisition board, so replace the signal acquisition board.



12.5.2.13 Error description: “Warning: system moving stopped, please remove the objects on the detector surface” Error type: warning information



- 598 -



ERROR LISTING



Possible reason: 1. Fiber sensor is blocked by objects 2. Fiber sensor is damaged 3. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of stand column Solutions: 1. Check if the detector surface is blocked by objects; if yes, remove the objects; if no, proceed to step 2; 2. Open the front cover of motion signal acquisition box, unplug the wire that connects P2 socket of stand column signal acquisition board. If the warning information persists, it indicates that the stand column signal acquisition board fails, and so replace the signal acquisition board; if the warning information disappers, re-connect the wire to P2 socket and proceed to step 3; 3. Open the cover of FPD, check the fiber sensor and block the sensor receiver with objects; if no digit change occurs in the sensor display, it indicates that the sensor is not calibrated or damaged; re-calibrate or replace the sensor.



12.5.2.14



Error description: “Maximum value of X-ray tube height ”



Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. The MAX tube height travel switch is triggered 2. The wire that connects the traveling carriage signal acquisition board and the MAX tube height travel switch is disconnected or damaged 3. The travel switch is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of traveling carriage Solutions: 1. Check the wire that connects the traveling carriage signal acquisition board and the travel switch: If the wire is disconnected or damaged, unplug and plug the wire again or replace the wire; If the wire connection is normal, carry out step 2; 2. Check if the MAX Arm height travel switch is triggered. If yes, lock the switch. 3. Using a multimeter, test if there is short circuit at two ends of the wire that connects to the travel switch. If no, the travel switch is damaged. If yes, proceed to step 4; 4. Open the cover of traveling carriage, check the D25 indicator light on the traveling carriage signal acquisition board. If the D25 indicator light is always off, the signal acquisition board is damaged, so replace the signal acquisition board.



12.5.2.15



Error description: “Minimum value of X-ray tube height ”



Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. The MIN tube height travel switch is triggered



- 599 -



ERROR LISTING



2. The wire that connects the traveling carriage signal acquisition board and the MIN tube height travel switch is disconnected or damaged 3. The travel switch is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of traveling carriage Solutions: 1. Check the wire that connects the traveling carriage signal acquisition board and the travel switch: If the wire is disconnected or damaged, unplug and plug the wire again or replace the wire; If the wire connection is normal, carry out step 2; 2. Check if the MIN tube height travel switch is triggered. If yes, lock the switch. 3. Using a multimeter, test if there is short circuit at two ends of the wire that connects to the travel switch. If no, the travel switch is damaged. If yes, proceed to step 4; 4. Open the cover of traveling carriage, check the D20 indicator light on the traveling carriage signal acquisition board. If the D20 indicator light is always off, the signal acquisition board is damaged, so replace the signal acquisition board.



12.5.2.16



Error description: “Maximum value of X-ray tube angle”



Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. The MAX tube angle travel switch is triggered 2. The wire that connects the traveling carriage signal acquisition board and the travel switch is disconnected or damaged 3. The travel switch is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of traveling carriage Solutions: 1. Check the wire that connects the traveling carriage signal acquisition board and the travel switch: If the wire is disconnected or damaged, unplug and plug the wire again or replace the wire; If the wire connection is normal, carry out step 2; 2.



Check if the MAX tube angle travel switch is triggered. If yes, lock the switch.



3. Using a multimeter, test if there is short circuit at two ends of the wire that connects to the travel switch. If no, the travel switch is damaged. If yes, proceed to step 4; 4. Open the cover of traveling carriage, check the D21 indicator light on the traveling carriage signal acquisition board. If the D21 indicator light is always off, the signal acquisition board is damaged, so replace the traveling carriage signal acquisition board.



12.5.2.17



Error description: “Minimum value of X-ray tube angle”



Error type: prompt message



- 600 -



ERROR LISTING



Possible reason: 1. The MIN tube angle travel switch is triggered 2. The wire that connects the traveling carriage signal acquisition board and the travel switch is disconnected or damaged 3. The travel switch is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of traveling carriage Solutions: 1. Check the wire that connects the traveling carriage signal acquisition board and the travel switch: If the wire is disconnected or damaged, unplug and plug the wire again or replace the wire; If the wire connection is normal, carry out step 2; 2. Check if the MIN tube angle travel switch is triggered. If yes, lock the switch. 3. Using a multimeter, test if there is short circuit at two ends of the wire that connects to the travel switch. If no, the travel switch is damaged. If yes, proceed to step 4; 4. Open the cover of traveling carriage, check the D23 indicator light on the traveling carriage signal acquisition board. If the D23 indicator light is always off, the signal acquisition board is damaged, so replace the signal acquisition board.



12.5.2.18 Error description: “Maximum distance between X-ray tube and stand column” Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. SID Maximum travel switch is triggered 2. The wire that connects the traveling carriage signal acquisition board and the travel switch is disconnected or damaged 3. SID Maximum travel switch is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of traveling carriage Solutions: 1. Check the wire that connects the traveling carriage signal acquisition board and the travel switch: If the wire is disconnected or damaged, unplug and plug the wire again or replace the wire; If the wire connection is normal, carry out step 2; 2. Check if the SID maximum travel switch is triggered. If yes, lock the switch. 3. Using a multimeter, test if there is short circuit at two ends of the wire that connects to the travel switch. If no, the travel switch is damaged. If yes, proceed to step 4; 4. Open the cover of traveling carriage, check the D26 indicator light on the traveling carriage signal acquisition board. If the D26 indicator light is always off, the signal acquisition board is damaged, so replace the signal



- 601 -



ERROR LISTING



acquisition board.



12.5.2.19 Error description: “Minimum distance between X-ray tube and stand column” Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. SID MIN travel switch is triggered 2. The wire that connects the traveling carriage signal acquisition board and the travel switch is disconnected or damaged 3. SID MIN travel switch is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of traveling carriage Solutions: 1. Check the wire that connects the traveling carriage signal acquisition board and the travel switch: If the wire is disconnected or damaged, unplug and plug the wire again or replace the wire; If the wire connection is normal, carry out step 2; 2. Check if the SID minimum travel switch is triggered. If yes, lock the switch. 3. Using a multimeter, test if there is short circuit at two ends of the wire that connects to the travel switch. If no, the travel switch is damaged. If yes, proceed to step 4; 4. Open the cover of traveling carriage, check the D24 indicator light on the traveling carriage signal acquisition board. If the D24 indicator light is always off, the signal acquisition board is damaged, so replace the signal acquisition board.



12.5.2.20



Error description: “Maximum value of the detector height ”



Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. MAX Detector height travel switch is triggered 2. The wire that connects the stand column signal acquisition board and the travel switch is disconnected or damaged 3. MAX Detector height travel switch is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of stand column Solutions: 1. Check the wire that connects the stand column signal acquisition board and the travel switch: If the wire is disconnected or damaged, unplug and plug the wire again or replace the wire; If the wire connection is normal, carry out step 2; 2. Check if the MAX Detector height travel switch is triggered. If yes, lock the switch. 3. Using a multimeter, test if there is short circuit at two ends of the wire that connects to the travel switch. If no, the travel switch is damaged. If yes, proceed to step 4;



- 602 -



ERROR LISTING



4. Open the front cover of motion signal acquisition box, and check the D19 indicator light on the stand column signal acquisition board. If the D19 indicator light is always off, the signal acquisition board is damaged, so replace the signal acquisition board



12.5.2.21



Error description: “Minimum value of the detector height”



Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. MIN Detector height travel switch is triggered 2. The wire that connects the stand column signal acquisition board and the travel switch is disconnected or damaged 3. MIN Detector height travel switch is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of stand column Solutions: 1. Check the wire that connects the stand column signal acquisition board and the travel switch: If the wire is disconnected or damaged, unplug and plug the wire again or replace the wire; If the wire connection is normal, carry out step 2; 2. Check if the MIN Detector height travel switch is triggered. If yes, lock the switch. 3. Using a multimeter, test if there is short circuit at two ends of the wire that connects to the travel switch. If no, the travel switch is damaged. If yes, proceed to step 4; 4. Open the front cover of motion signal acquisition box, and check the D20 indicator light on the stand column signal acquisition board. If the D20 indicator light is always off, the signal acquisition board is damaged, so replace the signal acquisition board.



12.5.2.22



Error description: “Maximum value of the detector angle”



Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. MAX Detector angle travel switch is triggered 2. The wire that connects the stand column signal acquisition board and the travel switch is disconnected or damaged 3. MAX Detector angle travel switch is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of stand column Solutions: 1. Check the wire that connects the stand column signal acquisition board and the travel switch: If the wire is disconnected or damaged, unplug and plug the wire again or replace the wire; If the wire connection is normal, carry out step 2; 2. Check if the MAX Detector angle travel switch is triggered. If yes, lock the switch. 3. Using a multimeter, test if there is short circuit at two ends of the wire that



- 603 -



ERROR LISTING



connects to the travel switch. If no, the travel switch is damaged. If yes, proceed to step 4; 4. Open the front cover of motion signal acquisition box, and check the D24 indicator light on the stand column signal acquisition board. If the D24 indicator light is always off, the signal acquisition board is damaged, so replace the signal acquisition board



12.5.2.23



Error description: “Minimum value of the detector angle”



Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. MIN Detector angle travel switch is triggered 2. The wire that connects the stand column signal acquisition board and the travel switch is disconnected or damaged 3. MIN Detector angle travel switch is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of stand column Solutions: 1. Check the wire that connects the stand column signal acquisition board and the travel switch: If the wire is disconnected or damaged, unplug and plug the wire again or replace the wire; If the wire connection is normal, carry out step 2; 2. Check if the MIN Detector angle travel switch is triggered. If yes, lock the switch. 3. Using a multimeter, test if there is short circuit at two ends of the wire that connects to the travel switch. If no, the travel switch is damaged. If yes, proceed to step 4; 4. Open the front cover of motion signal acquisition box, and check the D21 indicator light on the stand column signal acquisition board. If the D21 indicator light is always off, the signal acquisition board is damaged, so replace the signal acquisition board



12.5.2.24



Error description: “Maximum value of X-ray tube height”



Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. The X-ray tube reaches the maximum height set by the software 2. Calibration data of embedded software is not saved. 3. The tube height potentiometer is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of traveling carriage Solutions: 1. If the machine stops before reaching the programmed height with the prompt message above, enter the calibration interface in IPC embedded software in order to re-adjust position calibration. 2. If the error has not been solved after re-adjustment, enter the IPC calibration interface. Have the tube move vertically, and meanwhile measure the output voltage at the potentiometer lead foot by using a multimeter.If the measured



- 604 -



ERROR LISTING



voltage remains unchanged, the tube height potentiometer is damaged, so replace the potentiometer; If the reading of the sensor on the IPC calibration interface does not change as the measured voltage changes, an error exists in the traveling carriage signal acquisition board, so replace the signal acquisition board. 3. If the error still exists after conducting the steps above, an error exists in saving calibration data of the IPC motion control software, so re-install the IPC embedded software.



12.5.2.25



Error description: “Minimum value of X-ray tube height”



Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. The X-ray tube reaches the minimum height set by the software 2. Calibration data of embedded software is not saved. 3. The tube height potentiometer is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of traveling carriage



Solutions: 1. If the machine stops before reaching the programmed height with the prompt message above, enter the calibration interface in IPC embedded software in order to re-adjust position calibration. 2. If the error has not been solved after re-adjustment, enter the IPC calibration interface. Have the tube move vertically, and meanwhile measure the output voltage at the potentiometer lead foot by using a multimeter.If the measured voltage remains unchanged, the tube height potentiometer is damaged, so replace the potentiometer; If the reading of the sensor on the IPC calibration interface does not change as the measured voltage changes, an error exists in the traveling carriage signal acquisition board, so replace the signal acquisition board. 3. If the error still exists after conducting the steps above, an error exists in saving calibration data of the IPC motion control software, so re-install the IPC embedded software.



12.5.2.26



Error description: “Maximum value of X-ray tube angle”



Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. The X-ray tube reaches the maximum angle set by the software 2. Calibration data of embedded software is not saved. 3. The tube angle potentiometer is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of traveling carriage Solutions: 1. If the machine stops before reaching the programmed angle with the prompt message above, enter the calibration interface in IPC embedded software in order to re-adjust position calibration. 2. If the error has not been solved after re-adjustment, enter the IPC calibration



- 605 -



ERROR LISTING



interface. Have the tube rotate, and meanwhile measure the output voltage at the potentiometer lead foot by using a multimeter.If the measured voltage remains unchanged, the tube angle potentiometer is damaged, so replace the potentiometer; If the reading of the sensor on the IPC calibration interface does not change as the measured voltage changes, an error exists in the traveling carriage signal acquisition board, so replace the signal acquisition board. 3. If the error still exists after conducting the steps above, an error exists in saving calibration data of the IPC motion control software, so re-install the IPC embedded software.



12.5.2.27



Error description: “Minimum value of X-ray tube angle”



Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. The X-ray tube reaches the minimum angle set by the software 2. Calibration data of embedded software is not saved. 3. The tube angle potentiometer is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of traveling carriage Solutions: 1. If the machine stops before reaching the programmed angle with the prompt message above, enter the calibration interface in IPC embedded software in order to re-adjust position calibration. 2. If the error has not been solved after re-adjustment, enter the IPC calibration interface. Have the tube rotate, and meanwhile measure the output voltage at the potentiometer lead foot by using a multimeter.If the measured voltage remains unchanged, the tube angle potentiometer is damaged, so replace the potentiometer; If the reading of the sensor on the IPC calibration interface does not change as the measured voltage changes, an error exists in the traveling carriage signal acquisition board, so replace the signal acquisition board. 3. If the error still exists after conducting the steps above, an error exists in saving calibration data of the IPC motion control software, so re-install the IPC embedded software.



12.5.2.28 Error description: “Maximum distance between X-ray tube and stand column” Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. The X-ray tube reaches the maximum SID set by the software 2. Calibration data of embedded software is not saved. 3. SID potentiometer is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of traveling carriage Solutions: 1. If the machine stops before reaching the programmed SID with the prompt



- 606 -



ERROR LISTING



message above, enter the calibration interface in IPC embedded software in order to re-adjust position calibration. 2. If the error has not been solved after re-adjustment, enter the IPC calibration interface. Move the tube forwards and backwards, and meanwhile measure the output voltage at the potentiometer lead foot by using a multimeter.If the measured voltage remains unchanged, the SID potentiometer is damaged, so replace the potentiometer; If the reading of the sensor on the IPC calibration interface does not change as the measured voltage changes, an error exists in the traveling carriage signal acquisition board, so replace the signal acquisition board. 3. If the error still exists after conducting the steps above, an error exists in saving calibration data of the IPC motion control software, so re-install the IPC embedded software.



12.5.2.29 Error description: “Minimum distance between X-ray tube and stand column” Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. The X-ray tube reaches the minimum SID set by the software 2. Calibration data of embedded software is not saved. 3. SID potentiometer is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of stand column Solutions: 1. If the machine stops before reaching the programmed SID with the prompt message above, enter the calibration interface in IPC embedded software in order to re-adjust position calibration. 2. If the error has not been solved after re-adjustment, enter the IPC calibration interface. Move the handpiece forwards and backwards, and meanwhile measure the output voltage at the potentiometer lead foot by using a multimeter.If the measured voltage remains unchanged, the SID potentiometer is damaged, so replace the potentiometer; If the reading of the sensor on the IPC calibration interface does not change as the measured voltage changes, an error exists in the traveling carriage signal acquisition board, so replace the signal acquisition board. 3. If the error still exists after conducting the steps above, an error exists in saving calibration data of the IPC motion control software, so re-install the IPC embedded software.



12.5.2.30



Error description: “Maximum value of the detector height”



Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. The X-ray tube reaches the maximum detector height set by the software 2. Calibration data of embedded software is not saved. 3. The detector height potentiometer is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition



- 607 -



ERROR LISTING



board of stand column Solutions: 1. If the machine stops before reaching the programmed detector height with the prompt message above, enter the calibration interface in IPC embedded software in order to re-adjust position calibration. 2. If the error has not been solved after re-calibration, enter the IPC calibration interface. Have the detector move vertically, and meanwhile measure the output voltage at the potentiometer lead foot by using a multimeter.If the measured voltage remains unchanged, the detector height potentiometer is damaged, so replace the potentiometer; If the reading of the sensor on the IPC calibration interface does not change as the measured voltage changes, an error exists in the stand column signal acquisition board, so replace the signal acquisition board. 3. If the error still exists after conducting the steps above, an error exists in saving calibration data of the IPC motion control software, so re-install the IPC embedded software.



12.5.2.31



Error description: “Minimum value of the detector height”



Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. The X-ray tube reaches the minimum detector height set by the software 2. Calibration data of embedded software is not saved. 3. The detector height potentiometer is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of stand column Solutions: 1. If the machine stops before reaching the programmed detector height with the prompt message above, enter the calibration interface in IPC embedded software in order to re-adjust position calibration. 2. If the error has not been solved after re-calibration, enter the IPC calibration interface. Have the detector move vertically, and meanwhile measure the output voltage at the potentiometer lead foot by using a multimeter.If the measured voltage remains unchanged, the detector height potentiometer is damaged, so replace the potentiometer; If the reading of the sensor on the IPC calibration interface does not change as the measured voltage changes, an error exists in the stand column signal acquisition board, so replace the signal acquisition board. 3. If the error still exists after conducting the steps above, an error exists in saving calibration data of the IPC motion control software, so re-install the IPC embedded software.



12.5.2.32



Error description: “Maximum value of the detector angle”



Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. The X-ray tube reaches the maximum detector angle set by the software 2. Calibration data of embedded software is not saved.



- 608 -



ERROR LISTING



3. The detector angle potentiometer is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of stand column Solutions: 1. If the machine stops before reaching the programmed detector angle with the prompt message above, enter the calibration interface in IPC embedded software in order to re-adjust position calibration. 2. If the error has not been solved after re-calibration, enter the IPC calibration interface. Have the detector rotate, and meanwhile measure the output voltage at the potentiometer lead foot by using a multimeter.If the measured voltage remains unchanged, the detector angle potentiometer is damaged, so replace the potentiometer; If the reading of the sensor on the IPC calibration interface does not change as the measured voltage changes, an error exists in the stand column signal acquisition board, so replace the signal acquisition board. 3. If the error still exists after conducting the steps above, an error exists in saving calibration data of the IPC motion control software, so re-install the IPC embedded software.



12.5.2.33



Error description: “Minimum value of the detector angle”



Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. The X-ray tube reaches the minimum detector angle set by the software 2. Calibration data of embedded software is not saved. 3. The detector angle potentiometer is damaged 4. Hardware device error or software failure occurs in the signal acquisition board of stand column Solutions: 1. If the machine stops before reaching the programmed detector angle with the prompt message above, enter the calibration interface in IPC embedded software in order to re-adjust position calibration. 2. If the error has not been solved after re-calibration, enter the IPC calibration interface. Have the detector rotate, and meanwhile measure the output voltage at the potentiometer lead foot by using a multimeter.If the measured voltage remains unchanged, the detector angle potentiometer is damaged, so replace the potentiometer; If the reading of the sensor on the IPC calibration interface does not change as the measured voltage changes, an error exists in the stand column signal acquisition board, so replace the signal acquisition board. 3. If the error still exists after conducting the steps above, an error exists in saving calibration data of the IPC motion control software, so re-install the IPC embedded software.



12.5.2.34



Error description: “Movement paused”



Error type: prompt message Possible reason:



- 609 -



ERROR LISTING



1. The tube moves to an angle of 0 or 90 degree 2. Chest position photoelectric switch is blocked or damaged 3. Undertable position photoelectric switch is blocked or damaged Solutions: 1. If the machine stops before reaching the programmed tube angle with the prompt message above, enter the calibration interface in IPC embedded software in order to re-calibrate the handpiece angle. 2. Check whether the chest position photoelectric switch on the rail is blocked by objects; re-install or replace the chest position photoelectric switch. 3. Check whether the undertable position photoelectric switch on the rail is blocked by objects; re-install or replace the undertable position photoelectric switch.



12.5.2.35



Error description: “Reach the designated position”



Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. Run the Thorax Positioning or Undertable Positioning command and move to the designated position; 2. Run the co-movement command and move to the designated position 3. Run the one-key-positioning command and move to the designated position



12.5.2.36



Error description: “Minimum SID”



Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. The machine moves to the minimum SID position 2. The photoelectric 错误！ 错误！超链接引用无效。 超链接引用无效。 in the L-arm of handpiece works abnormally Solutions: 1. If the machine stops before reaching the programmed minimum SID with the prompt message above, enter the calibration interface in IPC embedded software in order to re-calibrate SID. 2. Press the electrical plug key on the handpiece to have the handpiece change between position A and position B. If SID displayed in the touch screen does not change, it indicates that the photoelectric cell in the L-arm works abnormally; dismantle L-arm and replace or re-install the photoelectric cell.



12.5.2.37



Error description: “Maximum SID”



Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. The machine moves to the maximum SID position 2. The photoelectric 错误！ 错误！超链接引用无效。 超链接引用无效。 in the L-arm of handpiece works abnormally Solutions: 1. If the machine stops before reaching the programmed maximum SID with the prompt message above, enter the calibration interface in IPC embedded software in order to re-calibrate SID. 2. Press the electrical plug key on the handpiece to have the handpiece change



- 610 -



ERROR LISTING



between position A and position B. If SID displayed in the touch screen does not change, it indicates that the photoelectric cell in the L-arm works abnormally; dismantle L-arm and replace or re-install the photoelectric cell.



12.5.2.38 Error description: “Too close between assemblies or to the floor ” Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. Too close between the detector and the telescopic trunk 2. Too close between the tube and the stand column 3. The height of the detector is too low Solutions: 1. Check if the distance between the detector and the telescopic trunk is too small. If yes, move away the detector or the telescopic trunk; if the prompt persists, proceed to step 2 2. Check if the distance between the tube and the stand column is too small. If yes, move away the tube; if the prompt persists, proceed to step 3 3. Check if the height of the detector is too low; if yes, elevate the detector; if the prompt persists, proceed to step 4 4. Enter the IPC calibration interface to re-calibrate the safety distance range



12.5.2.39 Error description: “This action requires X-ray tube in horizontal 0 degree and in A position. Please move in place first” Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. “Throax positioning” key on FPD keypad is triggered 2. Thorax Positioning command is run before the tube moves to 0 degree and A position Solutions: 1. Check if FPD keypad is damaged 2. Rotate the tube to 0 degree first 3. Then press the handpiece electric plug and rotate the tube to A position 4. Move the tube in the Y axis direction to align the photoelectric cell of chest position. “Movement paused” will be displayed at this time. 5. Run the Thorax Positioning command and move to the designated position; “Reach the designated position” will be displayed.



12.5.2.40 Error description: “This action requires X-ray tube in horizontal 90 degree and in B position. Please move in place first” Error type: prompt message Possible reason: 1. “Undertable positioning” key on FPD keypad is triggered 2. Undertable Positioning command is run before the tube moves to 90 degree and B position Solutions: 1. Check if FPD keypad is damaged



- 611 -



ERROR LISTING



2. Rotate the tube to 90 degree first 3. Then press the handpiece electric plug and rotate the tube to B position 4. Move the tube in the Y axis direction to align the photoelectric cell of undertable position. “Movement paused” will be displayed at this time. 5. Run the Undertable Positioning command and move to the designated position; “Reach the designated position” will be displayed. Note: For the disassembly and replacement of all the wires or components, please refer to the sections on dissembly and replacement of Maintenance Manual.



12.6 Detector Error The detector error code (returned in the form of PXM_STATUS) and message can be shown on the DROC interface (as in the red frame below).



- 612 -



ERROR LISTING



Error messa



Error code



Solution



ge



PXM_E_ERROR



Shut



Error



and



restart



the



system;



Error license (File is PXM_E_LICENCE



down



either



absent



Replace the license file.



or



corrupted) PXM_INVALID_SEQUENC



Error reading or write



Shut down the system, and then



E



calibration file



re-start the system for calibration.



PXM_E_ACQ_NOT_CLOS



Unable to close the



Shut down the system, and then



E



device



re-start the system. Check if the port connection of



Error



requesting



a



PXM_E_ACQ_ERR_REQ



frame to the detector



UEST



(communication



error



with detector)



detector and image acquisition workstation is normal. If the error still exists; switch off the detector and shut down the system, and then re-start the system. Check



Error wait for the pixel PXM_E_ACQ_EVENT_ST



data transmission start



ART



event



(image



transmission error)



if



the



optical



fiber



connection of detector and image acquisition workstation is normal. If the error still exists; switch off the detector and shut down the system, and then re-start the system. Check if the optical fiber connection



Error waiting for the PXM_E_ACQ_EVENT_EN



pixel data transmission



D



end



event



(image



transmission error)



of detector and image acquisition workstation is normal. If the error still exists; Switch off the detector and shut down the system, and then re-start the system.



PXM_E_CORRECTION



Error



in



calibration



Select the right correction unit



combination



PXM_E_NO_CALIBRATIO



Error, calibration not in



Start a calibration or load all



N



progress.



references



- 613 -



ERROR LISTING



PXM_E_LOAD_OFFSET_ REF



Error



reading



offset.fxd



file



(Reference



file does not exist) Error



reading



file



PXM_E_LOAD_OFFSET_



offsetStandBy.fxd



STANDBY



(Reference file does not



Start a dark calibration



exist) PXM_E_LOAD_PIXELS_C LUSTER_DEFECT



Error



reading



offset.fxd



(Reference



file does not exist) Error



PXM_E_LOAD_GAIN



file



reading



file



gain.fxd (Reference file does not exist) Error



reading



Start X-ray calibration



file



PXM_E_LOAD_DEFECTM



defectmap.fxd



AP



(Reference file does not exist)



PXM_E_CALIBRATION_C



Calibration cancelled by



ANCELED



user



PXM_E_BAD_STATE



Error, function call in a



Shut down the system, and then



wrong state



re-start the system.



Error



during



library



configuration (read of PXM_E_CONFIG



Start the calibration again



videoTools.ini) (reason: videoTools.ini



is



Replace with the correct file videoTools.ini



corrupted) Unable PXM_E_ACQ_NOT_STAR T



to



acquisition



start (reason:



communication ACQ



Shut down the system, and then re-start the system.



with



Board



is



corrupted) Error waiting for the end of PXM_E_ACQ_DMA



DMA



transfer



(reason: communication ACQ



with



Board



is



corrupted) Close other application of the PXM_E_MEMORY_ALLO



Failed



to



allocate



C



sequences memory



image acquisition workstation to free some memory. If the error still exists, shut down the system and then re-start it.



PXM_E_PXM_NOT_OPE



Device



N



(reason:



not



open



PXM_Open - 614 -



Shut down the system, and then re-start the system.



ERROR LISTING



has failed or has not been launched.) PXM_E_CALCUL_PIXELS



Calcul



_CLUSTER_DEFECT



defect error



PXM_E_CALIBRATION_G AIN PXM_E_UPDATE_DM



pixels



cluster



Start a dark calibration



Calibration gain error Start X-ray calibration Update DM error Switch off the detector and shut



PXM_E_SELF_TEST



Detector self-test error



down the system, and then re-start the system.



12.7 Bought-In Components Error 12.7.1Barcode Scanner Error Error 1 description: The power indicator light on the barcode scanner is not on.



Troubleshooting: Replace the USB port with which the barcode scanner connects to the computer. Error description 2: The power indicator light is on, but the barcode scanner fails to scan barcode. Troubleshooting: During scanning, keep the barcode scanner close to and targeting the barcode. If it does not work yet, re-configure the barcode scanner according to the reference. If the barcode scanner fails to work after re-configuration, replace with another one.



12.7.2Disc Driver Error Error description 1: - 615 -



ERROR LISTING



Fail to open or close the disc tray. Troubleshooting: Check if the power supply is normal, switch on the power again. If it does not work, replace the disc driver. Error description 2: The disc driver fails to burn disc. Troubleshooting: (1) Firstly check if the power supply and USB port are correctly connected, you may try unplugging and plugging the wire and replacing USB port. (2) Secondly, open "My Computer" on Windows desktop, and check if there is a disc driver icon. If no, connect the disc driver to another computer. If the disc driver can not be opened on another computer, the disc driver is damaged and then should be replaced. (3) If the results of previous steps are normal, put in a burnt CD and see if the driver can open and read the content. If no, the disc driver is damaged and then should be replaced. (4) If the driver reads the disc normally, put in anther good empty disc and operate burning order. If it fails, the disc driver needs to be replaced.



- 616 -



ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM



APPENDIX A ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM



Main Circuit Connection Chart of the System Control Cabinet



B-2



Control Loop Connection Diagram of the System Control Cabinet



B-3



Terminal Row Connection Diagram



B-4



IPC Connection Diagram



B-5



Connection Diagram of the System Control Cabinet Inner Motor Driving Parts



B-6



Power Connection Diagram of PCB and FPD Inside the System Control Cabinet



B-7



Connection Diagram of Operator Console



B-8



Connection Diagram of OTS Signal Acquisition Board



B-9



Connection Diagram of Driving Parts



B-10



Connection Diagram of Generator and FPD



B-11



Connection Diagram of Handpiece Assembly



B-12



Connection Diagram of Signal Acquisition Board of Stand Column



B-13



A-1



ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM



B.1 Main Circuit Connection Chart of the System Control Cabinet



A-2



ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM



B.2 Control Loop Connection Diagram of the System Control Cabinet



A-3



ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM



B.3 Terminal Row Connection Diagram Automatic collimator



A-4



ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM



B.4 IPC Connection Diagram



A-5



ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM



B.5 Connection Diagram of the System Control Cabinet Inner Motor Driving Parts



A-6



ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM



B.6 Power Connection Diagram of PCB and FPD Inside the System Control Cabinet



A-7



ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM



B.7 Connection Diagram of Operator Console



A-8



ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM



B.8 Connection Diagram of OTS Signal Acquisition Board



A-9



ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM



B.9 Connection Diagram of Driving Parts



A-10



ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM



B.10 Connection Diagram of Generator and FPD



A-11



ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM



B.11 Connection Diagram of Handpiece Assembly



A-12



ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM



B.12 Connection Diagram of Signal Acquisition Board of Stand Column



A-13



P/N: 046-001937-00 (3.0)